NOTICE
Note that when converting this document from its original format to a .pdf file,
some minor font and format changes may occur causing slight variations. When
viewing and printing this document, we cannot guarantee that your specific PC or
printer will support all of the fonts or graphics. Therefore, when you view the
document fonts may be substituted and your individual printer may not have the
capability to print the document correctly.

PROGRAMMING MANUAL
INT-1026 (IPK)
CD Stock Number 750855
Document Revision 3
(Release 3000/3500)

NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. reserves the right to change the specifications, functions, or
features at any time without notice.
NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. has prepared this document for use by its employees and
customers. The information contained herein is the property of NEC Unified Solutions, Inc.
and shall not be reproduced without prior written approval of NEC Unified Solutions, Inc.
Dterm is a registered trademark of NEC Corporation and Electra Elite is a registered
trademark of NEC America, Inc. Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
AT&T is a registered trademark of American Telephone and Telegraph Company. Lucent
Technologies is a trademark or service mark of Lucent Technologies Inc. Nortel Networks
and the Nortel Networks logo are trademarks of Nortel Networks.
Copyright 2004
NEC Infrontia, Inc.
6535 N. State Highway 161
Irving, TX 75039-2402
Technology Development

PREFACE
___________________________________________________________________________________
SEC
TION 1
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
The Programming Manual provides the technician with all of the necessary
information for programming the Electra Elite IPK system.
Programming can be accomplished using a PC or a Multiline Terminal.
SEC
TION 2
MANUAL ORGANIZATION
This manual provides instructions for programming the Electra Elite IPK system.
Chapter 1  Multiline Terminal Programming
This chapter includes the basic information for programming the system.
Chapter 2 Memory Blocks
This chapter includes all of the Memory Blocks used to program the system. Detailed
programming instructions are provided for each Memory Block.
Chapter 3 Advanced Applications
This chapter includes information for code restrictions, Automatic Route Selection
(ARS) and ISDN-PRI Call-by-Call.
Appendices
The appendices include the function time chart, character codes and the display
abbreviations.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
1

___
Do __
cu __
me __
nt __
Re___
visi __
on __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elec__
t __
ra E ____
lite
__
IPK
SEC
TION 3
SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS
A set of manuals for the Electra Elite system provides all the information necessary to
install and support the system. Other manuals included in the set are described
below.
This manual provides detailed information related to every feature available in the
system.
Electra Electra Elite IPK General Description Manual
This manual provides general information about the system features, configuration,
and standards. An overview of the Electra Elite IPK system that is useful when
presenting information to potential customers is provided.
Electra Electra Elite IPK System Hardware Manual
The System Hardware Manual is intended for the system installer and provides
detailed instructions for installing the Electra Elite IPK KSU, ETUs, Multiline
Terminals, and optional equipment.
Electra Electra Elite IPK Least Cost Routing Manual
This manual provides instructions to the service technician for programming the
customer site for least cost routing.
Electra Electra Elite IPK Automatic Call Distribution Manual
This manual provides the service technician with instructions for programming the
ACD. This manual can also be used by the ACD supervisor at the customer site to
become familiar with the ACD/MIS feature.
Electra Electra Elite IPK Job Specifications Manual
This manual is intended to help the technician install and maintain the Electra Elite
system. Job specification worksheets are provided. When these worksheets are
completed, they provide all of the system programming values and configuration
information necessary to help technicians maintain the system.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2
Preface

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Electra Electra Elite IPK ACD Plus Installation Manual
This manual provides general information about the Electra Electra Elite IPK ACD
Plus features, installation procedures and feature programming. The NEC Electra
Electra Elite IPK ACD Plus is an Automatic Call Distribution card that supports up to
40 Agents and 12 supervisors at one time.
Electra Electra Elite IPK Wireless System Manual
This manual describes the system and provides hardware installation and
programming procedures for the Electra Electra Elite IPK Wireless Communication
System (WCS).
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
3

___
Do __
cu __
me __
nt __
Re___
visi __
on __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elec__
t __
ra E ____
lite
__
IPK
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
4
Preface

__
D _
o __
cu __
m ___
ent __
Re __
vi __
si
__
on 3 _______________________________________________________
Ele __
ct __
ra ___
Elite __
IP _
K
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
xx
Table of Contents

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _____________________________________________________
E __
lect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
xxii
List of Figures

Multiline Terminal
Programming
Chapter 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
A stored program controls the Electra Elite IPK system. When the system is initially
powered up, the CPUI( )-U( ) ETU scans all interface and ISA slots to determine the
hardware configuration. The system stores this information and the default values in
the resident system program memory. After initially powering up the system, a trained
technician can change the resident system program to meet the specific needs of an
individual customer.
SECTION 2
PROGRAMMING THE SYSTEM

The battery on the CPU must be connected. When the battery is not
connected before programming begins, data may be lost when a
power outage occurs.
System data programming may be necessary when:
H
the system is installed for the first time.
H
components of an existing system are replaced.
H
functions of an existing system are changed.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
1 - 1

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
New Installation
Existing System
Develop System
Data Sheet
Component
Function
Replacement
Change
Installation
Rewrite System
Rewrite System
Data Sheet
Data Sheet
Test System with Default
Installation
Values
System Data
System Data
System Data
Programming (Note 1)
Programming (Note 2)
Programming (Note 3)
TEST
TEST
TEST
Note 1:
For new installation, system default values are assigned when power is
turned on. Program the system data to be changed only.
Note 2:
For component replacement, program the relevant system data.
Note 3:
For function change, program the system data to be revised.
Figure 1-1 Programming Flowchart
2.1
Features of Programming
The following features are provided with Multiline Programming:
H
The system operates from default after initial power-up. Only the
parameters that change must be programmed.
H
System programming characters are displayed on the LCD of the
Multiline Terminal.
H
Several types of system programming can be entered at the same time.
H
Data programmed for one telephone (e.g., Tenant Mode, or Telephone
Mode) can be copied to another telephone.
___________________________________________________________________________________
1 - 2
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
Two Multiline Terminals, connected to ports 01 and 02, respectively, can
be used simultaneously for programming.
2.2
System Programming Modes
Modes and submodes are listed in Table 1-1 Programming Modes.
Table 1-1 Programming Modes
Line
Line
Mode Name
Submode Name
Key
Key
LK 1
CO Line
LK 2
ICM
LK 3
SLT
LK 4
Transfer/Automated Attendant
LK 5
SMDR/LCR
LK 6
DSS
LK 1
System Mode
LK 7
ESP
LK 8
PBR/Miscellaneous
LK 9
DISA
LK 10
Call by Call
LK 11
DTI
LK 12
ACD/UCD
LK 13
PRI
LK 14
ARS
LK 15
K-CCIS
LK 16
HUB
LK 2
Tenant Mode
N/A
N/A
LK 3
CO/PBX Line Mode
N/A
N/A
LK 4
Telephone Mode
N/A
N/A
LK 5
Trunk Group Mode
N/A
N/A
LK 2
Tenant Mode Copy Assignment
LK 3
CO Line Mode Copy Assignment
LK 6
Copy Mode
LK 4
Telephone Mode Copy Assignment
LK 5
Trunk Group Mode Copy Assignment
LK 1
Card Interface Slot Assignment
LK 7
ETU Mode
LK 2
Telephone Type Assignment
LK 3
MIF Assignment
LK 4
MIF (Caller ID) Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
1 - 3

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 1-1 Programming Modes (Continued)
Line
Line
Mode Name
Submode Name
Key
Key
LK 1
ROM Version Confirmation
LK 2
System Speed Dial Memory Clear
LK 8
Special Mode
LK 3
Station Speed Dial Memory Clear
LK 8
Second Initialization
2.3
Before Programming
The technician should check the ROM version and the port numbers before
programming the system.
2.3.1
Check Points
H
Confirm the ROM Version
The available features depend on the ROM version. Refer to
Memory Block 8-1 (ROM Version Confirmation), or from any
idle Display Terminal, press A andC.
H
Confirm the Port Number
Port numbers are used for system programming. Refer to
Memory Block 7-1 (Card Interface Slot Assignment).
To confirm station numbers press A andD. The display
indicates the station number and the port number.
Station
Port
Number
Number
# # # = T E L X X
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
2.3.2
Preliminary Points
H
Select System Programming
Refer to Section 2 Programming the System on page 1-1.
___________________________________________________________________________________
1 - 4
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
2.4
Writing System Data
After turning on power, the system data can be programmed using a Multiline
Terminal connected to port 01 or port 02 (the Multiline Terminal must be idle).
System programming can be performed while other Multiline Terminals in the
system are in use. Some data is written into memory immediately after the
programming process, but other data is not written until the stations or trunks
are idle. When the data is not written until a station or trunk is idle, the station
LCD displays DATA ENTRY, even after programming is complete, to indicate
that system data entry is still in progress. When the in-use stations become
idle, the data is written and the station LCD displays only the time.
The data programmed for the following Memory Blocks is not written while the
Multiline Terminals or PBR are in use:
H
When Multiline Terminals are in use:
J Memory Block 2-01 (Trunk to Tenant Assignment)
J Memory Block 2-05 (Line Key Selection)
J Memory Block 2-07 (System Speed Dial Display Assignment)
J Memory Block 4-09 (Telephone to Tenant Assignment)
H
When the PBR is in use:
J Memory Block 1-8-01 (SLT or Automated Attendant/DISA to CPU
PBR Selection)
J Memory Block 1-8-02 (PBR Receive Level Assignment for
Automated Attendant/DISA)
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
1 - 5

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
2.5
Programming Methods
2.5.1
Initializing the System
Turn on the new Key Service Unit (KSU) power supply. After
approximately 30 seconds, the system operates with the system
default values.
2.5.2
Using the Multiline Terminal for Programming
System programming can be performed using a Display Multiline
Terminal that is connected to station port 01 or 02.
Figure 1-2 Electra Elite IPK Multiline Terminal shows the terminal in
the offline mode.
Exit
Display (LCD)
Key
Message
Waiting LED
Softkeys
Help
Dial
Key
Keys
Flexible Line
Keys
Feature
Key
Directory Key
Recall
Key
Message Key
MIC
Key
Conference
Key
Redial
Key
Hold
Transfer
Speaker
Key
Key
Key
Answer
Key
Figure 1-2 Electra Elite IPK Multiline Terminal
___________________________________________________________________________________
1 - 6
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 1-2 Multiline Terminal Keys Used for Programming provides a
list and description of the keys used during Multiline Terminal
Programming.
Table 1-2 Multiline Terminal Keys Used for Programming
Key
Description
K~I
Used to enter data from the dial pad or to specify a Memory Block
location.
J
Used to move the cursor to the left. The cursor moves one character
space to the left each timeJis pressed.
L
Used to move the cursor to the right. The cursor moves one character
space to the right each timeLis pressed.
F
F
Used to select another mode. Press
to switch modes as follows:

Mode or submode selection: Returns to Program Mode.

Data No. Mode: Return to a mode or submode selection, or
Program Mode (if no submode exists).
D Each time the conference key is pressed, Memory Block item changes
are as follows:

Tenant Mode: The tenant number increments by one.

CO/PBX Line Mode: The CO/PBX line number increments by one.

Telephone Mode: The telephone port number increments by one.

Trunk Group Mode: The Trunk group number increments by one.
Y Future use.
Used to return to the previous page in system programming.
A
X Future use.
H Used to enter a pause in speed dial programming mode or to clear data
in system programming mode.
W Flexible Line keys are used to specify a mode or submode when
selecting a Memory Block or to select programming data for input.
C Used to proceed to the next page in system programming.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
1 - 7

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 1-2 Multiline Terminal Keys Used for Programming
Key
Description
B This key is used to enter a pause, hyphen, asterisk or pound. To enter
an asterisk or pound:
B

+ J = ,
B

+ L = #
B + A= A
B + B= B
B + C= C
The Message Waiting LED turns on and off afterJorLis pressed.
E Used to exit the programming mode (go back on-line).
G
G
Used to write (save) data. After entering data, press
; the data is
written into memory. The next Memory Block is displayed.
2.5.3
Entering Programming Mode
The following digital Multiline Terminals can be used to program the
system. Station ports 01 and 02 are automatically assigned as
programming stations.
H
DTP or DTH/DTR-8D-1 TEL
H
DTU-8D-2 TEL
H
DTP or DTH/DTR-16D-1 TEL
H
DTU-16D-2 TEL
H
DTP or DTH/DTR-32D-1 TEL
H
DTU-32D-2 TEL

Using the DTH-16LD -1 TEL to program is not
recommended.
To enter programming mode, the station must be idle (on-hook).
Perform the following procedure to go off-line.
1.
Press A .
2.
Press H .
___________________________________________________________________________________
1 - 8
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.
DialL, K, andJin sequence. The Multiline Terminal LCD
indicates program mode is now active.
P R O G R A M
M O D E
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
While off-line, the programming terminal cannot be signaled by
any system station. Off-line mode does not timeout.
2.5.4
Page Switching
In Memory Block 1-1-18 (System Speed Dial Restriction by Tenant)
tenant numbers 00~07 are assigned to Flexible Line keys on the first
page. Tenant number 08~15 are assigned to the Flexible Line keys
on the second page. The tenant number corresponding to Flexible
Line key 1 of the current page is displayed on the right side of the
display.
During system programming, a value (data) is assigned to each
Flexible Line key. When the number of values exceeds the number
of Flexible Line keys, value assignments are displayed on additional
pages. The associated data can be entered on that page. The page
number is displayed on the right side of the LCD.
Figure 1-3 Page Display for 8-Key, and 16-Key Multiline Terminals
shows an example of CO/PBX line keys on each page and their
corresponding tenant numbers. In all cases, each page is
represented by eight line keys.
C
To navigate between pages, press
to access the next page,
or press A to return to the previous page.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
1 - 9

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________

8-Key Multiline Terminal
8-Key Multiline Terminal
DTU/DTP
DTH/DTR
LCD Display:
LCD Display:
01 to indicate Page 1
Page 1
01 to indicate Page 1
Page 1
09 to indicate page 2
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK5
LK6
LK 7
LK 8
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
01
02
03
04
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Page 2
05
06
07
08
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK5
LK6
LK 7
LK 8
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Page 2
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
09
10
11
12
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
13
14
15
16
16-Key Multiline Terminal
16-Key Multiline Terminal
DTU/DTP
DTH/DTR
LCD Display:
LCD Display:
(Page 1)
01 to indicate Page 1
(Page 1)
01 to indicate Page 1

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK5
LK6
LK 7
LK 8
01
02
03
04
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
LK 09
LK 10
LK 11
LK 12
LK 13
LK 14
LK 15
LK 16
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
11
12
15
16
LK 9
LK 10
LK 11
LK 12
09
10
11
12
LK 13
LK 14
LK 15
LK 16
13
14
15
16
LCD Display:
LCD Display:
(Page 2)
09 to indicate Page 2
09 to indicate Page 2
(Page 2)

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK5
LK6
LK 7
LK 8
09
10
11
12
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
LK 9
LK 10
LK 11
LK 12
LK 13
LK 14
LK 15
LK 16
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
LK 9
LK 10
LK 11
LK 12
17
18
19
20
LK 13
LK 14
LK 15
LK 16
21
22
23
24
LCD Display:
09 to indicate Page 2
Figure 1-3 Page Display for 8-Key, and 16-Key Multiline Terminals
___________________________________________________________________________________
1 - 10
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 1-4 Page Switching for Data Values is an example of 10 data
values. Values are displayed on two pages.
16-Key Multiline Terminal
DTU/DTP
(Page 1)

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4
Data 01
Data 02
Data 03
Data 04

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
Data 05
Data 06
Data 07
Data 08
LCD Display:
01 to indicate Page 1
(Page 2)
LK 9
LK 10
LK 11
LK 12
Data 09
Data 10
LK 13
LK 14
LK 15
LK 16
LCD Display:
09 to indicate Page 2
16-Key Multiline Terminal
DTH/DTR

LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK5
LK6
LK 7
LK 8
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08

LK 9
LK 10
LK 11
LK 12
LK 13
LK 14
LK 15
LK 16
Data
Data
09
10
Figure 1-4 Page Switching for Data Values
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
1 - 11

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
2.5.5
Station Port Numbering Plan
Some Memory Blocks require entering a 2-digit port number. The
Electra Elite IPK system supports 48/120 ports, respectively.
Programming values for entry of Port Assignments are defined
below:
Port Assignments
Programming Value
01~99
01~99
100~109
A0~A9
110~119
B0~B9
120
C0
B
To enter an A, B, or C, press
and 1, 2, or 3.
___________________________________________________________________________________
1 - 12
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 3
SYSTEM DATA LIST
The System Data List is a complete list of Memory Blocks that are available in the
Electra Elite IPK system. The information is organized by mode, submode, and then
numerically by Memory Block number. The Memory Block number and name, the
default values, and programming values are provided for each Memory Block.
LK 1 System Mode
LK 1 CO Line
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
00
Pause Time Selection
3.0s
1.0s, 3.0s
01
DP Interdigit Time Selection
B
Pattern A or B
02
Hookflash Time Selection
600ms
20ms, 40ms, 60ms, 80ms, 100ms,
140ms,
160ms, 200ms, 400ms, 600ms,
800ms,
1.0s, 1.5s, 2.0s, 3.0s, 5.0s
03
Hold Recall Time Selection
25s (R2500 or lower)
25s, 45s, 60s, 90s, 120s, 180s, 240s,
(Non-Exclusive Hold)
60s (R3000 or
(No Limit)(R2500 or lower)
higher)
000s (No Limit), 001s~255s (R3000 or
higher)
04
Automatic Redial Time Selection
Table 1: 030
Table 1: 001 ~ 050 sec.
Table 2: 060
Table 2: 001 ~ 100 sec.
Table 3: 002
Table 3: 001 ~ 015 times
05
Start Time Selection
10s (R2500 or lower)
2s, 10s, 20s, 30s, 40s, 50s, 60s, 70s
02s (R3000 or
(R2500 or lower)
higher)
00s (No Limit), 01s~99s (R3000 or
higher)
06
CO/PBX Incoming Ringing Alarm
(No Limit) (R2500
10s, 20s, 30s, (R2500 or lower)
Time Selection
or lower)
000s (R3000 or
000s (No Limit), 001s~255s (R3000 or
higher)
higher)
07
Tie Line Delay Ringing Time
(No Limit) (R2500
10s, 20s, 30s, (R2500 or lower)
Selection
or lower)
000s (R3000 or
000s (No Limit), 001s~255s (R3000 or
higher)
higher)
09
Manual Pause Selection
NO
NO, YS
11
System Transfer/Camp-On
YS
NO, YS
Selection
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
1 - 13

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
LK 1 System Mode
LK 1 CO Line (Continued)
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
12
Station Transfer/Camp-On Recall
45s (R2500 or lower)
25s, 45s, 60s, 90s, 120s, 180s, 240s,
Time Selection
060s (R3000 or
(No Limit) (R2500 or lower)
higher)
000s (No Limit), 001s~999s (R3000 or
higher)
13
CO Transfer Ring Pattern Selection
C
OFF, ON, A ~ H
14
CO Transfer Ring Tone Selection
A
A ~ H
18
System Speed Dial Restriction by
CO/PBX Line LED
LED On: Not Restricted
Tenant
On
LED Off: Restricted
20
DID Digit Length Selection
3
2, 3, or 4
21
DID Digit Conversion Assignment
NO
NO, YS
22
DID Digit Conversion Table
T
T (Station or Closed Number)
TN (Tenant)
23
DID Forward Station Number for
NON
NON, T (TEL), TN (Tenant)
Busy Station or Undefined Digit
24
PBX/CTX Access Code Assignment
9
Up to six digits (three numeric, three
I
pauses)
25
PBX/CTX Access Code Assignment
8
Up to six digits (three numeric, three
II
pauses)
27
Automatic Day/Night Mode
Not Specified
Day/Night Mode Time (24-hour clock)
Switching Time Assignment
28
Distinctive Ringing by Telephone or
TEL
TEL, CO
CO Selection
29
Private Line Assignment
Not Specified
CO/PBX Line Number, Tel Port
Number
30
Route Advance Block Assignment
All Blocks 00
Priority of Trunk Group Number
(Not Set)
32
Automatic Day/Night Mode by Day
CO/PBX Line LED
Pattern 1, Pattern 2
of Week Selection
Off Pattern 1
(Sunday ~ Saturday)
33
Speed Dial Number/Name Display
DIAL DIAL,
NAME
Selection
34
Tie Line First Ring Pattern Selection
PAT3
PAT1, PAT2, PAT3, PAT4, ICM,
VOICE
___________________________________________________________________________________
1 - 14
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
LK 1 System Mode
LK 1 CO Line (Continued)
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
35
Speed Dial Buffer Allocation
100
100, 1,000 Memories
37
Trunk Queuing Timeout Selection
10s (R2500 or lower)
10s, 20s, 30s, 60s (R2500 or lower)
10s(R3000 or
00s (No Limit), 01s~99s (R3000 or
higher)
higher)
46
Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment
Refer to 1-1-46 Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment on page
2-51.
47
Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment
Refer to 1-1-47 Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment on page
2-58.
48
Access Code (3-Digit) Assignment
All Dial 000
N/A
(Not Used)
49
Networking Trunk Group/Route
Not Specified
101~132 (Trunk Group 01 ~ 32) or
Advance Assignment
201~216 (Route Advance Block 01 ~
16)
50
CO/PBX Outgoing Digit Add
Not Specified
10 digits max.
Assignment
51
CO Line Ringing Pattern Selection
A
A ~ H, NO
52
PBX Line Ringing Pattern Selection
B
A ~ H, NO
53
Tie Line Delay Ring Pattern
D
A ~ H, NO
Selection
54
Automated Attendant Transfer Ring
C
A ~ H, NO
Pattern
55
DID Line Ringing Pattern Selection
A
A ~ H, NO
57
CO/PBX Prepause Time Selection
1s
None, 1s~13s
59
Synchronous Ringing Selection
YS
YS, NO
60
8-Digit Matching Table Assignment
Refer to 1-1-60 8-Digit Matching Table Assignment on page
2-78.
61
8-Digit Matching Table to Class
Refer to 1-1-61 8-Digit Matching Table to Class Assignment on
Assignment
page 2-80.
62
System Speed Dial Override by
YS
NO = No Override
Class Selection
YS = Override
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
1 - 15

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
LK 1 System Mode
LK 1 CO Line (Continued)
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
63
Hold Recall Time Selection
1.0 (R2500 or lower)
In minutes: 0.5, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0, 3.0,
(Exclusive)
060s (R3000 or
5.0, 8.0, (No Limit)(R2500 or lower)
higher)
000s (No Limit), 001s~999s (R3000 or
higher)
65
Code Restriction Class Allow/Deny
Class 01 ~ 04 YS
YS (Allow)
Selection
Class 05 ~ 14 NO
NO (Deny)
66
8-Digit Matching Table to Normal
Tables 00 ~ 14 =
N/A
Dial Assignment
Used
(All CO/PBX Line
LEDs On)
Table 15 = Unused
(CO/PBX Line LED
Off)
67
OCC Table Assignment
Tables 00 ~ 15 =
N/A
Blank
Table 16 =
1010XXX
68
8-Digit Matching Table to OCC
CO/PBX Line LED
Refer to 1-1-68 8-Digit Matching Table
Table Assignment
Off
to OCC Table Assignment on page
2-88.
69
Tie Line Code Restriction
YS
NO = No Restriction
Assignment
YS = Restriction
70
Code Restriction Class Assignment
15
Class 00 ~ 15
when Lockout is Set
71
First Delay Announcement Start
20
In seconds: 00, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60
Time Selection
72
First Delay Announcement Repeat
1
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
Selection
73
First to Second Delay
20
In seconds: 00, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60,
Announcement Interval Time
(No Limit)
Selection
74
Second Delay Announcement
1 1~
8
Repeat Selection
75
Second Delay Announcement
20
In seconds: 00, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60,
Repeat Interval Time Selection
(No Limit)
76
Barge-In Alert Tone Assignment
YS
YS = Send Alert Tone
NO = Do not send Alert Tone
___________________________________________________________________________________
1 - 16
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
LK 1 System Mode
LK 1 CO Line (Continued)
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
77
Delayed Ringing Time Assignment
15s
00 ~ 99 sec.
(CO)
78
Caller ID Display Assignment for
Not Specified
Up to 15 ports
System Mode
Tel Port No. = 01~ CO
79
BGM Port Assignment
00
00 (Not Specified), 01~ 64
80
ISDN DTMF Duration/Interdigit
100/70
In milliseconds: 70/60, 100/70, 400/
Selection
100, 600/100, 900/200
81
ISDN / K-CCIS Interval Time
4s (R2500 or lower)
2s, 4s, 8s, 16s, 32s (R2500 or lower)
Selection
04s (R3000 or
01s~99s (R3000 or higher)
higher)
82
CO Feature Code Service for Code
Not Specified
10 tables each with up to 10 digits
Restriction
86
Call Monitoring Alert tone
YS
YS, NO
Assignment
LK 1 System Mode
LK 2 ICM
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
00
Internal Paging Timeout Selection
90s (R2500 or lower)
90s, 120s, (No Limit) (R2500 or
090s (R3000 or
lower)
higher)
000s (No Limit), 001s~255s (R3000 or
higher)
01
Intercom Call Voice/Tone Signal
VOICE
TONE
Selection
VOICE
02
Automatic Callback Release Time
30m (R2500 or
30s, 1m, 2m, 3m, 5m, 10m, 20m,
Selection
lower)
30m(R2500 or lower)
30m (R3000 or
00m (No Limit), 01m~99m (R3000 or
higher)
higher)
03
2~7-Digit Station Number Selection
3DGT
2DGT, 3DGT, 4DGT, 5DGT, 6DGT,
7DGT
04
Call Arrival Key Block Assignment
No CAR Blocks are
CAR Blocks:
Assigned
Port 01~CO - 4 ports per block
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
1 - 17

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
LK 1 System Mode
LK 2 ICM (Continued)
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
08
Specified Station Access Code
00 = 01
Tel. Port Number
Assignment
01 ~ 23 Not Set
9~18
Customized Message 1~10
09 = DND
Maximum of 13 characters.
Assignment
10 = MEETING
11 = BUSINESS
Refer to Appendix B Character Codes,
TRIP
Section 1 Character Assignment on
12 = NOT IN
page B-1 for a list of characters.
13 = WITH GUEST
14 = OUT OF
OFFICE
15~18 = Not
Specified
19
Intercom Ring Pattern Selection
B
OFF, ON, A~H
20
Intercom Ring Tone Selection
A
A~H
21
PS Telephone Block Assignment
No CAR Blocks are
CAR Blocks:
Assigned
Port 01~C0 - 4 ports per block
22
Call Forward- No Answer Time
8s (R2500 or lower)
4s, 8s, 12s, 18s, 24s, 30s, 60s (R2500
Selection
12s (R3000 or
or lower)
higher)
01s~99s (R3000 or higher)
23
System Call Park Recall Time
1.0 (R2500 or lower)
In minutes: 0.5, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0, 3.0, 5.0,
Selection
060s(R3000 or
8.0, 10.0 (R2500 or lower)
higher)
001s~999s (R3000 or higher)
24
Intercom Feature Access Code
Refer to 1-2-24 Intercom Feature Access Code Assignment on
Assignment
page 2-126.
25
Internal Paging Alert Tone
YS
YS (Tone provided)
Selection
NO (No Tone)
26
Delayed Ringing Time Assignment
10s 00~99
sec.
(ICM)
30
PS Out of Area Time Assignment
08s
00~99 sec.
32
IP Telephone Block Assignment
Off (No IP Phone
Off
Blocks Assigned)
ON (Green), IP Assigned
On (Red), Block Not available
33
IP Telephone Block Assignment
YS (Allow)
YS (Allow), NO (Deny)
Allow/Deny Selection
___________________________________________________________________________________
1 - 18
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
LK 1 System Mode
LK 2 ICM (Continued)
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
34
Expanded Station Number
Blank (Not Specified)
2, 3, or 4 Digits Blank (Not Specified)
Assignment
5-Digit
1~8, one digit
6-Digit
10~89, two digits
7-Digit
100~899, three digits

LK 1 System Mode
LK 3 SLT
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
01
Bounce Protect Time Selection
300ms
Page 1:
0ms, 100ms, 200ms, 300ms,
400ms, 500ms, 600ms,
700ms
Page 2: 800ms, 900ms, 1000ms,
1100ms, 1200ms, 1300ms,
1400ms, 1500ms
02
SLT Hookflash Signal Selection
HOLD
HOLD
FLASH
03
First Digit PBR Release Time
10s (R2500 or lower)
10s, 20s, 30s, 40s, 50s, 60s (R2500 or
Selection
10s (R3000 or
lower).
higher)
01s~99s (R3000 or higher)
04
Dial 1 (DP) Hookflash Selection
YS
YS, NO
05
Hookflash Start Time Selection
290
In milliseconds: 40, 90, 140, 190, 240,
290, 340, 390, 440, 490, 540, 590,
640, 690, 740, 790
06
Hookflash End Time Selection
07 (HST + 700 ms.)
Refer to 1-3-06 Hookflash End Time
Selection on page 2-143.
07
Voice Mail Digit Add Assignment
Blank
Up to 4 digits
08
Voice Mail DTMF Delay Time
1s
0s, 1s, 2s, 3s, 4s, 5s, 6s, 8s
Selection
09
Voice Mail Disconnect Time
1.5s
0.5s, 1.0s, 1.5s, 2.0s, 3.0s, 3.5s
Selection
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
1 - 19

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
LK 1 System Mode
LK 3 SLT (Continued)
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
10
Voice Mail DTMF Duration/Interdigit
110/80
In milliseconds: 60/70, 110/80, 410/
Time Selection
100,
610/100, 810/190
11
SLT/PSII Talk Start timer
10s
01~99 sec
12
SLT/ISDN TELCO Account Codes
NO
NO, YES
Allow/Deny Selection

LK 1 System Mode
LK 4 Transfer/Automated Attendant (A.A.)
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
00
Tandem Transfer Automatic
060
In minutes: 000~999
Disconnect Time Selection
01
Automated Attendant First Digit
20s (R2500 or lower)
5s, 10s, 20s, 30s, 40s, 50s, 60s
PBR Release Time Selection
20s (R3000 or
(R2500 or lower)
higher)
01s~99s (R3000 or higher)
02
Automated Attendant Transfer
(R2500 or lower)
In seconds: 10, 20, 30, (No Limit)
Delayed Ringing Time Selection
00s (R3000 or
(R2500 or lower)
higher)
00s (No Limit), 01~99s (R3000 or
higher)
03
Automated Attendant No Answer
2m (R2500 or lower)
1m, 2m, 3m, 4m (R2500 or lower)
Disconnect Time Selection
120s (R3000 or
001s~255s (R3000 or higher)
higher)
04
Tandem Transfer SMDR Print
999
2-digit = 00~99
Extension Assignment
3-digit = 000~999
4-digit = 0000~9999
05
Automatic Tandem Trunk by Night
NO
YS, NO
Mode Selection
08
Automated Attendant PBR Timeout
NORMAL NORMAL,
RELEAS
Response Selection
09
Automated Attendant PBR Start
FR
FR = Same Time as Greeting
Time Selection
AF = After Greeting
___________________________________________________________________________________
1 - 20
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
LK 1 System Mode
LK 4 Transfer/Automated Attendant (A.A.) (Continued)
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
11
Automated Attendant Message
NO
YS, NO
Day/Night Mode Selection
12
Automated Attendant Message to
00
Tenant Number 00 to 47
Tenant Assignment
13
Automated Attendant Answer Delay
04s
00~99s, per MSG 1~8
Time Assignment
14
Automated Attendant Message
Refer to 1-4-14 Automated Attendant Message Access Code
Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment
(1-Digit) Assignment on page 2-166.
15
Automated Attendant Message
Refer to 1-4-14 Automated Attendant Message Access Code
Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment
(1-Digit) Assignment on page 2-166.
16
Automated Attendant Message
1
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
Repeat Selection
All messages
17
Automated Attendant Delay
RBT
RBT, MOH
Announcement Hold Tone
Selection
18
Automated Attendant Delay
NONE (Not specified)
None, MSG1, MSG2, MSG3, MSG4,
Announcement Assignment
MSG5, MSG6, MSG7, MSG8
19
Automated Attendant 1st to 2nd
4m
0s, 10s, 20s, 30s, 1m, 2m, 3m, 4m,
Delay Announcement Interval Time
5m,
Selection
10m, 20m.
20
Automated Attendant Delay
30s
0s, 10s, 20s, 30s, 1m, 2m, 3m, 4m,
Announcement Disconnect Time
5m, 10m, 20m
Selection
21
Automated Attendant Extension
Not Specified
2-digit (10~89), 3-digit (100~899), or 4-
Number Assignment
digit (1000~8999) extension numbers
Messages 1~8
22
Automated Attendant Direct
Not Specified
2-digit (10~89), 3-digit (100~899), or 4-
Extension Ring Assignment
digit (1000~8999) extension numbers
Messages 1~8
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
1 - 21

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________

LK 1 System Mode
LK 5 SMDR/LCR
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
02
SMDR Print Format
ALL
ALL, MSK
13
Printer Connected Selection
NO
NO, PC(Future), YS
14
Printer Line Feed Control Selection
YS
YS, NO
25
SMDR Valid Call Time Assignment
040s
000~990s (in 10-second increments)
26
SMDR Incoming/Outgoing Print
OUT
ALL, OUT, INC
Selection

LK 1 System Mode
LK 6 DSS
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
01
Attendant Add-On Console to
Refer to 1-6-01 Attendant Add-On Console to Telephone Port
Telephone Port Assignment
Assignment on page 2-183.
03
DSS Call Voice/Tone Signal
VOICE
TONE, VOICE
Selection
05
Attendant Add-On Console Key
Refer to 1-6-05 Attendant Add-On Console Key Selection on
Selection
page 2-185.
07
Message Board Lamp Assignment
NON
NON (Not assigned)
MSG (message)
08
Attendant Transfer Selection During
YS
NO, YS
Live Record
___________________________________________________________________________________
1 - 22
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________

LK 1 System Mode
LK 7 ESP
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
00
Doorphone Assignment
No default
LK1~LK4 Assigns DPH1~DPH4 Yes or
No
01
Doorphone Display Time Selection
10s (R2500 or lower)
10s, 30s, 60s, 90s (R2500 or lower)
10s (R3000 or
01s~99s (R3000 or higher)
higher)
02
External Speaker Connection
All Speakers (A~C)
ESP A, ESP B, ESP C
Selection
On
03
External Paging Alert Tone
YS
YS, NO
Selection
04
Doorphone Ring Pattern Selection
DPH1~4 ON
OFF, ON, A~H
05
Doorphone Ringing Frequency
C

A~H
Selection
06
External Paging Timeout Selection
5.0 (R2500 or lower)
In minutes: 0.5, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0, 3.0, 5.0,
300s (R3000 or
8.0, (No Limit) (R2500 or lower)
higher)
000s (No Limit), 001s~999s (R3000 or
higher)
07
External Ring Relay Pattern
PT3
Refer to 1-7-07 External Ring Relay
Selection
Pattern Selection on page 2-202.
08
External Speaker Chime Selection
PRT
PRT (Normal paging tone before Page)
C-S (Chime Start Only)
C-B (Chime Start/End)
09
External Speaker Chime Start Time
700
In milliseconds: 000, 100, 200, 300,
Selection
400, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000,
1100, 1200, 1300, 1400, 1500
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
1 - 23

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________

LK 1 System Mode
LK 8 PBR/Miscellaneous
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
01
SLT or Automated Attendant/DISA
LK1 and LK2 Off
Off = Single Line Telephone
to CPU PBR Selection
On = Automated Attendant/DISA
02
PBR Receive Level Assignment for
03 (36.0 dBm)
Refer to 1-8-02 PBR Receive Level
Automated Attendant/DISA
Assignment for Automated Attendant/
DISA on page 2-208.
04
Time Display (12h/24h) Selection
12
12, 24
07
Class of Service (Attendant)
Refer to 1-8-07 Class of Service (Attendant) Feature Selection
Feature Selection 1
1 on page 2-211.
08
Class of Service (Station) Feature
Refer to 1-8-08 Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
Selection 2
on page 2-214.
09
Music on Hold Pattern Selection
A
Medley A or B
10
PBR Interdigit Release Time
7s
3s, 4s, 5s, 6s, 7s, 8s, 9s, 10s
Selection
11
System Refresh Time Assignment
4H
NON, 4H, 8H, 12H, 24H
12
VRS Message Recording Time
15s x16
Time and number of messages: 15s x
Selection
16,
30s x 8, 60s x 4, 120s x 2
13
VRS Message Function
Refer to 1-8-13 VRS Message Function Assignment on page
Assignment
2-225.
15
Tone Assignment
A
Refer to 1-8-15 Tone Assignment on
page 2-227.
16
Voice Prompt to Tone Assignment
PR1
Refer to 1-8-16 Voice Prompt to Tone
Assignment on page 2-230.
17
PC Programming Password
Class 1, 2 All Blank
N/A
Assignment
18
Site Name Assignment
Not Assigned
N/A
25
ACD/UCD Group Agent
Not Specified
Agent Station Number and ACD/UCD
Assignment
Group Number
___________________________________________________________________________________
1 - 24
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
LK 1 System Mode
LK 8 PBR/Miscellaneous (Continued)
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
26
Voice Mail Quick Transfer Master
000
Station numbers:
Hunt Number
2-digit
10-89
3-digit
100-899
4-digit
1000-8999
5-digit
10000-89999
6-digit
100000-899999
7-digit
1000000-8999999
27
Forced Account Code Length
10DGT
1~13 Digits
Assignment
29
SCD (Simplified Call Distribution)
Not Assigned
Pilot Number for up to 4 Groups
Pilot Number Assignment
30
SCD Group Agent Assignment
Not Assigned
1~4 Digits
31
Hold Tone Source Assignment
INT
INT, EXT
32
Hold Internal Tone Volume
0dB
0dB, -6dB
Selection
33
Master Clock Selection
0: Not Assigned
Cabinet: 0,1~3
Slot: 1~8
35
COM Port Baud Rate Setting
COM 1 = 38.4
4.8 Kbps, 9.6 Kbps, 19.2 Kbps, 38.4
Assignment
COM 2 = 4.8
Kbps
COM 3 = 9.6
36
COM Port Parity/Stop Bit Setting
NON/1
NON/1, NON/2, EVEN/1, ODD/1
Assignment
37
General Purpose Relay Assignment
NO
NO, YS
38
Modem Number for Remote
Not Assigned
Any Unused Extension Number
Programming Assignment
(1~4 digits)
40
ACD Hunt Time
10s
10s, 20s, 30s, 60s, 120s, 240s,
( No Limit).
43
Enhanced 911 Trunk Assignment
Not Specified
CO/PBX trunks 01~64 / Trunk Group/
Right Advance Block
44
Enhanced 911 Alternate Route
No Alternate Route
No Alternate Route
Assignment
101~132 for trunk group 01~32
201~216 for route advance block
01~16
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
1 - 25

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
LK 1 System Mode
LK 10 Call by Call
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
00
Call by Call Type of Network ID
All RABs 2
0,1
Not Used)
Assignment
2 National
Network Identification
3~7 Not
Used
01
Call by Call ID Plan Assignment
All RABs 01
00
Not Used)
01
Interexchange Carrier Code
02~15 Not Used
02
Call by Call Type of Number
All RABs 0
0
Unknown
Assignment
1 International
2 National
3
Network Specific
4 Subscriber
or
Local
5~7 Not
Used
03
Call by Call Numbering Plan ID
All RABs 00
00
Unknown
Assignment
01 ISDN/Telephony
Numbering
Plan)
02 Not
Used
3
Future Data Numbering Plan
04~08 Not Used
09 Private
Numbering
Plan
10~15 Not Used
04
Call by Call Network ID Assignment
All RABs Unspecified
Three or four-digit Call by Call Network
ID
05
Call by Call Facility Coding Value
All RABs 00
00
Non-CBC RAB, None
Assignment (Service)
01
5ESS SDN
02
5ESS MEGACOMBO800
03
5ESS MEGACOM
06
5ESS ACCUNE)
08
5ESS International 800
16
5ESS AT&T MultIQuest 900
Service
17
NI-2 INWATS
18
NI-2 OUTWATS
19
NI-2 FX
20
NI-2 Tie Trunk
01
DMS100 Private
02
DMS100 INWATS
03
DMS100 OUTWATS
04
DMS100 FX
05
DMS100 Tie Trunk
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
1 - 27

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
LK 1 System Mode
LK 10 Call by Call (Continued)
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
06
Call by Call Facility Coding Value
All RABs 00
00
Non-CBC RAB, None
Assignment (Feature)
05
5ESS Local Exchange
06
5ESS default-Common Carrier
07
Call by Call Service Parameter
All RABs 0 - 000
0 (0 or 1) - 000 (000~127)
Assignment
08
Call by Call Max Digit Assignment
All RABs 00
00 (Don't Send Delimiter)~24
09
Call by Call Simulated Facility
All RABs 00
00 (None)~16
Group Assignment
20
Call by Call Outgoing SFG
99
01~16
For Electra Elite 48 (Default
Assignment
16), 01~64For Electra Elite192 (Default
64)
99
Default for all SFGs
21
Call by Call Outgoing/Incoming
99
01~16 For Electra Elite 48 (Default
SFG Assignment
16),
01~64 For Electra Elite 192 (Default
64) 99 Default for all SFGs
22
Call by Call Incoming Type
DID
CO, DID
Selection
___________________________________________________________________________________
1 - 28
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________

LK 1 System Mode
LK 11 DTI
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
00
T1 Signal Format Selection
24
12 (Superframe), 24 (Extended
Superframe)
01
Clear Channel Selection
ZCS
ZCS, B8ZS
02
Line Length Selection
1
Refer to 1-11-02 Line Length Selection
on page 2-291.
03
IP K-CCIS Selection
NO
YS, NO
05
T1 Channel Selection
Refer to 1-11-05 T1 Channel Selection on page 2-294.
06
Signaling Selection
LS
LS, GS
07
DTI Trunk Type Assignment
CO
CO, E&M, DID, ANI
08
Digits Delete for T1 ANI Assignment
2DGT
0 (No delete), 1~9

LK 1 System Mode
LK 12 ACD/UCD
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
00
ACD/UCD Group Pilot Number
Not Specified
Any Unused Extension Number
Assignment
01
ACD/UCD Group Overflow
Not Specified
Any Unused Extension Number
Destination Assignment
02
ACD/UCD Overflow Time Selection
60s
In seconds: , 10s, 20s, 30s,
60s,120s, 180s, 240s
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
1 - 29

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________

LK 1 System Mode
LK 13 PRT
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
00
PRT Channel Assignment
24
0, 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24
01
PRT Signal Format Selection
24
12 (SF), 24 (ESF)
02
Clear Channel Selection
ZCS
ZCS, B8ZS
03
Call by Call Service Selection
NO
YS, NO
04
PRT B Channel Outgoing Priority
H L
H L, L H
Selection
05
PRT B Channel-to-Trunk Group
00 (Any Trunk Group)
00, 01~32 Trunk Groups
Assignment
LK 1 System Mode
LK 14 ARS
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
00
ARS Allow/Deny Selection
NO
NO, YES
01
ARS Dialing Assignment
None
Tables 1~4.
02
ARS Dial Allow/Deny Selection
YES
YES, NO
03
ARS Route Table Number
00
Table 1~4, Dial No. 01~C8, Route
Assignment
01~32
04
ARS Trunk Group to Route Number
NORMAL
NORMAL, TKGP 01~32, RAB
Assignment
01~16ARS, or ICM
05
ARS Digit Delete Assignment
00
Route No. 01~32, No. of Digits 00~10
06
ARS Add Assignment
Not Specified
Route No. 01~32, Additional dialing
digits
07
ARS Max Digit Assignment
24
01~99 Digits
___________________________________________________________________________________
1 - 30
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
LK 1 System Mode
LK 15 K-CCIS
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
00
K-CCIS Main/Remote Office
NONE
NONE, MAIN, REMOTE
Selection
01
Common Signal Channel Data
64k
64k, 56k, 48k(1), 48k(2)
Speed Assignment
02
Common Signal Channel
00
Any DTI Trunk
Assignment
03
Originating Point Code Assignment
Blank
Point Code Range: 00001~16367
04
Destination Point Code Assignment
Blank
Point Code Range: 00001~16367
05
Destination Point Code Transfer
Blank
Point Code Range: 00001~16367
Assignment
T001~T255 can be assigned.
06
Originating Office code Number
Blank
Valid Range: 0~99999
Assignment
07
K-CCIS Message Response
30 sec
Valid Times: 01~99 Seconds
Timeout Assignment
08
Link Reconnect Allow/Deny
YS
NO, YS
Selection
09
K-CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding
5
1~7
Hop Assignment
10
Calling Name display Allow/Deny
NO
NO, YS
Selection
11
Centralized Billing Allow/Deny
NO (Deny)
NO (Deny), YS (Allow)
Selection
12
Centralized Billing Point Code of
Blank
Point Code Range: 00001~16367
Center Office Assignment
13
Centralized Day/Night Switching for
NO (Deny)
NO (Deny), YS (Allow)
Remote Office Assignment
14
Centralized Day/Night Switching for
All Tables Not
Table Range: 01~16
Main Office Assignment
Specified
Point Code Range: 00001~16367
15
Centralized BLF Send Point Code
All Tables Not
Group No. 1~8
Assignment
Specified
Point Code Range: 00001~16367
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
1 - 31

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
LK 1 System Mode
LK 15 K-CCIS (Continued)
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
16
Centralized BLF Send Extension
All Tables Not
Table Range: 001~120
Number Assignment
Specified
3-digit Extension numbers 100~899
4-digit Extension numbers
1000~8999
17
Centralized BLF Send Time
04s
04s, 08s, 12s, 16s
Assignment
18
Centralized BLF Receive Extension
All Tables Not
Table Range: 001~120
Number Assignment
Specified
3-digit Extension numbers 100~899
4-digit Extension numbers
1000~8999
19
Centralized 911 Allow/Deny
NO (Deny)
NO (Deny), YS (Allow)
Selection
20
Centralized 911 Originating Number
STA. (Station No.)
STA. (Station No.), CESID (CES-ID)
Selection
21
Centralized 911 Look Ahead
NO (Deny)
NO (Deny), YS (Allow)
Routing Allow/Deny Selection
LK 1 System Mode
LK 16 HUB
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
00
Auto Negotiation Yes/No Selection
YS (Enable)
YS, NO
01
Port Speed Selection 10/100
100 (100 Base-TX)
10 (10 Base-T), 100 (100 Base-TX)
Base-T
02
Port Duplex Mode Selection
HALF
HALF, FULL
03
MDI/MDIX Mode Selection
AUTO
MDIX, MDI, AUTO
04
VLAN Mode Selection
NO (Disable)
NO, YS (Enable)
05
Default VLAN ID Assignment
0001 (0x001 Hex)
0001~4095 (0x001~0xfff Hex)
06
Port Based Priority Selection
NO (Not Assigned)
NO, LO (Low), HI (High)
07
High Priority RX Tag Assignment
7
(Lowest) 0~7 (Highest)
___________________________________________________________________________________
1 - 32
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
LK 1 System Mode
LK 16 HUB (Continued)
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
08
High Priority TX Tag Assignment
7
(Lowest) 0~7 (Highest)
09
Low Priority TX Tag Assignment
0
(Lowest) 0~7 (Highest)
10
Port Mirroring Selection
NO (Normal)
NO, YS (Mirror)
11
Mirroring Source Port Assignment
Port 1
Port range: 1~8
12
Mirroring Target Port Assignment
Port 1
Port range: 1~8
13
VLAN Group to VLAN ID
0001(0x001)
ID Range: 0001~4095 (0x001~0xfff
Assignment
Hex)
14
VLAN Group and Port Selection
NO
NO, YS
15
VLAN Tag Insertion Selection
NO
NO, YS
16
Flow Control for Full Duplex
NO
NO, YS
Selection
17
Back Pressure for Half Duplex
NO
NO, YS

LK 2 Tenant Mode
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
01
Trunk to Tenant Assignment
Refer to 2-01 Trunk to Tenant Assignment on page 2-415.
05
Line Key Selection
TEL
TEL (Telephone Mode)
TNAT (Tenant-Wide Mode)
06
Line Key Selection for Tenant Mode
Refer to 2-06 Line Key Selection for Tenant Mode on page
2-418.
07
System Speed Dial Display
CO/PBX Line LED
On (Assigned)
Assignment
On
Off (Not Assigned)
All Speed Dial
Confirmation Allowed
08
ECR Relay to Tenant Assignment
All Tenants - No
N/A
Assignment
09
DID Limit to Tenant Assignment
00
00 (no limit), 01~64 Incoming Calls
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
1 - 33

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________

LK 3 CO/PBX Line Mode
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
00
Trunk Name/Number Assignment
Not Specified
Maximum of 13 digits (numbers,
hyphens, and spaces)
02
Trunk Status Selection
OUT&IN
OUT&IN, IN
03
Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment
01
Refer to 3-03 Trunk-to-Trunk Group
Assignment on page 2-427.
04
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Yes/No
NO
NO, YES
Selection
05
Trunk Incoming Answer Mode
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN, TANDM TRF, AA
Selection
06
Automatic Tandem Trunk
Not Specified
CO 01~64
Assignment
07
CO/PBX Ringing Variation Selection
M
M, L, H
11
CO External Source Selection
CO
CO, EXT SOURCE
12
Trunk-to-MOH Trunk Assignment
00
01~64 CO/PBX
14
Tie Line Type Assignment
2ND DIAL
2ND DIAL, IMMEDIATE, DELAY,
WINK
15
Trunk DTMF Duration/Interdigit
110 /80
Duration / Interdigit Time in
Selection
milliseconds:
60/70, 60/80, 110/80, 160/80, 210/80,
410/100, 610/100, 810/190
16
Tie Line Prepause Time Selection
0
In seconds:
0, 0.5, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0,
7.0,
8.0, 9.0, 10.0, 11.0, 12.0,13.0
17
Tie Line Answer Detect Time
520 In
milliseconds:
Selection
0, 130, 260, 390, 520, 650, 780, 910,
1040, 1170, 1300, 1430, 1560, 1690,
1820, 1950
18
Tie Line Release Detect Time
520 In
milliseconds:
Selection
0, 130, 260, 390, 520, 650, 780, 910,
1040, 1170, 1300, 1430, 1560, 1690,
1820, 1950
___________________________________________________________________________________
1 - 34
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
LK 3 CO/PBX Line Mode (Continued)
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
19
Tie Line/CO/PBX Incoming Signal
03 Refer
to 3-19 Tie Line/CO/PBX
Detect Time Selection
Incoming Signal Detect Time Selection
on page 2-444.
20
Tie Line Loop Off-Guard Time
2.0
In seconds:
Selection
0.0, 0.5, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0,
7.0, 8.0, 9.0, 10.0, 11.0, 12.0, 13.0
21
Tie Line Length of Wink Signal
180
In milliseconds:
Selection
30, 60, 90, 120, 150, 180, 210, 240,
270,
300, 330, 360, 390, 420, 450, 480
22
Tie Line Length of Delay Signal
300
In milliseconds:
Selection
0, 300, 600, 900, 1200, 1500, 1800,
2100, 2400, 2700, 3000, 3300, 3600,
3900, 4200, 4500
24
Tie Line Incoming Interdigit Timeout
6s
1s, 2s, 3s, 4s, 5s, 6s, 7s, 8s, 9s, 10s,
Selection
11s, 12s, 13s, 14s, 15s, (No Limit)
25
Tie Line Wink/Delay Signal Detect
7s
1s, 2s, 3s, 4s, 5s, 6s, 7s, 8s, 9s, 10s,
Timeout Selection
11s, 12s, 13s, 14s, 15s, (No Limit)
27
Tie Line Dial Tone Selection
YS
YS, NO
28
Tie Line Reorder Tone Selection
YS
YS (Send)
NO (Don't Send)
29
Trunk Internal Transmit Pad
8

In dB:
Selection
2, 4, 6, 8, 12, 16, 3, -3, 0
30
Trunk Internal Receive Pad
8

In dB:
Selection
2, 4, 6, 8, 12, 16, 3, -3, 0
31
Trunk External Transmit Pad
0 In
dB:
Selection
2, 4, 6, 8, 12, 16, 3, -3, 0
32
Trunk External Receive Pad
0

In dB:
Selection
2, 4, 6, 8, 12, 16, 3, -3, 0
33
Disconnect Recognition Time
0.3 In
seconds:
Selection
0, 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8,
0.9, 1.0, 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5
38
Automated Attendant Message to
1
Message 1~8 to CO 01~64
Trunk Selection
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
1 - 35

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
LK 3 CO/PBX Line Mode (Continued)
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
40
Automatic Release Signal Detection
350
In milliseconds:
Selection
0, 50, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350,
400,
450, 500, 550, 600, 650, 700, (No
Limit)
41
Delay Announcement Assignment
NN
Refer to 3-41 Delay Announcement
Assignment on page 2-470.
42
DIT Assignment
No Assignment
2~7 digit Station numbers
43
ANA Assignment
No Assignment
2~7 digit Station numbers
44
Caller ID Display Assignment for
Not Specified
N/A
CO/PBX Line
45
Live Record Trunk Selection
NO
NO = No Live Recording
YS = Live Recording
50
ISDN Line SPID Assignment
Not Specified
Up to 20 digits
52
ISDN Trunk Directory Number
Not Specified
Up to 20 digits
Assignment
53
Caller Name Indication Selection
NUM
NO, NUM, NAM, TRK
59
Automated Attendant Function
NORMAL
NORMAL, DELAY
Selection
61
DIT/ANA Delay Answer Time
0s (R2500 or lower)
0s, 5s, 10s, 20s, 30s, 40s, 50s, 60s
Selection
00s (R3000 or
(R2500 or lower
higher)
00 (No Time), 01~99s (R3000 or
higher)
62
DIT Tenant Assignment
00
00~47
63
DIT Weekend Mode Selection
YS
YS, NO
64
DIT Night Mode Delay Answer
NO
NO, YS
Selection
65
Hold Tone Automated Attendant
NONE
NONE, MSG 1~MSG 8
Selection
67
CO/PBX Ringing Pattern Selection
None
None, Pattern A~Pattern H
69
911 Cut Through Trunk Selection
NO
NO, YES
70
CIC Number Assignment
000 (Not Specified)
CIC Range: 001~127
___________________________________________________________________________________
1 - 36
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
LK 3 CO/PBX Line Mode (Continued)
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
73
CO Message Waiting Yes/No
NO
NO, YES
Selection
90
Polarity Reverse Selection
NO
NO, YS
91
Trunk Type Selection
CO
CO, PBX, TIE, DID, CTX (Assume-9)
92
Trunk (Installed, DP/DTMF)
MF
NIL, DP 10 pps, DP 20 pps, MF
Selection

LK 4 Telephone Mode
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
01
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day
Refer to 4-01 CO/
No Ring, Immediate Ring, Delayed
Mode)
PBX Ring
Ring
Assignment
(Day Mode) on page
2-499.
02
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night
Refer to 4-02 CO/
No Ring, Immediate Ring, Delayed
Mode)
PBX Ring
Ring
Assignment
(Night Mode) on
page 2-501.
03
Doorphone Chime Assignment
Station Port 01 and
DPH1, DPH2, DPH3, DPH4
(Day Mode)
02 Chime for All Four

Doorphones).
Station Port 01~120 Chime per
Doorphone
04
Doorphone Chime Assignment
Station Port 01 and
DPH1, DPH2, DPH3, DPH4
(Night Mode)
02 Chime (All Line
Station Port 01~120 Chime per
Key LEDs on)
Doorphone
07
Code Restriction Class Assignment
00 (All Stations)
Class 00~15 per Station
(Day Mode)
08
Code Restriction Class Assignment
00 (All Stations)
Class 00~15 per Station
(Night Mode)
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
1 - 37

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
LK 4 Telephone Mode (Continued)
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
09
Telephone to Tenant Assignment
00 (All Tenant
Tenant Number
Telephones)
10
Station Number Assignment
100
Refer to 4-10 Station Number
Assignment on page 2-511.
11
Ringing Line Preference Selection
YS
NO, YS
12
Line Key Selection for Telephone
CO Refer
to 4-12 Line Key Selection for
Mode
Telephone Mode on page 2-515.
13
CO/PBX Busy Forward Station
Not Specified
N/A
Assignment
14
Intercom Master Hunt Number
NO
NO, YS
Selection
15
Intercom Master Hunt Number
No Telephones
Station Number (2~7 digits)
Forward Assignment
Specified
17
Station to Class of Service Feature
00
Refer to 4-17 Station to Class of
Assignment
Service Feature Assignment on page
2-524.
18
Station Name Assignment
Not Specified
Up to six digits (characters)
19
Trunk Outgoing Restriction
LEDs Off
Off = Not Restricted
On = Restricted
23
Prime Line/Hot Line Assignment
Not Specified
Up to 10 digits
24
SLT Hookflash Assignment
HOLD
HOLD, DISC
26
DISA ID Number Station
01
Refer to 4-26 DISA ID Number Station
Assignment
Assignment on page 2-533.
28
Multilingual LCD Indication
ENG
JAPA, FREN, ENG, SPAN
Selection
29
HFU Selection
NO
NO, YS
30
Hold/Transfer Recall Display
YS
YS, NO
Selection
31
Receiving Internal/All Call Page
YS
YS, NO
Selection
32
Trunk Digit Restriction
00 (No Limit)
00~99
35
Voice Mail/SLT Selection
NO
NO, YS
___________________________________________________________________________________
1 - 38
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
LK 4 Telephone Mode (Continued)
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
36
Voice Prompt Selection
NO
NO, YS
37
Extension Line Key Ring
All LEDs Off
LED Off (No Ring)
Assignment (Day Mode)
Green LED (Immediate Ring)
Red LED (Delayed Ring, Extension
Line Key)
38
Extension Line Key Ring
All LEDs Off
LED Off (No Ring)
Assignment (Night Mode)
Green LED (Immediate Ring)
Red LED (Delayed Ring, Extension
LK)
39
APR Ring Mode Assignment
STA
NON, STA, ALL
40
LCR Class Selection
0
Class 0~4
41
SIE/CAR Ringing Line Preference
YS
NO, YS
Selection
42
Call Forward - Busy Immediately/
YS
NO, YS
Delay Selection
43
Station to Call Appearance Block
All Stations Assigned
Call Appearance Block 00~47
Assignment
Call Appearance
Block 00
44
Caller ID Preset Dial Outgoing CO
Not Specified
N/A
Selection
46
Live Record Auto Delete Selection
NO
YS, NO
47
ISDN Directory Number Selection
YES
YES, NO
49
Caller ID Display for CAR Key
00 (Not Specified)
Refer to the Memory Block Description.
Assignment
50
Multiline Terminal Type Selection
16
16, 24, or 24A
51
Off-Hook Ringing Selection
YS
YS, NO
52
CO/PBX Answer Key Operation
YS
NO, YS
Without Ringing Assignment (Day
Mode)
53
CO/PBX Answer Key Operation
YS
NO, YS
Without Ringing Assignment (Night
Mode)
54
Enhanced 911 CESID to Station
Not Specified
7 or 10 digits plus up to 5-digit
Table Assignment
extension
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
1 - 39

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
LK 4 Telephone Mode (Continued)
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
55
CO/PBX Telephone Ringing Pattern
None
None, Pattern A~Pattern H
Selection
56
SMDR Telephone Print Selection
YS
YS, NO
57
CO Line Ringing Pattern Priority
CO
CO, TEL
Selection
58
Automated Attendant Selection for
NON
NON, AA1~AA8
DID
59
APR/APA Hookflash Selection
NO
NO, YS
62
ISDN-PRI Directory Number
None
Calling Party Number (CPN)
Selection
64
Code Restriction Class (without
All Stations Class 15
Setting Data 00~15
Authorization Code) Day Mode
Assignment
65
Code Restriction Class (without
All Stations Class 15
Setting Data 00~15
Authorization Code) Night Mode
Assignment
66
MOH or Ring Back Tone Selection
MOH
MOH, RBT
67
IP Station Number Assignment
Blank
10~89, 100~899, 1000~8999
68
LCD Line Key Name Assignment
LK01~08:CO01~08
Name: Up to 8 characters
69
CO Message Waiting Indication
Not Assigned
Line keys 1~24
Assignment
Tel Port No. 01~CO
71
Station to Timer Class of Service
Tel Ports 1 and 2 in
Tel Ports 01~CO
Class 1. All other
Class 1~4
ports in Class 2.
90
SLT Data Line Security Assignment
NORMAL
NORMAL, DATA
91
Telephone Ringing Variation
M
M, L, H
Selection
92
Receiving Volume Selection
DOWN
DOWN, UP
93
Internal Zone Paging Selection
NO
No, A, B, C
94
3-Minute Alarm Selection
NO
NO, YS
95
DTMF/DP SLT Type Selection
MF
DP, MF
___________________________________________________________________________________
1 - 40
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________

LK 5 Trunk Group Mode
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
00
Digit Add/Del for Tie Line
000
Delete up to two digits
Networking Assignment
(No Add or Delete)
Add up to two digits
01
Tie Line Networking Tandem
All Trunk Groups
On = Enable
Connection Assignment
CO/PBX Line LEDs
Off = Disable
On
02
8-Digit Matching Table to Trunk
Enabled
On = Enable
Group Assignment
CO/PBX Line LEDs
Off = Disable
On
03
OCC Table to Trunk Group
CO/PBX Line LEDs
On = Enable
Assignment
On
Off = Disable
Use All Tables
04
LCR Class to Trunk Group
0
0~4
Selection
05
Common Signaling Channel Route
0 (Not Assigned)
CCH Range: 1~4
Selection
06
Trunk Group Outgoing Priority
H L
H L, L H
Selection

LK 6 Copy Mode
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
2
Tenant Mode Copy Assignment
N/A
N/A
3
CO Line Mode Copy Assignment
N/A
N/A
4
Telephone Mode Copy Assignment
N/A
N/A
5
Trunk Group Mode Copy
N/A
N/A
Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
1 - 41

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________

LK 7 ETU Mode
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
1
Card Interface Slot Assignment
Refer to 7-1 Card Interface Slot Assignment on page 2-623.
2
Telephone Type Assignment
TEL
NON, TEL, DSS CONSOL, SLT ADP,
DIGITAL VM, MSG BOARD
3-00
MIF (ACD) Assignment
00 (No Assignment)
N/A
3-01
MIF (LCR) Assignment
00 (No Assignment)
N/A
3-02
MIF (SMDR) Assignment
00 (No Assignment)
N/A
3-03
MIF (UCD) Assignment
00 (No Assignment)
N/A
3-04
MIF (Caller ID) Assignment
00 (No Function)
N/A

LK 8 Special Mode
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
1
ROM Version Confirmation
N/A
N/A
2
System Speed Dial Memory Clear
N/A
N/A
3
Station Speed Dial Memory Clear
N/A
N/A
8
Second Initialization
N/A
N/A
Clock/Calendar Setting
N/A
N/A
___________________________________________________________________________________
1 - 42
Multiline Terminal Programming

Memory Blocks
Chapter 2
___________________________________________________________________________________
SEC
TION 1
PROGRAMMING SYSTEM DATA USING THE MEMORY BLOCK
This section provides detailed instructions for programming individual Memory
Blocks. The Memory Blocks are listed numerically. For each Memory Block, the
following information is provided.
H
General Description is a brief explanation of the function of the Memory
Block.
H
Display indicates the default information displayed in the Multiline Terminal
LCD during programming.
H
Settings (when applicable) indicates the information that is entered using the
line keys on the Multiline Terminal.
H
Programming Procedures contains detailed procedures to program each
Memory Block.
H
Related Programming (when applicable) contains a list of associated
Memory Blocks that may need to be programmed.
H
Notes contains additional information related to programming the Memory
Block.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 1

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-1-00
Pause Time Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify the pause time that can be inserted between digits
1
dialed on CO/PBX and Tie lines.
Data No.
Display

00
Data
Data
No.
Title

Se
tt
ing
PC Programming
0 0 : P A U S E
3 . 0 s
¦+BCM
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
1.0s
3.0s
default.

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + KK to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-09
Manual Pause Selection
1-1-24
PBX/CTX Access Code Assignment I
1-1-25
PBX/CTX Access Code Assignment II
3-91
Trunk Type Selection

Notes

1.
A pause is automatically inserted following a CO/PBX Access Code (e.g., 9) by programming CO/PBX lines as
PBX in Memory Block 3-91 (Trunk Type Selection) and 1-1-24/25 (PBX/CTX Access Code Assignment I/II).
2.
Manual pauses can be stored for use when dialing outside lines by the Last Number Redial or Save/Store and
Repeat features using Memory Block 1-1-09 (Manual Pause Selection).
3.
Pauses can be stored as part of System and Station Speed Dial buffers when needed.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 2
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-1-01
DP Interdigit Time Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
The DP Interdigit Time is the minimum pause time between Dial Pulses. Use this
1
Memory Block to Select Pattern A or Pattern B.
Data No.
Display

01
Data
Data
No.
Title
Se
tt
in
g

PC Programming
0 1 : D P
I N T E R
B
¦+BCM
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK7
LK8
The shaded
selection is the
A
B
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 +KAto access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.

DP Dial
10 pps
20 pps
Data
Pattern A
650 ms.
500 ms.
Dial
Minimum
Dial
Pause
Signal
Signal
Time
Pattern B
800 ms.
800 ms.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
3-92
Trunk (Installed, DP/DTMF) Selection

Notes

Use this Memory Block when DP Tie lines or DID are assigned in Memory Block 3-92 [Trunk (Installed, DP/
DTMF) Selection] to send Dial Pulse signaling.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 3

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-1-02
Hookflash Time Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify the loop open time for a hookflash signal sent to the
1
CO or PBX when the Recall key on a Multiline Terminal is pressed. A Single Line
Telephone (SLT) generates a hookflash to the CO or PBX line when a Single Line
Data No.
Telephone hookflash is assigned.
02
Display
PC Programming

Data
Data
Page

No.
Title
Setting
No.
¦+BCM
0 2 : F L S H 6 0 0 m s
| 2
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
20ms
40ms
60ms
80ms
100ms
140ms
160ms
200ms
The shaded
Page 2
selection is the
default.
LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
400ms
600ms
800ms
1.0s
1.5s
2.0s
3.0s
5.0s
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 +KBto access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.

Use the following to enter data:
C to go to the next page
A to go to the previous page
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 4
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-46
Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment
1-1-47
Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment
1-3-02
SLT Hookflash Signal Selection
4-24
SLT Hookflash Assignment

Notes

1.
A 1- or 2-digit Access Code can be assigned in Memory Block 1-1-46/47 [Access Code (1- or 2-Digit)
Assignment] for Single Line Telephones to send a hookflash signal on a CO/PBX line (default: 6 #).
2.
A hookflash from a Single Line Telephone puts an existing call on hold or sends a hookflash signal on the
CO/PBX line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 5

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-1-03
Hold Recall Time Selection
System Mode
(Non-Exclusive Hold)
1
Submode
1
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify the Hold time for a Non-Exclusive outside call
Data No.
before a recall tone is generated. When No Limit is selected, the hold recall alarm tone
03
is not generated.
PC Programming
This Memory Block can be adjusted in 1-second intervals (R3000 or higher).
¦+BM
Display (R2500 or lower)

Data
Data
No.
Titl
e
S
ett
ing
0 3 : H O L D
R E C L
2 5 s
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
The shaded
selection is the

25s
45s
60s
90s
120s
180s
240s
default.
(No Limit)
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 +KCto access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Refer to the next page for R3000 Programming Procedures.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 6
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Display (R3000 or higher)

Timer
Data
Class
Setting

No.
Title
1~
4
Data
0 3 : H L D R C L
1 = 0 6 0 s
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 +KCto access the Memory Block.
3
Use the dial pad to enter the Data Setting for Class 1.
Default Values
Setting Data
Class 1~4 = 060s
000s = No Limit
000s~255s (e.g., 045s = 45s)
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Timer Class of Service
E
5
Program the next Timer Class of Service or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-63
Hold Recall Time Selection (Exclusive)
1-2-23
System Call Park Recall Time Selection
4-71
Station to Timer Class of Service (R3000 or higher)

Notes

1.
Calls put on Exclusive Hold, recall using the data selected in Memory Block 1-1-63 [Hold Recall Time Selection
(Exclusive)].
2.
Calls placed on hold on Call Appearance keys, recall using this Memory Block.
3.
Calls parked in System Call Park locations recall using Memory Block 1-2-23 (System Call Park Recall Time
Selection).
4.
Telephone ports 1 and 2 are in Station to Timer Class of Service, Class 1 by default. All other ports are in Station
to Timer Class of Service, Class 2 by default (R3000 or higher).
5.
When a system is upgraded from R2500 or lower, the Hold Recall Time Selection is reset to the default value
during the upgrade process (R3000 or higher).
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 7

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-1-04
Automatic Redial Time Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
When a called party is busy, the station user dials an Access Code and restores the
1
handset. Use this Memory Block to define the redial timing parameters when
automatic redial is set to a busy CO/PBX number. After the specified number of call
Data No.
attempts with no answer, the system stops dialing.
04
Display
PC Programming

Data
Table
Setting

No.
Title
1~3
Data
¦+BM
0 4 : R E D I A L ( 1 )
0 3 0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + KD to access the Memory Block.
3
Use the dial pad to enter the Data Setting for Table 1.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
Table
J
Description
Value
to move the cursor left
No.
Lto move the cursor right
1
Calling Time
030

Setting Data (Allowed):
2
Call Waiting Time
060
Table 1 (Calling Time): 001~050 sec.
3
Call Attempts
002
Table 2 (Call Waiting Time): 001~100 sec.
Table 3 (Call Attempts): 001~015 times
000 cannot be entered.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next table.
G
5
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each remaining table. After pressing
for Table 3, the next Memory Block is displayed.
E
6
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Notes

1.
Definitions:
Calling Time: The time that the system automatically calls the busy CO/PBX number. After the programmed time
limit is reached, the call is abandoned.
Call Waiting Time: The time the system waits between call attempts.
Call Attempts: The number of times the system redials the busy CO/PBX number.
2.
When Call Pickup groups are assigned using Memory Block 4-09 (Telephone to Tenant Assignment), the CO
lines must be assigned to the same Tenant group in Memory Block 2-01 (Trunk to Tenant Assignment) for this
feature to work.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 8
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-1-05
Start Time Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify the time after dialing before the system starts the
1
Elapsed Call Time. Used for copper trunks only. Not supported by digital trunks.
Data No.
This Memory Block can be adjusted in 1-second intervals (R3000 or higher).
05
Display (R2500 or lower)
PC Programming

Data
Setting
No.
Tit
le
Da
ta
¦+BM
0 5 : C A L L S T A R T
1 0 s
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
10s
20s
30s
40s
50s
60s
70s
2s
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + KE to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Refer to the next page for R3000 Programming Procedures.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 9

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
Display (R3000 or higher)

Timer
Data
Class
Setting

No.
Title
1~4
Data
0 5 : S T A R T
1 = 0 2 s
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 +KEto access the Memory Block.
3
Use the dial pad to enter the Data Setting for Class 1.
Default Values
Setting Data
Class 1~4 = 02s
00s = No Limit
00s~99s (e.g., 02s = 2s)
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Timer Class of Service.
E
5
Program the next Timer Class of Service or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-5-25
SMDR Valid Call Time Assignment
4-71
Station to Timer Class of Service (R3000 or higher)

Notes

1.
This time is used for the features with functions described below:
Elapsed Call Time: The time after dialing before the Elapsed Call Time is started and displayed on a Multiline
Terminal.
SMDR Start Time: The time needed after dialing before the SMDR Valid Call Time is started. Refer to Memory
Block 1-5-25 (SMDR Valid Call Time Assignment). For outgoing calls, both Elapsed Call Time and SMDR Valid
Call Time must elapse before a call record is generated.
2.
Telephone ports 1 and 2 are in Station to Timer Class of Service, Class 1 by default. All other ports are in Station
to Timer Class of Service, Class 2 by default (R3000 or higher).
3.
When a system is upgraded from R2500 or lower, the Start Time Selection is reset to the default value during
the upgrade process (R3000 or higher).
4.
For Copper trunks only. Not supported on digital trunks.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 10
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-1-06
CO/PBX Incoming Ringing Alarm
System Mode
Time Selection
1
Submode
1
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify the time between when a CO/PBX call is detected
Data No.
and the ringing tone changes to a higher pitch when the call is not answered. When
06
No Limit is selected, the ringing tone does not change.
PC Programming
This Memory Block can be adjusted in 1-second intervals (R3000 or higher).
¦+BM
Display (R2500 or lower)
Data
Setting
No.
Title
Data
0 6 : R I N G
A L M

T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
The shaded
selection is the

10s
20s
30s
default.
(No Limit)
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + KF to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
4
Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Refer to the next page for R3000 Programming Procedures.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 11

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
Display (R3000 or higher)

Setting
Data

Data
No.
Title
0 6 : R I N G
A L M
0 0 0 s
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Display
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 +KFto access the Memory Block.
3
Use the dial pad to enter the Data Setting for Class 1.
Default Values
Setting Data
000s
000s = No Limit
000s~255s (e.g., 020s = 20s)
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-07
Tie Line Delay Ringing Time Selection
3-07
CO/PBX Ringing Variation Selection
4-01
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)
4-02
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)
4-91
Telephone Ringing Variation Selection

Notes

1.
Memory Blocks 4-01 and 4-02 [CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode/Night Mode)] must be set to ring.
2.
CO/PBX lines assigned for DIT/ANA do not activate this feature.
3.
Tie/DID lines assigned for Delayed Ringing follow this assignment after the delayed ringing starts.
4.
This feature uses the same ringing tone (Low, Medium, High) that is selected in Memory Blocks 3-07 (CO/PBX
Ringing Variation Selection) and 4-91 (Telephone Ringing Variation Selection). When High is selected in these
Memory Blocks, this feature does not function.
5.
Select (No Limit) to disable this feature.
6.
When a system is upgraded from R2500 or lower, the Start Time Selection is reset to the default value during
the upgrade process (R3000 or higher).
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 12
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-1-07
Tie Line Delay Ringing Time
System Mode
Selection
1
Submode
1
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify the time before a Tie line call ringing at a station can
Data No.
begin ringing at other preassigned stations when it is not answered in a programmed
07
time. CO/PBX Ringing Assignment defines the preassigned station.
PC Programming
This Memory Block can be adjusted in 1-second intervals (R3000 or higher).
¦+ALM
Display (R2500 or lower)

Setting
Data
No.
Titl
e
Data
0 7 : T L
D L Y R N G

T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
The shaded
selection is the

10s
20s
30s
default.
(No Limit)
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + KG to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Refer to the next page for R3000 Programming Procedures.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 13

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________

Notes

Example:
¤
(D)
System 1
System 2

Electra Elite

Electra Elite
Electra Elite
System I
Elite IPK
System I
¤(A) 100
¤(C) 102
IPK System II
¤(B) 101
¤(B) 101
(C) 102
(A) 100
¤
¤
¤
Time Elapsed
In this example, systems 1 and 2 are connected. Stations A (extension 100)
and C (extension 102) are assigned to ring on the Tie line using Memory
Blocks 4-01 and 4-02 [CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day/Night) Mode].
1.
To speak to station user A, station user D dials extension 100.
2.
In the example at station A:

The ICM LED blinks, and a ring tone that is different from the normal ringing tone is heard.

The call can be answered by lifting the handset.

Stations B and C users cannot press the line key on the Multiline Terminals to answer the call.
3.
In the example, when station user A does not answer in the specified time:

The ringing tone changes to the normal tone and station C starts ringing.

Any station (A, B, or C) user can press the flashing line key to answer the call.
4.
After the timeout, the system uses the Day and Night Ringing Assignment and rings the assigned station.
5.
Select (No Limit) to disable this feature.
6.
Telephone ports 1 and 2 are in Station to Timer Class of Service, Class 1 by default. All other ports are in Station
to Timer Class of Service, Class 2 by default (R3000 or higher).
7.
When a system is upgraded from R2500 or lower, the Start Time Selection is reset to the default value during
the upgrade process (R3000 or higher).
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 15

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-1-09
Manual Pause Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify either YS (Pause Insertion) or NO (Last Number
1
Dialed/Speed Dial) to be executed using the Redial key when it is pressed after one or
more digits of a dialed number are entered.
Data No.
Display
09

PC Programming
Data
Setting
No.
Title
Data

¦+BTS
0 9 : M A N
P A U S E
N O
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
NO
YS
default.

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + KI to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-00
Pause Time Selection
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 16
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________

Notes

B
1.
When a user seizes a CO/PBX line and dials 907 4000 +
+ 12345 with this Memory Block set to NO,
the system interprets the sequence as:
B
9074000XXX345 (XXX =
and 12 is interpreted as Speed Dial buffer 12).
B
2.
When a user seizes a CO/PBX line and dials 907 4000 +
+ 12345 with this Memory Block set to YS,
the system interprets the sequence as:
9074000XXX12345 (XXX = is interpreted as a pause).
3.
The pause is inserted when Last Number Redial, Save and Repeat, or Store and Repeat is used to redial the
number.
B
4.
When this feature is allowed, Multiline Terminal users cannot use consecutive Speed Dial using
.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 17

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-1-11
System Transfer/Camp-On Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block system-wide to select whether or not the station user can
1
press the Transfer key to perform a Ring Transfer or Station Camp-On.
Data No.
Display
11
Data
Setting
No.
Title
Data
PC Programming

¦+BTS
1 1 : R I N G
T R F
Y S
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
NO
YS
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + AA to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-12
Station Transfer/Camp-On Recall Time Selection

Notes

Transfers or camp-ons from Attendant Add-On Consoles are also affected using this Memory Block.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 18
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-1-12
Station Transfer/Camp-On Recall
System Mode
Time Selection
1
Submode
1
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify the time before a Ring Transfer or Station Camp-On
Data No.
from a station (without an Attendant Add-On Console) recalls back to the originating
12
station when the call is not answered.
PC Programming
This Memory Block can be adjusted in 1-second intervals (R3000 or higher).
¦+BM
Display (R2500 or lower)

Data
Data
No.
Title
Se
tt
ing
1 2 : T R F
R E C L
4 5 s
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
The shaded
selection is the

25s
45s
60s
90s
120s
180s
240s
default.
(No Limit)
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + AB to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Refer to the next page for R3000 Programming Procedures.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 19

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
Display (R3000 or higher)

Timer
Data
Class
Setting

No.
Title
1~4
Data
1 2 : T R F R C L
1 = 0 6 0 s
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 +ABto access the Memory Block.
3
Use the dial pad to enter the Data Setting for Class 1.
Default Values
Setting Data
Class 1~4 = 060s
000s = No Limit
000s~999s (e.g., 020s = 20s)
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Timer Class of Service.
E
5
Program the next Timer Class of Service or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-11
System Transfer/Camp-On Selection
1-6-01
Attendant Add-On Console to Telephone Port Assignment
1-8-08
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
4-71
Station to Timer Class of Service (R3000 or higher)

Notes

1.
Telephone ports 1 and 2 are in Station to Timer Class of Service, Class 1 by default. All other ports are in Station
to Timer Class of Service, Class 2 by default (R3000 or higher).
2.
When a system is upgraded from R2500 or lower to R3000 or higher, the Station Transfer/Camp-On Recall
Time Selection is reset to the default during the upgrade process.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 20
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-1-13
CO Transfer Ring Pattern Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to select a Ring Pattern for CO transfers.
1
Display
Data No.

Data
Setting
13
No.
Title

Data Page
PC Programming
1 3 : C O T
P T N
C | 1
¦+BCS
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
(Page 1)

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
OFF
ON
A
B

C

D

E

F
The shaded
(Page 2)
selection is the
default.
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8

G

H
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + AC to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.

Use the following to enter data:
C

to access the next page
A to access the previous page
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-11
System Transfer/Camp-On Selection
1-1-14
CO Transfer Ring Tone Selection
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 21

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
The Ring Patterns are shown in the table below:
s= seconds
0s
1s
2s
3s
4s
5s
6s
Line
Pattern
Key
Tone
LK 1
Off
Tone
LK 2
On
A

LK 3
B

LK 4
C
LK 5
D

LK 6
E

LK 7
F

LK 8
LK 1
G
(Pg. 2)
LK 2
H
(Pg. 2)
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 22
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-1-14
CO Transfer Ring Tone Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to select a ring tone for CO transfers.
1
Display
Data No.
Data
Setting
14
No.
Ti
tle
Data
PC Programming
1 4 : C O T R F
T O N E
A
¦+BCS
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the

A

B
C

D
E
F

G

H
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + AD to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
The available tones are:
Tone
Frequency
Tone A
480/600 (Modulation - 16 Hz)
Tone B
480/606 (Modulation - 8 Hz)
Tone C
1024/1285
Tone D
1024
Tone E
500
Tone F
1024/1285 (Modulation - 16 Hz)
Tone G
600/700 (Modulation - 16 Hz)
Tone H
1024 (Envelope - 2 sec.)
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-11
System Transfer/Camp-On Selection
1-1-13
CO Transfer Ring Pattern Selection
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 23

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-1-18
System Speed Dial Restriction by
System Mode
Tenant
1
Submode
1
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not System Speed Dial is restricted for
Data No.
each tenant.
18
Display
PC Programming
Starting
Data
Speed Dial
Tenant
¦+AC
No.
Title
Buffer No.
No.
1 8 : S P E E D ( 0 X )
| 0 0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1 Tenants 00~07
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
Page 2 Tenants 08~15
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
Six pages
provide access
Page 3 Tenants 16~23
to the Tenant
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Numbers.
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Tenant
Numbers 00~47
Page 4 Tenants 24~31
correspond to
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
the line keys
listed in the
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
table to the left.
Page 5 Tenants 32~39
None are
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
restricted.
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
Page 6 Tenants 40~47
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + AH to access the Memory Block.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 24
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Procedures
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the tenant number.
Default Values
Speed Dial buffers have the nine groups listed in the table below.
All System Speed Dial buffers can
be dialed from any tenant.
Speed Dial
Speed Dial Number
Buffer No.
80 Codes
1000 Codes
0X
00~09
000~099
1X
10~19
100~199
X = 0~9
~
~
~
6X
60~69
600~699
7X
70~79
700~799
8X
N/A
800~899

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data
C to move to the next page
A to move to the previous page
Each time a CO/PBX line key is pressed, the LED toggles between On and Off.
CO/PBX
Off
On
Line LED
The shaded area indicates
the default setting.
Data
Restricted
Not Restricted
G
4
Enter all pages for the selected buffer, and press
to write the data and display the next Speed Dial Buffer No.
G
5
After entering data for the last Speed Dial Buffer No., press
to write that data, and the next Memory Block is displayed.
E
6
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-33
Speed Dial Number/Name Display Selection
1-1-35
Speed Dial Buffer Allocation
2-01
Trunk to Tenant Assignment
4-09
Telephone to Tenant Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 25

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K

Notes

1.
One or more tenants can be enabled to use each group.
2.
Use this Memory Block to assign which tenants use each group.
3.
When speed dial is set to 1000, 900~999 cannot be restricted.
4.
The X in each Speed Dial Buffer No. is displayed even when it is not entered.
5.
Tenant numbers 00~07 are assigned to Flexible Line keys on the first page. Tenant numbers 08~15 are assigned
to the Flexible Line keys on the second page. The tenant number corresponding to Flexible Line key 1 of the
current page is displayed under Starting Tenant No. In all cases, each page has eight line keys.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 26
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-1-20
DID Digit Length Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to define the number of Direct Inward Dialing (DID) digits in
1
Memory Block 1-1-22 (DID Digit Conversion Table).
Data No.
Display
20
Data
Setting
No.
Title
Data
PC Programming

¦+ALN
2 0 : D I D
D G T
3
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + BK to access the Memory Block.
3
Enter the data using the dial pad.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
3 (Setting Data 2, 3, or 4)
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data
H

to clear all data
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-21
DID Digit Conversion Assignment
1-1-22
DID Digit Conversion Table
1-1-23
DID Forward Station Number for Busy Station or Undefined Digit
5-00
Digit Add/Del For Tie Line Networking Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 27

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-1-21
DID Digit Conversion Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to enable the DID Digit Conversion Table, Memory Block
1
1-1-22 (DID Digit Conversion Table), for each number.
Data No.
Display
21
Data
Setting
PC Programming
No.
Ti
tle
Data
¦+ALN
2 1 : D I D
C N V
N O
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8

The shaded
selection is the
NO
YS
default.

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + BA to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
Default Values
NO
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-20
DID Digit Length Selection
1-1-22
DID Digit Conversion Table
1-1-23
DID Forward Station Number for Busy Station or Undefined Digit
5-00
Digit Add/Del For Tie Line Networking Assignment

Notes

1.
When NO is assigned, only Memory Block 5-00 has an impact on incoming DID numbers.
2.
When YS is assigned, each incoming DID number can be modified.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 28
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-1-22
DID Digit Conversion Table
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Up to 200 incoming DID numbers can be assigned individually to ring at a preassigned
1
2-digit, 3-digit, or 4-digit station number, closed number (plus outgoing digits), or
tenant number (00~47) for day mode or night mode. This Memory Block applies to the
Data No.
DID number after it is modified by Memory Block 5-00 (Digit Add/Del for Tie Line
Networking Assignment).
22
PC Programming
Display
¦+ALN
Data
Digits
Setting
No.
Mode
Received
Data

2 2 :
D Y = T
DNIS Data
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
T
Default not
(Station or
TN
assigned
Closed
(Tenant)
Number)

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + BB to access the Memory Block.
3
Press Line Key to select Station or closed number or tenant.
Default Values
Enter the data using the dial pad.
Not Specified

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or name (Refer to Appendix B Character Codes,
Section 1 Character Assignment on page B-1.)
B

to switch between Day and Night
H

to clear all data
C

to assign the name (Refer to Dial Pad Entry chart)

Digits Received: 0000~9999

Setting Data:
Station No. is a 2-, 3-, or 4-digit number (10~89, 100~899, or 1000~8999).
Closed Number is a 2-, 3-, or 4-digit number to facilitate routing to the closed
number.
Tenant No. 00~47
DNIS Data: 8-character maximum
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 29

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
Programmi G
ng Procedures (Continued)
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-20
DID Effective Digit Selection
1-1-21
DID Digit Conversion Assignment
1-1-23
DID Forward Station Number for Busy Station or Undefined Digit
5-00
Digit Add/Del For Tie Line Networking Assignment

Notes

1.
When Memory Block 5-00 is used to add or delete digits on a trunk group, this Memory Block is used to route the
digits after the add or delete.
2.
When converting a DID number to a Tenant, the following must be assigned to ring the desired station:
Memory Block 4-01 [CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)]
Memory Block 4-02 [CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)]
Memory Block 4-09 (Telephone to Tenant Assignment).
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 30
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-1-23
DID Forward Station Number for
System Mode
Busy Station or Undefined Digit
1
Submode
1
General Description
Use this Memory Block when Memory Block 1-1-22 (DID Digit Conversion Table) is
Data No.
enabled to define where digits are routed when undefined or the station is busy.
23
Display
PC Programming
Data
Setting
Setting
No.
Title
Data 1
Data 2
¦+ALN

2 3 : T R F
E X = N O N
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
T
TN
NON
default.
(TEL)
(Tenant)

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + BC to access the Memory Block.
3
Enter Setting Data 1 using the Line key.
Default Values
Enter Setting Data 2 using the dial pad.
NON

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data

TEL is 2-, 3-, or 4-digit number (10~89, 100~899, or 1000~8999).

Tenant number can be 00~47.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-22
DID Digit Conversion Table
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 31

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K

Notes

When this Memory Block is set to a Tenant, the following must be assigned to ring the desired station:
Memory Block 4-01 [CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)]
Memory Block 4-02 [CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)]
Memory Block 4-09 (Telephone to Tenant Assignment).
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 32
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-1-24
PBX/CTX Access Code Assignment I
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify a PBX line PBX/CTX Access Code together with
1
pauses for outgoing calls.
Data No.
Display
24
Data
Setting
No.
Title
Data
PC Programming

¦+BA
2 4 : P B X
A C
9
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + BD to access the Memory Block.
3
Enter the data using the dial pad.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
9
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data
B

to insert a pause
H

to clear all data
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
3-91
Trunk Type Selection
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 33

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K

Notes

Example:
¤

Elite IPK
PBX
System
Elite IPK System
PBX Line
CO Line
Intercom Line
1.
Features such as Code Restriction do not operate properly unless a PBX/CTX Access Code is specified. This
limitation applies to PBX lines assigned in Memory Block 3-91 (Trunk Type Selection).
2.
A pause is not inserted in the number of an outgoing call on a CO line.
3.
Up to three numeric characters and three pauses can be specified.
4.
A pause cannot be inserted as the first digit or as consecutive digits.
5.
The entry for pause is .
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 34
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-1-25
PBX/CTX Access Code Assignment II
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify a second PBX line PBX/CTX Access Code together
1
with pauses for outgoing calls.
Data No.
Display
25
Data
Setting
No.
Title

Da
ta
PC Programming
2 5 : P B X
A C
8
¦+BA
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + BE to access the Memory Block.
3
Enter the option using the dial pad.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
8
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data
B

to insert a pause (cannot be first digit)
H

to clear all data
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
3-91
Trunk Type Selection
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 35

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K

Notes

Example:

¤
Elite IPK
PBX
System
Elite IPK System
Intercom Line
PBX Line
Tie Line
1.
Features such as Code Restriction do not operate properly unless a PBX/CTX Access Code is specified. This
limitation only applies to PBX lines assigned in Memory Block 3-91 (Trunk Type Selection).
2.
A pause is not inserted in the number of an outgoing call on a CO line.
3.
Up to three numeric characters and three pauses can be specified.
4.
A pause cannot be inserted as the first or as consecutive digits.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 36
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-1-27
Automatic Day/Night Mode Switching
System Mode
Time Assignment
1
Submode
1
General Description
Use this Memory Block to assign a start time for Pattern 1 and a different start time for
Data No.
Pattern 2 to automatically switch between Day Mode and Night Mode.
27
Display
PC Programming
Day Mode
Night Mode
Start Time
Start Time
¦+BM
Data Pattern
Setting
Setting
No. (1/2)
Data
Data
2 7 : 1
:
,
:
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + BG to access the Memory Block.
3
Enter the data using the dial pad.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
Not Specified
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data
H

to clear all data when the cursor is in the Data No. position
G
4
Press
to write the data. The switching time for pattern 2 is displayed.
5
Use the dial pad to change the time.
G
6
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
7
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-32
Automatic Day/Night Mode by Day of Week Selection
1-4-05
Automatic Tandem Trunk by Night Mode Selection
1-8-07
Class of Service (Attendant) Feature Selection I
1-8-48
Automatic Daylight Saving Time Selection.
4-07
Code Restriction Class Assignment (Day Mode)
4-08
Code Restriction Class Assignment (Night Mode)
4-09
Telephone to Tenant Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 37

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
Related Programming (Continued)
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
4-17
Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment
4-37
Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Day Mode)
4-38
Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Night Mode)

Notes

1.
The start time for Day Mode or Night Mode can be programmed to automatically switch modes at the specified
times.
2.
A start time for Day Mode only or Night Mode only cannot be programmed.
3.
Day Mode and Night Mode cannot be programmed for the same start time.
4.
The time is entered using 24-hour clock only.
5.
The first time input indicates when Day Mode starts. The second time input indicates when Night Mode starts.
6.
Refer to Memory Block 1-1-32 (Automatic Day/Night Mode by Day of Week Selection) for selecting either Pattern
1 or Pattern 2 Day/Night Mode start time for each day of the week. Assigning each day of the week to either
Pattern 1 or Pattern 2 allows Day/Night Mode start time for Monday through Friday to differ from Day/Night Mode
start time for Saturday and Sunday.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 38
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-1-28
Distinctive Ringing by Telephone or
System Mode
CO Selection
1
Submode
1
General Description
Use this Memory Block to assign a distinctive ringing tone for each telephone or each
Data No.
CO/PBX line.
28
Display
PC Programming
Data
Setting
¦+BTS
No.
Title
Data
2 8 : D S T
R I N G
T E L
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
TEL
CO
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + BH to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
3-07
CO/PBX Ringing Variation Selection
4-01
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)
4-02
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)
4-91
Telephone Ringing Variation Selection

Notes

1.
TEL = Telephone Mode
Ringing tone is specified in Memory Block 4-91 (Telephone Ringing Variation Selection).
2.
CO = CO/PBX Line Mode
Ringing tone is specified for each CO/PBX line in Memory Block 3-07 (CO/PBX Ringing Variation Selection).
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 39

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-1-29
Private Line Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to assign an outside line as a private line. The private line
1
cannot be seized by any other telephone, and an LED indication is not provided to
other terminals.
Data No.
Display
29
Combination
PC Programming
Data
No.
CO No.
Tel. Port No.
No.
Title (1/2)
(01~64)
(01~CO)
¦+BCS
2 9 : P
1
C =
T =
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + BI to access the Memory Block.
3
Enter the data using the dial pad.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
Not Specified
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data
H

to clear all data when cursor is at CO No. or Tel. Port No.
G
4
Press
to write the data. Data for the second line is displayed. Move the cursor to change the data.
G
5
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
6
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
2-06
Line Key Selection for Tenant Mode
4-12
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode

Notes

1.
Two private lines can be assigned to one station or one private line can be assigned to two stations.
2.
A Single Line Telephone (SLT) user cannot dial the Trunk Group Access Code to access a private line. The
Single Line Telephone user can dial the specified Line Seizure Access Code assigned in Memory Blocks 1-1-46/
1-1-47 [Access Code (1-digit/2-digit) Assignment], Function 063 or 064 to access the line.
3.
When a station is allowed Barge-In originate, and a second station is allowed Barge-In receive, Barge-In is not
allowed on a private line unless both stations share the private line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 40
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-1-30
Route Advance Block Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to assign a priority level (1~4) to each Trunk group assigned in
1
a Route Advance Block. The system has 32 blocks that can be specified.
Data No.
Display
30
Block Priority
Data
No.
No. Setting
PC Programming
No.
Title
(1~32) (1~4)
Data
¦+BCS
3 0 : R T
A D V 0 1 1 = 0 0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + CK to access the Memory Block.
3
Write data using one of the following.
Default Values

G
Press
repeatedly to cycle until desired Block and Priority number are
All Blocks (00)
displayed. Use the dial pad to enter the Trunk Group Number, and press
G

.

Use the dial pad to select Block Number, Priority Number, and Trunk Group in
G
sequence, and press
after Block 32 to display the next Memory Block.

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data

Block Numbers:
Block
Priority
Setting Data
No.
No.
1
Trunk Groups 01~32
2
Trunk Groups 01~32
1
3
Trunk Groups 01~32
4
Trunk Groups 01~32
~
~
~
1
Trunk Groups 01~32
2
Trunk Groups 01~32
32
3
Trunk Groups 01~32
4
Trunk Groups 01~32
E
4
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 41

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
3-03
Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment

Notes

1.
When 00 (Not Set) is programmed, no trunks are accessed for this priority setting.
2.
When Route Advance Block Numbers are assigned and a line key is pressed or an Access Code is dialed, the
system starts searching for an idle line in a specified group (beginning with the Trunk group assigned priority 1).
3.
When all CO/PBX lines are in use, the line with the next highest priority is seized.
4.
Route Advance Block Number Access Codes are defined in Memory Block 1-1-46 [Access Code (1-Digit)
Assignment] or Memory Block 1-1-47 [Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment] function number 201~232.
5.
Press the Transfer key repeatedly to cycle through four priorities for each Block sequentially until all Blocks are
covered, and then advance to the next Memory Block. The Trunk Group must be added using the dial pad keys.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 42
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-1-32
Automatic Day/Night Mode by Day of
System Mode
Week Selection
1
Submode
1
General Description
Use this Memory Block to select either Pattern 1 or Pattern 2 Day/Night Mode start
Data No.
time for each day of the week. Memory Block 1-1-27 (Automatic Day/Night Mode
32
Switching Time Assignment) sets Day/Night Mode start time for Pattern 1 and Pattern
2 to switch the system between Day Mode and Night Mode.
PC Programming
Display
¦+BM

Data
No.
Title

3 2 : D / N
B Y
D A Y
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Default not
assigned.
Sun
Mon
Tue
Wed
Thu
Fri Sat
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + CB to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
Default Values
Each time a CO/PBX line is pressed, the LED indication changes from Pattern 1 to
Sunday ~ Saturday = Pattern 1
Pattern 2.
CO/PBX
Off
On
Line LED
The shaded area indicates
Day/Night
Day/Night
the default setting.
Automatic
Automatic
Data
Switching
Switching
Pattern 1
Pattern 2
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 43

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-27
Automatic Day/Night Mode Switching Time Assignment
1-8-07
Class of Service (Attendant) Feature Selection 1
1-8-48
Automatic Daylight Saving Time Selection
4-09
Telephone to Tenant Assignment
4-17
Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment

Notes

1.
By designating two time settings in Memory Block 1-1-27 (Automatic Day/Night Mode Switching Time
Assignment), one of the two settings can be assigned to each day of the week.
2.
To specify Day/Night Mode automatic switching time for Monday ~ Friday, and Day/Night Mode automatic
switching time 2 for Saturday and Sunday, press CO/PBX line keys 1 and 7.
Related Programming
Sun
Mon
Tue
Wed
Thu
Fri
Sat
Pattern 2
Pattern 1
Pattern 2
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 44
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-1-33
Speed Dial Number/Name Display
System Mode
Selection
1
Submode
1
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify whether the dialed number or name is displayed first
Data No.
on the LCD of the originating station when an outgoing call is made using Speed Dial.
33
Display
PC Programming
Data
Setting
No.
Title
Data
Title
¦+BE
3 3 : S P D
D I A L
D I S P
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
DIAL
NAME
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + CC to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
G
4
Press
to w rite the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-18
System Speed Dial Restriction by Tenant
1-1-35
Speed Dial Buffer Allocation

Notes

When the name of the dialed party is not programmed in Memory Block 3-00, only the dialed number is displayed
regardless of programming in this Memory Block.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 45

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-1-34
Tie Line First Ring Pattern Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to set a specific ringing pattern for incoming calls on Tie lines.
1
After a delay interval specified in Memory Block 1-1-07 (Tie Line Delay Ringing Time
Selection), a Tie call can ring at all Day/Night ring-assigned telephones using a
Data No.
different cadence.
34
Display
PC Programming
Data
Setting
¦+ALN
No.
Title
Data
3 4 : T L I
R N G
P A T 3
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
PAT1
PAT2
PAT3
PAT4
ICM
VOICE
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + CDto access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-07
Tie Line Delay Ringing Time Selection
1-1-53
Tie Line Delay Ring Pattern Selection
4-01
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)
4-02
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)

Notes

1.
Specify one pattern in the Ringing Pattern Selection Table.
2.
When Voice is selected, switching from voice to tone is not allowed, Memory Block 1-1-07 (Tie Line Delay
Ringing Time Selection) is not used, and Handsfree Answerback is not allowed at the receiving station.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 46
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Ringing Pattern Selection
s= seconds
Pattern
0s
1s
2s
3s
4s
5s
6s
1
2
3
4
5
Same as Internal Ring
6
Voice Announce
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 47

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-1-35
Speed Dial Buffer Allocation
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify either 100-memory or 1000-memory allocation.
1
Display
Data No.
Data
Setting
35
No.
Title
Data

PC Programming
3 5 : S P D
A L L O
1 0 0
¦+BE
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
100 1000
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + CEto access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-18
System Speed Dial Restriction by Tenant
1-1-33
Speed Dial Number/Name Display Selection

Notes

1.
The 100-memory option allows 80 System Speed Dial memories and 20 Station Speed Dial memories.
2.
The 1000-memory option does not allow Station Speed Dial memories.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 48
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-1-37
Trunk Queuing Timeout Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify the time that a station with Trunk Queue set rings,
1
before the queue is automatically canceled.
Data No.
This Memory Block can be adjusted in 1-second intervals (R3000 or higher).
37
Display (R2500 or lower)
PC Programming
Data
Setting
No.
Title
Data
¦+BM

3 7 : T R U N K
Q U E
1 0 s
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
10s
20s
30s
60s
default.

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + CGto access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Refer to the next page for R3000 Programming Procedures.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 49

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
Display (R3000 or higher)

Timer
Data
Class
Setting

No.
Title
1~4
Data
3 7 : T R K
Q U E
1 = 1 0 s
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 +CGto access the Memory Block.
3
Use the dial pad to enter the Data Setting for Class 1.
Default Values
Setting Data
Class 1~4 = 10s
00s = No Limit
00s~99s (e.g., 02s = 2s)
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Timer Class of Service.
E
5
Program the next Timer Class of Service or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
4-71
Station to Timer Class of Service (R3000 or higher)

Notes

1.
When all trunks in a particular Trunk group are busy, the station user can dial an Access Code to queue on the
busy Trunk group. When a Trunk in that group becomes idle, the queued station is signaled.
2.
Telephone ports 1 and 2 are in Station to Timer Class of Service, Class 1 by default. All other ports are in Station
to Timer Class of Service, Class 2 by default (R3000 or higher).
3.
When a system is upgraded from R2500 or lower to R3000 or higher, the Trunk Queuing Timeout Selection is
reset to the default value during the upgrade process.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 50
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-1-46
Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to assign a 1-digit number as an Access Code or station
1
number.
Data No.
Display
Dial
46
No.
Data
Function
0~9
PC Programming
No.
Title
No.
* #
¦+BA
4 6 : 1 D G
( 0 ) = 1 7 6
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + DF to access the Memory Block.
3
Enter the options using the dial pad.

Default Values

Use the following when entering data:
Function
J
Dial No.
Function Name
to move the cursor left
No.
Lto move the cursor right
K
176
Specified Intercom Call
K~Ito enter numeric data
A~C
001
Station Number
D~G
000
Not Used
H
102
Trunk Group 2
I
101
Trunk Group 1
J
096
Last Number Redial
L
026
Callback Message Answer
4
Enter the Function Number for the Dial Number. Refer to the table on the following pages for a complete list.
G
5
Press
to write the data and display the next Dial No.
G
6
Program each Dial No., and press
after the last Dial No. to display the next Memory Block.
E
7
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-47
Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment
1-1-48
Access Code (3-Digit) Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 51

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
This table applies to Data Numbers 46, 47, and 48.
Default
Function
Default
Function
Function Name
Function Name
Dial No.
No.
Dial No.
No.
4, 5, 6, 7
000
Not Used
034
Call Forward All Call Cancel from
Destination
1, 2, 3
001
Station Number
035
Station Outgoing Lockout Set
002
Not Used
036
Station Outgoing Lockout Cancel
~
~
037
Change Password
019
Not Used
038
Reset Password from Attendant
020
Call Forward No Answer Set
039
Fax Status Indication (Tie/DID lines)
021
Call Forward No Answer Cancel
040
Log - ON/OFF
022
Call Forward Busy Set
041
Account Code Entry
023
Call Forward Busy Cancel
67
042
Call Pickup Direct
43
024
Call Forward Busy/No Answer Set
043
Not Used
44
025
Call Forward Busy/No Answer
044
Timed Alarm Set at SLTs
Cancel
045
Timed Alarm Cancel at SLTs
#
026
Callback Message Answer
046
Set and Cancel of Timed Alarm for
6#
027
SLT Hookflash/DVM Hookflash
Single Line Telephone from
028
Not Used
Attendant
4,
047
Call Park System Transfer
029
Not Used
41
030
Call Forward All Call Set
4#
048
Call Park System Answer
60
049
Volume/LCD Control
40
031
DND Set
42
032
Call Forward All Call/DND Cancel
050
Specified Tenant on CO/PBX/
Centrex Line Seizure (1-digit)
033
Call Forward All Call Set from
Destination
051
Specified Tenant on CO/PBX/
Centrex Line Seizure (2-digit)
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 53

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
This table applies to Data Numbers 46, 47, and 48.
Default
Function
Default
Function
Function Name
Function Name
Dial No.
No.
Dial No.
No.
4, 5, 6, 7
000
Not Used
034
Call Forward All Call Cancel from
Destination
1, 2, 3
001
Station Number
035
Station Outgoing Lockout Set
002
Not Used
036
Station Outgoing Lockout Cancel
~
~
037
Change Password
019
Not Used
038
Reset Password from Attendant
020
Call Forward No Answer Set
039
Fax Status Indication (Tie/DID lines)
021
Call Forward No Answer Cancel
040
Log - ON/OFF
022
Call Forward Busy Set
041
Account Code Entry
023
Call Forward Busy Cancel
67
042
Call Pickup Direct
43
024
Call Forward Busy/No Answer Set
043
Not Used
44
025
Call Forward Busy/No Answer
044
Timed Alarm Set at SLTs
Cancel
045
Timed Alarm Cancel at SLTs
#
026
Callback Message Answer
046
Set and Cancel of Timed Alarm for
6#
027
SLT Hookflash/DVM Hookflash
Single Line Telephone from
028
Not Used
Attendant
4,
047
Call Park System Transfer
029
Not Used
41
030
Call Forward All Call Set
4#
048
Call Park System Answer
60
049
Volume/LCD Control
40
031
DND Set
42
032
Call Forward All Call/DND Cancel
050
Specified Tenant on CO/PBX/
Centrex Line Seizure (1-digit)
033
Call Forward All Call Set from
Destination
051
Specified Tenant on CO/PBX/
Centrex Line Seizure (2-digit)
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 54
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Default
Function
Default
Function
Function Name
Function Name
Dial No.
No.
Dial No.
No.
052
Call Pickup CO/PBX by Tenant
55
075
All External Zone Paging
(1-digit)
56
076
External Zone A Paging
053
Call Pickup CO/PBX/Centrex by
Tenant (2-digit)
57
077
External Zone B Paging
054
Specified Tenant Internal Paging
58
078
External Zone C Paging
(1-digit)
5#
079
External Meet-Me
055
Specified Tenant Internal Paging
080
Outgoing (CO only) Access in Same
(2-digit)
Tenant
056
Internal Emergency All Call Paging
59
081
All Internal/External Zone Paging
68
057
Intra-Tenant Call Pickup
082
System I. D. Number for Tie Line
69
058
Night Chime Call Pickup
Networking
059
Not Used
083 Not
Used
060
Call Pickup CO/PBX for other
~
~
Tenants
085
Not Used
061
Internal/CO/PBX Transfer Call
Pickup in Same Tenant
086
Tie Line Seizure in Same Tenant
062
SLT Park to Non-Exclusive Hold
087
PBX Line Seizure in Same Tenant
063
Specified CO/PBX/Centrex Line
78
088
Trunk Queuing Set
Seizure (1-digit)
79
089
Trunk Queuing Cancel
064
Specified CO/PBX/Centrex Line
Seizure (2-digit)
76
090
Station Speed Dial Programming
(Single Line Telephone)
065
Not Used
091
Doorphone 1 Call
6,
066
Call Pickup CO/PBX in Same Tenant
092
Doorphone 2 Call
067
Call Pickup (Tie only) in Same
Tenant
093
Doorphone 3 Call
068
Call Pickup (PBX only) in Same
094
Doorphone 4 Call
Tenant
77
095
Station/System Speed Dial Call
069
Call Pickup (CO only) in Same
(Single Line Telephone)
Tenant
,
096
Last Number Redial
51
070
All Internal Zone Paging
097
Not Used
52
071
Internal Zone A Paging
098
DSS 1 CALL
53
072
Internal Zone B Paging
099
DSS 2 CALL
54
073
Internal Zone C Paging
100
Not Used
5,
074
Internal/External Meet-Me
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 55

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K

Default
Function
Default
Function
Function Name
Function Name
Dial No.
No.
Dial No.
No.
9
101
Trunk Group 01
155
Call Forward Busy/ No Answer
Split Cancel
8
102
Trunk Group 02
156
Call Forward All Split Set
70
103
Trunk Group 03
157
Call Forward All Split Cancel
71
104
Trunk Group 04
158
Call Forward Busy/No Answer Split
72
105
Trunk Group 05
Set for Call Arrival Key (CAR)
73
106
Trunk Group 06
159
Call Forward Busy/No Answer Split
74
107
Trunk Group 07
Cancel for Call Arrival Key (CAR)
75
108
Trunk Group 08
160~175 Not Used
109~132 Trunk Group 09~32
0
176
Specified Station Access Code 00
133~139 Not Used
177
Specified Station Access Code 01
45
140
Call Forward Busy/No Answer Set
178
Specified Station Access Code 02
for Call Arrival Key (CAR)
179
Specified Station Access Code 03
46
141
Call Forward Busy/No Answer
180
Specified Station Access Code 04
Cancel for Call Arrival Key (CAR)
181
Specified Station Access Code 05
47
142
Call Forward All Call Set for Call
Arrival Key (CAR)
182
Specified Station Access Code 06
48
143
Call Forward All Call Cancel for
183
Specified Station Access Code 07
Call Arrival Key (CAR)
184
Specified Station Access Code 08
144
Call Forward All Split Set for Call
Arrival Key (CAR)
185
Specified Station Access Code 09
145
Call Forward All Split Cancel for
186
Specified Station Access Code 10
Call Arrival Key (CAR)
187
Specified Station Access Code 11
146
Forced Account Code/Authorization
188
Specified Station Access Code 12
Code
189
Specified Station Access Code 13
147
Forced Account Code/Authorization
Code Access
190
Specified Station Access Code 14
148
Station Relocation
191
Specified Station Access Code 15
150
Call Forward No Answer Split Set
192
Specified Station Access Code 16
151
Call Forward No Answer Split
193
Specified Station Access Code 17
Cancel
194
Specified Station Access Code 18
152
Call Forward Busy Split Set
195
Specified Station Access Code 19
153
Call Forward Busy Split Cancel
196
Specified Station Access Code 20
154
Call Forward Busy/ No Answer
Split Set
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 56
Memory Blocks

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-1-47
Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to assign a 2-digit number as an Access Code.
1
Display
Data No.
Dial
No.
47
Data
0~9
Function
No.
Title
* #
No.
PC Programming
4 7 : 2 D G
( 0 0 ) = 0 0 0
¦+BA
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + DG to access the Memory Block.
3
Enter the options using the dial pad.

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data
4
Enter the Function Number for the Dial Number. Refer to the table in Memory Block 1-1-46 [Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment].
G
5
Press
to display next dial number in succession.
G
6
After programming last Dial No., press
to display the next Memory Block.
E
7
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-46
Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment
1-1-48
Access Code (3-Digit) Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 58
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________

Notes

1.
Select options from the list of function numbers in Memory Block 1-1-46 [Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment], and
assign a number (from 00~99), ,, or # to each selected function.
H When a function is assigned a 1-digit Access Code, 2-digit Access Codes with the same first digit become
invalid (i.e., if a function is assigned to Access Code 5, Access Codes 50~59, 5,, and 5# cannot be used).
B
2.
To enter # or , as part of an Access Code, press
then L or J.
3.
Use this Memory Block when a 4-Digit Station Numbering Plan is programmed.
4.
When function 001 (Station Number) is assigned in this memory block, it cannot be assigned in Memory Block
1-1-46 [Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment] or Memory Block 1-1-48 [Access Code (3-Digit) Assignment].
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 59

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-1-48
Access Code (3-Digit) Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to assign a 3-digit number as an Access Code.
1
With System Software R2500, Function 001 (Station Number) can be assigned
Data No.
allowing 4-digit numbers by 10s group, 5-digit numbers by 100s group, 6-digit
numbers by 1000s group, or 7-digit numbers by 10000s group.
48
PC Programming
Display
Third Dial
¦+BA
Digit
Table
No.
Data
No.
0~9
Function
Title
No.
(01~04)
* #
No.
4 8 : 3 D G / 0 1 ( 0 ) = 0 0 0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + DH to access the Memory Block.
3
Enter the Function No. for Dial No. 0 for Third Digit Table No. 01 using the dial pad.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
All Dial 000 (Not Used)
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data
B

andJto enter ,
B

andLto enter #
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Dial No.
G
5
After last Dial No. entry, press
to write the data and display Third Digit Table No. 02, Dial No. 0.
G
6
Enter Function No. for Dial No. 0, and press
to write the data and display the next Dial No.
G
7
After last Dial No. entry for Table 02, press
to write the data and display Third Digit Table No. 03, Dial No. 0.
G
8
Enter Function No. for Dial No. 0, and press
to write the data and display the next Dial No.
G
9
After last Dial No. entry for Table 03, press
to write the data and display Third Digit Table No. 04.
G
10 Enter Function No. for Dial No. 0, and press
to write the data and display the next Dial No.
G
11 After last Dial No. entry for Table 04, press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
12 Program next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 60
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-46
Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment
1-1-47
Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment
1-2-03
2~7-Digit Station Number Selection
1-2-34
Expanded Station Number Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 61

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K

Notes

1.
Select options from the list of function numbers in Memory Block 1-1-46 [Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment],
and assign a 3-digit Access Code.
H When a function is assigned a 1-digit Access Code or 2-digit Access Code, 3-digit Access Codes (with the
same first digit) become invalid (i.e., if a function is assigned to Access Code 5, Access Codes 50~59, 5,,
and 5# cannot be used).
2.
A station number is not assigned in this Memory Block.
3.
All items except function number 001 (Station Number) in 1-digit assignment are valid in this block (R2000 or
lower only).
4.
Four groups of Access Code Tables can be used. 0~9, ,, and # are the third digit Access Codes that are
assigned in the third digit tables.
5.
Before using this function, assign function numbers 301~304 (Table No. for third digit) in Memory Block 1-1-47
[Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment].
6.
To program Access Code 811 for Trunk Group 02:
H Use Memory Block 1-1-47 [Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment] to assign function 301 to 81.
H Set Third Digit Table No. 01 dial number 1 to function 102.
7.
By assigning Memory Blocks 1-2-03, 1-2-34, 1-1-47, and 1-1-48 as shown below, Stations can be assigned by
the 10s group for 4-digit station numbers, 100s group for 5-digit station numbers, 1000s group for 6-digit station
numbers, or 10000s group for 7-digit station numbers (System Software R2500).
4-Digit Station Numbers
MB 1-2-03 (2~7-Digit Station Number Selection)
4DGT
MB 1-2-34 (Expanded Station Number Assignment)
Blank
MB 1-1-47 [Access Code (2-Digit ) Assignment]
(AC20)
301 (Digit Table 01)
MB 1-1-48 [Access Code (3-Digit ) Assignment]
(Table 01, Dial 0)
001 (Station Number)
Station Numbers are 2000~2009 (200X)
5-Digit Station Numbers
MB 1-2-03 (2~7-Digit Station Number Selection)
5DGT
MB 1-2-34 (Expanded Station Number Assignment)
2
MB 1-1-47 [Access Code (2-Digit ) Assignment]
(AC20)
301 (Digit Table 01)
MB 1-1-48 [Access Code (3-Digit ) Assignment]
(Table 01, Dial 0)
001 (Station Number)
Station Numbers are 20000~20009 (200XX)
6-Digit Station Numbers
MB 1-2-03 (2~7-Digit Station Number Selection)
6DGT
MB 1-2-34 (Expanded Station Number Assignment)
20
MB 1-1-47 [Access Code (2-Digit ) Assignment]
(AC20
301 (Digit Table 01)
MB 1-1-48 [Access Code (3-Digit ) Assignment]
(Table 01, Dial 0)
001 (Station Number)
Station Numbers are 200000~200999 (200XXX).
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 62
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________

Notes (Continued)

7-Digit Station Numbers
MB 1-2-03 (2~7-Digit Station Number Selection)
7DGT
MB 1-2-34 (Expanded Station Number Assignment)
200
MB 1-1-47 [Access Code (2-Digit ) Assignment]
(AC20
301 (Digit Table 01)
MB 1-1-48 [Access Code (3-Digit ) Assignment]
(Table 01, Dial 0)
001 (Station Number)
Station Numbers are 2000000~2009999 (200XXXX).
8.
When function 001 (Station Number) is assigned in this memory block, it cannot be assigned in Memory Block
1-1-46 [Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment] or Memory Block 1-1-47 [Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment].
Numbering Plan (2-Digit)
Dial No.
Function Number
81
301 (3rd Dgt Table 01)
82
302 (3rd Dgt Table 02)
83
303 (3rd Dgt Table 03)
84
304 (3rd Dgt Table 04)
Numbering Plan (3-Digit)
3rd Digit Table No. 01
Dial No.
Function Number
0
101 (Trunk Group 01)
1
102 (Trunk Group 02)
2
103 (Trunk Group 03)
3
104 (Trunk Group 04)
4
105 (Trunk Group 05)
~
~
9
110 (Trunk Group 10)
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 63

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-1-49
Networking Trunk Group/Route
System Mode
Advance Assignment
1
Submode
1
General Description
Use this Memory Block to assign the function number of the Trunk Group to be used to
Data No.
network an Electra Elite 48/192 system to another system by Tie lines or CO/PBX/
49
CTX lines.
PC Programming
Display
Closed
Number
¦+BCS
Data
Block
Function
No.
01~16
No.
4 9 : 0 1 = R T
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + DI to access the Memory Block.
3
Use dial pad to enter the Function Number for Closed Number Block 01 of the Trunk
Default Values
Group or the Route Advance Block.
Not Specified

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data
H

to clear all data
G
4
Press
to write selected data and display the next Closed Number Block.
5
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each Closed Number Block. After data for the last Closed Number Block is written, the next Memory
Block is displayed.
E
6
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-30
Route Advance Block Assignment
1-1-50
CO/PBX Outgoing Digit Add Assignment
3-03
Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment

Notes

Function Number 101~132 (Trunk Group 1~32, respectively) or 201~232 (Route Advance Block 1~32,
respectively) is assigned to Closed Number blocks.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 64
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-1-50
CO/PBX Outgoing Digit Add
System Mode
Assignment
1
Submode
1
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify up to 10 additional digits when a trunk in the Trunk
Data No.
group or Route Advance block assigned in Memory Block 1-1-49 (Networking Trunk
50
Group/Route Advance Assignment) is seized, and a number is dialed.
PC Programming
Display
¦+BCS
Closed
Data
Number
Add
No.
Block
Digit
01~16
10 Max.
5 0 : 0 1 =
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + EK to access the Memory Block.
3
Use dial pad to enter digits to be added for Closed Number Block 01.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
Not Specified
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data
H

to clear all data
B

+ Jto enter ,
B

+ Lto enter #
G
4
Press
to write selected data and display the next Closed Number Block.
5
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each Closed Number Block. After data for the last Closed Number Block is written, the next Memory
Block is displayed.
E
6
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-46
Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment
1-1-49
Networking Trunk Group/Route Advance Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 65

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K

Notes

Example:
Station 100
Add 200
Dials 200
¤

System
System
1
2
¤
Station 200
Rings
To assign System 1 in System Programming:
1.
Memory Block 1-1-46 [Access Code (1-Digit) assignment]. Assignment 2 401 (Closed Number Block 01).
2.
Memory Block 1-1-49 (Networking Trunk Group/Route Advance Assignment). Assignment Block 01 102
(Trunk group 02).
3.
Memory Block 1-1-50 (CO/PBX Outgoing Digit Add Assignment). Assignment Block 01 Assign 2.
4.
Digits are added when the Access Code is dialed from the internal dial tone.
5.
This Memory Block also applies to ISDN trunks.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 66
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-1-51
CO Line Ringing Pattern Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to assign the initial ringing pattern or no ring for incoming calls
1
on a CO line.
Data No.
Display
51
Data
Setting Page
No.
Title
Data No.
PC Programming
5 1 : C O
P T N
A | 1
¦+BCS
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H
The shaded

selection is the
default.
LK 9
LK 10
LK 11
LK 12
LK 13
LK 14
LK 15
LK 16
NO

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + EAto access the Memory Block.
3
Press corresponding CO/PBX line key to change data.

Use the following to enter data:
C

to access the next page
A to access the previous page
G
4
Press
to write data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-59
Synchronous Ringing Selection
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 67

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
The Ring Patterns are shown in the table below:
s= seconds
Pattern
0s
1s
2s
3s
4s
5s
6s
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
NO
No Ring
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 68
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-1-52
PBX Line Ringing Pattern Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to assign the initial ringing pattern or no ring for incoming calls
1
on a PBX line.
Data No.
Display
52
Data
SettingPage
PC Programming
No.
Title
Data No.
¦+BCS
5 2 : P B X
P T N
B | 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Page 1
LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H
The shaded
Page 2
selection is the
default.
LK 9
LK 10
LK 11
LK 12
LK 13
LK 14
LK 15
LK 16
NO

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + EBto access the Memory Block.
3
Press corresponding CO/PBX line key to change data.
Use the following to enter data:
C

to access the next page
A to access the previous page
G
4
Press
to write data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Notes

Do not program this Memory Block if Memory Block 1-1-59 (Synchronous Ringing Selection) is assigned YS.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 69

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
The Ring Patterns are listed in the table below:
s= seconds
Pattern
0s
1s
2s
3s
4s
5s
6s
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
NO
No Ring
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 70
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-1-53
Tie Line Delay Ring Pattern Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to select a ringing pattern or no ring for incoming calls on a Tie
1
line after the timeout set in Memory Block 1-1-07 (Tie Line Delay Ringing Time
Selection).
Data No.

53
Data
Setting Page
PC Programming
No.
Title
Data
No.
¦+ALN
5 3 : T L I
P T N
D | 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H
The shaded
Page 2
selection is the
default.
LK 9
LK 10
LK 11
LK 12
LK 13
LK 14
LK 15
LK 16
NO
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + EC to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.

Use the following to enter data:
C

to access the next page
A to access the previous page
G
4
Press
to write data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 71

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-07
Tie Line Delay Ringing Time Selection
1-1-34
Tie Line First Ring Pattern Selection
4-01
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)
4-02
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)
The Ring Patterns are shown in the table below:
s= seconds
Pattern
0s
1s
2s
3s
4s
5s
6s
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
NO
No Ring
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 72
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-1-54
Automated Attendant Transfer Ring
System Mode
Pattern
1
Submode
1
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify the ringing pattern or no ring sent to the Multiline
Data No.
Terminal when an incoming call is received at the Automated Attendant and
54
transferred.
PC Programming
Display
Setting
¦+AU
Data
Page
No.
Title
Data
No.
5 4 : A A
P T N
C | 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1
LK 1
LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H
The shaded
Page 2
selection is the
default.
LK 9
LK 10
LK 11
LK 12
LK 13
LK 14
LK 15
LK 16
NO
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + ED to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.

Use the following to enter data:
C

to access the next page
A to access the previous page
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
Refer to individual features in the Electra Elite IPK Features and Specifications Manual.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 73

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
The Ring Patterns are shown in the table below:
s= seconds
Pattern
0s
1s
2s
3s
4s
5s
6s
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
NO
No Ring
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 74
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-1-55
DID Line Ringing Pattern Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to assign the ringing pattern or no ring to be used for DID calls.
1
Display
Data No.
Data
Setting Page
55
No.
Title Data
No.
PC Programming
5 5 : D I D
P T N
A | 1
¦+ALN
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H
The shaded
Page 2
selection is the
default.
LK 9
LK 10
LK 11
LK 12
LK 13
LK 14
LK 15
LK 16
NO
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + EE to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.

Use the following to change page:
C

to move to next page
A to move to previous page
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-20
DID Digit Length Selection
1-1-21
DID Digit Conversion Assignment
1-1-22
DID Digit Conversion Table
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 75

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-1-57
CO/PBX Prepause Time Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to assign a pause time before dialed digits can be sent over a
1
CO/PBX line after the trunk is seized by a system user.
Data No.

57
Data
Setting Page
No.
Title Data
No.
PC Programming
5 7 : P R E P A U S E
1 s | 1
¦+BCM
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1
LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
NON
1s 2s
3s
4s 5s
6s
7s
The shaded
Page 2
selection is the
default.

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
8s
9s
10s
11s
12s
13s
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + EG to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.

Use the following to change page:
C

to move to next page
A to move to previous page
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 76
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-1-59
Synchronous Ringing Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not CO/PBX calls follow Synchronous
1
Ringing.
Data No.
Display
59
Data
Setting
No.
Ti
tl
e
Data
PC Programming
5 9 : S Y N C H R O N U S
Y S
¦+BCS
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
YS
NO
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + EI to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-51
CO Line Ringing Pattern Selection
1-1-52
PBX Line Ringing Pattern Selection

Notes

Synchronous Ringing does not apply to incoming DID calls, off-hook ringing calls, or CO/PBX ring transfer calls.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 77

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-1-60
8-Digit Matching Table Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to assign the outgoing dial digit for Code Restriction (except
1
OCC Dial Digit - Normal Dial). Program this assignment in one of two ways:
Data No.
a) When the user dials digit(s) and there is a match, the system allows free dialing or
denies dialing by disconnecting. Refer to Memory Block 1-1-61 (8-Digit Matching
60
Table to Class Assignment) for programming.
PC Programming
b) When a user dials digit(s) and there is no match, the system allows free dialing or
¦+AC
denies dialing by disconnecting. Refer to Memory Block 1-1-65 (Code Restriction
Class Allow/Deny Selection) for programming.
Display

Data
No.

Ti
tle
6 0 : 8 D I G I T
T A B L E
0 0 / 0 0 = 9 1 1
8-Digit
Dial
Dial Di g
it
Matching
Code
(max. 8)
Table

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + FK to access the Memory Block.
3
Use the dial pad to enter the data for Dial Code 00 for 8-Digit Matching Table 00.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
Matching
Dial
Setting
J
Table
Code
Data
to move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
00
00
911
K~Ito enter numeric data
H
11
00
0

to clear data
12
00
976

The information that can be entered includes:
13
00/ 01/02 1800/1888/1877
Matching Table: 00~15 (8-digit)
14
00
1X
Dial Code:
00~15
15
00
X
Dial Digit:
0~9, ,, #, NANP = X, P, N (Maximum eight digits)
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 78
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________

Programming Procedures
4
Operation data includes:

Operation
Dial Number
Operation
Data
B
X
K~I,J,L
+ G
B
P
KandA

+ H
B
N
B~I

+ I
B
,
J

+ J
B
#
L

+ L
G
5
Press
to write the data and advance to the next Dial Code. After all Dial Codes for 8-Digit Matching Table 00 are entered,
G
press
again to display 8 Digit Matching Table 01.
6
Repeat Steps 3 and 5 to cycle through all Dial Codes for all 8-Digit Matching Tables. After the last Dial Code for the last 8-Digit
Matching Table is entered, the next Memory Block is displayed.
E
7
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
Refer to Chapter 3 Advanced Applications, Section 1 Code Restriction on page 3-1.

Notes

1.
There are 16, 8-Digit Matching Tables. Each 8-digit table contains 16 Dial Codes. Each dial code can have eight
characters including digits and/or ,, #, X, P, or N characters.
2.
NANP = North American Numbering Plan.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 79

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-1-61
8-Digit Matching Table to Class
System Mode
Assignment
1
Submode
1
General Description
Use this Memory Block to program each 8-digit Matching Table to allow or deny
Data No.
assignment per class. Classes 00 and 15 are fixed. Only classes 01~14 can be
61
programmed.
PC Programming
Display
¦+AC
Class
Data
No.
Table
Setting
No
Title 01~14
00~15
Data
6 1 : C L S 0 1 ( 0 0 ) =
Y S
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
YS
NO
NON
default.
(Allow)
(Deny)
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + FA to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option for Class 01 Table 00.

Classes:
Class 00 and 15 cannot be programmed
Class 00 has no restrictions (Allow)
Class 15 has restricted outgoing (Deny)
Refer to the table on the next page.
G
4
Press
to write the data and advance to the next Table and then to the next Class. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each Class
and Table.
5
After data for the last Table for the last Class is entered, the next Memory Block is displayed.
E
6
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming.
Refer to Chapter 3 Advanced Applications, Section 1 Code Restriction on page 3-1.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 80
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________

Table 00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
Class
01
YS
NO
NO
NO
02
YS
NO
YS
NO
NO
03
YS
NO
NO
YS
NO
NO
04
YS
YS
NO
NO
05
YS
06
YS
07
YS
08
YS
09
YS
10
YS
11
YS
12
YS
13
YS
14
YS
YS = Allow
NO = Deny
NON = Blank
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 81

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-1-62
System Speed Dial Override by Class
System Mode
Selection
1
Submode
1
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify per Class whether or not Class Selection can
Data No.
override System Speed Dial.
62
Display
PC Programming
Class
Data
No.
Setting
No
Title
01~14
Data
¦+AC
6 2 : S P D O V R ( 0 1 ) = Y S
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
NO
YS
default.
(Override)
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + FB to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option for Class 01.
G
4
Press
to write the data and advance to the next class. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each class.
5
After data for the last class is entered, the next Memory Block is displayed.
E
6
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-18
System Speed Dial Restriction by Tenant

Notes

At system default, all stations are set to Class 00 to allow override for System Speed Dial.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 82
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-1-63
Hold Recall Time Selection
System Mode
(Exclusive)
1
Submode
1
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify the time for Exclusive Hold Recall. When No Limit is
Data No.
selected, Exclusive Hold Recall is not provided.
63
This Memory Block can be adjusted in 1-second intervals (R3000 or higher).
PC Programming
Display
¦+BM
Data
Setting
No.
Title
Data
6 3 : H O L D
R E C L
1 . 0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the

default. Times
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
3.0
5.0
8.0
(No Limit)
are in minutes.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + FC to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Refer to next page for R3000 Programming Procedures.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 83

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
Display (R3000 or higher)

Timer
Data
Class
Setting

No.
Title
1~4
Data
6 3 : H L D R C L
1 = 0 6 0 s
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 +FCto access the Memory Block.
3
Use the dial pad to enter the Data Setting for Class 1.
Default Values
Setting Data
Class 1~4 = 060s
000s = No Limit
000s~999s (e.g., 020s = 20s)
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Timer Class of Service.
E
5
Program the next Timer Class of Service or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-03
Hold Recall Time Selection (Non-Exclusive Hold)
1-2-23
System Call Park Recall Time Selection
4-71
Station to Timer Class of Service (R3000 or higher)

Notes

1.
When an Exclusive Hold call recalls, the held call switches to a Non-Exclusive Hold call.
2.
Telephone ports 1 and 2 are in Station to Timer Class of Service, Class 1 by default. All other ports are in Station
to Timer Class of Service, Class 2 by default (R3000 or higher).
3.
When a system is upgraded from R2500 or lower to R3000 or higher, the Hold Recall Time Selection is reset to
the default value during the upgrade process.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 84
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-1-65
Code Restriction Class Allow/Deny
System Mode
Selection
1
Submode
1
General Description
Use this Memory Block to assign Code Restriction Classes 01~14 as Allow or Deny.
Data No.
This assignment is used when there is no match or there is an overlap (duplicate
65
numbers in tables with opposite assignments) of numbers in the 8-Digit Matching
Tables.
PC Programming
Display
¦+AC
Class
Data
No.
No
Title
01~14
Function
6 5 : C L A S S
( 0 1 ) = Y S
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
YS
NO
default.
(Allow)
(Deny)
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + FE to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change data option.
Default Values
Class 01~04 Allow (YS)
Class 05~14 Deny (NO)
G
4
Press
to write the data and advance to the next Class. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until last Class is assigned.
5
The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
6
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
Refer to Chapter 3 Advanced Applications, Section 1 Code Restriction on page 3-1.

Notes

1.
When a match is not found or duplicate match is made with opposite assignments, the system uses this memory
Block.
2.
When the interdigit dialing time duration exceeds 10 seconds while a restricted station user is dialing on an
outside line, the system automatically drops the call.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 85

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-1-66
8-Digit Matching Table to Normal
System Mode
Dial Assignment
1
Submode
1
General Description
Use this Memory Block to assign the 8-Digit Matching Table by class for normal dialing
Data No.
as used or unused. When unused is assigned, the system does not check during
66
normal dialing even when Memory Block 1-1-61 (8-Digit Matching Table to Class
Assignment) is programmed.
PC Programming
Display
¦+AC
Data
Page
No.
T
itl
e
No.
6 6 : N O R M A L
D I A L | 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Table 00
Table 01
Table 02
Table 03
Table 04
Table 05
Table 06
Table 07
The shaded
selection is the
default.
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Table 08
Table 09
Table 10
Table 11
Table 12
Table 13
Table 14
Table 15

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + FF to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change data option for each Table.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
C
Tables 00~14 Used (Non-OCC and OCC)

to access the next page
Table 15
Unused (OCC calls only)
A to access the previous page

Each time a CO/PBX line key is pressed, the LED toggles between On
and Off.
CO/PBX Line LED
Off
On
The shaded
selection is
the default.
Data
Restricted
Not restricted
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
Refer to Chapter 3 Advanced Applications, Section 1 Code Restriction on page 3-1.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 86
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-1-67
OCC Table Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to assign an Other Common Carrier (OCC) code (8-digit
1
maximum) in a table. A maximum of 16 codes can be assigned.
Data No.
Display
67
OCC
Data
Table
Setting
PC Programming
No
01~16
Data
¦+AC
6 7 : ( 0 1 ) =
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + FG to access the Memory Block.
3
Use the dial pad to enter the data.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
OCC Table 01 ~ 15
Blank
J
OCC Table 16
1010XXX
to move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data
H

to clear data

The information that can be entered includes:
OCC Table:
01~16 (8-digit)

Setting Data: 0~9, ,, #, NANP = X, P, N (Maximum eight digits)

Operation data includes:
Operation
Dial Number
Operation
Data
B
X
K~I,J,L

+ G
B
P
KandA

+ H
B
N
B~I

+ I
B
,
J

+ J
B
#
L

+ L
G
4
Press
to write the data and advance to the next OCC table.
5
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each OCC Table. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
6
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
Refer to Chapter 3 Advanced Applications, Section 1 Code Restriction on page 3-1.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 87

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-1-68
8-Digit Matching Table to OCC Table
System Mode
Assignment
1
Submode
1
General Description
Use this Memory Block to assign each 8-Digit Matching Table to each Other Common
Data No.
Carrier (OCC) Code Table.
68
Display
PC Programming
OCC
Data
Table
¦+AC
No.
Title
01~16
Page No.
6 8 : 8 D G
O C C ( 0 1 ) | 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
Table 00
Table 01
Table 02
Table 03
Table 04
Table 05
Table 06
Table 07
Default not
Page 2
assigned.

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
Table 08
Table 09
Table 10
Table11
Table 12
Table13
Table14
Table15

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + FH to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change data option.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
C
OCC Tables 01~15:
All Matching Tables Not Used

to access the next page
A
OCC Table 16:
to access the previous page
Matching Tables 00~14 Not Used

Each time a CO/PBX line key is pressed, the LED toggles between On
Matching Table 15 Used
and Off.
The shaded area
CO/PBX Line LED
Off
On
is the default
setting.
Data
Unused
Used
G
4
Press
to write the data and advance to the next OCC table. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until last OCC data is entered.
5
The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
6
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
Refer to Chapter 3 Advanced Applications, Section 1 Code Restriction on page 3-1.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 88
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-1-69
Tie Line Code Restriction Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to restrict outgoing Tie line dialed digits.
1
Display
Data No.
Data
Setting
69
No.
Title
Data
PC Programming
6 9 : T I E
R E S T
= Y S
¦+AC
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
NO
YS
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + FI to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change data option.
Default Values
Restriction
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
Refer to Chapter 3 Advanced Applications, Section 1 Code Restriction on page 3-1.
Notes
When Tie lines are assigned code restriction, the Access Code used to dial out of the distant system must be
entered in front of the dialed number in the 8-Digit Matching Tables.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 89

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-1-70
Code Restriction Class Assignment
System Mode
When Lockout is Set
1
Submode
1
General Description
Use this Memory Block to assign the Code Restriction Class when a station user sets
Data No.
the Station Outgoing Lockout or when the Attendant sets Attendant Station Outgoing
70
Lockout.
PC Programming
Display
¦+AC
Data
Setting
No.
Title
Data
7 0 : R E S T
C L A S S = 1 5
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + GK to access the Memory Block.
3
Used dial pad to enter class restriction.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
Class 15
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data
G
4
Press
to write selected data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
Refer to Chapter 3 Advanced Applications, Section 1 Code Restriction on page 3-1.
Notes
When a station is locked out, the Code Restriction Class Assignment of this Memory Block is used instead of the
Code Restriction Class assigned in Memory Block 4-07 [Code Restriction Class Assignment (Day Mode)] or 4-08
[Code Restriction Class Assignment (Night Mode)].
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 90
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-1-71
First Delay Announcement Start Time
System Mode
Selection
1
Submode
1
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify the time between receiving a CO call and sending a
Data No.
First Delay Announcement to the calling party.
71
Display
PC Programming
Data
Setting
No.
Ti
tl
e
Data
¦+AR
7 1 : M S G
S T A R T = 2 0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
default. Times
00
10
20 30 40 50
60
are in seconds.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + GA to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-72
First Delay Announcement Repeat Selection
1-8-13
VRS Message Function Assignment
3-41
Delay Announcement Assignment
Notes
This Memory Block does not display unless the MIFA-U ( ) ETU is installed.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 91

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-1-72
First Delay Announcement Repeat
System Mode
Selection
1
Submode
1
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify the number of times a First Delay Announcement is
Data No.
repeated.
72
Display
PC Programming
Data
Setting
No.
Titl
e Data
¦+AR
7 2 : M S G 1
S E N D = 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
1
2 3 4 5
6
defaul
7 8
t.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + GB to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-71
First Delay Announcement Start Time Selection
1-8-12
VRS Message Recording Time Selection
1-8-13
VRS Message Function Assignment
3-41
Delay Announcement Assignment
Notes
1.
This Memory Block does not display unless the MIFA-U( ) ETU is installed.
2.
When Memory Block 2-08 is used, this is the number of times the message is played back-to-back. After this is
done, the system looks at the timer in 1-1-73.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 92
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-1-73
First to Second Delay Announcement
System Mode
Interval Time Selection
1
Submode
1
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify the time between the end of the First Delay
Data No.
Announcement sending time and the start time of the Second Delay Announcement.
73
Display
PC Programming
Data
Setting
No.
Titl
e Data
¦+AR
7 3 : M S G
I N T V L = 2 0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the

default. Times
00
10
20
30 40
50
60
(No Limit)
are in seconds.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + GC to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-74
Second Delay Announcement Repeat Selection
1-1-75
Second Delay Announcement Repeat Interval Time Selection
1-8-13
VRS Message Function Assignment
3-41
Delay Announcement Assignment
Notes
This Memory Block does not display unless the MIFA-U( ) ETU is installed.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 93

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-1-74
Second Delay Announcement Repeat
System Mode
Selection
1
Submode
1
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify the number of times a Second Delay Announcement
Data No.
is repeated.
74
Display
PC Programming
Data
Setting

No.
Title
Data
¦+AR
7 4 : M S G 2
S E N D = 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
defaul
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
t.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + GD to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-73
First to Second Delay Announcement Interval Time Selection
1-1-75
Second Delay Announcement Repeat Interval Time Selection
1-8-12
VRS Message Recording Time Selection
1-8-13
VRS Message Function Assignment
3-41
Delay Announcement Assignment
Notes
1.
This Memory Block does not display unless the MIFA-U( ) ETU is installed.
2.
When Memory Block 2-08 is used, this is the number of times the message is played back-to-back. After this is
done, the system looks at 1-1-75 to repeat the procedure.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 94
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-1-75
Second Delay Announcement Repeat
System Mode
Interval Time Selection
1
Submode
1
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify the interval time to repeat Second Delay
Data No.
Announcement to the calling party.
75
Display
PC Programming
Data
Setting
No.
Ti
tle Data
¦+AR
7 5 : M S G 2
R P E T = 2 0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the

default. Times
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
(No Limit)
are in seconds.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + GE to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-73
First to Second Delay Announcement Interval Time Selection
1-1-74
Second Delay Announcement Repeat Selection
3-41
Delay Announcement Assignment
Notes
This Memory Block does not display unless the MIFA-U( ) ETU is installed.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 95

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-1-76
Barge-In Alert Tone Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not Barge-In Alert Tone is allowed.
1
Display
Data No.
Data
Setting

76
No.
Title
Data
PC Programming
7 6 : A L E R T
T O N E = Y S
¦+BTS
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
YS
NO
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + GF to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-8-08
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
4-17
Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment
4-90
SLT Data Line Security Assignment
Notes
1.
Monitoring telephone conversations may be illegal under certain circumstances and laws. Consult a legal advisor
before implementing the monitor of conversations. Some federal and state laws require a monitoring party to use
an alert tone to indicate monitoring and/or obtain consent from all parties to the conversation. Some laws provide
strict penalties for illegal monitoring of telephone conversations.
2.
When YS is assigned, both internal and external parties receive the alert tone.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 96
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-1-77
Delayed Ringing Time Assignment
System Mode
(CO)
1
Submode
1
General Description
Use this Memory Block to assign the delayed ringing time for incoming outside line
Data No.
calls.
77
Display
PC Programming
Data
Setting

No.
Title
Data
¦+BCM
7 7 : D R I N G ( 1 )
= 1 5 s
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + GG to access the Memory Block.
3
Use the dial pad to enter data.
Default Values

Setting data:
15 Seconds
KK~II
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-2-26
Delayed Ringing Time Assignment (ICM)
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 97

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-1-78
Caller ID Display Assignment for
System Mode
System Mode
1
Submode
1
General Description
Use this Memory Block to assign up to 15 Multiline Terminals to display ANI/Caller ID
Data No.
Indication for normal incoming CO/PBX calls or CO/PBX calls ringing a Call Arrival
78
(CAR) key.
PC Programming
This Memory Block is used for System Software R1600 and lower. For System
Software R1700 and higher it is no longer required.
¦+AI
Display
Tel Port No.
(00~99
Entry
A0~A9
Data
No.
B0~B9
No.
Title
01~15
CO)
7 8 : C A L L I D
0 1 =
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + GH to access the Memory Block.
3
Use the dial pad to enter Entry No. 01 and Tel Port No.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
Not specified
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data
G
G
4
Press
to write the data and advance to the next Entry No. After each tel port No. is selected, press
again. A total
of 15 entries can be made. After the last data is entered, the next Memory Block is displayed.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Notes

1.
To display ANI/Caller ID Indication for normal incoming and CAR incoming calls, Caller ID Indication and Ring
Assignment must be programmed.
2.
Fifteen Multiline Terminals can be assigned system-wide to display ANI/Caller ID.
3.
A sixteenth terminal can be assigned to display ANI/Caller ID using another Memory Block.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 98
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-1-79
BGM Port Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to assign the CO/PBX port as a Background Music port.
1
Display
Data No.
Data
CO No.
79
No.
Title
(01~64)
PC Programming
7 9 : B G M
C 0 = 0 0
¦+BCS
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + GI to access the Memory Block.
3
Use the dial pad to enter the CO No.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
Not specified
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-8-08
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
2-06
Line Key Selection For Tenant Mode
4-12
Line Key Selection For Telephone Mode
Notes

When separate Music on Hold and Station Background Music are required, use an analog CO port to support
Station Background Music.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 99

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-1-80
ISDN DTMF Duration/Interdigit
System Mode
Selection
1
Submode
1
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify tone duration/interdigit time of Dual-Tone
Data No.
Multifrequency (DTMF) signals for the ISDN trunk.
80
Display
PC Programming
Data
Setting

No.
Title
Data
¦+AN
8 0 : M F
=
1 0 0 / 7 0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
default. Times
70/60
100/70
400/100
600/100
900/200
are in
milliseconds.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + HK to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
3-92
Trunk (Installed, DP/DTMF) Selection
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 100
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-1-81
ISDN Dial Interval Time Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify the time between each digit dialed before digits are
1
sent over the ISDN PRI line Network. This also applies to K-CCIS outgoing calls.
Data No.
This Memory Block can be adjusted in 1-second intervals (R3000 or higher).
81
Display (2500 or lower)
PC Programming
Data
Setting

No.
Title
Data
¦+AN
8 1 : I S D N
D I A L
4 s
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
2s
4s
8s
16s
32s
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + HA to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 101

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
Display (3000 or higher)
Data
Setting

No.
Title
Data
8 1 : I S D N
D I A L
0 4 s
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 +HAto access the Memory Block.
3
Use the dial pad to enter the Data Setting for Class 1.
Default Values
Setting Data
04 Seconds
01s~99s (e.g., 08s = 8s)
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-15-07
K-CCIS Message Response Timeout Assignment
3-91
Trunk Type Selection
3-92
Trunk (Installed, DP/DTMF) Selection
Notes

1.
When Maximum Digits are assigned, and a user dials a phone number equal to the limit set, the dialed digits are
sent immediately over the Network without waiting for this timer to expire.
2.
R3000 or higher is required to adjust this Memory Block by 1-second intervals.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 102
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-1-82
CO Feature Code Service for Code
System Mode
Restriction
1
Submode
1
General Description
Use this Memory Block to define a code to send to the CO in front of the dialed
Data No.
number to allow completion of a CO call made to a Code restricted number set to
82
allow.
PC Programming

Code
Table
Setting
¦+AC
Data
01~10

Data
No.
8 2 : 0 1 =
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + HB to access the Memory Block.
3
Use the dial pad to enter the Feature Code for Restriction to Code Table 01.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
Not specified
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data
G
4
Press
to write the data.
5
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for all code Tables. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
6
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Notes

Example: Set Code Table 01 to ,67
When Tel 100 user dials Access Code 9, Feature Code ,67 Telephone Number 12147517000 to access a line
that is code restricted, the code restriction starts at 12147517000. When code restriction is set to allow, the 1214
matches and the call goes through. When Code restriction is deny, the 1214 matches and user receives a
reorder tone and ERROR is displayed on telephones that have a display.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 103

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-1-86
Call Monitoring Alert Tone
System Mode
Assignment
1
Submode
1
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not Call Monitoring Alert Tone is allowed.
Data No.
When allowed, the Conference LED indicates Call Monitoring. When denied, the
86
Conference LED does not indicate Call Monitoring.
PC Programming
System Software R2000 or higher is required.
¦+BTS

Data
Setting

No.
Title
Data
8 6 : A L E R T
T O N E = Y S
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
YS
NO
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + HF to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-8-08
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
Page 6, LK6 and LK7
Notes

1.
When YS is assigned, Call Monitoring Tone and the Conference LED indicate Call Monitoring.
2.
When NO is assigned, Call Monitoring Tone and the Conference LED do not indicate Call Monitoring.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 104
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-2-00
Internal Paging Timeout Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify the time allowed for paging.
2
This Memory Block can be adjusted in 1-second intervals (R3000 or higher).
Data No.
Display (R2500 or lower)
00

PC Programming
Setting
Data
Title
Data
No.
¦+BP
0 0 : P A G I N G
9 0 s
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
The shaded
selection is the

90s
120s
default.
(No Limit)

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK2 to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Refer to next page for R3000 Programming Procedures
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 105

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
Display (R3000 or higher)

Timer
Data
Class
Setting

No.
Title
1~4
Data
0 0 : P A G I N G
1 = 0 9 0 s
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK2 to access the Memory Block.
3
Use the dial pad to enter the Data Setting for Class 1.
Default Values
Setting Data
Class 1~4 = 090s
000s = No Limit
000s~255s (e.g., 020s = 20s)
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Timer Class of Service.
E
5
Program the next Timer Class of Service or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-7-06
External Paging Timeout Selection
4-93
Internal Zone Paging Selection
4-71
Station to Timer Class of Service (R3000 or higher)
Notes
1.
Types of paging include:
H All Internal Zone (51)
H Internal Zone Paging (52~54)
H External Zone Paging (all speakers) (55)
H External Zone Paging (individual speakers) (56~58)
H Internal/External Zone Paging (59)
2.
Telephone Ports 1 and 2 are in Station to Timer Class of Service, Class 1, by default. All other ports are in
Station to Timer Class of Service, Class 2, by default.
3.
When a system is upgraded from R2500 or lower to R3000 or higher, the Internal Paging Timeout Selection is
reset to the default during the upgrade process.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 106
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-2-01
Intercom Call Voice/Tone Signal
System Mode
Selection
1
Submode
2
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify whether signal tone or voice is used first for an
Data No.
intercom call.
01
Display
PC Programming

Setting
Data
Data
Title
No.
¦+BI
0 1 : V O I C E
C A L L
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
TONE
VOICE
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK2 +KAto access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-6-03
DSS Call Voice/Tone Signal Selection
Notes
1.
To switch from voice to tone signaling or from tone to voice, dial a station number, then dial 1.
2.
When tone signaling is programmed in this Memory Block, the called party cannot answer handsfree unless the
originator of the call dials 1.
3.
This Memory Block has no effect on incoming Voice Announcement Tie/DID line calls. Refer to Memory Block
1-1-34 (Tie Line First Ring Pattern Selection).
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 107

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-2-02
Automatic Callback Release Time
System Mode
Selection
1
Submode
2
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify the time allowed for an automatic callback before
Data No.
the request is automatically canceled.
02
This Memory Block can be adjusted in 1-minute intervals (R3000 or higher).
PC Programming
Display (R2500 or lower)
¦+BM

Setting
Data
Title
No.
Data
0 2 : C A L L
B A C K
3 0 m
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
30s
1m
2m
3m
5m
10m
20m
30m
default.

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK2 + KB to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Refer to next page for R3000 Programming Procedures.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 108
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Display (R3000 or higher)

Timer
Data
Class
Setting

No.
Title
1~4
Data
0 2 : C A L L B A C K 1 = 3 0 M
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK2 + KB to access the Memory Block.
3
Use the dial pad to enter the Data Setting for Class 1.
Default Values
Setting Data
Class 1~4 = 30m
00m = No Limit
00m~99m (e.g., 05m =5m)
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Timer Class of Service.
E
5
Program the next Timer Class of Service or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
4-71
Station to Timer Class of Service (R3000 or higher)
Notes
1.
Telephone Ports 1 and 2 are in Station to Timer Class of Service, Class 1, by default. All other ports are in
Station to Timer Class of Service, Class 2, by default.
2.
When a system is upgraded from R2500 or lower to R3000 or higher, the Automatic Callback Release Time
Selection is reset to the default during the upgrade process.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 109

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-2-03
2~7-Digit Station Number Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to determine the number of digits for station numbers. Either
2
2-digit (10~89), 3-digit (100~899), or 4-digit (1000~8999) assignment is available or a
5-, 6-, or 7-digit station numbering plan is available.
Data No.
System Software R2500 is required to assign 5-, 6-, or 7-Digit station numbering
03
plan.
PC Programming
Display
¦+BS

Setting
Data
Title
Data
No.
0 3 : S T A . N O .
3 D G T
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
2DGT
3DGT
4DGT
5DGT
6DGT
7DGT
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK2 + KCto access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-46
Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment
1-1-47
Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment
1-1-48
Access Code (3-Digit) Assignment
1-2-34
Expanded Station Number Assignment
1-8-26
Voice Mail Quick Transfer Master Hunt Number
4-10
Station Number Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 110
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Notes
1.
The Station Numbering Plan can be 2-~7- digits; however, only one plan can be used at a time.
2.
After a change is made in this Memory Block, all station numbers must be reassigned in Memory Block 4-10
(Station Number Assignment).
3.
By assigning Memory Blocks 1-2-03, 1-2-34, 1-1-47, and 1-1-48 as shown below, Stations can be assigned by
the 10s group for 4-digit station numbers, 100s group for 5-digit station numbers, 1000s group for 6-digit station
numbers, or 10000s group for 7-digit station numbers (System Software R2500).
4-Digit Station Numbers
MB 1-2-03 (2~7-Digit Station Number Selection)
4DGT
MB 1-2-34 (Expanded Station Number Assignment)
Blank
MB 1-1-47 [Access Code (2-Digit ) Assignment]
(AC20)
301 (Digit Table 01)
MB 1-1-48 [Access Code (3-Digit ) Assignment]
(Table 01, Dial 0)
001 (Station Number)
Station Numbers are 2000~2009 (200X)
5-Digit Station Numbers
MB 1-2-03 (2~7-Digit Station Number Selection)
5DGT
MB 1-2-34 (Expanded Station Number Assignment)
2
MB 1-1-47 [Access Code (2-Digit ) Assignment]
(AC20)
301 (Digit Table 01)
MB 1-1-48 [Access Code (3-Digit ) Assignment]
(Table 01, Dial 0)
001 (Station Number)
Station Numbers are 20000~20009 (200XX)
6-Digit Station Numbers
MB 1-2-03 (2~7-Digit Station Number Selection)
6DGT
MB 1-2-34 (Expanded Station Number Assignment)
20
MB 1-1-47 [Access Code (2-Digit ) Assignment]
(AC20)
301 (Digit Table 01)
MB 1-1-48 [Access Code (3-Digit ) Assignment]
(Table 01, Dial 0)
001 (Station Number)
Station Numbers are 200000~200999 (200XXX)
7-Digit Station Numbers
MB 1-2-03 (2~7-Digit Station Number Selection)
7DGT
MB 1-2-34 (Expanded Station Number Assignment)
200
MB 1-1-47 [Access Code (2-Digit ) Assignment]
(AC20)
301 (Digit Table 01)
MB 1-1-48 [Access Code (3-Digit ) Assignment]
(Table 01, Dial 0)
001 (Station Number)
Station Numbers are 2000000~2009999 (200XXXX)
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 111

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-2-04
Call Arrival Key Block Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify the number of Call Arrival keys that can be used in
2
the system.
Data No.
Display
04

Data
Setting
PC Programming
No.
Title
Data
¦+BK
0 4 : C A R
A S S I G N | 0 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1Ports 01~32

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
Port 01~04
Port 05~08
Port 09~12
Port 13~16
Port 17~20
Port 21~24
Port 25~28
Port 29~32
Page 2 Ports 33~64
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Port 33~36
Port 37~40
Port 41~44
Port 45~48
Port 49~52
Port 53~56
Port 57~60
Port 61~64
Default: No Call
Arrival Key
Page 3 Ports 65~96
Blocks are
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
assigned.
Port 65~68
Port 69~72
Port 73~76
Port 77~80
Port 81~84
Port 85~88
Port 89~92
Port 93~96
Page 4 Ports 97~CO
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Port 97~A0
Port A1~A4
Port A5~A8
Port A9~B2
Port B3~B6
Port B7~C0
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK2 + KDto access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
Default Values
LK is green = block assigned for CAR
No Call Arrival Key Blocks are assigned.
LK is red = block not available for CAR (hardware is installed)
Hardware equipped ports are red.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
Refer to individual features in the Electra Elite IPK Features and Specifications Manual.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 112
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Notes
1.
The Electra Elite IPK expanded system allows a maximum of 120 ports to be shared by station ports (ESI, SLI,
FMS/VMS, and OPX) and Call Arrival Keys. When 32 station ports are being used, 88 remain for use as Call
Arrival (CAR) Keys.
2.
The total number of shared and CAR ports are shared with PS ports.
3.
The Electra Elite IPK basic system allows a maximum of 32 ports to be shared by Legacy stations (ESI, SLI,
FMS/VMS, and OPX) and Call Arrival Keys. In addition to the shared ports, 40 dedicated CAR ports can also be
defined. Dedicated CAR ports are 33~72.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 113

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-2-08
Specified Station Access Code
System Mode
Assignment
1
Submode
2
General Description
Use this Memory Block to assign specific stations for abbreviated dialing. Up to 24
Data No.
stations can be assigned.
08
Display
PC Programming
Specified
Station
¦+BA
Access
Data
Code
Tel.Port
No.
Title
00
~23
01~C0
0 8 : S P C L
E X T 0 0 = 0 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK2 + KHto access the Memory Block.
3
Use the dial pad to enter Specified Station Access Code 00 Tel Port No.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
Access Code No.
Value
Jto move the cursor left
00
01
Lto move the cursor right
H
01-23
Not Set

to clear data

Setting Data:
Tel. Port No. 01~120
Specified Station Access Code is 00~23
G
4
Press
to write data and display the next Specified Station Access Code.
5
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each Specified Station Access Code.
6
The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
7
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-46
Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment
1-1-47
Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment
1-4-14
Automated Attendant Message Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment
1-4-15
Automated Attendant Message Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 114
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Notes
1.
Specified stations can be accessed from intercom (ICM) dial tone or as an outside caller calling into the Electra
Elite IPK system Auto Attendant.
2.
The Specified Access Code is assigned in Memory Blocks 1-1-46 or 1-1-47 [Access Code (1-Digit/2-Digit)
Assignment].
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 115

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-2-09~18 Customized Message 1~10
System Mode
Assignment
1
Submode
2
General Description
Use this Memory Block to program various messages for display at a station LCD.
Data No.
When a user places an intercom (ICM) call from a station equipped with an LCD
09~18
display to a station in DND mode, the applicable programmed message displays at the
calling station.
PC Programming
Display
¦+BI

Data
Setting Data
No.
(13 di
gi
ts ma
x.)
0 9 : D N D
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK2 + KI~AH to access the Memory Block.
3
Enter the options using the dial pad.

Default Values

Use the following enter data:
Data No.
Message
Jto move the cursor left
09
DND
Lto move the cursor right
10
MEETING
K~Ito enter numeric data
H
11
BUSINESS TRIP

to clear data
12
NOT IN
13
WITH GUEST
14
OUT OF OFFICE
15~18 Not
Specified
4
Enter the characters to be displayed. Refer to Appendix B Character Codes, Section 1 Character Assignment on page B-1.
G
5
After entering each message for Memory Block 1-2-9~18 (Custom Message 1~10 Assignment), press
to write the data.
The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
6
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Notes
1.
Ten messages are available, the first six are assigned at default.
2.
System Software allows a message to be entered using the dial pad instead of the ASCII Character Code Tables.
Follow the procedure in Appendix B Character Codes, Section 1 Character Assignment on page B-1.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 116
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-2-19
Intercom Ring Pattern Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to select a ring pattern or turn the tone ON/OFF when intercom
2
calls are made.
Data No.
Display
19
Data
Setting

No.
Title
Data Page
PC Programming
1 9 : I C M
P T N
B | 1
¦+BI
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
OFF
ON
A

B

C

D
E
F
The shaded
Page 2
selection is the
default.

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8

G

H
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + L2 + AI to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.

Use the following to enter data:
C

to go to the next page
A to go to the previous page
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 117

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
The Ring Patterns are listed in the table below:
s= seconds
Line
0s
1s
2s
3s
4s
5s
6s
Pattern
Key
OFF
LK 1
ON
LK 2
A

LK 3
B
LK 4
C

LK 5
D

LK 6
E

LK 7
F

LK 8
LK 1
G
(Pg. 2)
LK 2
H
(Pg. 2)
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 118
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-2-20
Intercom Ring Tone Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to select a ring tone for intercom calls.
2
Display
Data No.
Data
Setting
Title
20
No.
Data
PC Programming
2 0 : I C M
T O N E
A
¦+BI
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK2 + BK to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Notes
The available tones are:
Tone A = (480/600):
Modulation (16 Hz)
Tone B = (480/606):
Modulation (8 Hz)
Tone C = (1024/1285)
Tone D = (1024)
Tone E = (500)
Tone F = (1024/1285):
Modulation (16 Hz)
Tone G = (600/700):
Modulation (16 Hz)
Tone H = (1024)
Envelope 2 sec.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 119

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-2-21
PS Telephone Block Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify the number of PS II stations that can be used in the
2
system.
Data No.
Display

21
Data
Setting
Title
No.
Data
PC Programming
2 1 : P H S
A S S I G N | 0 1
¦+AP
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1 Ports 01~32

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
Port 01~04
Port 05~08
Port 09~12
Port 13~16
Port 17~20
Port 21~24
Port 25~28
Port 29~32
Page 2 Ports 33~64
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Port 33~36
Port 37~40
Port 41~44
Port 45~48
Port 49~52
Port 53~56
Port 57~60
Port 61~64
Default: No PS
Telephone
Page 3 Ports 65~96
Blocks are
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
assigned.
Port 65~68
Port 69~72
Port 73~76
Port 77~80
Port 81~84
Port 85~88
Port 89~92
Port 93~96
Page 4 Ports 97~C0
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Port 97~A0
Port A1~A4
Port A5~A8
Port A9~B2
Port B3~B6
Port B7~C0
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK2 + BAto access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
Default Values
LK is green = block assigned for PS
No PS Terminal Blocks are assigned.
LK is red = block not available for PS
Hardware equipped ports are red.

C
Press
to cycle between pages.

Setting Data indicates the first port number on the applicable page.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 120
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Notes
1.
The Electra Elite IPK basic system can support a maximum of 24 PS II stations.
2.
The Electra Elite IPK expanded system can support a maximum of 40 PS II stations.
3.
The Electra Elite IPK basic system can have 32 ports to be shared by station ports (ESI, SLI, FMS/VMS, CNF,
and OPX), Call Arrival Keys, and PS stations. If 24 station ports are being used, eight remain for use as PS
stations.
4.
The Electra Elite IPK expanded system allows a maximum of 120 ports to be shared by station ports (ESI, SLI,
FMS/VMS, CNF, and OPX), Call Arrival Keys, PS stations, and IP phones (Memory Block 1-2-32.)
5.
The total number of PS station ports are shared with the total number of hardware and software station ports.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 121

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-2-22
Call Forward - No Answer Time
System Mode
Selection
1
Submode
2
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify the time before incoming intercom calls or incoming
Data No.
CO/PBX lines are forwarded to another station number when the called party does not
22
answer.
PC Programming
This Memory Block can be adjusted in 1-second intervals (R3000 or higher).
¦+BM
Display (R2500 or lower)
Setting
Data
Title
Data
No.
2 2 : F W D
N O A N S
8 s
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
4s
8s
12s
18s
24s
30s
60s
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK2 + BB to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Refer to next page for R3000 Programming Procedures.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 122
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Display (R3000 or higher)

Timer
Data
Class
Setting

No.
Title
1~4
Data
2 2 : N O A N S
1 = 1 2 s
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK2 + BB to access the Memory Block.
3
Use the dial pad to enter the Data Setting for Class 1.
Default Values
Setting Data
Class 1~4 = 12s
01s~99s (e.g., 05s =5s)
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Timer Class of Service.
E
5
Program the next Timer Class of Service or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-46
Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment
1-1-47
Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment
1-1-48
Access Code (3-Digit) Assignment
1-2-01
Intercom Call Voice/Tone Signal Selection
1-8-08
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
4-17
Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment
4-42
Call Forward-Busy Immediately/Delay Selection
4-71
Station to Timer Class of Service (R3000 or higher)

Notes
1.
Telephone Ports 1 and 2 are in Station to Timer Class of Service, Class 1, by default. All other ports are in
Station to Timer Class of Service, Class 2, by default.
2.
When a system is upgraded from R2500 or lower to R3000 or higher, the Call Forward No Answer Time
Selection is reset to the default during the upgrade process.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 123

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-2-23
System Call Park Recall Time
System Mode
Selection
1
Submode
2
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify the time before a CO/PBX call recalls back to a
Data No.
station from Call Park.
23
This Memory Block can be adjusted in 1-second intervals (R3000 or higher).
PC Programming
Display
¦+BM
Setting
Data
Title
Data
No.
2 3 : P A R K
R E C L
1 . 0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
default. Times
0.5
1.0
1.5 2.0
3.0
5.0
8.0
10.0
are in minutes.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK2 + BC to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Refer to next page for R3000 Programming Procedures.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 124
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Display (R3000 or higher)

Timer
Data
Class
Setting

No.
Title
1~4
Data
2 3 : P R K R C L
1 = 0 6 0 s
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK2 + BC to access the Memory Block.
3
Use the dial pad to enter the Data Setting for Class 1.
Default Values
Setting Data
Class 1~4 = 060s
001s~999s (e.g., 120s = 2 Minutes)
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Timer Class of Service.
E
5
Program the next Timer Class of Service or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
4-71
Station to Timer Class of Service

Notes
1.
Telephone Ports 1 and 2 are in Station to Timer Class of Service, Class 1, by default. All other ports are in
Station to Timer Class of Service, Class 2, by default.
2.
When a system is upgraded from R2500 or lower to R3000 or higher, the System Call Park Recall Time
Selection is reset to the default during the upgrade process.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 125

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-2-24
Intercom Feature Access Code
System Mode
Assignment
1
Submode
2
General Description
Use this Memory Block to assign the Access Code for Voice/Tone change or Step
Data No.
Call.
24
Display
PC Programming

Dial
Setting
Data
¦+BA
No.

No
.
Data
Title
2 4 : F E A
A C ( 0 ) = 0 0 4
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK2 + BD to access the Memory Block.
3
Use the dial pad to enter the Setting Data.

Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
Dial Numbers
Jto move the cursor left
0 = 004
Lto move the cursor right
1 = 001
K~Ito enter numeric data
B
2 = 002

+ , or # to enter , or #
3~5 = 000
6 = 006
Setting Data
7 = 007
Setting Code
Feature
8, 9 = 000
000
Not Used
, = 003
001
Voice/Tone Switching
# = 005
002
Step Call
003
Tone Override
004
Automatic Callback
005
Callback Request
006
Voice Over Originate
007
Quick Transfer to Voice Mail
G
4
Press
to write the data and advance to the next Dial No.
5
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each Dial No. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
6
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 126
Memory Blocks

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-2-25
Internal Paging Alert Tone Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not a call alert tone is provided when
2
Internal Paging is used.
Data No.
Display
25
Data
Setting
Titl
No.

e
Data
PC Programming
2 5 : I N
P G
T O N
Y S
¦+BP
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
YS
NO
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK2 + BE to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 128
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-2-26
Delayed Ringing Time Assignment
System Mode
(ICM)
1
Submode
2
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify the delayed ringing time for incoming internal calls.
Data No.
26
Display
PC Programming
Data
Setting
Titl
No.

e
Data
¦+BI
2 6 : D R I N G ( 1 )
= 1 0 s
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK2 + BFto access the Memory Block.
3
Enter data using the dial pad.
Default Values

10 seconds
Setting Data: KK~II
G
4
Press
to write data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
4-37
Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Day Mode)
4-38
Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Night Mode)
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 129

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-2-30
PS Out of Area Time Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify the retry time when a PS II is Out of Area.
2
Display
Data No.
Data
Setting Data
30
T
No.

itl
e

Data 00~99
PC Programming
3 0 : O U T
T I M E R
0 8 s
¦+AP
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK2 + CKto access the Memory Block.
3
Enter data using the dial pad.
Default Values
08 seconds

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K ~ Ito enter numeric data
G
4
Press
to write data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Notes
1.
When the PS Out of Area time is shorter than the Call Forward No Answer time, the caller receives an Out of
Area indication.
2.
This Memory Block is used to define the Time a system searches for a PS II before displaying Out of Area or
providing a busy tone to the Caller.
3.
When using Call Forward Busy/No Answer feature, verify that the time is compatible with this Memory Block.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 130
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-2-32
IP Telephone Block Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify when IP Telephones that connect to the
2
IPCA( )-U( ) ETU must use resources from the CPUI( )-U( ) ETU (Legacy system).
When IP Telephone Blocks are assigned, the CPUI( )-U( ) ETU can control the
Data No.
following features for the IPC IP Telephones:
32
H
Centralized Billing (K-CCIS)
PC Programming
H
Code Restriction
¦+AH
H
Enhanced 911
H
ISDN-PRI Trunk Connections Calling Party Number (CPN) Presentation from Station
H
Least Cost Routing (LCR)
H
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
System Software R2500 is required.
Display
Data
Setting Data
Tit
No.

le
Data 00~CO
3 2 : I P
A S S I G N
| 0 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1 Ports 01~32

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
Port 01~04
Port 05~08
Port 09~12
Port 13~16
Port 17~20
Port 21~24
Port 25~28
Port 29~32
Page 2 Ports 33~64
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Port 33~36
Port 37~40
Port 41~44
Port 45~48
Port 49~52
Port 53~56
Port 57~60
Port 61~64
Default: No PS
Telephone
Page 3 Ports 65~96
Blocks are
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
assigned.
Port 65~68
Port 69~72
Port 73~76
Port 77~80
Port 81~84
Port 85~88
Port 89~92
Port 93~96
Page 4 Ports 97~C0
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Port 97~A0
Port A1~A4
Port A5~A8
Port A9~B2
Port B3~B6
Port B7~C0
LED Status
Off
On (Green)
On (Red)
Default is shaded, and no IP Phone
Block Not
Blocks are Assigned.
Data
Not Assigned
IP Assigned)
Available
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 131

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK2 + CB to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the Data option.

LK Off Not Assigned

LK Green Block Assigned for IP Phone

LK Red Block not available for IP Phone
C
4
Press
to go to the next page.
Press A to return to the previous page.
G
5
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
6
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card Interface Slot Assignment
1-2-04
Call Arrival Key Block Assignment
1-2-21
PS Telephone Block Assignment
1-2-33
IP Telephone Block Assignment Allow/Deny Selection
4-07
Code Restriction Class Assignment (Day Mode)
4-08
Code Restriction Class Assignment (Night Mode)
4-40
LCR Class Selection
4-54
Enhanced 911 CESID to Station Table Assignment
4-56
SMDR Telephone Print Selection
4-67
IP Station Number Assignment
Notes
1.
The Electra Elite IPK Basic port package allows up to 30 IP Telephones to be installed using dedicated ports
73~104.
2.
The maximum station port capacity for the Electra Elite IPK Expanded port package is reduced by the number of
IPC IP Telephones assigned by this Memory Block in groups of four.
3.
The Electra Elite IPK Expanded port package allows a maximum of 120 ports to be shared by station ports (ESI,
SLI, OPX, FMS/VMS, etc.), Call Arrival Keys, PS Telephones, and IP Telephones. When 32 stations are used as
IP Telephones, 88 station ports remain for use by the Legacy system.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 132
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-2-33
IP Telephone Block Assignment
System Mode
Allow/Deny Selection
1
Submode
2
General Description
Use this Memory Block to designate whether or not Memory Block 1-2-32 (IP
Data No.
Telephone Block Assignment) is used. When this Memory Block is set to YS (Allow),
33
Memory Block 1-2-32 can be used to assign IP Telephones to connect to the
IPCA( )-U( ) ETU to use resources from the CPUI( )-U( ) (Legacy system). When
PC Programming
this Memory Block is set to NO (Deny), Memory Block 1-2-32 cannot be assigned.
¦+AH
System Software R2500 is required.
Display

Data
Setting
Title
No.
Data
3 3 : I P
A S S I G N
Y S
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
YS (Allow)
NO (Deny)
default.

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK2 + CC to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 133

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card interface Slot Assignment
1-2-04
Call Arrival Key Block Assignment
1-2-21
PS Telephone Block Assignment
1-2-32
IP Telephone Block Assignment
1-5-13
Printer Connected Selection
4-07
Code Restriction Class Assignment (Day Mode)
4-08
Code Restriction Class Assignment (Night Mode)
4-40
LCR Class Selection
4-47
ISDN Directory Number Selection
4-54
Enhanced 911 CESID to Station Table Assignment
4-56
SMDR Telephone Print Selection
4-62
ISDN-PRI Directory Number Selection
4-67
IP Station Number Assignment
Notes
When Memory Block 1-2-32 (IP Telephone Block Assignment) has data (Blocks) assigned, this Memory Block
cannot be changed to NO (Deny).
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 134
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-2-34
Expanded Station Number
System Mode
Assignment
1
Submode
2
General Description
Use this Memory Block to assign the lead digits when more than 4-digit station
Data No.
numbers are used.
34
System Software R2500 is required.
PC Programming
Display
¦+BTS
Data
Setting Data
T
No.

itl
e

Data 1~899
3 4 : E X T
D I G I T
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK2 + CDto access the Memory Block.
3
Enter data using the dial pad.
Default Values
Not Specified

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K ~ Ito enter numeric data
2, 3, or 4 digit
Blank (Not Specified)
5 digit
1~8
6 digit
10~89
7 digit
100~899
G
4
Press
to write data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 135

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-46
Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment
1-1-47
Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment
1-1-48
Access Code (3-Digit) Assignment
1-2-03
2~7-Digit Station Number Assignment
1-8-26
Voice Mail Quick Transfer Master Hunt Number
4-10
Station Number Assignment

Notes
The setting data depends on the assignment in Memory Block 1-2-03.
For 2, 3, or 4 digits
Blank (Not Assigned)
For 5 digits
1~8 (Assign one digit)
For 6 digits
10~89 (Assign two digits)
For 7 digits
100~899 (Assign three digits)
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 136
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-3-01
Bounce Protect Time Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify a time for detection of a valid off-hook indication that
3
is long enough to prevent an unintentional bounce of the receiver from being detected
as a new off-hook indication from a Single Line Telephone or Voice Mail system.
Data No.
Display
01
PC Programming
Data
Setting
Page
No.
Title
Data
No.
¦+BTI
0 1 : B N C E
3 0 0 m s | 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
0ms
100ms
200ms
300ms
400ms
500ms
600ms
700ms
The shaded
Page 2
selection is the
default.
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
800ms
900ms
1000ms
1100ms
1200ms
1300ms
1400ms
1500ms

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK3 to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-3-05
Hookflash Start Time Selection
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 137

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-3-02
SLT Hookflash Signal Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify whether a line is held internally, or when behind a
3
PBX, a hookflash (HF) signal is sent to the line when a Single Line Telephone user
performs a hookflash.
Data No.
Display
02

Data
Setting
PC Programming
No.
Title
Data
¦+BTI
0 2 : S I G N A L
H 0 L D
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
HOLD
FLASH
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK3 +KBto access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-02
Hookflash Time Selection
4-24
SLT Hookflash Assignment
Notes
1.
When Hold is specified, the CO/PBX line is put on Exclusive Hold.
2.
When Hold is selected, the PBX/CTX line can receive the hookflash signal using Access Code 6# (default).
3.
When Flash is specified, press the hookswitch to send the hookflash signal to the PBX/CTX line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 138
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-3-03
First Digit PBR Release Time
System Mode
Selection
1
Submode
3
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify the time a Push Button Receiver (PBR) circuit is
Data No.
connected when a dual-tone multifrequency (DTMF) Single Line Telephone user goes
03
off-hook. After the time expires, the PBR is disconnected. When the Single Line
Telephone user dials a digit before the time expires, a PBR interdigit time starts.
PC Programming
This Memory Block can be adjusted in 1-second intervals (R3000 or higher).
¦+BTI
Display (R2500 or lower)

Data
Setting
No.
Title
Data
0 3 : P B R
R L S
1 0 s
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
10s
20s
30s
40s
50s
60s
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK3 + KC to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Refer to next page for R3000 Programming Procedures.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 139

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
Display (R3000 or higher)

Data
Setting
No.
Title
Data
0 3 : P B R
R L S
1 0 s
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK3 + KC to access the Memory Block.
3
Use the dial pad to enter the Data Setting for Class 1.
Default Values
Setting Data
10s
01s~99s (e.g., 05s =5s)
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
E
5
Program the next memory block, or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-8-10
PBR Interdigit Release Time Selection
4-95
DTMF/DP SLT Type Selection
Notes
R3000 or higher is required to adjust this memory block by 1-second intervals.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 140
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-3-04
Dial 1 (DP) Hookflash Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not a dial pulse (DP) Single Line
3
Telephone provides a hookflash signal when the user presses 1 during an intercom or
CO/PBX call.
Data No.
Display
04

PC Programming
Data
Setting
No.
Title
Data
¦+BTI
0 4 : D I A L 1 F L S H
Y S
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
YS
NO
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK3 + KDto access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
4-90
SLT Data Line Security Assignment
4-95
DTMF/DP SLT Type Selection
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 141

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-3-05
Hookflash Start Time Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify the minimum hookflash time from a Single Line
3
Telephone or analog Voice Mail system before it is detected as the beginning of a
valid hookflash.
Data No.
Display
05
PC Programming
Data
Setting
Page

No.
Title
Data
No.
¦+BTI
0 5 : F L S H
S T
2 9 0 | 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
40
90 140
190
240 290
340 390
selection is the
Page 2
default. The
times are in
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
milliseconds.
440 490 540 590 640 690 740 790
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK3 + KE to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.

C
Press
to cycle between pages.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-3-01
Bounce Protect Time Selection
1-3-06
Hookflash End Time Selection
Notes
Press hookswitch during CO/PBX call to place the line on hold or send hookflash to CO/PBX.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 142
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-3-06
Hookflash End Time Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify the maximum hookflash duration from a Single Line
3
Telephone to receive a second dial tone.
Data No.
Display
06
Data
Setting Page

No.
Title
Data
No.
PC Programming
0 6 : F L S H
E N D = 0 7 | 1
¦+BTI
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
selection is
(HST + 0 ms.)
(HST + 100 ms.)
(HST + 200 ms.)
(HST + 300 ms.)
(HST + 400 ms.)
(HST + 500 ms.)
(HST + 600 ms.)
(HST + 700 ms.).
the default.
Page 2
HST =
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Hookflash
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
Start Time.
(HST + 800 ms.)
(HST + 900 ms.)
(HST + 1000 ms.)
(HST + 1100 ms.)
(HST + 1200 ms.)
(HST + 1300 ms.)
(HST + 1400 ms.)
(HST + 1500 ms.)
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK3 + KF to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.

C
Press
to cycle between pages.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-3-05
Hookflash Start Time Selection
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 143

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-3-07
Voice Mail Digit Add Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to assign up to four digits in front of the station number sent to
3
the voice mail when a call is forwarded.
Data No.
Display
07
Data
Setting

No.
Title
Data
PC Programming
0 7 : V M
A C E S S =
¦+AV
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK3 + KG to access the Memory Block.
3
Use the dial pad to enter data.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
All Blank
K~Ito enter numeric data
B +Jto enter *
B +Lto enter #
Setting Data: 0~9, *, #
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
4-35
Voice Mail/SLT Selection
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 144
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-3-08
Voice Mail DTMF Delay Time
System Mode
Selection
1
Submode
3
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify the delay time before dual-tone multifrequency
Data No.
(DTMF) tones are sent from Voice Mail Interface (VMI) ports.
08
Display
PC Programming
Data
Setting
No.
Title
Data
¦+AV
0 8 : V M
D E L A Y
=
1 s
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
0s
1s
2s
3s
4s
5s
6s
8s
default.

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK3 +KHto access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.

G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
4-35
Voice Mail/SLT Selection
Notes
This Memory Block applies to both digital voice mail and analog voice mail ports.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 145

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-3-09
Voice Mail Disconnect Time Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify the time a disconnect signal is sent to the voice mail
3
system.
Data No.
Display
09
Data
Setting
No.
Title
Data
PC Programming
0 9 : V M
D S C O N = 1 . 5 s
¦+AV
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
0.5s
1.0s
1.5s
2.0s
3.0s
3.5s
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK3 + KI to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
4-35
Voice Mail/SLT Selection
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 146
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-3-10
Voice Mail DTMF Duration/Interdigit
System Mode
Time Selection
1
Submode
3
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify dual-tone multifrequency (DTMF) duration and
Data No.
interdigit time for voice mail.
10
Display
PC Programming
Data
Setting
No.
Title
Data
¦+AV
1 0 : V M
M F = 1 1 0 / 8 0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded selection is the
default for Duration and
Interdigit Time. Times are in
60/70
110/80 410/100 610/100 810/190
milliseconds.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK3 + AK to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX key to change data option.
Default Values
Duration time: 110 ms.
Interdigit Time: 80 ms.
G
4
Press
to write the data and advance to the next Memory Block.
E
5
Press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
4-35
Voice Mail/SLT Selection
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 147

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-3-11
SLT/PS II Talk Start Timer
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to assign the time needed after a hookflash and dialing before
3
three-party (two COs and one SLT) line conference is allowed from a Single Line
Telephone or PSII.
Data No.
System Software R2000 or higher is required.
11
PC Programming
Display
¦+BTI
Data
Setting

No.
Title
Data
1 1 : T L K
T M R
= 1 0 s
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK3 + AA to access the Memory Block.
3
Use the dial pad to enter data.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
10 sec
K~Ito enter numeric data
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
Setting Data: 01~99 sec
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-8-08
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
Page 3, LK 5
3-04
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Yes/NO Selection
4-17
Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 148
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Notes
1.
This Memory Block applies only to trunks without answer supervision (i.e., loop or ground start).
2.
A hookflash before this timer or far end answer detection, drops the new call and returns to the original call.
3.
A hookflash after this timer or far end answer detection results in a three-party Conference call (two COs and one
Single Line Telephone).
4.
A blind transfer can be performed anytime by hanging up after making the second call.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 149

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-3-12
SLT/ISDN TELCO Account Codes
System Mode
Allow/Deny Selection
1
Submode
3
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify when ISDN (PRI/BRI) circuits have account codes
Data No.
set up by TELCO that must be entered by Single Line Telephone users.
12
R3000 or higher is required.
PC Programming
Display
¦+BTI
Data
Setting
No.
Title
Data
1 2 : I S D N
A . C .
N 0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded selection is the
default.
NO
YES
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK3 + AB to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX key to change data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data and advance to the next Memory Block.
E
5
Press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 150
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-4-00
Tandem Transfer Automatic
System Mode
Disconnect Time Selection
1
Submode
4
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify maximum time, in minutes, before the system
Data No.
automatically disconnects a Trunk-to-Trunk connection.
00
Display
PC Programming

Data
Setting
¦+AT
No.
Title
Data
0 0 : A U T O
D I S
0 6 0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK4 to access the Memory Block.
3
Use the dial pad to enter data.

Use the following to enter data:
K~Ito enter numeric data
Jto move cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
Setting Data: 001~999 Minutes
000 No Limit
H to clear Data
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
Refer to individual features in the Electra Elite IPK Features and Specifications Manual.
Notes
This block is used for Direct Inward System Access (DISA), Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer, Call Forward Off-Premise,
and Tie line tandem features.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 151

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-4-01
Automated Attendant First Digit PBR
System Mode
Release Time Selection
1
Submode
4
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify the time a Push Button Receiver (PBR) remains
Data No.
connected after the Automated Attendant message is played when a calling party calls
01
in through an Automated Attendant trunk.
PC Programming
This Memory Block can be adjusted in 1-second intervals (R3000 or higher).
¦+AU
Display (R2500 or lower)

Data
Setting
No.
Title
Data
0 1 : A A
P B R T I M E 2 0 s
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
5s
10s
20s
30s
40s
50s
60s
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK4 + JA to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Refer to next page for R3000 Programming Procedures.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 152
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Display (R3000 or higher)

Data
Setting
No.
Title
Data
0 1 : A A
P B R R L S
2 0 s
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK4 + J +A to access the Memory Block.
3
Use the dial pad to enter the Data Setting for Class 1.
Default Values
Setting Data
20s
01s~99s (e.g., 02s = 2s)
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
E
5
Program the next memory block, or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
4-71
Station to Timer Class of Service (R3000 or higher)
Notes
1.
After PBR is connected, dialing must be completed in the specified time. After the first digit is dialed, interdigit
time (default 7 sec.) controls the PBR time. Dialing the third digit exceeds the 20 sec. default, and the PBR is
disconnected.
2.
R3000 or higher is required to adjust this memory block by 1-second intervals.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 153

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-4-02
Automated Attendant Transfer
System Mode
Delayed Ringing Time Selections
1
Submode
4
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify the time that a call rings at the destination station
Data No.
before the automated attendant rings a programmed station.
02
This Memory Block can be adjusted in 1-second intervals (R3000 or higher).
PC Programming
Display
¦+AU

Data
Setting
No.
Title
Data
0 2 : A A
D L Y R N G

T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the

10s
20s
30s
default.
(No Limit)
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK4 + JBto access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Refer to next page for R3000 Programming Procedures.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 154
Memory Blocks

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
Notes
Example:
¤
( D)

(A) 100
(C) 102
¤
PSTN
¤
Elite IPK
(B) 101
(B) 101
¤
¤
(C) 102
(A) 100
Trunk 1
¤
¤
Time Elapsed
In this example, Public Switching Telephone Network (PSTN) and the system are
connected by Trunk 1. Stations A (extension 100) and C (extension 102) are ring
assigned to Trunk 1. Trunk 1 is assigned to Automated Attendant trunk.
1.
To speak to station user A, the outside user D dials the telephone number for TRUNK 1, confirms the Automated
Attendant message, and dials extension 100.
2.
In the example at station A:

The ICM LED blinks and a ring tone that is different from the normal ringing tone is heard.

The call can be answered by lifting the handset.

Station users B and C cannot press the line key on the Multiline Terminals to answer the call.
3.
In the example, if station user A does not answer in the specified time:

The ringing tone changes to the normal tone and station C starts ringing.

Any station (A, B, or C) user can press the flashing line key to answer the call.
4.
Select (No Limit) to disable this feature.
1.
Telephone ports 1 and 2 are in Station to Timer Class of Service, Class 1 by default. All other ports are in
Station to Timer Class of Service, Class 2 by default (R3000 or higher).
2.
When a system is upgraded from R2500 or lower to R3000 or higher, the Automated Attendant Transfer
Delayed Ringing Time Selection is reset to the default value during the upgrade process.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 156
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-4-03
Automated Attendant No Answer
System Mode
Disconnect Time Selection
1
Submode
4
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify the time the Automated Attendant rings a station
Data No.
before the caller is automatically disconnected.
03
This Memory Block can be adjusted in 1-second intervals (R3000 or higher).
PC Programming
¦+AU
Display (R2500 or lower)

Data
Setting
No.
Title

Data
0 3 : A A
D I S
2 m
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
1m
2m
3m
4m
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK4 + JCto access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Refer to next page for R3000 Programming Procedures.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 157

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
Display (R3000 or higher)

Data
Setting
No.
Title
Data
0 3 : A A
D I S C
1 2 0 s
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK4 + J +C to access the Memory Block.
3
Use the dial pad to enter the Data Setting for Class 1.
Default Values
Setting Data
120s
001s~255s (e.g., 180s =3min)
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
E
5
Program the next memory block, or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
Refer to individual features in the Electra Elite IPK Features and Specifications Manual.
Notes
1.
When the called party does not answer in the programmed time, the call is dropped.
2.
R3000 or higher is required to adjust this memory block by 1-second intervals.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 158
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-4-04
Tandem Transfer SMDR Print
System Mode
Extension Assignment
1
Submode
4
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify a special number to be output from Station Message
Data No.
Detail Recording (SMDR) to indicate an automatic trunk-to-trunk transfer.
04
Display
PC Programming

Data
Setting
¦+AT

No.
Title
Data
0 4 : T A N D
E X T = 9 9 9
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK4 + JDto access the Memory Block.
3
Use the dial pad to enter the Table Number and Setting Data.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
3-digit number = 999
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
Setting Data (Allowed):
2-Digit Number:
10~89
3-Digit Number:
100~899
4-Digit Number:
1000~8999
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-2-03
2-, 3-, or 4-Digit Station Number Selection
Notes
1.
When the system is powered up initially, this block defaults to 3-digit number 999.
2.
When 2-digit station numbers are selected, this block defaults to 99.
3.
When 4-digit station numbers are selected, this block defaults to 9999.
4.
5~7 digit station numbers are not supported.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 159

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-4-05
Automatic Tandem Trunk by Night
System Mode
Mode Selection
1
Submode
4
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not the Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk
Data No.
Transfer feature follows the Night Mode assignment.
05
Display
PC Programming

Data
Setting

No.
Tit
le
Data
¦+AT
0 5 : T A N D
B Y
N T
N O
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
NO
YS
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK4 + JEto access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-27
Automatic Day/Night Mode Switching Time Assignment
1-1-33
Speed Dial Number/Name Display Selection
3-05
Trunk Incoming Answer Mode Selection
3-06
Automatic Tandem Trunk Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 160
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-4-08
Automated Attendant PBR Timeout
System Mode
Response Selection
1
Submode
4
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify how a call answered by the Automated Attendant
Data No.
should be processed when a dual-tone multifrequency (DTMF) tone is not received.
08
Display
PC Programming

Data
Setting
¦+AU
No.
Title
Data
0 8 : A A
R E S
N O R M A L
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
NORMAL RELEAS
default.

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK4 + JHto access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.

G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
Refer to individual features in the Electra Elite IPK Features and Specifications Manual.
Notes
1.
When NORMAL is selected, and a DTMF tone is not received during the Automated Attendant message or
during the Automated Attendant Push Button Receiver (PBR) Release Time (20-second default), the system
rings selected stations using Memory Block 4-01 [CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)] or Memory Block 4-02
[CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)].
2.
When RELEAS is selected, and a DTMF tone is not received during the Automated Attendant message or during
the Automated Attendant PBR Release Time (20-second default), the system drops the call after 30 seconds
regulated by a fixed time.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 161

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-4-09
Automated Attendant PBR Start Time
System Mode
Selection
1
Submode
4
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify whether the Push Button Receiver (PBR) can
Data No.
receive dual-tone multifrequency (DTMF) signaling while the Automated Attendant is
09
sending the message or after the message is complete.
PC Programming
Display
¦+AU
Data
Setting
No.
Tit
le

Data
0 9 : P B R
S T R T
F R
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
FR
AF
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK4 + JIto access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
Setting Data:
FR: While the Automated Attendant sends the message.
AF: After the Automated Attendant sends the message.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
Refer to individual features in the Electra Elite IPK Features and Specifications Manual.
Notes
When FR is assigned, the Automated Attendant message send start time and the PBR connected to Automated
Attendant trunk start time are the same.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 162
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-4-11
Automated Attendant Message Day/
System Mode
Night Mode Selection
1
Submode
4
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not Automated Attendant messages can
Data No.
be used in a Day/Night Mode setting.
11
Display
PC Programming
A.A.
Msg. Day/
¦+AU
Data
NO.
Night
Setting
No.
Title
1~8
Mode
Data
1 1 : A A M S G 1 ( D Y ) = N O
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
YS
NO
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK4 + JJAAto access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change data option for AA MSG1 in DY (Day) Mode.

Use the following to enter data:
A~Hto enter numerical data
B

to toggle between Day Mode and Night Mode
G
4
Press
to write the data, and display the next message.
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for all eight messages. The next Memory Block is displayed.
B
6
Return to this Memory Block, toggle
to select NT (Night) and repeat Steps 3, 4, and 5 for all messages for night Mode.
The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
7
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
Refer to individual features in the Electra Elite IPK Features and Specifications Manual.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 163

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-4-12
Automated Attendant Message to
System Mode
Tenant Assignment
1
Submode
4
General Description
Use this Memory Block to assign Automated Attendant Messages to a Tenant.
Data No.
12
Display
PC Programming
Data
AA MSG
Setting
No.
Title
(1~8)
Data
¦+AU
1 2 : A A
1 T N A T = 0 0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK4 +JJABto access the Memory Block.
3
Use the dial pad to change the Tenant for AA MSG1.
Default Values
K~Ito enter Tenant Number
All Automated Attendant Messages:
Tenant No. 00
G
4
Press
to write the data, and advance to the next message.
5
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for all AA messages. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
6
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
Refer to individual features in the Electra Elite IPK Features and Specifications Manual.
Notes
When a tenant is not assigned to a specific automated message, the Automated Attendant sends the message
assigned in Memory Block 1-4-11 (Automated Attendant Message Day/Night Mode Selection).
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 164
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-4-13
Automated Attendant Answer Delay
System Mode
Time Assignment
1
Submode
4
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify the time, in seconds, before the Automated
Data No.
Attendant answers an incoming CO/PBX call.
13
Display
PC Programming
Data
AA MSG.
Setting
¦+AU
No.
Title
(1~8)
Data
1 3 : A A D L Y 1
= 0 4 s
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK4 +JJACto access the Memory Block.
3
Use the dial pad to enter the delay time for AA MSG. 1.
Default Values
KK~II to enter number of seconds
All Automated Attendant Messages:
4 sec.
G
4
Press
to write the data, and advance to the next AA MSG.
5
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for all messages. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
6
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
Refer to individual features in the Electra Elite IPK Features and Specifications Manual.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 165

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-4-14
Automated Attendant Message Access
System Mode
Code (1-Digit) Assignment
1
Submode
4
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify a 1-digit code to route an incoming call from the
Data No.
Automated Attendant.
14
Display
PC Programming
DIAL.
Data
AA MSG. No.
Function
No.
Title
(1~8) (0~9)
Code
¦+AU
1 4 : A A
A C
1 - O = 0 3 0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK4 +JJADto access the Memory Block.
3
Use the dial pad to enter function code for AA MSG. 1, Dial No. 0.

Default Values
UseK~Ito enter the function code.
Dial
Function

Contents
Setting Data (Allowed):
Number
Code
Function Code 001~053
0
030
Specified
Station Call (0)
000 is unused.
1
010
Station Number
2
010
Station Number
3
010
Station Number
4 ~ 9
000
Unregistered
G
4
Press
to write the data and advance to the next dial number.
5
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each Dial No. AA MSG. 2, Dial No. 0 is displayed.
6
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each Dial No. AA MSG. 3, Dial No. 0 is displayed.
7
Continue this cycle for all Dial NOs. for all messages. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
8
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
Refer to individual features in the Electra Elite IPK Features and Specifications Manual.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 166
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________

Notes

1.
Function 011 (Bypass Automated Attendant) uses Memory Blocks 4-01 [CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)]
and 4-02 [CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)] to ring according to those assignments.
2.
Functions 015~016 (Ring Internal Paging Zone A/B/C) require assigning the following to ring the desired station:
Memory Block 4-01 [CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)]
Memory Block 4-02 [CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)]
Memory Block 4-93 (Internal Zone Paging Selection).
3.
When a caller receives a busy signal after being transferred by the Automated Attendant, the following Fixed
Access Codes apply:
A Step Call
J Receive a second dial tone
L CO rings based on Day/Night Ring Assignment.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 167

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
Function
Function
Contents
Contents
Code
Code
000
Unregistered
027
Not Used
001
Automated Attendant Message (1)
028
Not Used
002
Automated Attendant Message (2)
029
Not Used
003
Automated Attendant Message (3)
030
Specified Station Call (00) Refer to
Memory Block 1-2-08 (Specified Station
Access Code Assignment).
004
Automated Attendant Message (4)
031
Specified Station Call (01)
005
Automated Attendant Message (5)
032
Specified Station Call (02)
006
Automated Attendant Message (6)
033
Specified Station Call (03)
007
Automated Attendant Message (7)
034
Specified Station Call (04)
008
Automated Attendant Message (8)
035
Specified Station Call (05)
009
Not Used
036
Specified Station Call (06)
010
Internal Number (Station Number)
037
Specified Station Call (07)
011
Bypass Automated Attendant
038
Specified Station Call (08)
012
Not Used
039
Specified Station Call (09)
013
Not Used
040
Specified Station Call (10)
014
Not Used
041
Specified Station Call (11)
015
Ring Internal Paging Zone A
042
Specified Station Call (12)
016
Ring Internal Paging Zone B
043
Specified Station Call (13)
017
Ring Internal Paging Zone C
044
Specified Station Call (14)
018
Not Used
045
Specified Station Call (15)
019
Not Used
046
Specified Station Call (16)
020
DSS 1 Call
047
Specified Station Call (17)
021
DSS 2 Call
048
Specified Station Call (18)
022
DISA Access Code
049
Specified Station Call (19)
023
Not Used
050
Specified Station Call (20)
024
Not Used
051
Specified Station Call (21)
025
Not Used
052
Specified Station Call (22)
026
Not Used
053
Specified Station Call (23)
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 168
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-4-15
Automated Attendant Message Access
System Mode
Code (2-Digit) Assignment
1
Submode
4
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify a 2-digit code to route an incoming call from the
Data No.
Automated Attendant.
15
Display
PC Programming
Dial.
Data
AA MSG.
No.
Function
No.
Title
(1~8) 00~99
Code
¦+AU
1 5 : A A
A C 1 0 O = 0 3 0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK4 +JJAEto access the Memory Block.
3
Use the dial pad to enter Function Code for MSG. 1, Dial No. 00.

Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
Dial No.
Funct. Code
Contents
K~Hto enter Automated Attendant message number
00 ~ 50
030
Specified Station Call (0)
KK~IIto enter Dial No.
Bypass Automated
51
011
Attendant
52
015
Paging Zone A Call
53
016
Paging Zone B Call
54
017
Paging Zone C Call
55 ~ 99
000
Not Used
G
4
Press
to write the data and to advance the Dial No.
5
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each Dial No. Message 2, Dial No. 00 is displayed.
6
Continue this cycle until the Dial number function codes are assigned to all AA MSGs. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
7
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
Refer to individual features in the Electra Elite IPK Features and Specifications Manual.
Notes
To use default 52~54, ringing must be assigned in Memory Blocks 4-01 [CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)]
or 4-02 [CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)].
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 169

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-4-16
Automated Attendant Message Repeat
System Mode
Selection
1
Submode
4
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify the number of times a message from the Automated
Data No.
Attendant Is repeated to the calling party.
16
Display
PC Programming
Data
AA MSG.
Setting
¦+AU
No.
Title
(1~8)
Data
1 6 : A A M S G 1
1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
The shaded
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
selection is the
default.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK4 +JJAFto access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the number of times a message is
Default Values
repeated.
All Messages One Time
G
4
Press
to write the data and advance to next AA MSG.
5
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each AA MSG. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
6
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
Refer to individual features in the Electra Elite IPK Features and Specifications Manual.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 170
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-4-17
Automated Attendant Delay
System Mode
Announcement Hold Tone Selection
1
Submode
4
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify the tone to be sent to the outside party after the
Data No.
Automated Attendant Delay Announcements are played.
17
Display
PC Programming
Data
Setting
No.
Title
Data
¦+AU
1 7 : A A
H O L D
R B T
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
The shaded
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
selection is the
default.
RBT
MOH
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK4 +JJAGto access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
Example: To change Ringback tone to Music On Hold, press CO/PBX LK2.
G
4
Press
to write the data and advance to the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-4-18
Automated Attendant Delay Announcement Assignment
1-4-19
Automated Attendant 1st to 2nd Delay Announcement Interval Time Selection
1-4-20
Automated Attendant Delay Announcement Disconnect Time Selection
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 171

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-4-18
Automated Attendant Delay
System Mode
Announcement Assignment
1
Submode
General Description
4
Use this Memory Block to specify the order for the Automated Attendant messages
Data No.
that are played in Delayed Announcement Mode.
18
Display
PC Programming
Setting
Data
1st MSG
Data
No.
1~8
Title
2nd MSG
Page
¦+ AU
1 8 : ( 1 ) 2 N D = N O N E | 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
NONE
MSG1
MSG2
MSG3
MSG4
MSG5
MSG6
MSG7
The shaded
Page 2
selection is the
default.
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
MSG8

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK4 +JJAH to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the 2nd MSG for 1st MSG 1.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
1st MSG No. 1~8: Not Specified
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K ~ Ito enter numeric data
C

to toggle between pages
G
4
Press
to write the data and advance to the next 1st MSG.
5
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each 1st MSG. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
6
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-4-19
Automated Attendant 1st to 2nd Delay Announcement Interval Time Selection
1-4-20
Automated Attendant Delay Announcement Disconnect Time Selection
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 172
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-4-19
Automated Attendant 1st to 2nd Delay
System Mode
Announcement Interval Time
1
Selection
Submode
4
General Description
Data No.
Use this Memory Block to specify the time, in seconds or minutes, between the
19
Automated Attendant Delay Announcement messages.
PC Programming
Display
¦+ AU
Data
Setting
No.
Title
Data
Page
1 9 : 1 S T
I N T R
4 m | 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
0s
10s 20s
30s
1m 2m
3m 4m
The shaded
Page 2
selection is the
default.
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
5m
10m 20m

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK4 +JJAIto access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the interval time.
Default Values
Example: To change 4 minutes to 10 seconds, press CO/PBX LK2.
4 minutes

C
Press
to toggle between pages.
G
4
Press
to write the data and advance to the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-4-18
Automated Attendant Delay Announcement Assignment
1-4-20
Automated Attendant Delay Announcement Disconnect Time Selection
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 173

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-4-20
Automated Attendant Delay
System Mode
Announcement Disconnect Time
1
Selection
Submode
4
General Description
Data No.
Use this Memory Block to establish the time, in seconds or minutes, the Automated
20
Attendant rings the station before disconnecting the caller. This Memory Block only
applies when the Automated Attendant is set to Delay Announcement Mode.
PC Programming
¦+ AU
Display
Setting
Data
No.
Title
Data
Page
2 0 : 2 N D
I N T R 3 0 s | 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
0s
10s 20s
30s
1m 2m
3m
4m
The shaded
Page 2
selection is the
default.
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
5m 10m
20m

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK4 +JJBKto access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the disconnect time.
Default Values
Example: To change 30 seconds to 10 seconds, press CO/PBX LK2.
30 seconds

C
Press
to toggle between pages.
G
4
Press
to write the selected data and advance to the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-4-18
Automated Attendant Delay Announcement Assignment
1-4-19
Automated Attendant 1st to 2nd Delay Announcement Interval Time Selection
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 174
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-4-21
Automated Attendant Extension
System Mode
Number Assignment
1
Submode
General Description
4
Use this Memory Block to specify the Automated Attendant message to be played
Data No.
when a DID call is received.
21
Display
PC Programming
Data
AA MSG
Setting
No.
Title
1~8
Data
¦+ AU
2 1 : A A
M S G
1 =
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK4 +JJBAto access the Memory Block.
3
Enter Setting Data using the dial pad for AA MSG 1.
Default Values

Use the following:
No Message Specified
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K ~ Ito enter numeric data
2-Digit Station Number: 10~89
3-Digit Station Number: 100~899
4-Digit Station Number: 1000~8999
H

to clear all data when cursor is at setting position
G
4
Press
to write the data and advance to the next AA MSG.
5
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each AA MSG. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
6
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-46,47
Access Code (1-Digit, 2-Digit) Assignment
1-2-03
2-, 3-, or 4-Digit Station Number Selection

Notes

This number is the same as Extension Number, CAR key number, and ACD/UCD/SCD. Pilot number cannot be
assigned.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 175

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-4-22
Automated Attendant Direct
System Mode
Extension Ring Assignment
1
Submode
General Description
4
Use this Memory Block to specify the Automated Attendant message to be played for
Data No.
direct transfer to the extension number.
22
Display
PC Programming
Data
AA MSG
Setting
No.
Title
1~8
Data
¦+ AU
2 2 : A A
T R F
1 =
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK4 +JJBBto access the Memory Block.
3
Use the Dial pad to enter Station Number for AA MSG 1.
Default Values

Use the following:
No Message Specified
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K ~ Ito enter numeric data
2-Digit Station Number: 10~89
3-Digit Station Number: 100~899
4-Digit Station Number: 1000~8999
H

to clear all data when cursor is at setting position
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next AA MSG.
5
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each AA MSG. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
6
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-46,47
Access Code (1-Digit, 2-Digit) Assignment
1-2-03
2-, 3-, or 4-Digit Station Number Selection

Notes

The CAR Number and AA number can also be assigned as Extension Number. When Extension Number is not
assigned, the Memory Block 1-4-08 time is followed.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 176
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-5-02
SMDR Print Format
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not all digits are printed. When ALL is
5
specified, all digits are printed. When MSK (Mask) is specified, the last four digits are
masked and printed as XXXX.
Data No.
Display
02

PC Programming
Data
Setting
No.

Title
Data
¦+AS
0 2 : F O R M A T
A L L
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
ALL
MSK
default.

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK5 to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-5-13
Printer Connected Selection
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 177

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-5-13
Printer Connected Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to program printer connection. When the printer is not
5
connected to the system, an alarm sounds at stations connected to Ports 01 and 02.
Data No.
Display
13

Data
Setting
PC Programming
Title
No.

Data
¦+AS
1 3 : P R I N T E R
N O
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
NO
PC
YES
default.
SMDR Off
CSV Format
SMDR On
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK5 + AC to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-5-02
SMDR Print Format
1-5-14
Printer Line Feed Control Selection
1-5-25
SMDR Valid Call Time Assignment
1-8-35
COM Port Baud Rate Setting Assignment
1-8-36
COM Port Parity/Stop Bit Setting Assignment

Notes

When PC is assigned, the SMDR output data can be saved in a Comma-Separated Values (CSV) format file on a
PC. The file can then be opened using PC software (i.e., MS Excel) to analyze, filter, and/or sort the data.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 178
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-5-14
Printer Line Feed Control Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify the data format to be sent to the Station Message
5
Detail Recording (SMDR) printer. When YS is set, a return is provided with the call
record.
Data No.
Display
14

PC Programming
Data
Setting
No.
Titl
e
Data
¦+AS
1 4 : L I N E
F E E D
Y S
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
YS
NO
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK5 + ADto access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-5-02
SMDR Print Format
1-5-13
Printer Connected Selection
1-5-25
SMDR Valid Call Time Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 179

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K

Notes

Example: Settings to specify the format of communication data output to the printer.
H Line Feed control in effect.
07/03/92
09:00
08-05-12
OG 123
00:15:32
102885167537000
LCR
FWD234
12345678
H No Line Feed control.
07/03/92
09:00
08-05-12
OG 123
00:15:32
10288516753700
LCR
IWD234
12345678
(No Limit)
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 180
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-5-25
SMDR Valid Call Time Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to assign the minimum call time before the Station Message
5
Detail Recording (SMDR) outputs a record of the outgoing CO/PBX call.
Data No.
Display
25

Data
Setting
No.
Titl
e
PC Programming
Data
¦+AS
2 5 : S M D R
T I M = 0 4 0 s
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK5 +BE to access the Memory Block.
3
Use the dial pad to enter data.
Default Values

Minimum time assignment is 000 sec.
040 seconds

Time assignment can be set from 000~099 sec. in increments of 10.
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-05
Start Time Selection
1-5-13
Printer Connected Selection
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 181

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-5-26
SMDR Incoming/Outgoing Print
System Mode
Selection
1
Submode
5
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify the call records to be output from the Station
Data No.
Message Detail Recording (SMDR): OUT = print outgoing call records only, INC =
26
print incoming call records only, ALL = print incoming and outgoing call records.
PC Programming
Display
¦+AS
Data
Setting
No.
Ti
tle
Data
2 6 : P R I N T
M O D = O U T
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
ALL
OUT
INC
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK5 +BFto access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-5-13
Printer Connected Selection
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 182
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-6-01
Attendant Add-On Console to
System Mode
Telephone Port Assignment
1
Submode
6
General Description
Use this Memory Block to assign an Attendant Add-On Console to a telephone port
Data No.
number.
01
Display
PC Programming
Data
DSS No.
Data
No.
Title
1~4
Setting
¦+BTD

0 1 : D S S
1 = P
0 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK6 to access this Memory Block.
3
Use the dial pad to enter the data.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
DSS
Tel Port No.
Jto move the cursor left
L
1
>
01
to move the cursor right
K
2
>
02
~Ito enter numeric data
3
>
01
4
>
02
G
4
Press
to write the data and advance to the next DSS No.
5
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each DSS. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
6
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-2
Telephone Type Assignment

Notes

1.
The telephone with an Attendant Add-On Console connected must be specified by port number.
2.
A maximum of four Attendant Add-On Consoles can be connected to a system.
3.
A maximum of four Attendant Add-On Consoles can be connected to one telephone.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 183

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-6-03
DSS Call Voice/Tone Signal Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify whether Voice or Tone signaling is to be used first
6
when calling an extension from an Attendant Add-On Console.
Data No.
Display

03
Data
Setting

No.
Da
ta
PC Programming
0 3 : V O I C E
C A L L
¦+BTD
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
TONE
VOICE
default.

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK6 + J+J+ C.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-6-01
Attendant Add-On Console to Telephone Port Assignment

Notes

1.
To switch Voice/Tone signaling, dial 1 from a station.
2.
When tone signaling is programmed in this Memory Block, the called party cannot answer handsfree unless the
Direct Station Select (DSS) station user dials 1 to switch it to Voice.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 184
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-6-05
Attendant Add-On Console Key
System Mode
Selection
1
Submode
6
General Description
Use this Memory Block to assign functions to the Attendant Add-On Console keys.
Data No.
05
Display
DSS Button
PC Programming
Data
No.
No.
Setting
Page
No.
1~4
01~60
Data
No.
¦+BTD
0 5 : 1 / 0 1 = T E L 0 1
| 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
INT ALL
TEL01
INT A
INT B
INT C
EXT A
EXT B
NON
(Paging
(01~120)
(Paging Zone) (Paging Zone) (Paging Zone)
(Paging Zone) (Paging Zone)
Zones)
Page 2
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
IN OUT
Shaded area
EXT ALL
(Attendant
indicates
EXT C
MSG
NT MOD
TRF
CO
(Paging
Station
default.
(Paging Zone)
(Waiting)
(Night Mode)
(Transfer)
(Trunk 01~64)
Zones)
Outgoing
Lockout)
Page 3
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
RELAY 0
RELAY 1
VM
VB
DPH 1
DPH 2
(General
(General
(Live Record)
(Mail Box)
(Doorphone)
(Doorphone)
Purpose)
Purpose)
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK6 +J+J+Eto access the Memory Block.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 185

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
Programming Procedures (Continued)
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key and dial pad keys to change the data
Default Values
option:
DSS
Functions can be assigned to keys 01~60 on Attendant Add-On Consoles 1~4.
Key No.
Data Setting
No.
Functions to be programmed:
01
TEL No. 01
H
Station No. 01~120
02
TEL No. 02
H
~
~
Internal Paging Zone A
H
Internal Paging Zone B
48
TEL. No. 48
H
Internal Paging Zone C
49
Night Mode Switching
H
Internal Paging Zone ALL
Internal Paging Zone A
50
H
(INT A)
External Paging Zone A
H
Internal Paging Zone B
External Paging Zone B
51
(INT B)
H
External Paging Zone C
Internal Paging Zone C
H
52
External Zone Paging ALL
(INT C)
H
Message Waiting
1~4
All Internal Paging Zone
53
H
(INT ALL)
Night Mode Switching
54
Vacant
H
Transfer
55
Message Waiting (MSG)
H
Attendant Station Outgoing Lockout
External Paging Zone A
H
56
CO (Trunk 01~64)
(EXT A)
H
Feature Access Key with Live Record
External Paging Zone B
57
H
(EXT B)
Digital Voice Mail Mailbox Number
H
External Paging Zone C
DPH 1 & 2
58
(EXT C)
H
General Purpose Relay 0 and 1
External Paging Zone All
59
(EXT ALL)
DSS Key Number
60
Transfer (TRF)

Use the following to enter data:
J to move the cursor left

L to move the cursor right
1 2 3 4 5 6
K~Ito enter numeric data
7 8 9 10
11
12

G

to write selected data
13 14 15 16 17 18
C
19 20 21 22 23 24

to go to the next page
25 26 27 28 29 30
A to go to the previous
31 32 33 34 35 36
page
37 38 39 40 41 42
43 44 45 46 47 48
49 50 51 52 53 54
55 56 57 58
59 60

G
4
Press
to write the data.
5
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for all buttons for each DSS. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
6
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 186
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-6-01
Attendant Add-On Console to Telephone Port Assignment
7-2
Telephone Type Assignment

Notes

1.
When TEL is assigned to a line key, the red LED is used to indicate Station Status.
2.
When a function (e. g., Message or Paging) that does not require a green LED is assigned to a 2-color LED key,
the green LED does not function.
3.
Telephone number setting data for telephone sets is determined by the number of installed ESI(8)-U( ) ETUs.
4.
Message Waiting and Attendant Station Outgoing Lockout cannot be assigned on the same console.
5.
DSS/CO keys should be programmed on line keys 1~48 only.
6.
The VM (Live Record) key with Live Record has seven features:
Feature No.
Feature
00
Record Start
01
Record Pause/Restart
02
Record Erase
03
Record Finish
04
Record Erase/Restart
05
Pager
06
Record Confirmation
Each function can be assigned by dialing the Feature No. using the dial pad after pressing LK1 on page 3.
7.
Digital Voice Mail Mailbox Number can be entered using two, three, or four digits of the Mailbox number on the
dial pad. This feature is used for Live Record addressing. The Live Record feature must be assigned to a line key
on the console also.
8.
R3000 or higher is required to support Centralized BLF on the DSS Console. The Mail Box (Page 3, LK 2) key
on the Attendant Add-On Console is used to support the BLF of the remote stations across K-CCIS.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 187

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-6-07
Message Board Lamp Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to assign mailbox numbers for each Message Display Board.
6
Display
Data No.
Board
Lamp Setting
07
Data
Setting
No.
No.
Da
ta
1
No.
Data 2
PC Programming
0 7 :
1 0 1 N O N
¦+BTB
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
NON
MSG
default.
(Unassigned)

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK6 + J+J+Gto access the Memory Block.
3
Press line key to select Setting Data 1. Use the dial pad to select Setting Data 2.

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor to the left
Lto move the cursor to the right
K~Ito enter numeric data
H

to clear all data

Setting Data 2: Mailbox No.
2-digits 10 ~ 89
3-digits 100 ~ 899
4-digits 1000 ~ 8999
G
4
Press
to write the selected data. The next Lamp No. is displayed. After all 48 lamps are assigned, the next Board No. is
displayed.
5
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each lamp (01~48) and for each board (1~8). The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
6
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-2
Telephone Type Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 188
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-6-08
Attendant Transfer Selection During
System Mode
Live Record
1
Submode
6
General Description
Use this Memory Block to control the Attendant DSS/BLF transfer while the Attendant
Data No.
is engaged in Live Record. The call is transferred to either the DSS/BLF extension or
08
the voice mailbox of the DSS/BLF extension. When YS is selected, the call is
transferred to the DSS/BLF extension. When NO is selected, the Live Record session
PC Programming
is addressed to that DSS/BLF extension (no transfer).
¦+ BTD
Display

Data
Setting
No.
Title
Data
0 8 : D S S
S E L
Y S
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
NO
YS
default.

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK6 + J + J + Hto access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 189

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 190
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-7-00
Doorphone Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to enable the doorphones in System Programming.
7
Display
Data No.

Data
00
Ti
No.

tl
e
PC Programming
0 0 : D P H
A S S I G N
¦+BTP
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
Default not
assigned.
DPH1
DPH2
DPH3
DPH4

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK7 to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the CO/PBX line key corresponding to each doorphone. The LED changes to indicate the data each time the CO/PBX line
key is pressed.
CO/PBX
Off
On
Line LED
The shaded area is the
default setting.
Data
No
Yes
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-7-01
Doorphone Display Time Selection
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 191

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-7-01
Doorphone Display Time Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify the time, in seconds, a doorphone call signals a
7
station before it times out.
Data No.
This Memory Block can be adjusted in 1-second intervals (R3000 or higher).
01
Display (R2500 or lower)
PC Programming

Data
Setting
No.
Ti
tle
Data
¦+BTP
0 1 : D P H
T I M E R
1 0 s
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
10s
30s
60s 90s
default.

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK7 + KA to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the CO/PBX line key corresponding to the time assignment.
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Refer to next page for R3000 Programming Procedures.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 192
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Display (R3000 or higher)

Data
Setting
No.
Title
Data
0 1 : D P H
T M R
1 0 s
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK7 + KA to access the Memory Block.
3
Use the dial pad to enter the Data Setting for Class 1.
Default Values
Setting Data
10s
01s~99s (e.g., 02s = 2s)
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
E
5
Program the next memory block, or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-7-00
Doorphone Assignment

Notes

R3000 or higher is required to adjust this memory block by 1-second intervals.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 193

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-7-02
External Speaker Connection
System Mode
Selection
1
Submode
7
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not external speakers are connected to
Data No.
the system.
02
Display
PC Programming

Data
¦+BP
No.
Title
0 2 : E S P
C O N N
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
ESP A
ESP B
ESP C
default.

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK7+ KB to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the CO/PBX line key corresponding to each ESP Zone. The LED changes to indicate the data each time the CO/PBX line
key is pressed.
CO/PBX
Off
On
Line LED
The shaded area indicates
the default setting.
Data
No
Yes
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-7-03
External Paging Alert Tone Selection

Notes

Only three external speaker zones can be connected to the system.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 194
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-7-03
External Paging Alert Tone Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not a paging alert tone is sent on
7
External Zone Paging (all speakers/individual speaker).
Data No.
Display
03

Data
Setting
No.
Title
Data
PC Programming
¦+BP
0 3 : E S P
T O N E
Y S
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
YS
NO
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK7 + KC to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-7-02
External Speaker Connection Selection
1-7-08
External Speaker Chime Selection
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 195

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-7-04
Doorphone Ring Pattern Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to turn doorphone Off/On or specify the doorphone ring
7
pattern. Doorphones can be individually assigned.
Data No.
Display
04

Data
Setting
Tit
No.

le
Data
PC Programming
0 4 : D P H 1 C Y C L
O N | 1
¦+BTP
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1
LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
OFF
ON

A

B

C

D

E

F
The shaded
Page 2
selection is the
default.

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
G

H

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK7 + KD to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the CO/PBX line key corresponding to the time assignment.

Press C to alternate pages.

G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-7-00
Doorphone Assignment
1-7-05
Doorphone Ringing Frequency Selection
4-03
Doorphone Chime Assignment (Day Mode)
4-04
Doorphone Chime Assignment (Night Mode)
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 196
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
The Doorphone Ring Patterns are shown in the table below:
s= seconds
Line
0s
1s
2s
3s
4s
5s
6s
Pattern
Key
Tone
LK 1
Off
Tone
LK 2
On
A

LK 3
B

LK 4
C

LK 5
D

LK 6
E

LK 7
F

LK 8
LK 1
G
(Pg. 2)
LK 2
H
(Pg. 2)
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 197

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-7-05
Doorphone Ringing Frequency
System Mode
Selection
1
Submode
7
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify the doorphone ringing frequency. Doorphones can
Data No.
be individually assigned.
05
Display
PC Programming

Data
Setting
No.
Title
Data
¦+BTP
0 5 : D P H 1 F R E Q
C
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
A
B

C

D

E

F

G

H
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK7+ KE to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
The available tones are:
Tone
Frequency
Tone A
480/600 (Modulation - 16 Hz)
Tone B
480/606 (Modulation - 8 Hz)
Tone C
1024/1285
Tone D
1024
Tone E
500
Tone F
1024/1285 (Modulation - 16 Hz)
Tone G
600/700 (Modulation - 16 Hz)
Tone H
1024 (Envelope - 2 sec.)
G
4
Press
to write the data.
5
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each of the four doorphones. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
6
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 198
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-7-00
Doorphone Assignment
1-7-04
Doorphone Ring Pattern Selection
4-03
Doorphone Chime Assignment (Day Mode)
4-04
Doorphone Chime Assignment (Night Mode)
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 199

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-7-06
External Paging Timeout Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify the time allowed for External Paging before timeout
7
and release of the paging circuit. R1000/R2500/R3500 Speaker 59 uses this timer.
Data No.
This Memory Block can be adjusted in 1 second intervals (R3000 or higher).
06
Display
PC Programming

Setting
Data
Title
Data
¦+BP
No.

0 6 : E S P
T I M E R
5 . 0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the

default. Times
0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0 5.0 8.0
(No Limit)
are in minutes.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK7+ KF to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Refer to next page for R3000 Programming Procedures.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 200
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Display (R3000 or higher)

Timer
Data
Class
Setting

No.
Title
1~4
Data
0 6 : E S P T M R
1 = 3 0 0 s
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK7 + KF to access the Memory Block.
3
Use the dial pad to enter the Data Setting for Class 1.
Default Values
Setting Data
Class 1~4 = 300s
000S = No Limit
000s~999s (e.g., 300s = 5m)
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Timer Class of Service.
E
5
Program the next Timer Class of Service or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-2-00
Internal Paging Timeout Selection
1-7-02
External Speaker Connection Selection
4-71
Station to Timer Class of Service (R3000 or higher)

Notes

1.
Types of paging include:
H All Internal Zone (51)
H Internal Zone Paging (52~54)
H External Zone Paging (all speakers) (55)
H External Zone Paging (individual speakers) (56~58)
H Internal/External Zone Paging (59)
2.
Telephone ports 1 and 2 are in Station to Timer Class of Service, Class 1 by default. All other ports are in
Station to Timer Class of Service, Class 2 by default (R3000 or higher).
3.
When a system is upgraded from R2500 or lower to R3000 or higher, the External Paging Timeout Selection is
reset to the default value during the upgrade process.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 201

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-7-07
External Ring Relay Pattern Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to assign a distinctive ringing control/interval pattern to relay
7
circuits.
Data No.
Display
07
Ext
Ring
PC Programming
Data
Relay
Setting
No.
Title
(1~4)
Data
¦+BP
0 7 : E X T
R I N G 1 = P T 3
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
PT5
PT6
PT7
PT1
PT2
PT3
PT4
default.
(Continuous

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press L1 + LK7 + KG to access the Memory Block.
3
Press corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
Use dial pad keys 1~4 to specify external ring relay.
G
4
Press
to write the data.
5
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each of the four Ring Relays. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
6
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-2-00
Internal Paging Timeout Selection
1-7-02
External Speaker Connection Selection
2-08
ECR Relay to Tenant Assignment

Notes

An External Tone relay or the Night Chime relay must be assigned in Memory Block 2-08 (ECR Relay to Tenant
Assignment) before the tone is generated.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 202
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
s= seconds
Pattern
0s
1s
2s
3s
4s
5s
6s
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Continuous
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 203

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-7-08
External Speaker Chime Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify whether a normal paging alert tone (4 tones) sounds
7
before the speech path is established, a chime sounds at the start of the call, or a
chime sounds at the start and end of the call.
Data No.
Display
08

Setting
PC Programming
Data
Title
No.

Data
¦+BP
0 8 : S P K
O N
P R T
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
PRT
C-S
C-B
default.
PRT = Normal Paging Tone Before the Page
C-S = Chime - Start Only (4 Tone Chime)
C-B = Chime - Both Start and End (4 Tone Chime)
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK7+ KH to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-7-03
External Page Alert Tone Selection
1-7-09
External Speaker Chime Start Time Selection

Notes

Memory Block 1-7-03 (External Paging Alert Zone Selection) must be enabled for this Memory Block to function.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 204
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-7-09
External Speaker Chime Start Time
System Mode
Selection
1
Submode
7
General Description
Use this Memory Block only when paging alert tone (four tones) is assigned in
Data No.
Memory Block 1-7-08 (External Speaker Chime Selection). This Memory Block
09
specifies the delay time (in milliseconds) after an external paging code is dialed before
the paging alert tone is provided.
PC Programming
Display
¦+BP
Data
Setting
No.
Title
Data
0 9 : S T A R T
=
7 0 0 | 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7
LK 8
000
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
The shaded
Page 2
selection (in ms)
is the default.

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
800
900
1000
1100
1200
1300
1400
1500
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK7 +KI to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.

Use the following when entering data:
A C
or
to cycle between pages, + to go from page 2 to page 1, = to go from page 1 to page 2
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-7-08
External Speaker Chime Selection
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 205

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-8-01
SLT or Automated Attendant/DISA to
System Mode
CPU PBR Selection
1
Submode
8
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify whether the four Push Button Receiver (PBR)
Data No.
circuits in the CPUI( )-U( ) ETU are used for Single Line Telephones or Automated
01
Attendant/Direct Inward System Access (DISA).
PC Programming
Display
¦+BTI
Data
Title
No.
0 1 : P B R ( S L T / A A )
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
Default not
PBR 1
PBR 3
assigned.
and 2
and 4

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK8 to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
The LED indication changes to indicate the data each time the CO/PBX line key is pressed.
CO/PBX
Off
On
Line LED
The shaded area
indicates the default
Data
Single Line Telephone
A.A./DISA
setting.
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Notes

When LK1 and LK2 are assigned to Automated Attendant/DISA, a PBR( )-U( ) ETU must be installed in the
system when Single Line Telephones are used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 207

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-8-02
PBR Receive Level Assignment for
System Mode
Automated Attendant/DISA
1
Submode
8
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify the receiving level of the Push Button Receiver
Data No.
(PBR) at the Automated Attendant/Direct Inward System Access (DISA).
02
Display
PC Programming
PBR
Data
No.
Setting
¦+AU
No.
Title
1/2
Data
0 2 : P B R
1
= 0 3
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK8 + KB to access the Memory Block.
3 Use the dial pad to change the data option. The information that can be entered Default Values (PBR 1 and 2)
includes:
Setting Data Receiving Level
Setting
Receiving
Data
Level
00 -33.0 dBm
03
-36.0 dBm
01 -34.0 dBm
02 -35.0 dBm
03 -36.0 dBm
04 -37.0 dBm
05 -38.0 dBm
06 -39.0 dBm
07 -40.0 dBm
08 -41.0 dBm
09 -42.0 dBm
10 -43.0 dBm
11 -44.0 dBm
12 -45.0 dBm
13 -46.0 dBm
14 -47.0 dBm
15 -48.0 dBm
G
4
Press
to write the data and advance to the next PBR.
G
5
Enter next PBR, and press
to write data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
6
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 208
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________

Notes

1.
When the Automated Attendant answers, the DTMF signal level from the calling party is reduced from the Public
Switched Telephone Network (PSTN). This Memory Block specifies the minimum detectable receiving level.
Setting Data 15 is the most sensitive.
2.
PBR 1 data is for Channels 1 and 2 and PBR 2 is for Channels 3 and 4 in the CPUI( )-U( ) ETU.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 209

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-8-04
Time Display (12h/24h) Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify either a 12-hour (00:00 to 11:59 a.m., noon to 11:59
8
p.m.) or 24-hour (00:00 to 23:59) time display.
Data No.
Display
04
Data
Setting
No.
Data
Title
PC Programming
0 4 : 1 2
H O U R
D I S P
¦+BM
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
12 24
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK8 + KD to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 210
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-8-07
Class of Service (Attendant) Feature
System Mode
Selection 1
1
Submode
8
General Description
Use this Memory Block to allow or deny specific attendant features for each Class Of
Data No.
Service. When individual stations are assigned, the station user can access only the
07
features designated as allow.
PC Programming
Display
Class
Page
¦+BTS
Data
No.
No.
No.
Title
(00~15)
(1~3)
0 7 : C L S 1
( 0 0 )
| 0 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
Automatic
Automated
Night Mode
System
Trunk-to-
Night Mode
Attendant/
Switching Per
Speed Dial
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Trunk
Switching
DISA Set/
Tenant
Programming
Transfer Set/
Reset Mode
Reset
Page 2

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
Forced
Timed Alarm Call Forward
Password
System-Wide
Account
Default not
for Single
Set/Reset
(Outgoing
DISA
DISA
Weekend
Reset
Code/
assigned.
Line
from
Restriction)
Password
Password
Mode Per
Refer to Note
Authorization
Telephone
Destination
Refer to Note
Cancel
Confirmation
Tenant
1
Code
Set/Reset
Station
2
Programming
Page 3

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
CO VM
Terminal
Callback
Exchange
Telephone
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Mode Set
Number
Programming
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 211

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK8 + KG to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to enter data.
The LED indication changes to indicate the data each time a CO/PBX line key is pressed.
CO/PBX
Off
On
Line Key LED
The shaded area indicates
the default setting.
Data
Deny
Allow

Use the following when entering data:
C
Press
to go to the next page.
Press A to go to the previous page.
G
4
Press
key. Data for Class 01 ~ 15 is displayed successively.
G
5
Press
to write the data for Class 15. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
6
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-8-08
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
4-17
Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment

Notes

1.
System-Wide Reset selection resets the following: Call Forward All Call, Do Not Disturb, Customized Message,
and Callback Request.
2.
Password (Outgoing Restriction) selection cancels Station Lockout and default password for another station.
3.
Sixteen Classes (00 ~ 15) of feature restriction patterns allow a station user to activate particular features while
restricting others.
4.
At default, stations 100 and 101 are in class 00. All other stations are in class 15.
5.
Stations are assigned to a Class of Service in Memory Block 4-17 (Station to Class of Service Feature
Assignment).
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 212
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Classes 00 ~ 15 are programmed in this Memory Block as feature restriction classes. In Memory Block 4-17 (Station to
Class of Service Feature Assignment) specify any class of service for each telephone to assign features the user can/
cannot activate.
Corresponding
Default
Default
CO/PBX Line
Function Name
Class 00
Class 01 ~ 15
Key
Page 1
LK1
Night Mode Switching (System-Wide))
Allow
Deny
LK2
Night Mode Switching (Tenant)
Allow
Deny
LK3
System Speed Dial Programming
Allow
Deny
LK4
Not Used
N/A
N/A
LK5
Not Used
N/A
N/A
LK6
Not Used
N/A
N/A
LK7
Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer (Set/Reset) and programming of
Allow
Deny
Outgoing Numbers
LK8
Automated Attendant/DISA Mode (Set/Reset)
Allow
Deny
Page 2
LK1
Timed Alarm (Set/Reset) for Single Line Telephones (From Attendant)
Allow
Deny
LK2
Call Forward All Call (Set/Reset) from Destination Station, Call
Allow
Deny
Forward CAR Keys, Call Forward All Call Set, and Call
Forward Busy/No Answer set
LK3
System-Wide Reset of Timed Alarm, Call Forward All Call, Do Not
Deny
Deny
Disturb, Customized Message, and Callback Request
LK4
Cancel Station Lockout and Default Password for another Station
Allow
Deny
LK5
DISA Password Cancel
Allow
Deny
LK6
DISA Password Confirmation
Allow
Deny
LK7
Automated Attendant Weekend Mode (Set/Reset) Tenant
Allow
Deny
LK8
Forced Account Code/Authorization Code Programming
Allow
Deny
Page 3
LK1
Terminal Exchange Mode Set
Allow
Deny
LK2
CO VM Callback Telephone Number Programming (R2000 or higher)
Allow
Deny
LK3~LK8
Not Used
N/A
N/A
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 213

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-8-08
Class of Service (Station) Feature
System Mode
Selection 2
1
Submode
8
General Description
Use this Memory Block to allow or deny specific station features for each Class of
Data No.
Service. When individual stations are assigned, the station user can access only the
08
features specified as allow.
PC Programming
Display
Class
¦+BTS
Data
No.
Page No
No.
Title
(00~15)
(1~6)
0 8 : C L S 2
( 0 0 )
| 0 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Call Forward
Voice /
Barge-In
Timed Alarm
General
All Call,
Trunk
Automatic
Barge-In
Tone
Receive
Set/Cancel
Purpose
DND, Break
Queuing
Callback
(Calling Party)
Override
(Called Party)
From SLT
Relay
Mode
(Originate)
Page 2
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Station
Call Forward
Absence
Callback
VRS Voice
DISA
Outgoing
Not Used
Busy/No
Not Used
Message
Request Set
Message
Password Set
Lockout Set
Answer Set
Default not
Page 3
assigned.
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
User Ringing
Digit
Voice/Tone
Station Trunk-
Line
LCR/ARS
Account Code
Restriction
Call Alert
Not Used
Override
to-Trunk
Preference
Bypass
Entry
Time
Notification
(Receive)
Transfer
Set/Reset
Selection
Page 4
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
DSS Key
ANI/Caller ID
LCR/ARS
Live Record Auto Record
BGM
Unsupervised
Transfer
ANI/Caller ID
Number
Recall
Allow/Deny
Allow/Deny
Selection
Conference
Operation
Selection
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 214
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Page 5
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Forced
Group
Set Call
Pre-Set
ANI/Caller ID
Account Code
Station
Live
Listening
Forward Off
Dialing
Display
Not Used
/Authorization
Relocation
Monitoring
Selection
-Premise
Allow/Deny
Selection
Code
Page 6
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Unverified for
Saved
VMS
Forced
Caller ID for
Call Monitor
Call Monitor
Caller ID
ARS Overflow
Message
Account Code
Not Used
K-CCIS
(Originate)
(Receive)
missed
Indication
/Authorization
call Info.
Code
Page 7
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Send
Caller ID to
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
SLT
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK8 + KH to access the Memory Block.
3
Use the dial pad to enter Class No.

Use the following to enter Class No:
K~Ito enter numeric data
Jto move cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
4
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to allow or deny the feature selection.
The LED indication changes to indicate data each time CO/PBX line key is pressed.
CO/PBX
Off
On
Line Key LED
Data
Deny Allow
C
Press
to go to the next page.
Press A to go back to the previous page.
G
5
Press
key to transfer data.
6
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each Class. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
7
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-8-07
Class of Service (Attendant) Feature Selection 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 215

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
4-17
Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment

Notes

1.
Sixteen Classes (00 ~ 15) of feature restriction patterns allow a station user to activate particular features while
restricting others.
2.
At default, all stations are in Class 00.
3.
Stations are assigned to a Class of Service in Memory Block 4-17 (Station to Class of Service Feature
Assignment).
4.
LCR/ARS Bypass (Page 3, LK 4) applies only when the station is assigned to an LCR/ARS Class (1~4) in
Memory Block 4-40 (LCR Class Selection). LCR/ARS Bypass does not apply when using access codes to
directly access an ARS Table (functions 601~604 ARS Tables 1~4) in Memory Blocks 1-1-46~48 [Access
Code (1/2/3-Digit) Assignment].
5.
ARS Overflow (Page 6, LK 1) allows or restricts access to Trunk Group 01 when the first priority trunk group
(programmed route) is busy.
6.
When the SLIB(4)-U( ) ETU is used, and a change is made to Pg 7 LK1 (Send Caller ID to SLT), reset may be
required for proper functionality.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 216
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Corresponding
Default
Default
CO/PBX
Function Name
Class 00
Class 01 ~ 15
Line Key
Page 1
LK1
Set Call Forward All Call, Do Not Disturb (DND), Break Mode
Allow
Deny
LK2
Trunk Queuing
Allow
Deny
LK3
Automatic Callback
Allow
Deny
LK4
Barge-In Originate on a CO/PBX Line (Calling Party)
Deny
Deny
LK5
Barge-In Receive (Called Party)
Allow
Deny
LK6
Timed Alarm (Set/Cancel) From SLT
Allow
Deny
LK7
General Purpose Relay
Allow
Deny
LK8
Voice Override/Tone Override Originate
Allow
Deny
Page 2
LK1
Absence Message
Allow
Deny
LK2
Callback Request Originate
Allow
Deny
LK3
Station Outgoing Lockout (Set/Cancel)
Allow
Deny
LK4
Not Used
N/A
N/A
LK5
Call Forward Busy/ No Answer Set
Allow
Deny
LK6
VRS Voice Message Record/Verify/Erase
Allow
Deny
LK7
Not Used
N/A
N/A
LK8
DISA Password Set
Allow
Deny
Page 3
LK1
Not Used
N/A
N/A
LK2
User Ringing Line Preference Set/Reset
Allow
Deny
LK3
Voice/Tone Override/Camp-On Receive
Allow
Deny
LK4
LCR/ARS Bypass (Trunk Groups 02~32)
De ny
Deny
LK5
Station Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
Deny
Deny
LK6
Account Code Entry
Deny
Deny
LK7
Digit Restriction Time Selection
Allow
Allow
LK8
Call Alert Notification for DIT and DID
Allow
Deny
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 217

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
Corresponding
Default
Default
CO/PBX
Function Name
Class 00
Class 01 ~ 15
Line Key
Page 4
LK1
LCR/ARS Recall
Allow
Deny
LK2
DSS Key Transfer Operation
Deny
Deny
LK3
ANI/Caller ID
Deny
Deny
LK4
ANI/Caller ID Number/Name Selection
Deny
Deny
When deny is set, Name is displayed if Name and number are received.
When allow is set, Number is displayed if Name and number are
received.
LK5
Live Record Allow/Deny (Memory Block 1-8-26 must be set.)
Deny
Deny
LK6
Auto Record Allow/Deny (LK5 must be on, and Memory Block 1-8-26
Deny
Deny
must be set.)
LK7
BGM Selection
Allow
Deny
LK8
Unsupervised Conference
Deny
Deny
Page 5
LK1
Forced Account Code/Authorization Code
Deny
Deny
LK2
Group Listening Selection
Deny
Deny
LK3
Station Relocation
Allow
Deny
LK4
Set Call Forward Off- Premise (Related to Page 1 LK1 and Page 2
Deny
Deny
LK5).
LK5
Pre-Set Dialing (Allow/Deny)
Deny
Deny
LK6
Live Monitoring
Deny
Deny
LK7
Caller ID Display Selection
Deny
Deny
If allow is set, Caller ID Name and Number display at the same time.
LK8
Not Used
N/A
N/A
Page 6
LK1
ARS Overflow
Deny
Deny
LK2
Voice Mail Message Indication on Line Keys
Deny
Deny
LK3
Unverified for Forced Account Code/Authorization Code
Deny
Deny
Deny means Verified; Allow means Unverified
LK4
Not Used
N/A
N/A
LK5
Caller ID for K-CCIS
Allow
Deny
LK6
Call Monitor (Originate) (R2000 or higher)
Deny
Deny
LK7
Call Monitor( Receive) (R2000 or higher)
Allow
Deny
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 218
Memory Blocks

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-8-09
Music on Hold Pattern Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify the Music on Hold pattern.
8
Display
Data No.
Data
Setting
09
No.
Data
Title
PC Programming
0 9 : M O H
= A
¦+BCS
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
A
B
default.

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK8 +KI to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-8-31
Hold Tone Source Assignment
1-8-32
Hold Interval Tone Volume Selection

Notes

1.
Music on Hold can be provided to CO/PBX and intercom calls that are placed on hold.
2.
One of two melodies can be selected (R2500 or lower):
A = American Folk Song Medley
B = Christmas Song Medley
3.
For R3000 or higher, the internal Music on hold source for CPUI( )-U10 ETU Lot 3XXX or higher and
CPUI( )-U20 ETU provides the following options:
A = Hold Tone (default)
B = American Folk Song Medley
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 220
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-8-10
PBR Interdigit Release Time Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify the interdigit release time for the Push Button
8
Receiver (PBR).
Data No.
Display
10
Data
Setting
PC Programming
No.
Title
Data
¦+BM
1 0 : P B R
R E L E A S
7 s
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
3s
4s
5s
6s
7s
8s
9s
10s
default.

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK8 + AK to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-3-03
First Digit PBR Release Time Selection
1-8-01
SLT or Automated Attendant/DISA to CPU PBR Selection

Notes

A DTMF Single Line Telephone connected to the Electra Elite IPK system must be supported by a PBR that
receives DTMF signals.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 221

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
Off-hook
Specified Time: 10 sec. Default
Dial Tone is sent (PBR connected)
Memory Block 1-3-03
9
Dial the first digit.
Specified Time: 7 sec. Default
Memory Block 1-8-10
7
Dial the second digit.
Specified Time: 7 sec. Default
Memory Block 1-8-10
5
Dial the third digit.
When the PBR is not detected in the specified time,
3
PBR is released.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 222
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-8-11
System Refresh Time Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to assign the System Refresh Time during idle periods.
8
Display
Data No.
Data
Setting
11
No.
Title
Data
PC Programming
1 1 : R E F R E S H
4 H
¦+BM
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
NON
4H
8H
12H
24H
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK8 + AA to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Notes

The system automatically refreshes itself during idle periods based on the time specified in this Memory Block.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 223

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-8-12
VRS Message Recording Time
System Mode
Selection
1
Submode
8
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify the recording time and number of messages for
Data No.
each Voice Recording Service (VRS) channel.
12
Display
PC Programming
Data
VRS
Setting
No.
Chan.
¦+AR
Title
Data
1 2 : V R S 1
1 5 s
x 1 6
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
15s x16
30s x 8
60s x 4
120s x 2
default.

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK8 + AB to access the Memory Block.
3
Press corresponding CO/PBX line key to change data option.
Default Values

Use the following to enter VRS Channel:
All VRS Channels
K
Recording Time = 15 seconds,
~Hto enter numeric data
16 messages
G
4
Press
to write the data and advance to the next VRS Channel.
5
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each of the seven remaining VRS channels. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
6
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Notes

Voice Recording Services Channel 1 has 240 seconds for message recording. The number of messages that
can be recorded depends on message length. Divide 240 by the message length to obtain the number.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 224
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-8-13
VRS Message Function Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to assign the recorded voice prompt Delay Announcement/
8
Automated Attendant Message to the Voice Recording Service (VRS) Message
number. Refer to Memory Block 1-8-12 (VRS Message Recording Time Selection).
Data No.
Display
13
VRS
PC Programming
Channel Message
Data
No.
Setting
Title
(1~8)
No.
Page
¦+AR
No.
(1~16)
Data
No.
1 3 : V R S 1 / 0 1 = N O N | 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
M1
M2
V1
V2
NON
(Delay
(Delay
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
(Voice Prompt) (Voice Prompt)
message)
message)
Page 2

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
(Day A A)
(Day A A)
(Day A A)
(Day A A)
(Day A A)
(Day A A)
(Day A A)
(Day A A)
The shaded
selection is the
Page 3
default.

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
N1
N2
N3
N4
N5
N6
N7
N8
(Night A A)
(Night A A)
(Night A A)
(Night A A)
(Night A A)
(Night A A)
(Night A A)
(Night A A)
Page 4

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
W1
W2
W3
W4
W5
W6
W7
W8
(Weekend A A)
(Weekend A A)
(Weekend A A)
(Weekend A A)
(Weekend A A)
(Weekend A A)
(Weekend A A)
(Weekend A A)
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 225

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-8-15
Tone Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to assign each system tone to the flexible tables.
8
Display
Data No.
Table
15
Data
No.
Setting Page
No.
(00~12)
Tone
Data
No.
PC Programming
1 5 : ( 0 0 ) D T
=
A | 1
¦+BI
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
A

B

C

D
E
F
G

H
The shaded
Page 2
selection is the
default.

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
I

J

K

L

M
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK8 + AE to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the Setting Data option.

Use the following to enter data:
K~Ito enter Table No.
C

to alternate between pages
G
4
Press
to write the data and advance to the next table.
5
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each remaining table. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
6
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 227

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
Table
Tone
LCD
Default
Number
00
ICM Dial Tone
DT
A
01
Second Dial Tone
2DT
B
02
Special Dial Tone
SPDT
C
03
Busy Tone
BT
D
04
Reorder/Error Tone
ROT
E
05
Howler Tone
HWT
F
06
Service Set Tone
SST
G
07
ICM Ringback Tone
RBT1
I
08
Tie/DID Ringback
RBT2
H
Tone
09
Call Waiting Tone
CWT
J
10
LCR Dial Tone
SDTT
K
11
Tone Burst 1
TB1
G
12
Tone Burst 2
TB2
K
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 228
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Tone
Frequency
Intermit
Cycle
A
350/440
Continuous
B
350/440
120 IPM
0.25 On, 0.25 Off
C
440
240 IPM
0.125 On, 0.125 Off
D
480/620
60 IPM
0.5 On, 0.5 Off
E
480/620
120 IPM
F
2400
Continuous
16
Modulation
G
440
Continuous
H
440/480
2 sec On
4 sec Off
I
440/480
1 sec On
2 sec Off
J
440
60 IPM
K
400
Continuous
L
800
60 IPM
M
No Tone
Continuous
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 229

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-8-16
Voice Prompt to Tone Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to assign the voice prompt to each tone. Voice prompt is
8
provided only during the Internal Dial tone or Call Waiting tone.
Data No.
Display
16
Data
Table
Tone
Setting
PC Programming
No.
No.
Name
Data
¦+AR
1 6 : 0 1 : D T
= P R 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
PR1
PR2
default.

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK8 + AF to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change data option.
Default Values

Table No. 1: Dial tone
Dial Tone:
PR1
Table No. 2: Call Waiting tone
Call Waiting Tone:
PR2
G
4
Press
to write the data and advance to Table 02.
G
5
After entering Table 2 data, press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
6
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
Refer to individual features in the Electra Elite IPK Features and Specifications Manual.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 230
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-8-17
PC Programming Password
System Mode
Assignment
1
Submode
8
General Description
Use this Memory Block to assign system passwords that must be entered when
Data No.
connecting to the system using SAT PC Programming.
17
Display
PC Programming
Class
Data
Setting
No.
No.
Data
1,2
¦+CSP
1 7 : ( 1 ) =
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK8 + AG to access the Memory Block.
3
Use the following to enter Class 1 (Technician Mode) and password (8 digits max.).
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
Class 1, 2 All Blank
K~Ito enter numeric data
H

to clear data
G
4
Press
to write the data and advance to Class 2 (End User Mode).
G
5
After entering Class 2 password, press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
6
Program next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Notes

1.
Password 1 (Class 1) is used for Technician SAT PC Programming.
2.
Password 2 (Class 2) is used for End User SAT PC Programming.
3.
Password 1 (Class 1) can be assigned only by telephone programming. It cannot be assigned or changed by
Technician or End User SAT PC Programming.
4.
Password 2 (Class 2) can be assigned by telephone programming or Technician SAT PC Programming. It
cannot be assigned or changed by End User SAT PC Programming.
5.
Password 2 (Class 2) cannot be assigned until Password 1 (Class1) is assigned in the Memory Block.
6.
The password for both classes can have up to five digits.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 231

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-8-18
Site Name Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify a site name for PC Programming software to use to
8
program the system.
Data No.
Display
18
Data
Title
Setting
PC Programming
No.
Data
¦+CSN
1 8 : S I T E =
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK8 + AH to access the Memory Block.
3
Use the Character Code Table in Appendix B Character Codes, Section 1 Character Assignment on page B-1 and enter up to
eight characters for Setting Data.

Use the following to enter data:
H

to clear data at cursor
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
5
Program next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Notes

1.
When programmed, this assignment creates a directory in the PC after download is performed.
2.
System Software allows the name to be entered using the dial pad instead of the ASCII Character Code Tables.
Follow the procedure in Appendix B Character Codes, Section 1 Character Assignment on page B-1.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 232
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-8-25
ACD/UCD Group Agent Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify the Agent Station Number and the Automatic Call
8
Distribution/Uniform Call Distribution (ACD/UCD) Group Number where each agent is
assigned.
Data No.
Display
25
Agent Group
Station
PC Programming
Data
No.
No.
No.
No.
Title (1~32)
(1~4)
4 Digits (max.)
¦+AA
2 5 : A G 0 1 / G P _ =
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK8 + BE to access the Memory Block.
3
Setting data includes Group no. (1 ~ 4) and Station No. (4 digits max.) Use the dial pad
Default Values
to enter data.
Not Specified
Agent station number is one of the following:
H 2 digit (10 ~ 89)
H 3 digit (100 ~ 899)
H 4 digit (1000 ~ 8999)
G
4
Press
to write Group and Station No. and advance to next Agent number (1 ~ 32).
5
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each remaining Agent. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
6
Program next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-46
Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment
1-1-47
Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment
1-1-48
Access Code (3-Digit) Assignment
1-2-03
2-, 3- or 4-Digit Station Number Selection
1-12-00
ACD/UCD Group Pilot Number Assignment

Notes

UCD and ACD cannot be installed in the same system.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 233

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-8-26
Voice Mail Quick Transfer Master
System Mode
Hunt Number
1
Submode
8
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify a Voice Mail Master Hunt Number to operate Quick
Data No.
Transfer to Voice Mail. This Memory Block also enables the voice mail display in the
26
LCD of a Multiline Terminal when a voice mail machine sets a message.
PC Programming
R2500 or higher is required to assign a 5-, 6-, or 7-digit Master Hunt Number.
¦+AV
Display (R1700 or lower)
Data
Station
No.
Title
No.
2 6 : V M
M A S T E R 0 0 0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Display (R2000 or higher)
Data
Station
No.
Title
No.
2 6 : V M M S T R 0 0 0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK8 + BF to access the Memory Block.
3
Use dial pad to enter agent station No.
Default Values
Not Specified

Use the following to enter data:
K~Ito enter numeric data
Jto move cursor left
Lto move cursor right

Station number is one of the following:
2 digit (10 ~89)
3 digit (100 ~ 899)
4 digit (1000 ~ 8999)
5 digit (10000 ~ 89999)
6 digit (100000 ~ 899999)
7 digit (1000000 ~8999999)
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 234
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Procedures
E
5
Program next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-46
Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment
1-1-47
Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment
1-1-48
Access Code (3-Digit) Assignment
1-2-03
2~7-Digit Station Number Selection
1-2-24
Intercom Feature Access Code Assignment
1-2-34
Expanded Station Number Assignment
4-10
Station Number Assignment
4-14
Intercom Master Hunt Number Selection
4-15
Intercom Master Hunt Number Forward Assignment
4-35
Voice Mail/SLT Selection

The following procedure must be followed every time the Voice Mail
ETU is to be inserted into the KSU.
Installation Procedure for the Voice Mail ETU
1.
Verify that the battery is connected to CN4.
2.
Turn off the KSU system power.
3.
Wearing a grounding strap, place the Shutdown Switch on the voice mail ETU in RUN or, if equipped, place the MB
Switch to ON.
4.
Install the voice mail ETU in the KSU.
5.
Turn the KSU power ON.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 235

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-8-27
Forced Account Code/Authorization
System Mode
Code Length Assignment
1
Submode
8
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify the number of digits for the Forced Account Code/
Data No.
Authorization Code.
27
Display
PC Programming
Data
Setting
¦+BF
No.
Title
Data
2 7 : F O R C E D
1 0 D G T
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK8 + BG to access the Memory Block.
3
Use dial pad to enter number of digits.
Default Values
10 Digits

Use the following to enter data:
K~Ito enter digits
Jto move cursor left
Lto move cursor right

Setting Data = 01 ~ 13 digits
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
5
Program next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-46~48
Access Code (1/2/3-Digit) Assignment
Function 146 Forced Account Code/Authorization Code
Function 147 Forced Account Code/Authorization Code Access
1-8-07
Class of Service (Attendant) Feature Selection 1
Page 2, LK 8 Forced Account Code/Authorization Code Programming
1-8-08
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
Page 5, LK 1 Forced Account Code/Authorization Code
Page 6, LK 3 Unverified for Forced Account Code/Authorization Code
4-07
Code Restriction Class Assignment (Day Mode)
4-08
Code Restriction Class Assignment (Night Mode)
4-17
Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 236
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming (Continued)
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
4-64
Code Restriction Class (Without Authorization Code) Day Mode Assignment
4-65
Code Restriction Class (Without Authorization Code) Night Mode Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 237

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-8-29
SCD (Simplified Call Distribution)
System Mode
Pilot Number Assignment
1
Submode
8
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify the SCD Pilot number for each group. Any valid
Data No.
unused station number can be used.
29
Display
PC Programming
Data
Group
Setting
¦+AA
No.
Title
No.
Data
2 9 : P I L O T
1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK8 + BI to access the Memory Block.
3
Use dial pad to enter an extension number.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
Not Assigned
K~Ito enter digits
Jto move cursor left
Lto move cursor right

Setting Data = 2~4 digits
G
4
Press
to write the data and advance to next Group No. (1~4).
5
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each remaining Group No. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
6
Program next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-8-30
SCD Group Agent Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 238
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-8-30
SCD Group Agent Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to assign stations to one of four simplified call distribution
8
groups. A total of 32 stations can be assigned.
Data No.
Display
30
Data
Agent
Group
Setting
No.
Title
1~32
1~4
Data
PC Programming
¦+AA
3 0 : S G
0 1
1 =
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK8 + CK to access the Memory Block.
3
Use dial pad to enter Grp (1~4) and the Setting Data (station number) for each agent.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
Not Assigned
K~Ito enter digits
Jto move cursor left
Lto move cursor right

Setting Data = Maximum of 4 digits
G
4
Press
to write the data and select the next Agent No.
5
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each remaining Agent No. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
6
Program next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-8-29
SCD (Simplified Call Distribution) Pilot Number Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 239

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-8-31
Hold Tone Source Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to assign an internal or external Music on Hold source.
8
Display
Data No.
Data
Setting
31
No.
Title
Data
PC Programming
3 1 : H L D T
S R C
I N T
¦+BCS
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
The shaded
selection is the
INT
EXT
default.

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK8 + CA to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the MOH source.
Default Values
INT
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
5
Program next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-8-09
Music On Hold Pattern Selection
1-8-32
Hold Internal Tone Volume Selection
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 240
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-8-32
Hold Internal Tone Volume Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
When the internal Music On Hold source is used, this Memory Block can be used to
8
pad the music by -6 dB.
Data No.
Display
32
Data
Setting
No.
Title
Data
PC Programming
3 2 : H L D T
V O L
0 d B
¦+BCS
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
The shaded
selection is the
0dB
-6dB
default.

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK8 + CB to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the dB setting.
Default ValuesDefault Values
0 dB
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
5
Program next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-8-31
Hold Tone Source Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 241

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-8-33
Master Clock Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
When a DTI-U( ) ETU (T-1), PRT(1)-U( ) ETU, or BRT(4)-U( ) ETU is installed,
8
clocking must be synchronized. When this Memory Block is set for Cabinet 0 (default),
the system is set to be a Master Clock source. Programming this Memory Block
Data No.
defines the system to be a slave from its connected source.
33

When the master clock selection is changed, press the Reset switch on the CPU to reset the
system.
PC Programming
Display
¦+AD
Data
CabinetSlot
No.
Title
0~3
1~8
3 3 : M S T R C L C K
0 :
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK8 + CC to access the Memory Block.
3
Use dial pad to enter number of digits.
Default Values
Cabinet 0 (Master System)

Use the following to enter data:
K~Ito enter digits
Jto move cursor left
Lto move cursor right
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
5
Program next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Example 1: (Elite 100 is Master Clock Source)
Electra Elite
Electra Elite
Electra Elite
T1
T1
DTI
DTI
DTI
DTI
Cabinet 1
Cabinet 1
Cabinet 1
Cabinet 1
Slot 1
Slot 1
Slot 1
Slot 4
(100)
(200)
(300)
MB 1-8-33
Cabinet 0
Cabinet 1
Cabinet 1
Setting
Master
Slot 1
Slot 1
(Slave)
(Slave)
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 242
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Example 2: (The PSTN is Master Clock Source)
Electra Elite
ISDN
Electra Elite
Electra Elite
PRI
T1
T1
DTI
PRT
DTI
DTI
DTI
PSTN
Cabinet 1
Cabinet 1
Cabinet 1
Cabinet 1
Cabinet 1
Slot 1
Slot 4
Slot 1
Slot 1
Slot 4
(100)
(200)
(300)
MB 1-8-33
Cabinet 1
Cabinet 1
Cabinet 1
Setting
Slot 4
Slot 1
Slot 1
(Slave)
(Slave)
(Slave)
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card Interface Slot Assignment

Notes

1.
When ISDN/T1 or ISDN/T1 and Wireless trunks are installed, confirm that Switch SW1 is set to the proper
position on the CLKG-U( ) Unit (ISDN.PHS) and assign this Memory Block for proper Master Clock setting.
2.
When only Wireless is installed (No ISDN/T1), this Memory Block should be left at the default setting.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 243

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-8-35
COM Port Baud Rate Setting
System Mode
Assignment
1
Submode
8
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify the baud rates for individual COM ports.
Data No.
35
Display
Data
Setting
PC Programming
No.
Title
Data
¦+CSS
3 5 : B D R T
1 = 3 8 . 4
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3
LK 4
The shaded selection is the
default. Baud Rates are in
4.8
9.6
19.2
38.4
Kbps.

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK8 + CE to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to select the baud rate for each COM port.
Default Values
COM 1 = 38.4
COM 2 = 4.8
COM 3 = 9.6
G
4
Press
to write the data, and advance to the next COM port.
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each remaining COM port. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
6
Program next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-5-13
Printer Connected Selection

Notes

COM 1 = PC Programming
COM 1 = LCR
COM 2 = Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
COM 3 = Automatic Call Distribution [Not used by Electra Elite IPK Basic Port Package (48).]
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 244
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-8-36
COM Port Parity/Stop Bit Setting
System Mode
Assignment
1
Submode
8
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify the Parity and Stop bit for the individual COM ports.
Data No.
36
Display
Data
Setting
PC Programming
No.
Title
Data
¦+CSS
3 6 : P / S
1 =
N O N / 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
NON/1
NON/2
EVEN/1
ODD/1
default.

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK8 + CF to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to select the parity and stop bit setting.
Default Values
COM 1 = Non/1
COM 2 = Non/1
COM 3 = Non/1
G
4
Press
to write the data, and advance to the next COM port.
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each remaining COM port. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
6
Program next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-5-13
Printer Connected Selection

Notes

COM 1 = PC Programming
COM 1 = LCR
COM 2 = Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
COM 3 = Automatic Call Distribution [Not used by Electra Elite IPK Basic Port Package (48).]
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 245

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-8-37
General Purpose Relay Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not the General Purpose Relays on the
8
ECR-U( ) ETU are used.
Data No.
Display
37
Data
Relay
Setting
No.
Title
No.0,1
Data
PC Programming
3 7 : R E L A Y ( 0 ) = N O
¦+BP
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
NO
YS
default.

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK8 + CG to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to specify whether or not relay 0 is used.
Default Values
NO
G
4
Press
to write the data and advance to relay 1.
G
5
Press
to write the data for relay 1. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
6
Program next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-6-05
Attendant Add-On Console Key Selection

Notes

These General Purpose Relays are normally open relays.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 246
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-8-38
Modem Number For Remote
System Mode
Programming Assignment
1
Submode
8
General Description
A socket modem can be installed on the MIFM-U( ) ETU when it is installed in S1 or
Data No.
S2 of the B64-U20 KSU. Use this Memory Block to assign the extension number for
38
the socket modem.
PC Programming
Display
Data
Setting
¦+CSS
No.
Title
Data
3 8 : M O D E M
=
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK8 + CH to access the Memory Block.
3
Use dial pad to enter number of digits.
Default Values
Not assigned

Use the following to enter data:
K~Ito enter digits
Jto move cursor left
Lto move cursor right

Setting Data = maximum of 4 digits
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
5
Program next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card Interface Slot Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 247

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-8-40
ACD Hunt Time
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to assign the time for hunting among the Automatic Call
8
Distribution/Uniform Call Distribution (ACD/UCD) agents that do not answer an ACD/
UCD call.
Data No.
Display
40
PC Programming
Data
Setting
No.
Title
Data
¦+AA
4 0 : A C D
T I M E R
1 0 S
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
The shaded
selection is the

10s
20s
30s
60s
120s
240s
default.
(No Limit)

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK8 + DK to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to assign the value.
Default Values
10 seconds
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
5
Program next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-8-25
ACD/UCD Group Agent Assignment
1-12-00
ACD/UCD Group Pilot Number Assignment
1-12-01
ACD/UCD Group Overflow Destination Assignment
1-12-02
ACD/UCD Overflow Time Selection
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 248
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-8-43
Enhanced 911 Trunk Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this feature to define an available loop-start trunk as a CAMA or an ISDN PRI
8
trunk. When a user dials 911, the system seizes the E911 trunk and sends additional
digits (CESID) to enable the PSAP center to recognize the callback telephone
Data No.
number. The E911 trunk must be connected to a COI(4)/(8)-U( ), COID(4)/(8)-U( ),
COIB(4)-U( ), or COIB(8)-U( ) Loop Start port and assigned to the system. When the
43
system is installed at a K-CCIS Remote Office, the Trunk Group or Route Advance
PC Programming
Block that connects to the Main Office is assigned.
¦+AE
System Software R2000 or higher is required to select a Trunk Group or Route
Advance Block.
Display
Data
Setting
No.
Title
Data
4 3 : 9 1 1
T R U N K
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK8
The shaded
selection is the
CO/PBX
TG/RAB
default.
No.
No.

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK8 + DC to access the Memory Block.
3
Press Line Key to select CO/PBX No. or TG/RAB No.

Use the following to enter data:
K~Ito enter numeric data
Jto move cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
H to clear data
Setting Data: Not Specified (default)
CO No.
01~64
101~132
Trunk Group 01~32
201~232
Route Advance Block 01~32
System Software R1700 and lower only allows CO No. 01~64 to be entered.
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
5
Program next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 249

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-8-44
Enhanced 911 Alternate Route Assignment
1-8-45
Enhanced 911 Alternate Route Assignment (Maintenance Busy)
1-8-46
Enhanced 911 Dialing Digit Assignment
1-15-19
Centralized 911 Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-20
Centralized 911 Originating Number Selection
1-15-21
Centralized 911 Look Ahead Routing Allow/Deny Selection
4-54
Enhanced 911 CESID to Station Table Assignment

Notes

1.
Only one CAMA or ISDN PRI trunk can be assigned per system.
2.
The E911 trunk can be connected to a COI(4)/(8)-U( ), COID(4)/(8)-U( ), COIB(4)-U( ), or COIB(8)-U( ) ETU.
CAMA trunk support is provided on COIB(4)-U20 port 3 or COIB(8)-U10 ports 3 and 7 only. Other COI ETUs
support CAMA trunks on all ports.
3.
Information provided to the E911 system is called Caller Emergency Service Identification (CESID) that can be a
7- to 10-digit number. Caller ID can be used instead of CESID. The E911 Operator data base uses Caller ID or
the CESID to provide a callback number and location for emergency response.
4.
To seize the E911 trunk:
H
Dial 911 after receiving internal dial tone.
H
Dial 911 after accessing an outside trunk with a line key.
H
Dial 911 after accessing an outside trunk with an access code.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 250
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-8-44
Enhanced 911 Alternate Route
System Mode
Assignment
1
Submode
8
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify the trunk route or route advance block to be seized
Data No.
when the E911 trunk is busy. Normally, this Memory Block is left unassigned.
44
Display
PC Programming
Data No.
Setting
¦+AE
Title
Data
4 4 : 9 1 1 A L T
R T
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK8 + DD to access the Memory Block.
3
Use the dial pad to enter data.

Use the following to enter data:
K~Ito enter numeric data
Jto move cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
H
Press
to Clear Data.

Setting Data: Not Specified No Alternate Route (default)
101~132 Trunk Group 01~32
201~ 232 Route Advance Block 01~32
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
5
Program next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-8-43
Enhanced 911 Trunk Assignment
1-8-45
Enhanced 911 Alternate Route Assignment (Maintenance Busy)
1-8-46
Enhanced 911 Dialing Digit Assignment
4-54
Enhanced 911 CESID to Station Table

Notes

One trunk group or one route advance block per system can be specified.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 251

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-8-45
Enhanced 911 Alternate Route
System Mode
Assignment (Maintenance Busy)
1
Submode
8
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify the trunk route or route advance block to be seized
Data No.
when the E911 trunk is in maintenance busy or trouble out of service.
45
Display
PC Programming
Data No.
Setting
Title
Data
¦+AE
4 5 : 9 1 1
M N T
1 0 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK8 + DE to access the Memory Block.
3
Use the dial pad to enter data.

Use the following to enter data:
K~Ito enter numeric data
Jto move cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
H
Press
to Clear Data.

Setting Data: (Default: Trunk Group 01)
101~132 Trunk Group 01~32 (Default 101 for Trunk Group 01)
201~ 232 Route Advance Block 01~32
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
5
Program next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-8-43
Enhanced 911 Trunk Assignment
1-8-44
Enhanced 911 Alternate Route Assignment
1-8-46
Enhanced 911 Dialing Digit Assignment
4-54
Enhanced 911 CESID to Station Table
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 252
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________

Notes

1.
When the E911 trunk is maintenance busy or trouble out of service, E911 calls are routed to the trunk group
assigned by E911 Alternate Route Assignment.
2.
One trunk group or one route advance block per system can be specified.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 253

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-8-46
Enhanced 911 Dialing Digit
System Mode
Assignment
1
Submode
8
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify the number of digits to be sent when a call is
Data No.
originated by dialing 911.
46
System Software R2000 or higher is required to assign 9911.
PC Programming
Display
¦+AE
Data
Setting
No.
Title
Data
4 6 : 9 1 1
D I A L
9 1 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK8
The shaded
selection is the
1 11
911
9911
default.

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK8 + DF to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to assign the value.
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
5
Program next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Settings
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-8-43
Enhanced 911 Trunk Assignment
1-8-44
Enhanced 911 Alternate Route Assignment
1-8-45
Enhanced 911 Alternate Route Assignment (Maintenance Busy)
1-15-19
Centralized 911 Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-20
Centralized 911 Originating Number Selection
1-15-21
Centralized 911 Look Ahead Routing Allow/Deny Selection
4-54
Enhanced 911 CESID to Station Table
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 254
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-8-47
Call Arrival Key Voice Mail Message
System Mode
Notification Assignment
1
Submode
General Description
8
Use this Memory Block to assign the Call Arrival Key that is used to send Voice Mail
Data No.
message notification to other systems.
47
Display
PC Programming
Setting
Data
Title
Data
¦ + AV
No.
4 7 : V M M S G
C A R
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK8 +DG to access the Memory Block.
3
Enter Setting Data using the dial pad.
Default Values

Use the following:
Not Specified
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K ~ Ito enter numeric data
2-Digit CAR: 10~89
3-Digit CAR: 100~899
4-Digit CAR: 1000~8999
H

to clear all data when cursor is at setting position
G
4
Press
to write the data. Memory Block 1-1-00 is displayed.
E
5
Press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-46,47
Access Code (1-Digit, 2-Digit) Assignment
1-2-03
2-, 3-, or 4-Digit Station number selection
1-2-04
Call Arrival Key Block Assignment
4-10
Station Number Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 255

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-8-48
Automatic Daylight Saving Time
System Mode
Selection
1
Submode
8
General Description
Use this Memory Block to allow (YS) or deny (NO) the system clock adjustment for
Data No.
Daylight Saving Time.
48
Display
PC Programming
Data
Setting
No.
¦+BM
Title
Data
4 8 : D A Y L I G H T
Y S
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
YS
NO
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK8 + DH to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the setting option.
G
4
Press
to write the selected data and display Memory Block 1-8-00.
E
5
Press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-27
Automatic Day/Night Mode Switching Time Assignment
1-1-32
Automatic Day/Night Mode Switching by Day of Week Assignment

Notes

When allow is set in this Memory Block, the system automatically sets the time ahead one hour on the first
Sunday in April or sets the time back one hour on the last Sunday in October.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 256
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-8-49
New AA-Info Yes/No Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not New AA-Info is allowed. New
8
Application-to-Application (AA) Info is used with internal Voice Mail Systems
[i.e.,CMS( )-U( ), FMS( )-U( ), or VMS( )-U( ) ETUs]. For external digital Voice Mail
Data No.
Systems and VP/CTI Systems, this Memory Block must be set to NO.
49
R2000 or higher is required.
PC Programming
Display
¦+AV
Data
Setting
No.
Title
Data
4 9 : N E W
A A I N F O
Y S
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
NO
YS
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK8 + DI to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the setting option.
G
4
Press
to write the selected data and display next Memory Block or Memory Block 1-8-00.
E
5
Press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 257

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
n
__
t Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elec __
tra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
Table 2-1 Voice Mail AA-Info Settings Table
DOS Based Voice Mails
Hardware Type
Voice Mail Q Revision
Correct AA Info Type
EliteMail U10/U20
FMS Q26031 or lower
OLD
VMS Q30931 or lower
EliteMail U20/U30
ALL CMS
NEW
FMS Q05631 or higher
VMS Q00631 or higher
CMS-U30
Q11131 or higher
NEW
FMS-U30
Q21131 or higher
NEW
VMS-U30
Q31131 or higher
NEW
VMP-U30/40
Q21631, Q50131, G51231 or
NEW
higher
Linux Based Voice Mails (EliteMail CTI/LX Lite)
VMP-U40
ANY
NEW
OS/2 Based Voice Mails (EliteMail CTI/VP)
ANY
ANY
OLD
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 258
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card interface Slot Assignment
7-2
Telephone Type Assignment
1-1-46
Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment
Functions 020, 025, 027, 030, 032~034, 140~145
1-1-47
Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment
Functions 020, 025, 027, 030, 032~034, 140~145
1-1-48
Access Code (3-Digit) Assignment
Functions 020, 025, 027, 030, 032~034, 140~145
1-2-24
Intercom Feature Access Code Assignment
Function 007
1-8-08
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
Page 1, LK1 and LK5; Page 3, LK3 ON/OFF, Page 6, LK2
1-8-26
Voice Mail Quick Transfer Master Hunt Number
4-10
Station Number Assignment
4-14
Intercom Master Hunt Number Selection
4-15
Intercom Master Hunt Number Forward Assignment
4-17
Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment

Notes

Depending on the installed Digital Voice Mail system, set this Memory Block as follows:
YS
Internal CMS, FMS, or VMS ETUs
NO
Internal EliteMail VP or CTI, External ElectraMail or ElectraMail CTI
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 259

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-9-00
DISA ID Code Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify the Direct Inward System Access (DISA) ID Code
9
number.
Data No.
Display
00
ID Buffer
No.
Data
Setting
PC Programming
(01~C0)
No.
Title
Data
¦+BD
0 1 / 0 0 : C O D E
= 0 0 0 0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK9 to access the Memory Block.
3 Use the dial pad to enter the data.
Default Values

Setting Data:
If DISA ID Code is assigned as 2-digit:
2-digit DISA ID Code: 00~99 (00 no data)
ID Buffer Number 01~10 = Code 10
3-digit DISA ID Code: 000~999 (000 no data)
ID Buffer Number 11~20 = Code 11
4-digit DISA ID Code: 0000~9999 (0000 no data)
Thru

Use the following to enter data:
ID Buffer Number B1~C0 = Code 21
Jto move the cursor left
If DISA ID Code is assigned as 3-digit:
Lto move the cursor right
ID Buffer Number 01~C0 = Code 100~219
K~Ito enter numeric data
D
If DISA ID Code is assigned as 4-digit:

to access the next assigned ID buffer number or cycle back to 1
B
ID Buffer Number 01~C0 = Code 1000

+ 1, 2, 3 = A, B, or C for Port Number
and in 10s increments to 2190

ID Buffer Number:
01~99
A0~A9
B0~B9
C0
G
4
Press
to write the data. Memory Block 1-9-02 is displayed.
5
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each remaining sequential ID Buffer No. displayed after each password choice is made in Memory
Block 1-9-02.

Notes

1.
Assign 000 (No Data) for stations that are not installed or stations that are denied DISA access.
2.
This Memory Block cycles through ID Buffer Nos. alternating with Memory Block 1-9-02 password specification
for each Buffer No.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 261

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-9-02
DISA Password Effect/Invalid
System Mode
Selection
1
Submode
9
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not a Direct Inward System Access
Data No.
(DISA) Password is required. When NO is assigned, the calling party can use the
02
DISA feature without a DISA Password.
PC Programming
This Memory Block is automatically displayed after data is written for each ID Buffer
No. (01~CO for Electra Elite 192 or 01~48 for Electra Elite 48) in Memory Block
¦+BD
1-9-00. After password selection is entered, the next sequential ID Buffer NO. is
displayed on Memory Block 1-9-00. This cycle is repeated until all DISA ID codes are
assigned, and then cycles back to ID Buffer No. 1. Programming does not
automatically cycle to Memory Block 1-10-00.
Display
ID Buffer
No.
Data
Setting
(01~CO)
No.
Title
Data
0 1 / 0 2 : P A S W O R D = Y S
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
NO
YS
default.

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK9 + JB to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
Setting Data:
NO (LK1) = DISA Password is not required.
YS (LK2) = DISA Password is required. Assign with MB 1-1-46~48 [Access Code (1-,2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment].
G
4
Press
to write the data and return to the next Memory Block 1-9-00.
G
5
After last DISA ID Password decision is made, press
to write the data and return to Buffer No. 01 on Memory Block 1-9-00.
E
6
Press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
Refer to individual features in the Electra Elite IPK Features and Specifications Manual.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 262
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-10-00
Call by Call Type of Network ID
System Mode
Assignment
1
Submode
10
General Description
Use this Memory Block to send the Type of Number ID (TNI) for each Route Advance
Data No.
Block (RAB). This setting data is sent in the TNI field of the NSF-IE (Network Specified
00
Facility-Information Element) when making outgoing calls.
PC Programming
Display
¦+AY
RAB
Data
Setting
01~32
No.
Title
Data
0 1 / 0 0 : T N I
=
2
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK10 to access the Memory Block.
Default Values
All RABS
2
3 Enter data using the dial pad.

Use the following to enter data:
JandLto move the cursor
K~Ito enter data
D

to select next RAB No.

Setting Data:
0, 1
Reserved (Not Used)
2
National Network Identification
3~7
Reserved (Not Used)
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
5
Program Memory Blocks 1-10-01~09. RAB 2 for this Memory Block is displayed.
6
Repeat steps 3, 4, and 5 for all RABs. After Memory Block 1-10-09 is programmed for RAB 32, Memory Block 1-10-20 is
displayed.
E
7
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 263

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
3-03
Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment
1-1-30
Route Advance Block Assignment
1-1-46, 47, 48
Access Code (1-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment
1-10-01
Call by Call ID Plan Assignment
1-10-02
Call by Call Type of Number Assignment
1-10-03
Call by Call Numbering Plan ID Assignment
1-10-04
Call by Call Network ID Assignment
1-10-05
Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment (Service)
1-10-06
Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment (Feature)
1-10-07
Call by Call Service Parameter Assignment
1-10-08
Call by Call Max Digit Assignment
1-10-09
Call by Call Simulated Facility Group Assignment
1-10-20
Call by Call Outgoing SFG Assignment
1-10-21
Call by Call Outgoing/ Incoming SFG Assignment
1-10-22
Call by Call Incoming Type Selection
1-13-03
Call by Call Service Selection
4-12
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode

Notes

Call by Call Type of Network ID Assignment (Memory Block 1-10-00) and Call by Call ID Plan Assignment (Memory
Block 1-10-01) are sent to the network only when Network ID Assignment is made using Memory Block 1-10-04 (Call
by Call Network ID Assignment).
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 264
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-10-01
Call by Call ID Plan Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to send the Network ID Plan (NIP) for each Route Advance
10
Block (RAB). This setting data is sent in the NIP field of the NSF-IE (Network Specified
Facility-Information Element) when making outgoing calls.
Data No.
Display
01
PC Programming
RAB
Data
Setting
01~32
No.
Ti
tl
e
Data
¦+AY
0 1 / 0 1 : N I P
=
0 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK10 + JA to access the Memory Block.
Default Values
All RABs
01
3 Enter data using the dial pad.Use the following to enter data:
JandLto move the cursor
K~Ito enter data
D

to select next RAB No.

Setting Data:
00
Reserved (Not Used)
01
Interexchange Carrier Code
02~15
Reserved (Not Used)
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 265

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
3-03
Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment
1-1-30
Route Advance Block Assignment
1-1-46, 47, 48
Access Code (1-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment
1-10-00
Call by Call Type of Network ID Assignment
1-10-02
Call by Call Type of Number Assignment
1-10-03
Call by Call Numbering Plan ID Assignment
1-10-04
Call by Call Network ID Assignment
1-10-05
Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment (Service)
1-10-06
Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment (Feature)
1-10-07
Call by Call Service Parameter Assignment
1-10-08
Call by Call Max Digit Assignment
1-10-09
Call by Call Simulated Facility Group Assignment
1-10-20
Call by Call Outgoing SFG Assignment
1-10-21
Call by Call Outgoing/ Incoming SFG Assignment
1-10-22
Call by Call Incoming Type Selection
1-13-03
Call by Call Service Selection
4-12
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode

Notes

Call by Call Type of Network ID Assignment (Memory Block 1-10-00) and ID Plan Assignment (Memory Block
1-10-01) are sent to the network only when Network ID Assignment is made using Memory Block 1-10-04 (Call
by Call Network ID Assignment).
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 266
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-10-02
Call by Call Type of Number
System Mode
Assignment
1
Submode
10
General Description
Use this Memory Block to send the Type of Number (TN) for each Route Advance
Data No.
Block (RAB). This setting data is sent in the TN field of the CPN-IE (Called Party
02
Number-Information Element) when making outgoing calls.
PC Programming
Display
¦+AY
RAB
Data
Setting
01~32
No.
Title
Data
0 1 / 0 2 : T N
=
0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK10 + JB to access the Memory Block.
Default Values
All RABs 0
3 Enter data using the dial pad.

Use the following to enter data:
JandLto move the cursor
K~Ito enter data
D

to select next RAB No.

Setting Data:
0
Unknown
1
International Number
2
National
3
Network Specific Number
4
Subscriber (Local number)
5~7
Not Used
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 267

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
3-03
Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment
1-1-30
Route Advance Block Assignment
1-1-46, 47, 48
Access Code (1-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment
1-10-00
Call by Call Type of Network ID Assignment
1-10-01
Call by Call ID Plan Assignment
1-10-03
Call by Call Numbering Plan ID Assignment
1-10-04
Call by Call Network ID Assignment
1-10-05
Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment (Service)
1-10-06
Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment (Feature)
1-10-07
Call by Call Service Parameter Assignment
1-10-08
Call by Call Max Digit Assignment
1-10-09
Call by Call Simulated Facility Group Assignment
1-10-20
Call by Call Outgoing SFG Assignment
1-10-21
Call by Call Outgoing/ Incoming SFG Assignment
1-10-22
Call by Call Incoming Type Selection
1-13-03
Call by Call Service Selection
4-12
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode

Notes

Call by Call Type of Network ID Assignment (Memory Block 1-10-00) and ID Plan Assignment (Memory Block
1-10-01) are sent to the network only when Network ID Assignment is made using Memory Block 1-10-04 (Call by
Call Network ID Assignment).
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 268
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-10-03
Call by Call Numbering Plan ID
System Mode
Assignment
1
Submode
10
General Description
Use this Memory Block to send the Numbering Plan Identification (NPI) for each Route
Data No.
Advance Block (RAB). This setting data is sent in the NPI field of the CPN-IE (Called
03
Party Number-Information Element) when making outgoing calls.
PC Programming
Display
¦+AY
RAB
Data
Setting
01~32
No.
Ti
tl
e
Data
0 1 / 0 3 : N P I
=
0 0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK10 + JC to access the Memory Block.
Default Values
All RABs 00
3 Enter data using the dial pad.

Use the following to enter data:
JandLto move the cursor
K~Ito enter data
D

to select next RAB No.

Setting Data:
00
Unknown
01
ISDN Number Plan
02
Reserved (Not Used)
03
Data Numbering Plan (Future)
04~08
Not Used
09
Private Numbering Plan
10~15
Not Used
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 269

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
3-03
Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment
1-1-30
Route Advance Block Assignment
1-1-46, 47, 48
Access Code (1-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment
1-10-00
Call by Call Type of Network ID Assignment
1-10-01
Call by Call ID Plan Assignment
1-10-02
Call by Call Type of Number Assignment
1-10-04
Call by Call Network ID Assignment
1-10-05
Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment (Service)
1-10-06
Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment (Feature)
1-10-07
Call by Call Service Parameter Assignment
1-10-08
Call by Call Max Digit Assignment
1-10-09
Call by Call Simulated Facility Group Assignment
1-10-20
Call by Call Outgoing SFG Assignment
1-10-21
Call by Call Outgoing/ Incoming SFG Assignment
1-10-22
Call by Call Incoming Type Selection
1-13-03
Call by Call Service Selection
4-12
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode

Notes

Call by Call Type of Network ID Assignment (Memory Block 1-10-00) and ID Plan Assignment (Memory Block
1-10-01) are sent to the network only when Network ID Assignment is made using Memory Block 1-10-04 (Call
by Call Network ID Assignment).
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 270
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-10-04
Call by Call Network ID Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to send the Network Identification (NID) for each Route
10
Advance Block (RAB). This setting data is sent in the NID field of the CIC-IE (Carrier
Identification Code-Information Element) when making outgoing calls.
Data No.
Display
04
PC Programming
RAB
Data
Setting
01~32
No.
Tit
le Data
¦+AY
0 1 / 0 4 : N I D
=
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK10 + JD to access the Memory Block.
Default Values
All RABs Unspecified
3 Enter three or four digit data using the dial pad.

Use the following to enter data:
JandLto move the cursor
K~Ito enter data
D

to select next RAB No.
H

to clear Setting Data
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
3-03
Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment
1-1-30
Route Advance Block Assignment
1-1-46, 47, 48
Access Code (1-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment
1-10-00
Call by Call Type of Network ID Assignment
1-10-01
Call by Call ID Plan Assignment
1-10-02
Call by Call Type of Number Assignment
1-10-03
Call by Call Numbering Plan ID Assignment
1-10-05
Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment (Service)
1-10-06
Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment (Feature)
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 271

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-10-07
Call by Call Service Parameter Assignment
1-10-08
Call by Call Max Digit Assignment
1-10-09
Call by Call Simulated Facility Group Assignment
1-10-20
Call by Call Outgoing SFG Assignment
1-10-21
Call by Call Outgoing/ Incoming SFG Assignment
1-10-22
Call by Call Incoming Type Selection
1-13-03
Call by Call Service Selection
4-12
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode

Notes

1.
Call by Call Type of Network ID Assignment (Memory Block 1-10-00) and ID Plan Assignment (Memory Block
1-10-01) are sent to the network only when Network ID Assignment is made using Memory Block 1-10-04 (Call
by Call Network ID Assignment).
2.
A three- or four-digit code is used to specify the setting data.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 272
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-10-05
Call by Call Facility Coding Value
System Mode
Assignment (Service)
1
Submode
10
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify the Facility Coding Value (Service) for each Route
Data No.
Advance Block (RAB). This setting data is sent in the FCV-S field of the NSF-IE
05
(Network Specific Facility Code-Information Element) when making outgoing calls.
PC Programming
Display
¦+AY
RAB
Data
Setting
01~32
No.

Ti
tl
e
Data
0 1 / 0 5 : F C V S
=
0 0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK10 + JE to access the Memory Block.
Default Values
All RABs 00 (None)
3 Enter three or four digit data using the dial pad.

Use the following to enter data:
J andLto move the cursor
K~Ito enter data
D

to select next RAB No.

Setting Data:
PRT ETU SW1
Setting
Setting Data
Description
00
Non-CBC Route Advance Block (None)
01
SDN (Software Defined Network)
02
MEGACOM800
5ESS (Lucent)
and
03
MEGACOM
4ESS (AT&T)
06
ACCUNET (Future)
08
International 800
16
AT&T MultiQuest (900 Service)
17
INWATS
NI-2
18
OUTWATS
(Nortel)
19
Foreign Exchange (FX)
20
Tie Trunk (TIE)
01
Private
02
INWATS
DMS100
03
OUTWATS
(Nortel)
04
Foreign Exchange (FX)
05
Tie Trunk (TIE)
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 273

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
Programmi G
ng Procedures
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
3-03
Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment
1-1-30
Route Advance Block Assignment
1-1-46, 47, 48
Access Code (1-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment
1-10-00
Call by Call Type of Network ID Assignment
1-10-01
Call by Call ID Plan Assignment
1-10-02
Call by Call Type of Number Assignment
1-10-03
Call by Call Numbering Plan ID Assignment
1-10-04
Call by Call Network ID Assignment
1-10-06
Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment (Feature)
1-10-07
Call by Call Service Parameter Assignment
1-10-08
Call by Call Max Digit Assignment
1-10-09
Call by Call Simulated Facility Group Assignment
1-10-20
Call by Call Outgoing SFG Assignment
1-10-21
Call by Call Outgoing/ Incoming SFG Assignment
1-10-22
Call by Call Incoming Type Selection
1-13-03
Call by Call Service Selection
4-12
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode

Notes

SW1 is a 4-position DIP switch on the PRT(1)-U( ) ETU that is used to select the desired application.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 274
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-10-06
Call by Call Facility Coding Value
System Mode
Assignment (Feature)
1
Submode
10
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify the Facility Coding Value (Feature) for each Route
Data No.
Advance Block (RAB). This setting data is sent in the FCV-F field of the NSF-IE
06
(Network Specific Facility Code-Information Element) when making outgoing calls.
PC Programming
Display
¦+AY
Rab
Data
Setting
01~32
No.

Ti
tle
Data
0 1 / 0 6 : F C V F
=
0 0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK10 +JF to access the Memory Block.
3 Enter three or four digit data using the dial pad.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
All RABs 00
JandLto move the cursor
K~Ito enter data
D

to select next RAB No.

Setting Data:
PRT ETU SW1
Setting
Setting Data
Description
00
Non-CBC Route Advance Block (None)
01~04
Reserved (Not Used)
5ESS (AT&T)
05
Operator (Local Exchange)
06
Operator (Default-Common Carrier)
07~31
Reserved (Not Used)
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 275

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
3-03
Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment
1-1-30
Route Advance Block Assignment
1-1-46, 47, 48
Access Code (1-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment
1-10-00
Call by Call Type of Network ID Assignment
1-10-01
Call by Call ID Plan Assignment
1-10-02
Call by Call Type of Number Assignment
1-10-03
Call by Call Numbering Plan ID Assignment
1-10-04
Call by Call Network ID Assignment
1-10-05
Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment (Service)
1-10-07
Call by Call Service Parameter Assignment
1-10-08
Call by Call Max Digit Assignment
1-10-09
Call by Call Simulated Facility Group Assignment
1-10-20
Call by Call Outgoing SFG Assignment
1-10-21
Call by Call Outgoing/ Incoming SFG Assignment
1-10-22
Call by Call Incoming Type Selection
1-13-03
Call by Call Service Selection
4-12
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode

Notes

SW1 is a 4-position DIP switch on the PRT(1)-U( ) ETU that is used to select the desired application.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 276
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-10-07
Call by Call Service Parameter
System Mode
Assignment
1
Submode
10
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify the Service Parameters for each Route Advance
Data No.
Block (RAB). This setting data is sent to the Service Parameters in the NSF-IE
07
(Network Specific Facility Code-Information Element) when making outgoing calls.
Service Parameter Assignment is an Identification Number that is assigned when
PC Programming
subscribing with the carrier for the different services.
¦+AY
Display
RAB
Data
Setting Setting
01~32
No.
Title
1~5 Data 1
Data 2
0 1 / 0 7 : S P
1 = 0 0 0 0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK10 + JG to access the Memory Block.
3 Enter 1~5 digits for Setting Data using the dial pad.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
All RABs 0~000
JandLto move the cursor
K~Ito enter data
D

to select next RAB No.

Setting Data No. 1 = 0 or 1 for each entry.

Setting Data No. 2 = Three-digit code 000~127 for each entry.
G
4
Press
to write the data. Digit 2 is displayed.
5
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each remaining digit for RAB 1. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
6
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 277

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
3-03
Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment
1-1-30
Route Advance Block Assignment
1-1-46, 47, 48
Access Code (1-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment
1-10-00
Call by Call Type of Network ID Assignment
1-10-01
Call by Call ID Plan Assignment
1-10-02
Call by Call Type of Number Assignment
1-10-03
Call by Call Numbering Plan ID Assignment
1-10-04
Call by Call Network ID Assignment
1-10-05
Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment (Service)
1-10-06
Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment (Feature)
1-10-08
Call by Call Max Digit Assignment
1-10-09
Call by Call Simulated Facility Group Assignment
1-10-20
Call by Call Outgoing SFG Assignment
1-10-21
Call by Call Outgoing/ Incoming SFG Assignment
1-10-22
Call by Call Incoming Type Selection
1-13-03
Call by Call Service Selection
4-12
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode

Notes

The Service Parameter is provided by the ISDN Service Provider.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 278
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-10-08
Call by Call Max Digit Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify the maximum digits dialed for each Route Advance
10
Block (RAB). When the maximum digits are dialed, the PRT(1)-U( ) ETU sends
SETUP information to the ISDN Provider (Network).
Data No.
Display
08
PC Programming
RAB
Data
Setting
Ti
tle
01~32
No.
Data
¦+AY
0 1 / 0 8 : M D G T
=
0 0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK10 +JH to access the Memory Block.
3 Enter data using the dial pad.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
All RABs 00 (No Limit)
JandLto move the cursor
K~Ito enter data
D

to select next RAB No.

Setting Data = 00 (No Limit)
= 01~24 digits
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
3-03
Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment
1-1-30
Route Advance Block Assignment
1-1-46, 47, 48
Access Code (1-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment
1-10-00
Call by Call Type of Network ID Assignment
1-10-01
Call by Call ID Plan Assignment
1-10-02
Call by Call Type of Number Assignment
1-10-03
Call by Call Numbering Plan ID Assignment
1-10-04
Call by Call Network ID Assignment
1-10-05
Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment (Service)
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 279

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-10-06
Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment (Feature)
1-10-07
Call by Call Service Parameter Assignment
1-10-09
Call by Call Simulated Facility Group Assignment
1-10-20
Call by Call Outgoing SFG Assignment
1-10-21
Call by Call Outgoing/ Incoming SFG Assignment
1-10-22
Call by Call Incoming Type Selection
1-13-03
Call by Call Service Selection
4-12
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 280
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-10-09
Call by Call Simulated Facility Group
System Mode
Assignment
1
Submode
10
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify the Simulated Facility Group (SFG) for each Route
Data No.
Advance Block (RAB).
09
Display
PC Programming
RAB
Data
Setting Data
01~32
No.
Title
00~16
¦+AY

0 1 / 0 9 : S F G
=
0 0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK10 + JI to access the Memory Block.
3 Enter data using the dial pad.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
All RABs 00
JandLto move the cursor
K~Ito enter data
D

to select next RAB No.

Setting Data =
00 (Not Specified)
= 01~16
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next RAB for Memory Block 1-10-00 is displayed. After data for RAB 32 is entered, SFG 1 for
Memory Block 1-10-20 is displayed.
E
5
Program Memory Block 1-10-20 or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
3-03
Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment
1-1-30
Route Advance Block Assignment
1-1-46, 47, 48
Access Code (1-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment
1-10-00
Call by Call Type of Network ID Assignment
1-10-01
Call by Call ID Plan Assignment
1-10-02
Call by Call Type of Number Assignment
1-10-03
Call by Call Numbering Plan ID Assignment
1-10-04
Call by Call Network ID Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 281

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-10-05
Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment (Service)
1-10-06
Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment (Feature)
1-10-07
Call by Call Service Parameter Assignment
1-10-08
Call by Call Max Digit Assignment
1-10-20
Call by Call Outgoing SFG Assignment
1-10-21
Call by Call Outgoing/Incoming SFG Assignment
1-10-22
Call by Call Incoming Type Selection
1-13-03
Call by Call Service Selection
4-12
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode

Notes

This Memory Block specifies which RAB is linked to an SFG.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 282
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-10-20
Call by Call Outgoing SFG
System Mode
Assignment
1
Submode
10
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify the outgoing call service assignment for the
Data No.
Simulated Facility Group (SFG).
20
Display
PC Programming
SFG
Data
Setting
01~16
No.
Title
Data
¦+AY

0 1 / 2 0 : O G
=
9 9
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1 Go off-line.
2 Press LK1 + LK10 +JJBKto access the Memory Block.
3 Enter data using the dial pad.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
All SFGs 99
JandLto move the cursor
K~Ito enter data
D

to select next SFG No.

Setting Data = 01~64
= 99 (Not Specified)
G
4 Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
5 Program Memory Blocks 1-10-21 and 1-10-22. The next SFG is displayed.
6 Repeat Steps 3, 4, and 5 for each SFG. After SFG 16 data is programmed, RAB 1 of Memory Block 1-10-00 is displayed.
E
7 Program the cycle again or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
3-03
Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment
1-1-30
Route Advance Block Assignment
1-1-46, 47, 48
Access Code (1-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment
1-10-00
Call by Call Type of Network ID Assignment
1-10-01
Call by Call ID Plan Assignment
1-10-02
Call by Call Type of Number Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 283

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-10-03
Call by Call Numbering Plan ID Assignment
1-10-04
Call by Call Network ID Assignment
1-10-05
Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment (Service)
1-10-06
Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment (Feature)
1-10-07
Call by Call Service Parameter Assignment
1-10-08
Call by Call Max Digit Assignment
1-10-09
Call by Call Simulated Facility Group Assignment
1-10-21
Call by Call Outgoing/ Incoming SFG Assignment
1-10-22
Call by Call Incoming Type Selection
1-13-03
Call by Call Service Selection
4-12
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 284
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-10-21
Call by Call Outgoing/Incoming SFG
System Mode
Assignment
1
Submode
10
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify the outgoing/incoming call service assignment for
Data No.
the Simulated Facility Group (SFG).
21
Display
PC Programming
SFG
Data
Setting
01~16
No.
Title
Data
¦+AY

0 1 / 2 1 : O G I C
=
9 9
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK10 + JJBA to access the Memory Block.
3 Enter three or four digit data using the dial pad.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
All SFGs 99
JandLto move the cursor
K~Ito enter data
D

to select next SFG No.

Setting Data = 01~64
= 99 (Not Specified)
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
3-03
Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment
1-1-30
Route Advance Block Assignment
1-1-46, 47, 48
Access Code (1-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment
1-10-00
Call by Call Type of Network ID Assignment
1-10-01
Call by Call ID Plan Assignment
1-10-02
Call by Call Type of Number Assignment
1-10-03
Call by Call Numbering Plan ID Assignment
1-10-04
Call by Call Network ID Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 285

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-10-05
Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment (Service)
1-10-06
Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment (Feature)
1-10-07
Call by Call Service Parameter Assignment
1-10-08
Call by Call Max Digit Assignment
1-10-09
Call by Call Simulated Facility Group Assignment
1-10-20
Call by Call Outgoing SFG Assignment
1-10-22
Call by Call Incoming Type Selection
1-13-03
Call by Call Service Selection
4-12
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 286
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-10-22
Call by Call Incoming Type Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify the type of trunk for each Simulated Facility Group
10
(SFG).
Data No.
Display
22
SFG
Data
Setting
01~16
No.

Ti
tle
Data
PC Programming
0 1 / 2 2 : I N C O M
D I D
¦+AY
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
CO
DID
default.

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK10 + JJBBto access the Memory Block.
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.

Use the following to enter data:
JandLto move the cursor
D

to select next RAB No.
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next SFG for Memory Block 1-10-20 is displayed. The SFG Memory Block 1-10-20~22
cycle is repeated until the data for SFG 16 is entered. RAB 1 is displayed for Memory Block 1-10-00.
E
5
Press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
3-03
Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment
1-1-30
Route Advance Block Assignment
1-1-46~48
Access Code (1-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment
1-10-00
Call by Call Type of Network ID Assignment
1-10-01
Call by Call ID Plan Assignment
1-10-02
Call by Call Type of Number Assignment
1-10-03
Call by Call Numbering Plan ID Assignment
1-10-04
Call by Call Network ID Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 287

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-10-04
Call by Call Network ID Assignment
1-10-05
Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment (Service)
1-10-06
Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment (Feature)
1-10-07
Call by Call Service Parameter Assignment
1-10-08
Call by Call Max Digit Assignment
1-10-09
Call by Call Simulated Facility Group Assignment
1-10-20
Call by Call Outgoing SFG Assignment
1-10-21
Call by Call Outgoing/Incoming SFG Assignment
1-13-03
Call by Call Service Selection

Notes

Refer to individual features in the Electra Elite IPK Features and Specifications Manual for correct routing of calls for
Direct Inward Dialing.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 288
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-11-00
T1 Signal Format Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify the signal format of the T1 trunk connected to the
11
system. The signal format used (12- or 24-Multiframe) depends on the channel service
unit/demarcation (CSU/D mark) equipment being used.
Data No.
Display
00
PC Programming
DTI No.
Data
Setting
(01~08)
No.

Tit
le
Data
¦+AD
0 1 / 0 0 : F R A M E
= 2 4
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
12
24
default.
(SF)
(ESF)

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK11 to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.

Setting Data:
SF = Superframe Format (12-Multiframe)
ESF = Extended Superframe Format (24-Multiframe)
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card Interface Slot Assignment

Notes

The DTI-U( ) ETU must be assigned in the system to set this Memory Block.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 289

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-11-01
Clear Channel Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify the clear channel selection. when the Zero Byte
11
Time channel is available, the CLKG-U( ) Unit cannot extract a clock signal from the
T1 trunk. The T1 trunk modifies the Zero Byte Time channel to extract a clock signal
Data No.
for the CLKG-U( ) Unit.
01
Display
PC Programming
DTI No.
Data
Setting
(01~08)
No.
Title
Data
¦+AD

0 1 / 0 1 : O B Y T E = Z C S
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
ZCS
B8ZS
default.

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK11 + KA to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card Interface Slot Assignment

Notes

The DTI-U( ) ETU must be assigned in the system to set this Memory Block.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 290
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-11-02
Line Length Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify the distance, in feet, between the channel service
11
unit/demarcation (CSU/D mark) and the DTI-U( ) ETU. This specifies the equalization
values of the detect signal in the DTI-U( ) ETU.
Data No.
Display
02
PC Programming
DTI No.
Data
Setting
(01~08)
No.
Ti
tle
Data
¦+AD
0 1 / 0 2 : L I N E
= 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
1
2
3
4
5
default.
(0 - 131)
(132 - 262)
(263 - 393)
(394 - 524
(525 - 655)
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK11 + KB to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.

LCD
Line Key
Description
Indication
LK 1
1
0~131 feet
LK 2
2
132~262 feet
LK 3
3
263~393 feet
LK 4
4
394~524 feet
LK 5
5
525~655 feet
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card Interface Slot Assignment

Notes

The DTI-U( ) ETU must be assigned in the system to set this Memory Block.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 291

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-11-03
IP K-CCIS Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to assign the IAD(8)-U( ) ETU used for K-CCIS over IP.
11
System Software R1500~R1700 or R2500 is required.
Data No.
Display
03
PC Programming
DTI No.
Data
Setting
(01~08)
No.

Tit
le
Data
¦+AD
0 1 / 0 03 : FC RC AI MS Eo I P = 2N 4O
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
NO
YS
default.

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK11 + KC to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card Interface Slot Assignment
1-15-05
Destination Point Code Transfer Assignment
1-15-06
Originating Office Code Number Assignment
1-15-07
K-CCIS Message Response Timeout Assignment
1-15-08
Link Reconnect Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-09
K-CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop Assignment
1-15-11
Centralized Billing Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-12
Centralized Billing - Point Code of Center Office Assignment
1-15-13
Centralized Day/Night Switching for Remote Office Assignment
1-15-14
Centralized Day/Night Switching for Main Office Assignment
1-15-15
Centralized BLF Send Point Code Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 292
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-15-16
Centralized BLF Send Extension Number Assignment
1-15-17
Centralized BLF Send Time Assignment
1-15-18
Centralized BLF Display Extension Number Assignment

Notes

1.
The IAD(8)-U( ) ETU is programmed as a DTI (DTI4 or DTI8) ETU in Memory Block 7-1 (Card Interface Slot
Assignment) when used for K-CCIS over IP.
2.
Assign this Memory Block to YS when IAD(8)-U( ) ETUs are installed with one of the following applications
loaded:
IP CCH ETU [IP(K-CCIS)]
IP CCH ETU for NEAX [IP(K-CCIS) to NEAX (Point-to-Multipoint)]
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 293

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-11-05
T1 Channel Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify the digital trunk interface (DTI) channel numbers to
11
be used.
Data No.
Display
05
DTI No.
Data
Channel
(01~08)
No.

Ti

tle
No.
PC Programming
0 1 / 0 5 : C H A N E L
| 0 1
¦+AD
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK11 + KE to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to select DTI channel number.
Default Values

Use to following to enter data:
DTI No. 1 Channels 01~24 = Off
C
DTI No. 2 Channels 01~24 = Off
to go to the next page
DTI No. 3 Channels 01~24 = Off
Channel Numbers (01~24) correspond to CO/PBX line key.
DTI No. 4 Channels 01~24 = Off
Channel No.
DTI No. 5 Channels 01~24 = Off
CO/PBX
DTI No. 6 Channels 01~24 = Off
Line
Page
DTI No.
DTI No.
DTI No.
Key
DTI No. 7 Channels 01~24 = Off
1
2
3~8
DTI No. 8 Channels 01~24 = Off
01~08
01~08
01~08
01~08
1
09~16
09~16
09~16
09~16
2
17~24
17~24
17~24
17~24
3
CO/PBX
Off
On
Line LED
The shaded
selection is the
No
Yes
Data
default.
(Not Assigned)
(Assigned)
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 294
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card Interface Slot Assignment

Notes

The DTI-U( ) ETU must be assigned in the system to set this Memory Block.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 295

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-11-06
Signaling Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify Loop Start (LS) or Ground Start (GS) Trunk
11
Signaling when using T1.
Data No.
Display
06
DTI No.
Data
Channel
Setting
(01~08)
No.
Ti
tl
e
No
.

Data
PC Programming
0 1 / 0 6 : T R N K 0 1 = L S
¦+AD
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
LS
GS
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK11 + KF to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
G
4
Press
to write data and advance to the next Channel No.
5
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each Channel No. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
6
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-11-07
DTI Trunk Type Assignment
7-1
Card Interface Slot Assignment

Notes

The DTI-U( ) ETU must be assigned in the system to set this Memory Block.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 296
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-11-07
DTI Trunk Type Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to assign the trunk type (CO/E&M Tie line/DID/ANI) four
11
channels at a time. Assignment to an individual channel is impossible.
Data No.
Display
07
Block
DTI No.
Data
No.
Setting
(01~08)
No.
Title
1~6
Data
PC Programming
¦+AD
0 1 / 0 7 : T R K ( 1 )
C O
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 6
LK 7
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
CO
E&M
DID
ANI
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK11 + KG to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.

Use dial pad keys to change DTI Number (01~08).
4-Channel Unit
Block
No.
DTI
DTI
DTI No.
No. 1
No. 2
3~8
1
01~04
01~04
01~04
2
05~08
05~08
05~08
3
09~12
09~12
09~12
4
13~16
13~16
13~16
5
17~20
17~20
17~20
6
21~24
21~24
21~24
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 297

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-11-06
Signaling Selection
7-1
Card Interface Slot Assignment

Notes
1.
A DTI-U( ) ETU must be assigned in the system to set this Memory Block.
2.
When the default setting is changed to E&M or DID, the affected trunks are automatically reassigned to Trunk
Group 00. When trunks 01 ~ 08 are affected, default line key assignment for all Multiline Terminals changes to
Not Used and must also be reassigned. Memory Block 3-14 resets to second dial.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 298
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-11-08
Digits Delete for T1 ANI Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to delete the Information Digits received from the Network on
11
Feature Group D Trunks.
Data No.
Display
08
DTI
Data Block
Setting
01~08
No.
1~6
Title
Data 2
PC Programming
¦+AD
0 1 / 0 8 : 1 D E L
2 D G T
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK11 + KH to access the Memory Block.
Default Values
2
3 Use the dial pad to enter Setting Data 1 and Setting Data 2.

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter data
KA ~ KCto change DTI Number

Setting Data 1:
4-Channel Unit
Block
No.
DTI
DTI
DTI No.
No. 1
No. 2
3~8
1
01~04
01~04
01~04
2
05~08
05~08
05~08
3
09~12
09~12
09~12
4
13~16
13~16
13~16
5
17~20
17~20
17~20
6
21~24
21~24
21~24

Setting Data 2:
0

No Delete
1~9
Number of Digits to Delete
G
4
Press
to write the data. Memory Block 1-11-00 is displayed.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 299

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
Programming Procedures
E
5
Program Memory Block 1-11-00 again or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card interface Slot Assignment
1-11-05
T1 Channel Selection
1-11-07
DTI Trunk Type Assignment

Notes

Example of ANI information: KP009727517645STKP7100ST.
00 Information
digits
9727517645
ANI information
7100
DNIS Digits
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 300
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-12-00
ACD/UCD Group Pilot Number
System Mode
Assignment
1
Submode
12
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify the Pilot Number of an Automatic Call Distribution/
Data No.
Uniform Call Distribution (ACD/UCD) Group where incoming calls are terminated.
00
Display
PC Programming
Setting Data
Group No.
Data
(Pilot No.
(1~4)
No.
Title
¦+AA
max. 4 Digits)
0 1 / 0 0 : P I L O T =
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK12 to access the Memory Block.
3
Enter data using the dial pad.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
Not Specified
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data

Setting Data:
Pilot No.
2-digit (10~89)
3-digit (100~899)
4-digit (1000~8999)
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
5
Program Memory Block 1-12-01 and 1-12-02. The next Group No. is displayed.
6
Repeat Steps 3, 4, and 5 for each Group No. After Group 4 is programmed, Group 1 for Memory Block 1-12-00 is displayed.
E
7
Press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-46
Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment
1-1-47
Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment
1-1-48
Access Code (3-Digit) Assignment
1-2-03
2-, 3-, 4-Digit Station Number Selection
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 301

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-8-25
ACD/UCD Group Agent Assignment
1-12-01
ACD/UCD Group Overflow Destination Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 302
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-12-01
ACD/UCD Group Overflow
System Mode
Destination Assignment
1
Submode
12
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify the station or Station Hunt group where the overflow
Data No.
call of each Automatic Call Distribution/Uniform Call Distribution (ACD/UCD) group is
01
routed when incoming calls overflow.
PC Programming
Display
¦+AA
Setting Data
Group No. Data
(Station No.
(1~4)
No.

Ti
tle
max. 4 Digits)
0 1 / 0 1 : O V F L W =
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK12 + JA to access the Memory Block.
3
Enter data using the dial pad.
Default Values

The following are used when entering data:
Not Specified
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data

Setting Data:
Station No.
2-digit (10~89)
3-digit (100~899)
4-digit (1000~8999)
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-46
Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment
1-1-47
Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment
1-1-48
Access Code (3-Digit) Assignment
1-2-03
2-, 3-, 4-Digit Station Number Selection
1-8-25
ACD/UCD Group Agent Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 303

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K

Notes

1.
An ACD/UCD Group Pilot Number cannot be programmed as the overflow destination.
2.
UCD and ACD cannot be installed in the same system.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 304
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-12-02
ACD/UCD Overflow Time Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify the maximum time a waiting Automatic Call
12
Distribution/Uniform Call Distribution (ACD/UCD) call remains at an ACD/UCD group
before overflowing to a specified Station or Station Hunt group.
Data No.
Display
02
PC Programming
Group No.
Data
Setting
(1~4)
No.

Ti
tle
Data
¦+AA
0 1 / 0 2 : O V F T M R =
6 0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
default. Times

10
20 30 60 120 180 240
are in seconds.

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK12 + JB to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Group No. for Memory Block 1-12-00 is displayed.
5
Program Memory Blocks 1-12-00~02 for each Group No. After Group No. 4 is programmed, Group No. 1 for Memory Block
1-12-00 is displayed again.
E
6
Press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-46
Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment
1-1-47
Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment
1-1-48
Access Code (3-Digit) Assignment
1-2-03
2-, 3-, 4-Digit Station Number Selection
1-8-25
ACD/UCD Group Agent Assignment
1-12-01
ACD/UCD Group Overflow Destination Assignment

Notes

An ACD/UCD Group Pilot Number cannot be programmed as the overflow destination.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 305

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-13-00
PRT Channel Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to assign the available B channels used for PRI.
13
Display
Data No.
PRT
Data
Setting
00
1~8
No.
Title
Data
PC Programming
0 1 / 0 0 : C H A N N E L
| 0 1
¦+AN
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
Channel 5
Channel 6
Channel 7
Channel 8
Page 2

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
Channel 9
Channel 10
Channel 11
Channel 12
Channel 13
Channel 14
Channel 15
Channel 16
Page 3

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
Channel 17
Channel 18
Channel 19
Channel 20
Channel 21
Channel 22
Channel 23
Channel 24
CO/PBX
Off
On
Line LED
The shaded selection is
the default.
No (Not
Yes
Data
Assigned)
(Assigned)
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK13 to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the Setting Data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 307

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-13-01
PRT Signal Format Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify the signal format of the PRT trunk connected to the system.
13
The signal format used (12- or 24-Multiframe) depends on the channel service unit/demarcation
(CSU/D mark) equipment being used.
Data No.
Display
01
PC Programming
PRT
Data
Setting
1~8
No.

Ti
tl
e Data
¦+AN
0 1 / 0 1 : F R A M E = 2 4
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
12
24
default.
(SF)
(ESF)
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK13 + KA to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block2 is displayed.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block2 or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 309

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-13-02
Clear Channel Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify the clear channel selection. When the Zero Byte
13
Time channel is available, the CLKG-U( ) Unit cannot extract a clock signal from the
PRT trunk. The PRT trunk modifies the Zero Byte Time channel to extract a clock
Data No.
signal for the CLKG-U( ) Unit.
02
Display
PC Programming
PRT
Data
Setting
¦+AN
1~8
No.

Ti
tle
Data
0 1 / 0 2 : O B Y T E = B 8 Z S
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
ZCS
B8ZS
default.

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK13 + KB to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-13-00
PRT Channel Assignment
1-13-01
PRT Signal Format Selection
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 311

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-13-03
Call by Call Service Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not Call by Call Service is activated per
13
PRT.
Data No.
Display
03
PRT
Data
Setting
1~8
No.

Ti
tl
e
Data
PC Programming
0 1 / 0 3 : C B C
S V
N O
¦+AN
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
YS
NO
default.

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK13 + KC to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data. Memory Block 1-13-00 is displayed again.
E
5
Press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-13-00
PRT Channel Assignment
1-13-02
Clear Channel Selection
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 312
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-13-04
PRT B Channel Outgoing Priority
System Mode
Selection
1
Submode
13
General Description
Use this Memory Block to assign the Outgoing Priority for the B-channels when calls
Data No.
are originated on a PRT(1)-U( ) ETU.
04
This assignment is allowed by handset programming and SAT.
PC Programming
Display
¦+AN
PRT
Data
Setting
1~8
No.

T
itle
Data
0 1 / 0 4 : C H
S L C = H > L
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
H L
L H
default.
High to Low Low to High

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK13 + KD to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card Interface Slot Assignment
1-13-00
PRT Channel Assignment
1-13-01
PRT Signal Format Selection
1-13-03
Call by Call Service Selection
1-13-05
PRT B Channel-to-Trunk Group Assignment
5-06
Trunk Group Outgoing Priority Selection

Notes

This Memory Block applies to all firmware versions of the PRT(1)-U( ) ETU.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 313

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-13-05
PRT B Channel-to-Trunk Group
System Mode
Assignment
1
Submode
13
General Description
Use this Memory Block to assign a Trunk Group Number to each B channel or any
Data No.
Trunk Group for each B channel. Changing this assignment is not normally required
05
and default should be set. This Memory Block could be used when different trunks are
used in the same PRI span or for a tenant application where multiple tenants share the
PC Programming
PRI span and separation of B channels is required.
¦+AN
Display
PRT
Data
B Ch.
Setting Data
1~8
No.

01
~23 Trunk Group
0 1 / 0 5 : B
0 1 = T G
0 O
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK13 + KE to access the Memory Block.
3
Use dial pad keys to enter Trunk Group.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
00, No Trunk Group
Jto move cursor left
Lto move cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data

00 is No Trunk Group
01~32 are Trunk Groups 01~32
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next B channel or next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 314
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-14-00
ARS Allow/Deny Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify system wide whether or not Automatic Route
14
Selection (ARS) is allowed.
Data No.
Display
00
Data
Setting
No.
Title
Data
PC Programming
¦+AB
0 0 : A R S
N O
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
NO
YES
default.
(Deny)
(Allow)
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK14 to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the Setting Data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
3-03
Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment
4-40
LCR Class Selection
1-1-30
Route Advance Block Assignment
1-8-08
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
1-14-01
ARS Dialing Assignment
1-14-02
ARS Dial Allow/Deny Selection
1-14-03
ARS Route Table Number Assignment
1-14-04
ARS Trunk Group to Route Number Assignment
1-14-05
ARS Digit Delete Assignment
1-14-06
ARS Digit Add Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 317

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-14-01
ARS Dialing Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to assign a dialing plan to one of four ARS Tables. Each table
14
contains 128 maximum dialing assignments for the selected dialing plan.
Data No.
Display
01
Table
Data
No.
Dial
Setting
No.
1~4
No.
Da
ta
PC Programming
0 1 : 1 / 0 1 =
¦+AB
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK14 + KA to access the Memory Block.
3
Use dial pad keys to select Table number.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
None
Jto move cursor left
Lto move cursor right
H to clear setting data

Table No. 1~4 (Table Number is Class number)

Dial No. 01~C8

Setting Data:
0~9, J, ,, #, X, P, N (8 Digit Maximum)

Operation Data Includes:
Operation
Dial
Operation
Data
X
K~I, J, L
Redial + 7
P
K and A
Redial + 8
N
B~ I
Redial + 9
,
J
Redial + ,
#
L
Redial + #
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Dial No. is displayed.
5
Repeat Steps 3 and 5 for each Dial No. (01~C8) for Table 1. After Dial No. C8 is programmed, the next Table No. is displayed.
6
Repeat Programming cycle for each dial No. (01~C8) for Tables 2~4. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
7
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 318
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
3-03
Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment
4-40
LCR Class Selection
1-1-30
Route Advance Block Assignment
1-8-08
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
1-14-00
ARS Allow/Deny Selection
1-14-02
ARS Dial Allow/Deny Selection
1-14-03
ARS Route Table Number Assignment
1-14-04
ARS Trunk Group to Route Number Assignment
1-14-05
ARS Digit Delete Assignment
1-14-06
ARS Digit Add Assignment

Notes

Entries A0~C8 are 100~128.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 319

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-14-02
ARS Dial Allow/Deny Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not to Allow digits that are entered in the
14
ARS dialing assignment to be routed using the ARS feature.
Data No.
Display
02
Table
Data
No.
Dial
Setting
No.
1~4
No.

Ti
tle
PC Programming
Data
¦+AB
0 2 : 1 / 0 1
A / D
Y E S
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
YES
NO
default.

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK14 + KB to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the Setting Data option.

Use the following to enter data:
K~Ito select data
Jto move cursor left
Lto move cursor right
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Dial No. is displayed.
5
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each Dial No. (01~C8) for Table 1. After Dial No. C8 is programmed, the next Table No. is displayed.
6
Repeat Programming cycle for each Dial No.(01~C8) for Tables 2~4. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
7
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
3-03
Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment
4-40
LCR Class Selection
1-1-30
Route Advance Block Assignment
1-8-08
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
1-14-00
ARS Allow/Deny Selection
1-14-01
ARS Dialing Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 320
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-14-03
ARS Route Table Number Assignment
1-14-04
ARS Trunk Group to Route Number Assignment
1-14-05
ARS Digit Delete Assignment
1-14-06
ARS Digit Add Assignment

Notes

1.
Entries A0~C8 are 100~128.
2.
When NO (Deny) is set, the other Memory Blocks for this dialing assignment do not have to be programmed.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 321

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-14-03
ARS Route Table Number Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to assign each ARS Dialing Assignment to an ARS Route
14
Assignment.
Data No.
Display
03
Data
Table
Dial
Setting
No.
1~4
No.

Ti
tle
Data
PC Programming
¦+AB
0 3 : 1 / 0 1
R O U T E
0 0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK14 + KCto access the Memory Block.
3
Use dial pad keys to select Table number (1~4), Dial number (01~C8), and Route number (01~32).

Use the following to enter data:
K~Ito select data
Jto move cursor left
Lto move cursor right
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Dial No. is displayed.
5
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each Dial No (01~C8) for Table 1. After Dial No. C8 is programmed, the next table No. is displayed.
6
Repeat Programming cycle for dial Nos. 01~C8 for each Table (1~4). The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
7
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
3-03
Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment
4-40
LCR Class Selection
1-1-30
Route Advance Block Assignment
1-8-08
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
1-14-00
ARS Allow/Deny Selection
1-14-01
ARS Dialing Assignment
1-14-02
ARS Dial Allow/Deny Selection
1-14-04
ARS Trunk Group to Route Number Assignment
1-14-05
ARS Digit Delete Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 322
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-14-06
ARS Digit Add Assignment

Notes

1.
Entries A0~C8 are 100~128.
2.
When ARS Route Assignment 00 is selected, the call is sent to Trunk Group 01 exactly as it was dialed.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 323

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-14-04
ARS Trunk Group to Route Number
System Mode
Assignment
1
Submode
14
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify whether a Trunk Group, Route Advance Block, or
Data No.
ICM is used for each Route assignment.
04
Display
PC Programming
Data
Route
Setting
Setting
¦+AB
No.
No.

Da
ta
1
Data 2
0 4 / 0 1 = N O R M A L
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
NORMAL
TKGP
RAB
ICM
default.
(Originate)
(01~32)
(01~32)

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK14 + KDto access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the Setting Data 1 option.

Use the following to enter data:
K~Ito select Data Setting Data 2 Trunk Group Number (01~32) or Setting Data 2 RAB (01~32)
Jto move cursor left
Lto move cursor right
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Route No. is displayed.
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each Route No. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
6
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
3-03
Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment
4-40
LCR Class Selection
1-1-30
Route Advance Block Assignment
1-8-08
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
1-14-00
ARS Allow/Deny Selection
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 324
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-14-01
ARS Dialing Assignment
1-14-02
ARS Dial Allow/Deny Selection
1-14-03
ARS Route Table Number Assignment
1-14-05
ARS Digit Delete Assignment
1-14-06
ARS Digit Add Assignment
1-14-07
ARS Max Digit Assignment

Notes

1.
When NORMAL is selected, the call is routed to Trunk Group 1 exactly as dialed.
2.
ICM is used when the open numbering plan is used (K-CCIS).
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 325

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-14-05
ARS Digit Delete Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify the number of digits to delete from the Route
14
assignment.
Data No.
Display
05
Data
Route
Setting
No.

Title
No.
Data
PC Programming
0 5 : D E L E T E
0 1 =
0 0
¦+AB
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK14 + KEto access the Memory Block.
3
Use dial pad keys K~I to select Route No. (01~32) and number of digits (00~10).

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move cursor left
Lto move cursor right

If Setting Data is 00, digits are not deleted.
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Route No. is displayed.
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each Route No. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
6
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 326
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
3-03
Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment
4-40
LCR Class Selection
1-1-30
Route Advance Block Assignment
1-8-08
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
1-14-00
ARS Allow/Deny Selection
1-14-01
ARS Dialing Assignment
1-14-02
ARS Dial Allow/Deny Selection
1-14-03
ARS Route Table Number Assignment
1-14-04
ARS Trunk Group to Route Number Assignment
1-14-06
ARS Digit Add Assignment
1-14-07
ARS Max Digit Assignment

Notes

The maximum number of digits that can be deleted cannot exceed the number of digits used to route the call.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 327

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-14-06
ARS Digit Add Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify the number of digits to add to the Route assignment.
14
Display
Data No.
Data
Setting
06
Route

No.
Da
ta
No.
PC Programming
0 6 / 0 1 =
¦+AB
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK14 + KF to access the Memory Block.
3
Use dial pad keys K~I,J,Lto select Route No. (01~32) and enter the Default Values
additional dialing digits.
Not Specified

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move cursor left
Lto move cursor right
B

+Jto enter J
B

+Lto enter L
B

+Kto enter a pause
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Route No. is displayed.
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each Route No. Memory Block 1-14-00 is displayed.
E
6
Press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
3-03
Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment
4-40
LCR Class Selection
1-1-30
Route Advance Block Assignment
1-8-08
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
1-14-00
ARS Allow/Deny Selection
1-14-01
ARS Dialing Assignment
1-14-02
ARS Dial Allow/Deny Selection
1-14-03
ARS Route Table Number Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 328
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-14-04
ARS Trunk Group to Route Number Assignment
1-14-05
ARS Digit Delete Assignment
1-14-07
ARS Max Digit Assignment

Notes

A maximum of 10 digits can be added to a route assignment.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 329

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-14-07
ARS Max Digit Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify the number of digits to be collected by the system
14
before the message is sent to the network.
Data No.
Display
07
Data
Route
Setting

No.
Title
01~
32.
PC Programming
Data
0 7 : M A X D G T
0 1 =
2 4
¦+AM
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK14 + KG to access the Memory Block.
3
Use dial pad keys to enter Setting Data.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
Length = 24 Digits
J
Valid range for setting data: 01~99
to move cursor left
Lto move cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data
G
4
Press
to write the data.
E
5
Press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
3-03
Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment
4-40
LCR Class Selection
1-1-30
Route Advance Block Assignment
1-8-08
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
1-14-00
ARS Allow/Deny Selection
1-14-01
ARS Dialing Assignment
1-14-02
ARS Dial Allow/Deny Selection
1-14-03
ARS Route Table Number Assignment
1-14-04
ARS Trunk Group to Route Number Assignment
1-14-05
ARS Digit Delete Assignment
1-14-06
ARS Digit Add Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 330
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________

Notes

1.
When 00 is set for this Memory Block, refer to Memory Block 1-1-81 (ISDN / K-CCIS Interval Time Selection) for
the time it takes before the message is sent to the K-CCIS Network.
2.
ARS Max Digit Assignment applies to K-CCIS Trunk Routes routed through Automatic Route Selection.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 331

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-15-00
K-CCIS Main/Remote Office Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to activate K-CCIS by assigning a Main or Remote system.
15
Display
Data No.
Data
Setting
00
No.
Title
Data
PC Programming
0 0 : C C I S
N O N E
¦+AW
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
NONE
MAIN
REMOTE
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK15 to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the Setting Data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data.
E
5
Press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-3-01
MIF (LCR) Assignment
7-3-02
MIF (SMDR) Assignment
1-15-01
Common Signal Channel Data Speed Assignment
1-15-02
Common Signal Channel Assignment
1-15-03
Originating Point Code Assignment
1-15-04
Destination Point Code Assignment
1-15-05
Destination Point Code Transfer Assignment
1-15-06
Originating Office Code Number Assignment
1-15-07
K-CCIS Message Response Timeout Assignment
1-15-08
Link Reconnect Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-09
K-CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 333

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
Related Programming (Continued)
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-15-10
Calling Name Display Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-11
Centralized Billing Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-12
Centralized Billing Point Code of Center Office Assignment
1-15-13
Centralized Day/Night Switching for Remote Office Assignment
1-15-14
Centralized Day/Night Switching for Main Office Assignment
1-15-15
Centralized BLF Send Point Code Assignment
1-15-16
Centralized BLF Send Extension Number Assignment
1-15-17
Centralized BLF Send Time Assignment
1-15-18
Centralized BLF Display Extension Number Assignment
3-70
CIC Number Assignment
5-05
Common Signaling Channel Route Selection
1-1-05
Start Time Selection
1-5-02
SMDR Print Format
1-5-13
Printer Connected Selection
1-5-14
Printer Line Feed Control Selection
1-5-25
SMDR Valid Call Time Assignment
1-5-26
SMDR Incoming/Outgoing Print Selection
1-8-35
COM Port Baud Rate Setting Assignment
4-56
SMDR Telephone Print Selection

Notes

1.
For Electra Elite IPK-to-Electra Elite IPK Network only one system can be set for Main. All other systems must
be set from Remote.
2.
When connected to a PBX, the Electra Elite IPK must be set for REMOTE in this Memory Block.
3.
When this Memory Block is set to NONE, K-CCIS with point-to-point T1 lines does not function even when all
other K-CCIS Memory Blocks are allowed.
4.
The Main or Remote setting only applies to the Centralized Day/Night Mode Change - K-CCIS feature and only
when using traditional K-CCIS with point-to-point T1 lines and IP(K-CCIS) to NEAX ( Point-to-Multipoint) (R2500
or higher).
5.
This Memory Block is not used and has no effect on the IP (K-CCIS) feature (R1700 or lower).
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 334
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-15-01
Common Signal Channel Data Speed
System Mode
Assignment
1
Submode
15
General Description
Use this Memory Block to assign the Data Transmission speed for each Common
Data No.
Signaling channel.
01
DisplayS
PC Programming
Data
Setting
No.
Title
Data
¦+AW
0 1 : C C H 1
=
5 6 k
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
64k
56k
48k(1)
48k(2)
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK15 + KAto access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the Setting Data option.

Two adaptation rates are available with the 48 Kbps data transmission.
The adaptation method must match the rate adaptation of the clock source
office.
Data format for 48k(1) is as follows:
1
1
Data
Data format for 48k(2) is as follows:
1
1
Data
G
4
Press
to write the data.
E
5
Press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 335

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-3-01
MIF (LCR) Assignment
7-3-02
MIF (SMDR) Assignment
1-15-00
K-CCIS Main/Remote Office Selection
1-15-02
Common Signal Channel Assignment
1-15-03
Originating Point Code Assignment
1-15-04
Destination Point Code Assignment
1-15-05
Destination Point Code Transfer Assignment
1-15-06
Originating Office Code Number Assignment
1-15-07
K-CCIS Message Response Timeout Assignment
1-15-08
Link Reconnect Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-09
K-CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop Assignment
1-15-10
Calling Name Display Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-11
Centralized Billing Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-12
Centralized Billing Point Code of Center Office Assignment
1-15-13
Centralized Day/Night Switching for Remote Office Assignment
1-15-14
Centralized Day/Night Switching for Main Office Assignment
1-15-15
Centralized BLF Send Point Code Assignment
1-15-16
Centralized BLF Send Extension Number Assignment
1-15-17
Centralized BLF Send Time Assignment
1-15-18
Centralized BLF Display Extension Number Assignment
3-70
CIC Number Assignment
5-05
Common Signaling Channel Route Selection
1-1-05
Start Time Selection
1-5-02
SMDR Print Format
1-5-13
Printer Connected Selection
1-5-14
Printer Line Feed Control Selection
1-5-25
SMDR Valid Call Time Assignment
1-5-26
SMDR Incoming/Outgoing Print Selection
1-8-35
COM Port Baud Rate Setting Assignment
4-56
SMDR Telephone Print Selection
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 336
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-15-02
Common Signal Channel Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to assign a T1 Trunk to be a Common Signaling Channel.
15
Display
Data No.
Data
Title C-Channel
Setting
02
No.
1~4
Data
PC Programming
0 2 : C S C
1 = C O
0 0
¦+AW
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK15 + KB to access the Memory Block.
3
Use dial pad keys to enter Setting Data.
Default Values:

Use the following to enter data:
00
Jto move cursor left
Lto move cursor right
K~ Ito enter numeric data
G
4
Press
to write the data.
E
5
Press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-3-01
MIF (LCR) Assignment
7-3-02
MIF (SMDR) Assignment
1-15-00
K-CCIS Main/Remote Office Selection
1-15-01
Common Signal Channel Data Speed Assignment
1-15-03
Originating Point Code Assignment
1-15-04
Destination Point Code Assignment
1-15-05
Destination Point Code Transfer Assignment
1-15-06
Originating Office Code Number Assignment
1-15-07
K-CCIS Message Response Timeout Assignment
1-15-08
Link Reconnect Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-09
K-CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 337

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-15-03
Originating Point Code Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to assign the originating point code for each Common
15
Signaling Channel.
Data No.
Display
03
Data
C-Channel
Setting
Title
No.

1~4 Data
PC Programming
0 3 : O R G C C H 1
¦+AW
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK15 +KC to access the Memory Block.
3
Use dial pad keys to enter Setting Data.
Default Values:

Use the following to enter data:
Blank
Jto move cursor left
Lto move cursor right
K~ Ito enter numeric data

Point Code Range is 00001~16367.
G
4
Press
to write the data.
E
5
Press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-3-01
MIF (LCR) Assignment
7-3-02
MIF (SMDR) Assignment
1-15-00
K-CCIS Main/Remote Office Selection
1-15-01
Common Signal Channel Data Speed Assignment
1-15-02
Common Signal Channel Assignment
1-15-04
Destination Point Code Assignment
1-15-05
Destination Point Code Transfer Assignment
1-15-06
Originating Office Code Number Assignment
1-15-07
K-CCIS Message Response Timeout Assignment
1-15-08
Link Reconnect Allow/Deny Selection
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 339

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
Related Programming (Continued)
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-15-09
K-CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop Assignment
1-15-10
Calling Name Display Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-11
Centralized Billing Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-12
Centralized Billing Point Code of Center Office Assignment
1-15-13
Centralized Day/Night Switching for Remote Office Assignment
1-15-14
Centralized Day/Night Switching for Main Office Assignment
1-15-15
Centralized BLF Send Point Code Assignment
1-15-16
Centralized BLF Send Extension Number Assignment
1-15-17
Centralized BLF Send Time Assignment
1-15-18
Centralized BLF Display Extension Number Assignment
3-70
CIC Number Assignment
5-05
Common Signaling Channel Route Selection
1-1-05
Start Time Selection
1-5-02
SMDR Print Format
1-5-13
Printer Connected Selection
1-5-14
Printer Line Feed Control Selection
1-5-25
SMDR Valid Call Time Assignment
1-5-26
SMDR Incoming/Outgoing Print Selection
1-8-35
COM Port Baud Rate Setting Assignment
4-56
SMDR Telephone Print Selection

Notes

1.
Each C-Channel used must have an Originating Point Code assigned.
2.
When more than one C-Channel is used, the same point code is used for each C-Channel.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 340
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-15-04
Destination Point Code Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to assign the Destination Point Code for each Common
15
Signaling Channel.
Data No.
Display
04
Data
C-Channel
Setting
Title
No.

1~4 Data
PC Programming
0 4 : D S T C C H 1
¦+AW
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK15 + KD to access the Memory Block.
3
Use dial pad keys to enter Setting Data.
Default Values:

Use the following to enter data:
Blank
Jto move cursor left
Lto move cursor right
K~ Ito enter numeric data

Point Code Range is 00001~16367.
G
4
Press
to write the data.
E
5
Press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-3-01
MIF (LCR) Assignment
7-3-02
MIF (SMDR) Assignment
1-15-00
K-CCIS Main/Remote Office Selection
1-15-01
Common Signal Channel Data Speed Assignment
1-15-02
Common Signal Channel Assignment
1-15-03
Originating Point Code Assignment
1-15-05
Destination Point Code Transfer Assignment
1-15-06
Originating Office Code Number Assignment
1-15-07
K-CCIS Message Response Timeout Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 341

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
Related Programming (Continued)
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-15-08
Link Reconnect Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-09
K-CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop Assignment
1-15-10
Calling Name Display Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-11
Centralized Billing Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-12
Centralized Billing Point Code of Center Office Assignment
1-15-13
Centralized Day/Night Switching for Remote Office Assignment
1-15-14
Centralized Day/Night Switching for Main Office Assignment
1-15-15
Centralized BLF Send Point Code Assignment
1-15-16
Centralized BLF Send Extension Number Assignment
1-15-17
Centralized BLF Send Time Assignment
1-15-18
Centralized BLF Display Extension Number Assignment
3-70
CIC Number Assignment
5-05
Common Signaling Channel Route Selection
1-1-05
Start Time Selection
1-5-02
SMDR Print Format
1-5-13
Printer Connected Selection
1-5-14
Printer Line Feed Control Selection
1-5-25
SMDR Valid Call Time Assignment
1-5-26
SMDR Incoming/Outgoing Print Selection
1-8-35
COM Port Baud Rate Setting Assignment
4-56
SMDR Telephone Print Selection

Notes

Each C-Channel used must have a Destination Point Code assigned.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 342
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-15-05
Destination Point Code Transfer
System Mode
Assignment
1
Submode
15
General Description
Use this Memory Block to assign the Destination Point Code to the associated
Data No.
Common Signaling Channel when K-CCIS commands are required to pass through a
05
tandem system. This Memory Block is used for Centralized K-CCIS features.
PC Programming
With System Software R1500 or higher, a CCH Channel i can be assigned for
K-CCIS over IP.
¦+AW
Display
Data
Table
Point
C-Channel
(001~ 255)

No.
C
ode
1~4, i
0 5 : T 0 0 1 :
= 0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK15 + KE to access the Memory Block.
3
Use dial pad keys to enter Setting Data.
Default Values:
Press Redial + 1 to assign i for K-CCIS over IP for R1500 or higher.
Blank

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move cursor left
Lto move cursor right
K~ Ito enter numeric data

Point Code Range is 00001~16367.
T001~T255 can be assigned.
G
4
Press
to write the data.
E
5
Press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 343

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
Example: Elite 100 is Master for Centralized Day/Night Mode Change (K-CCIS)
Electra Elite IPK
Electra Elite IPK
Electra Elite IPK
10 TG 10
T1
T1
CCIS
DTI
DTI
DTI
DTI
CCIS
Cabinet 1
Cabinet 1
Cabinet 1
Cabinet 1
Slot 1
Slot 1
Slot 1
Slot 4
10 TG 10
11 TG 10
System A
System B
System C
PC 00001
PC 00002
PC 00003
(100s)
(200s)
(300s)
¤
Sys B
Sys C
CCH Channel 1
CCH Channel 1
(Attendant)
100
Sys A
Sys B
CCH Channel 1
CCH Channel 2
System A (100s)
System B (200s)
System C (300s)
MB 1-15-03 CCH1 = PC 00001
MB 1-15-03 CCH1 = PC 00002
MB 1-15-03 CCH1 = PC 00003
MB 1-15-04 CCH1 = PC 00002
MB 1-15-04 CCH1 = PC 00001
MB 1-15-04 CCH1 = PC 00002
MB 1-15-04 CCH2 = PC 00003
MB 1-15-05 Not assigned
MB 1-15-05 PC 00003 = CCH2
MB 1-15-05 Not assigned

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-3-01
MIF (LCR) Assignment
7-3-02
MIF (SMDR) Assignment
1-15-00
K-CCIS Main/Remote Office Selection
1-15-01
Common Signal Channel Data Speed Assignment
1-15-02
Common Signal Channel Assignment
1-15-03
Originating Point Code Assignment
1-15-04
Destination Point Code Assignment
1-15-06
Originating Office Code Number Assignment
1-15-07
K-CCIS Message Response Timeout Assignment
1-15-08
Link Reconnect Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-09
K-CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop Assignment
1-15-10
Calling Name Display Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-11
Centralized Billing Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-12
Centralized Billing Point Code of Center Office Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 344
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming (Continued)
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-15-13
Centralized Day/Night Switching for Remote Office Assignment
1-15-14
Centralized Day/Night Switching for Main Office Assignment
1-15-15
Centralized BLF Send Point Code Assignment
1-15-16
Centralized BLF Send Extension Number Assignment
1-15-17
Centralized BLF Send Time Assignment
1-15-18
Centralized BLF Display Extension Number Assignment
3-70
CIC Number Assignment
5-05
Common Signaling Channel Route Selection
1-1-05
Start Time Selection
1-5-02
SMDR Print Format
1-5-13
Printer Connected Selection
1-5-14
Printer Line Feed Control Selection
1-5-25
SMDR Valid Call Time Assignment
1-5-26
SMDR Incoming/Outgoing Print Selection
1-8-35
COM Port Baud Rate Setting Assignment
4-56
SMDR Telephone Print Selection

Notes

1.
This Memory Block is required for the following K-CCIS features:

Centralized Billing - K-CCIS

Centralized Day/Night Mode Change - K-CCIS

Centralized BLF (K-CCIS)
2.
Assigning a CCH i channel is used for IP (K-CCIS) feature.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 345

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-15-06
Originating Office Code Number
System Mode
Assignment
1
Submode
15
General Description
Use this Memory Block to assign the Office Code to the system when Open
Data No.
Numbering Plan is used.
06
Display
PC Programming
Data
Setting
No.
Title
Data
¦+AW

0 6 : O F F I C E
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK15 + KF to access the Memory Block.
3
Use dial pad keys to enter Setting data.
Default Values:

Use the following to enter data:
Blank
Jto move cursor left
Lto move cursor right
K~ Ito enter numeric data

The Maximum Office Code Number can have four digits and should
include the Access Code for the open numbering plan. Valid range is
0~9999.
G
4
Press
to write the data.
E
5
Press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-3-01
MIF (LCR) Assignment
7-3-02
MIF (SMDR) Assignment
1-15-00
K-CCIS Main/Remote Office Selection
1-15-01
Common Signal Channel Data Speed Assignment
1-15-02
Common Signal Channel Assignment
1-15-03
Originating Point Code Assignment
1-15-04
Destination Point Code Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 346
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming (Continued)
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-15-05
Destination Point Code Transfer Assignment
1-15-07
K-CCIS Message Response Timeout Assignment
1-15-08
Link Reconnect Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-09
K-CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop Assignment
1-15-10
Calling Name Display Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-11
Centralized Billing Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-12
Centralized Billing Point Code of Center Office Assignment
1-15-13
Centralized Day/Night Switching for Remote Office Assignment
1-15-14
Centralized Day/Night Switching for Main Office Assignment
1-15-15
Centralized BLF Send Point Code Assignment
1-15-16
Centralized BLF Send Extension Number Assignment
1-15-17
Centralized BLF Send Time Assignment
1-15-18
Centralized BLF Display Extension Number Assignment
3-70
CIC Number Assignment
5-05
Common Signaling Channel Route Selection
1-1-05
Start Time Selection
1-5-02
SMDR Print Format
1-5-13
Printer Connected Selection
1-5-14
Printer Line Feed Control Selection
1-5-25
SMDR Valid Call Time Assignment
1-5-26
SMDR Incoming/Outgoing Print Selection
1-8-35
COM Port Baud Rate Setting Assignment
4-56
SMDR Telephone Print Selection

Notes

The Access Code must be part of the Office Code Number Assigned.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 347

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-15-07
K-CCIS Message Response Timeout
System Mode
Assignment
1
Submode
15
General Description
Use this Memory Block to assign the time before a call or message request is
Data No.
canceled when no response is received from the destination office.
07
Display
PC Programming
Data
Setting
No.
Title
Data
¦+AW

0 7 : R E S
T I M E
3 0 s
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK15 + KG to access the Memory Block.
3
Use dial pad keys to enter Setting data.
Default Values:

Use the following to enter data:
30 Seconds
Use Jto move cursor left
Use Lto move cursor right
Use K~ Ito enter numeric data

Setting Data:
00 = (Infinity)
01~99 Seconds are valid times.
G
4
Press
to write the data.
E
5
Press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-3-01
MIF (LCR) Assignment
7-3-02
MIF (SMDR) Assignment
1-15-00
K-CCIS Main/Remote Office Selection
1-15-01
Common Signal Channel Data Speed Assignment
1-15-02
Common Signal Channel Assignment
1-15-03
Originating Point Code Assignment
1-15-04
Destination Point Code Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 348
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming (Continued)
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-15-05
Destination Point Code Transfer Assignment
1-15-06
Originating Office Code Number Assignment
1-15-08
Link Reconnect Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-09
K-CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop Assignment
1-15-10
Calling Name Display Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-11
Centralized Billing Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-12
Centralized Billing Point Code of Center Office Assignment
1-15-13
Centralized Day/Night Switching for Remote Office Assignment
1-15-14
Centralized Day/Night Switching for Main Office Assignment
1-15-15
Centralized BLF Send Point Code Assignment
1-15-16
Centralized BLF Send Extension Number Assignment
1-15-17
Centralized BLF Send Time Assignment
1-15-18
Centralized BLF Display Extension Number Assignment
3-70
CIC Number Assignment
5-05
Common Signaling Channel Route Selection
1-1-05
Start Time Selection
1-5-02
SMDR Print Format
1-5-13
Printer Connected Selection
1-5-14
Printer Line Feed Control Selection
1-5-25
SMDR Valid Call Time Assignment
1-5-26
SMDR Incoming/Outgoing Print Selection
1-8-35
COM Port Baud Rate Setting Assignment
4-56
SMDR Telephone Print Selection

Notes

When a response from the distant system is not received in the specified time, the system cancels the call. The
user hears Reorder Tone and CONGESTION is displayed.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 349

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-15-08
Link Reconnect Allow/Deny Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to allow or deny the Link Reconnect feature.
15
Display
Data No.
Data
Setting
08
No.
T

itl
e Data
PC Programming
0 8 : R E C O N N E C T
Y S
¦+AW
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
NO
YS
default.
(Deny)
(Allow)
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK15 + KH to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the option.
G
4
Press
to write the data.
E
5
Press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-3-01
MIF (LCR) Assignment
7-3-02
MIF (SMDR) Assignment
1-15-00
K-CCIS Main/Remote Office Selection
1-15-01
Common Signal Channel Data Speed Assignment
1-15-02
Common Signal Channel Assignment
1-15-03
Originating Point Code Assignment
1-15-04
Destination Point Code Assignment
1-15-05
Destination Point Code Transfer Assignment
1-15-06
Originating Office Code Number Assignment
1-15-07
K-CCIS Message Response Timeout Assignment
1-15-09
K-CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 350
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming (Continued)
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-15-10
Calling Name Display Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-11
Centralized Billing Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-12
Centralized Billing Point Code of Center Office Assignment
1-15-13
Centralized Day/Night Switching for Remote Office Assignment
1-15-14
Centralized Day/Night Switching for Main Office Assignment
1-15-15
Centralized BLF Send Point Code Assignment
1-15-16
Centralized BLF Send Extension Number Assignment
1-15-17
Centralized BLF Send Time Assignment
1-15-18
Centralized BLF Display Extension Number Assignment
3-70
CIC Number Assignment
5-05
Common Signaling Channel Route Selection
1-1-05
Start Time Selection
1-5-02
SMDR Print Format
1-5-13
Printer Connected Selection
1-5-14
Printer Line Feed Control Selection
1-5-25
SMDR Valid Call Time Assignment
1-5-26
SMDR Incoming/Outgoing Print Selection
1-8-35
COM Port Baud Rate Setting Assignment
4-56
SMDR Telephone Print Selection

Notes

1.
When NO is selected, Link Reconnect does not take place.
2.
When Local Loop/Ground Start Trunks are used, and a disconnect signal is not received from the network, the
time set in Memory Block 1-1-05 (Start Time Selection) applies for the reconnect to take place.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 351

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-15-09
K-CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding
System Mode
Hop Assignment
1
Submode
15
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify the maximum number of multiple Call Forwarding
Data No.
hops over the K-CCIS network.
09
Display
PC Programming
Data
Setting
No.
Title
Data
¦+AW

0 9 : C C I S
M A X
T R F 5
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK15 + KI to access the Memory Block.
3
Use dial pad keys to enter Setting Data.
Default Values:

Use the following to enter data:
5
J
Range: 1~7
to move cursor left
Lto move cursor right
K~ Ito enter numeric data
G
4
Press
to write the data.
E
5
Press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-3-01
MIF (LCR) Assignment
7-3-02
MIF (SMDR) Assignment
1-15-00
K-CCIS Main/Remote Office Selection
1-15-01
Common Signal Channel Data Speed Assignment
1-15-02
Common Signal Channel Assignment
1-15-03
Originating Point Code Assignment
1-15-04
Destination Point Code Assignment
1-15-05
Destination Point Code Transfer Assignment
1-15-06
Originating Office Code Number Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 352
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming (Continued)
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-15-07
K-CCIS Message Response Timeout Assignment
1-15-08
Link Reconnect Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-10
Calling Name Display Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-11
Centralized Billing Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-12
Centralized Billing Point Code of Center Office Assignment
1-15-13
Centralized Day/Night Switching for Remote Office Assignment
1-15-14
Centralized Day/Night Switching for Main Office Assignment
1-15-15
Centralized BLF Send Point Code Assignment
1-15-16
Centralized BLF Send Extension Number Assignment
1-15-17
Centralized BLF Send Time Assignment
1-15-18
Centralized BLF Display Extension Number Assignment
3-70
CIC Number Assignment
5-05
Common Signaling Channel Route Selection
1-1-05
Start Time Selection
1-5-02
SMDR Print Format
1-5-13
Printer Connected Selection
1-5-14
Printer Line Feed Control Selection
1-5-25
SMDR Valid Call Time Assignment
1-5-26
SMDR Incoming/Outgoing Print Selection
1-8-35
COM Port Baud Rate Setting Assignment
4-56
SMDR Telephone Print Selection

Notes

This Memory Block applies to both traditional K-CCIS with point-to-point T1 lines and IP (K-CCIS).
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 353

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-15-10
Calling Name Display Allow/Deny
System Mode
Selection
1
Submode
15
General Description
Use this Memory Block per Common Signaling Channel to allow or deny sending the
Data No.
station name.
10
Display
PC Programming
Data
C-Channel
Setting
No.
1~4
Title
Data
¦+AW

1 0 : C C H 1
N A M E
N 0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
NO
YS
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK15 + AK to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the option.
G
4
Press
to write the data.
E
5
Press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-3-01
MIF (LCR) Assignment
7-3-02
MIF (SMDR) Assignment
1-15-00
K-CCIS Main/Remote Office Selection
1-15-01
Common Signal Channel Data Speed Assignment
1-15-02
Common Signal Channel Assignment
1-15-03
Originating Point Code Assignment
1-15-04
Destination Point Code Assignment
1-15-05
Destination Point Code Transfer Assignment
1-15-06
Originating Office Code Number Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 354
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming (Continued)
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-15-07
K-CCIS Message Response Timeout Assignment
1-15-08
Link Reconnect Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-09
K-CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop Assignment
1-15-11
Centralized Billing Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-12
Centralized Billing Point Code of Center Office Assignment
1-15-13
Centralized Day/Night Switching for Remote Office Assignment
1-15-14
Centralized Day/Night Switching for Main Office Assignment
1-15-15
Centralized BLF Send Point Code Assignment
1-15-16
Centralized BLF Send Extension Number Assignment
1-15-17
Centralized BLF Send Time Assignment
1-15-18
Centralized BLF Display Extension Number Assignment
3-70
CIC Number Assignment
5-05
Common Signaling Channel Route Selection
1-1-05
Start Time Selection
1-5-02
SMDR Print Format
1-5-13
Printer Connected Selection
1-5-14
Printer Line Feed Control Selection
1-5-25
SMDR Valid Call Time Assignment
1-5-26
SMDR Incoming/Outgoing Print Selection
1-8-35
COM Port Baud Rate Setting Assignment
4-56
SMDR Telephone Print Selection

Notes

1.
This Memory Block determines whether or not the station name is sent to the distant system.
2.
This Memory Block is not used with and has no effect on the IP (K-CCIS) feature.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 355

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-15-11
Centralized Billing Allow/Deny
System Mode
Selection
1
Submode
15
General Description
Use this Memory Block to assign the Electra Elite IPK to send billing to the Billing
Data No.
Center Office (NEAX2000/2400) across the K-CCIS network. Electra Elite IPK does
11
not support receiving and managing billing information.
PC Programming
Display
¦+AW
Data
Setting
No.
Title
Data
1 1 : B I L L I N G
N O
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
Deny
Allow
default.
NO
YS
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK15 + A Ato access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the Setting Data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data.
E
5
Press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-3-01
MIF (LCR) Assignment
7-3-02
MIF (SMDR) Assignment
1-15-00
K-CCIS Main/Remote Office Selection
1-15-01
Common Signal Channel Data Speed Assignment
1-15-02
Common Signal Channel Assignment
1-15-03
Originating Point Code Assignment
1-15-04
Destination Point Code Assignment
1-15-05
Destination Point Code Transfer Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 356
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming (Continued)
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-15-06
Originating Office Code Number Assignment
1-15-07
K-CCIS Message Response Timeout Assignment
1-15-08
Link Reconnect Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-09
K-CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop Assignment
1-15-10
Calling Name Display Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-12
Centralized Billing Point Code of Center Office Assignment
1-15-13
Centralized Day/Night Switching for Remote Office Assignment
1-15-14
Centralized Day/Night Switching for Main Office Assignment
1-15-15
Centralized BLF Send Point Code Assignment
1-15-16
Centralized BLF Send Extension Number Assignment
1-15-17
Centralized BLF Send Time Assignment
1-15-18
Centralized BLF Display Extension Number Assignment
3-70
CIC Number Assignment
5-05
Common Signaling Channel Route Selection
1-1-05
Start Time Selection
1-5-02
SMDR Print Format
1-5-13
Printer Connected Selection
1-5-14
Printer Line Feed Control Selection
1-5-25
SMDR Valid Call Time Assignment
1-5-26
SMDR Incoming/Outgoing Print Selection
1-8-35
COM Port Baud Rate Setting Assignment
4-56
SMDR Telephone Print Selection

Notes

Memory Block 1-15-00 (K-CCIS Main/Remote Office Selection) does not apply for the Centralized
Billing - K-CCIS feature.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 357

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-15-12
Centralized Billing Point Code of
System Mode
Center Office Assignment
1
Submode
15
General Description
Use this Memory Block to assign the Common Signaling Channel number and point
Data No.
code of the Billing Center Office (NEAX2000/2400).
12
Display
PC Programming
Data
C-Ch
Point
Title
¦+AW
No.
1~4
Code
1 2 : B I L C C H O
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK15 + AB to access the Memory Block.
3
Use dial pad keys to enter C-Channel and Point Code.
Default Values:

Use the following to enter data:
Blank
Jto move cursor left
Lto move cursor right
K~ Ito enter numeric data
Point code range is 00001~16367
G
4
Press
to write the data, and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-3-01
MIF (LCR) Assignment
7-3-02
MIF (SMDR) Assignment
1-15-00
K-CCIS Main/Remote Office Selection
1-15-01
Common Signal Channel Data Speed Assignment
1-15-02
Common Signal Channel Assignment
1-15-03
Originating Point Code Assignment
1-15-04
Destination Point Code Assignment
1-15-05
Destination Point Code Transfer Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 358
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming (Continued)
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-15-06
Originating Office Code Number Assignment
1-15-07
K-CCIS Message Response Timeout Assignment
1-15-08
Link Reconnect Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-09
K-CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop Assignment
1-15-10
Calling Name Display Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-11
Centralized Billing Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-13
Centralized Day/Night Switching for Remote Office Assignment
1-15-14
Centralized Day/Night Switching for Main Office Assignment
1-15-15
Centralized BLF Send Point Code Assignment
1-15-16
Centralized BLF Send Extension Number Assignment
1-15-17
Centralized BLF Send Time Assignment
1-15-18
Centralized BLF Display Extension Number Assignment
3-70
CIC Number Assignment
5-05
Common Signaling Channel Route Selection
1-1-05
Start Time Selection
1-5-02
SMDR Print Format
1-5-13
Printer Connected Selection
1-5-14
Printer Line Feed Control Selection
1-5-25
SMDR Valid Call Time Assignment
1-5-26
SMDR Incoming/Outgoing Print Selection
1-8-35
COM Port Baud Rate Setting Assignment
4-56
SMDR Telephone Print Selection

Notes

1.
The Electra Elite IPK can be only a Remote Office for a NEAX2000/2400 Billing Center Office.
2.
When the Electra Elite IPK is a tandem office and Billing Information is not required, this assignment is not
necessary.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 359

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-15-13
Centralized Day/Night Switching for
System Mode
Remote Office Assignment
1
Submode
15
General Description
Use this Memory Block to assign the Electra Elite IPK to switch Day/Night mode when
Data No.
it receives the command from a main office.
13
Display
PC Programming
Data
Setting
Title
¦+AW
No.
Data
1 3 : C E N
D / N
N O
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
Deny
Allow
default.
(NO)
(YS)
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK15 + AC to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the Setting Data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data, and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-3-01
MIF (LCR) Assignment
7-3-02
MIF (SMDR) Assignment
1-15-00
K-CCIS Main/Remote Office Selection
1-15-01
Common Signal Channel Data Speed Assignment
1-15-02
Common Signal Channel Assignment
1-15-03
Originating Point Code Assignment
1-15-04
Destination Point Code Assignment
1-15-05
Destination Point Code Transfer Assignment
1-15-06
Originating Office Code Number Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 360
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming (Continued)
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-15-07
K-CCIS Message Response Timeout Assignment
1-15-08
Link Reconnect Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-09
K-CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop Assignment
1-15-10
Calling Name Display Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-11
Centralized Billing Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-12
Centralized Billing Point Code of Center Office Assignment
1-15-14
Centralized Day/Night Switching for Main Office Assignment
1-15-15
Centralized BLF Send Point Code Assignment
1-15-16
Centralized BLF Send Extension Number Assignment
1-15-17
Centralized BLF Send Time Assignment
1-15-18
Centralized BLF Display Extension Number Assignment
3-70
CIC Number Assignment
5-05
Common Signaling Channel Route Selection
1-1-05
Start Time Selection
1-5-02
SMDR Print Format
1-5-13
Printer Connected Selection
1-5-14
Printer Line Feed Control Selection
1-5-25
SMDR Valid Call Time Assignment
1-5-26
SMDR Incoming/Outgoing Print Selection
1-8-35
COM Port Baud Rate Setting Assignment
4-56
SMDR Telephone Print Selection

Notes

1.
Memory Block 1-15-00 (K-CCIS Main/Remote Office Selection) is used for the Centralized Day/Night
Switching - K-CCIS feature when using traditional K-CCIS with point-to-point T1 lines.
2.
This Memory Block is used for the Remote Office only.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 361

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-15-14
Centralized Day/Night Switching for
System Mode
Main Office Assignment
1
Submode
15
General Description
Use this Memory Block to assign the Point Codes and the CCH Channel to control
Data No.
remote systems for Centralized Day/Night Switching.
14
A CCH Channel of i can be assigned for K-CCIS over IP (System Software R1500 or
PC Programming
higher).
¦+AW
Display
CCH
Data
Table
Point
Channel
No.
01~16
Code
1~4, i
1 4 : T 0 1 :
=
0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK15 + AD to access the Memory Block.
3
Use dial pad keys to enter Table number, CCH Channel, and Point Code.
Default Values:
Press Redial + 1 to assign i for K-CCIS over IP (System Software R1500 or
All Tables Not Specified
higher).

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move cursor left
Lto move cursor right
K~ Ito enter numeric data
Point code range is 00001~16367.
Tables 01~16 can be assigned.
G
4
Press
to write the data, and display the next Memory Block.
5
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each table. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
6
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-3-01
MIF (LCR) Assignment
7-3-02
MIF (SMDR) Assignment
1-15-00
K-CCIS Main/Remote Office Selection
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 362
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming (Continued)
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-15-01
Common Signal Channel Data Speed Assignment
1-15-02
Common Signal Channel Assignment
1-15-03
Originating Point Code Assignment
1-15-04
Destination Point Code Assignment
1-15-05
Destination Point Code Transfer Assignment
1-15-06
Originating Office Code Number Assignment
1-15-07
K-CCIS Message Response Timeout Assignment
1-15-08
Link Reconnect Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-09
K-CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop Assignment
1-15-10
Calling Name Display Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-11
Centralized Billing Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-12
Centralized Billing Point Code of Center Office Assignment
1-15-13
Centralized Day/Night Switching for Remote Office Assignment
1-15-15
Centralized BLF Send Point Code Assignment
1-15-16
Centralized BLF Send Extension Number Assignment
1-15-17
Centralized BLF Send Time Assignment
1-15-18
Centralized BLF Display Extension Number Assignment
3-70
CIC Number Assignment
5-05
Common Signaling Channel Route Selection
1-1-05
Start Time Selection
1-5-02
SMDR Print Format
1-5-13
Printer Connected Selection
1-5-14
Printer Line Feed Control Selection
1-5-25
SMDR Valid Call Time Assignment
1-5-26
SMDR Incoming/Outgoing Print Selection
1-8-35
COM Port Baud Rate Setting Assignment
4-56
SMDR Telephone Print Selection

Notes

1.
Memory Block 1-15-00 (K-CCIS Main/Remote Office Selection) is used for the Centralized Day/Night Switching
feature.
2.
This Memory Block is used for the Main Office only.
3.
Up to 16 Remote Offices can be controlled by a Main Office.
4.
The Electra Elite IPK cannot be a Main Office for a NEAX2000/2400 PBX.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 363

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-15-15
Centralized BLF Send Point
System Mode
Code Assignment
1
Submode
15
General Description
Use this Memory Block to assign the Destination Point Codes and the CCH Channel
Data No.
of systems to be sent Centralized BLF messages. A CCH Channel of i can be
15
assigned for K-CCIS over IP.
PC Programming
System Software R1500 or higher is required.
¦+AW
Display
Group
CCH
Data
No.
Point
Channel
No.
1~8
Code
Title
1~4, i
1 5 : S E N D 1 :
= 0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK15 + AE to access the Memory Block.
3
Use dial pad keys to enter Group No., CCH Channel, and Point Code.
Default Values:
Press Redial + 1 to assign i for K-CCIS over IP (System Software R1500 or
All Tables Not Specified
higher).

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move cursor left
Lto move cursor right
K~ Ito enter numeric data
Point code range is 00001~16367.
Group No. 1~8 can be assigned.
G
4
Press
to write the data, and display the next Memory Block.
5
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each Group No. E
6
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card Interface Slot Assignment
1-8-08
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2 (Page 6, LK 2)
1-15-00
K-CCIS Main/Remote Office Selection
1-15-01
Common Signal Channel Data Speed Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 364
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming (Continued)
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-15-02
Common Signal Channel Assignment
1-15-03
Originating Point Code Assignment
1-15-04
Destination Point Code Assignment
1-15-05
Destination Point Code Transfer Assignment
1-15-06
Originating Office Code Number Assignment
1-15-07
K-CCIS Message Response Timeout Assignment
1-15-08
Link Reconnect Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-09
K-CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop Assignment
1-15-10
Calling Name Display Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-11
Centralized Billing Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-12
Centralized Billing Point Code of Center Office Assignment
1-15-13
Centralized Day/Night Switching for Remote Office Assignment
1-15-14
Centralized Day/Night Switching for Main Office Assignment
1-15-16
Centralized BLF Send Extension Number Assignment
1-15-17
Centralized BLF Send Time Assignment
1-15-18
Centralized BLF Display Extension Number Assignment
3-70
CIC Number Assignment
4-12
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
4-17
Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment
5-05
Common Signaling Channel Route Assignment

Notes

Up to eight Remote Offices can be sent Busy Lamp Field (BLF) status messages.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 365

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-15-16
Centralized BLF Send Extension
System Mode
Number Assignment
1
Submode
15
General Description
Use this Memory Block to assign the Extension Numbers for sending Centralized BLF
Data No.
messages.
16
System Software R1500 or higher is required.
PC Programming
Display
¦+AW
Table
Data
No.
Extension
No.
Title
(001~120
Number
1 5 : S E N D
0 0 1 =
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
Send Group Send Group Send Group Send Group Send Group Send Group Send Group Send Group
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK15 + AF to access the Memory Block.
3
Use dial pad keys to enter Table number and Extension No.
Default Values:

Use the following to enter data:
All Tables Not Specified
Jto move cursor left
Lto move cursor right
K~ Ito enter numeric data
Three Digit Extension Number: 100~899
Four Digit Extension Number: 1000~8999
Tables 001~120 can be assigned.
4
Press corresponding CO/PBX line key to select the Send Group No.
G
5
Press
to write the data, and display the next Memory Block.
6
Repeat Steps 4 and 5 for each Send Group No.
E
7
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 366
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card Interface Slot Assignment
1-8-08
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2 (Page 6, LK 2)
1-15-00
K-CCIS Main/Remote Office Selection
1-15-01
Common Signal Channel Data Speed Assignment
1-15-02
Common Signal Channel Assignment
1-15-03
Originating Point Code Assignment
1-15-04
Destination Point Code Assignment
1-15-05
Destination Point Code Transfer Assignment
1-15-06
Originating Office Code Number Assignment
1-15-07
K-CCIS Message Response Timeout Assignment
1-15-08
Link Reconnect Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-09
K-CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop Assignment
1-15-10
Calling Name Display Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-11
Centralized Billing Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-12
Centralized Billing Point Code of Center Office Assignment
1-15-13
Centralized Day/Night Switching for Remote Office Assignment
1-15-14
Centralized Day/Night Switching for Main Office Assignment
1-15-15
Centralized BLF Send Extension Number Assignment
1-15-17
Centralized BLF Send Time Assignment
1-15-18
Centralized BLF Display Extension Number Assignment
3-70
CIC Number Assignment
4-12
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
4-17
Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment
5-05
Common Signaling Channel Route Assignment

Notes

1.
The Send Group Number selected by the Line Key is the Group number assigned in Memory Block 1-15-15
(Centralized BLF Send Point Code Assignment).
2.
Up to 120 Extension Numbers (entries in the table) can be assigned to send BLF messages. With each assigned
extension number, up to eight destination offices can be selected until 240 extension numbers are assigned.
3.
A maximum of 240 total sending Extension Numbers (BLF messages) can be assigned. If 30 Extension
Numbers (entries in the table) are assigned with each set for all eight groups (systems), the 240 limit is reached
and no more Extension Numbers can be entered.
4.
When a Send Group (Point Code) is cleared in Memory Block 1-15-15, it is also cleared in this Memory Block.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 367

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-15-17
Centralized BLF Send Time
System Mode
Assignment
1
Submode
15
General Description
Use this Memory Block to assign the time interval for sending BLF information across
Data No.
the K-CCIS Network.
17
R1500 or higher is required.
PC Programming
Display
¦+AW
Data
Setting
No.
Title
Data
1 7 : S E N D
T I M E
0 4 s
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
4 Seconds
8 Seconds
12 Seconds 16 Seconds
default.
(04s)
(08s)
(12s)
(16s)
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK15 + AG to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the Setting Data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data, and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card Interface Slot Assignment
7-3-01
MIF (LCR) Assignment
7-3-02
MIF (SMDR) Assignment
1-15-00
K-CCIS Main/Remote Office Selection
1-15-01
Common Signal Channel Data Speed Assignment
1-15-02
Common Signal Channel Assignment
1-15-03
Originating Point Code Assignment
1-15-04
Destination Point Code Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 368
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming (Continued)
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-15-05
Destination Point Code Transfer Assignment
1-15-06
Originating Office Code Number Assignment
1-15-07
K-CCIS Message Response Timeout Assignment
1-15-08
Link Reconnect Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-09
K-CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop Assignment
1-15-10
Calling Name Display Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-11
Centralized Billing Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-12
Centralized Billing Point Code of Center Office Assignment
1-15-13
Centralized Day/Night Switching for Remote Office Assignment
1-15-14
Centralized Day/Night Switching for Main Office Assignment
1-15-15
Centralized BLF Send Point Code Assignment
1-15-16
Centralized BLF Send Extension Number Assignment
1-15-18
Centralized BLF Display Extension Number Assignment
3-70
CIC Number Assignment
4-12
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
4-17
Station to Class of Service Feature Selection
5-05
Common Signaling Channel Route Selection

Notes

The BLF messages are sent in a four-second cycle (at default), so some delay occurs to change the indication in the
destination office. In the network configured with two systems, it can take four to five seconds (at default) to change
the BLF indication in the destination office.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 369

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-15-18
Centralized BLF Receive Extension
System Mode
Number Assignment
1
Submode
15
General Description
Use this Memory Block to assign the Extension Numbers of remote systems to receive
Data No.
Centralized BLF messages.
18
System Software R1500 or higher is required.
PC Programming
Display
¦+AW
Table
Data
Number
Extension
No.
Title
001~120
Number
1 8 : B L F
0 0 1 =
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK15 + AH to access the Memory Block.
3
Use dial pad keys to enter Table No. and Extension No.
Default Values:

Use the following to enter data:
All Tables Not Specified
Jto move cursor left
Lto move cursor right
K~ Ito enter numeric data
Three Digit Extension Number: 100~899
Four Digit Extension Number: 1000~8999
Tables 001~120 can be assigned.
G
4
Press
to write the data, and display the next Memory Block.
5
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each Table No. E
6
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card Interface Slot Assignment
1-8-08
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2 (Page 6, LK 2)
1-15-00
K-CCIS Main/Remote Office Selection
1-15-01
Common Signal Channel Data Speed Assignment
1-15-02
Common Signal Channel Assignment
1-15-03
Originating Point Code Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 370
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming (Continued)
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-15-04
Destination Point Code Assignment
1-15-05
Destination Point Code Transfer Assignment
1-15-06
Originating Office Code Number Assignment
1-15-07
K-CCIS Message Response Timeout Assignment
1-15-08
Link Reconnect Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-09
K-CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop Assignment
1-15-10
Calling Name Display Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-11
Centralized Billing Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-12
Centralized Billing Point Code of Center Office Assignment
1-15-13
Centralized Day/Night Switching for Remote Office Assignment
1-15-14
Centralized Day/Night Switching for Main Office Assignment
1-15-15
Centralized BLF Send Point Code Assignment
1-15-16
Centralized BLF Send Extension Number Assignment
1-15-17
Centralized BLF Send Time Assignment
3-70
CIC Number Assignment
4-12
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
4-17
Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment
5-05
Common Signaling Channel Route Assignment

Notes

1.
Up to 120 remote Telephone's BLF can be received per system.
2.
All Multiline Terminals in the system can assign DSS/BLF keys for the supported remote telephone's BLF.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 371

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-15-19
Centralized 911 Allow/Deny Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to assign the Electra Elite IPK installed as a Main Office to
15
send the Calling Party Number out the CAMA trunk when an emergency 911 call is
originated from a remote K-CCIS office.
Data No.
This Memory Block is used at the main office and tandem offices.
19
PC Programming
System Software R2000 or higher is required.
¦+AW
Display
Data
Setting
No.
Title
Data
1 9 : C E N
9 1 1
N O
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
NO (Deny)
YS (Allow)
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK15 + AI to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the Setting Data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data, and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-8-43
Enhanced 911 Trunk Assignment
1-8-44
Enhanced 911 Alternate Route Assignment
1-8-45
Enhanced 911 Alternate Route Assignment (Maintenance Busy)
1-8-46
Enhanced 911 Dialing Digit Assignment
1-15-20
Centralized 911 Originating Number Selection
1-15-21
Centralized 911 Look Ahead Routing Allow/Deny Selection
4-54
Enhanced 911 CESID to Station Table Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 372
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________

Notes

1.
Assign this Memory Block to YS (Allow) at the Main Office and all tandem offices to allow the Calling Party
Number to be sent out on the CAMA or an ISDN PRI trunk when a 911 call is received from a remote K-CCIS
system.
2.
This system data must be set at the Main Office and any tandem office that passes E911 calls.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 373

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-15-20
Centralized 911 Originating Number
System Mode
Selection
1
Submode
15
General Description
Use this Memory Block to assign the Electra Elite IPK installed as a Remote K-CCIS
Data No.
Office to send the Station Number or CES-ID for Calling Party Number information to
20
the Main Office when an Emergency 911 call is originated.
PC Programming
This Memory Block is used at remote offices only.
¦+AW
System Software R2000 or higher is required.
Display
Data
Setting
No.
Title
Data
2 0 : 9 1 1
O R G
S T A .
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
The shaded
STA.
selection is the
CESID
(Station
default.
(CES-ID)
No.)
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK15 + BK to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the Setting Data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data, and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-8-43
Enhanced 911 Trunk Assignment
1-8-44
Enhanced 911 Alternate Route Assignment
1-8-45
Enhanced 911 Alternate Route Assignment (Maintenance Busy)
1-8-46
Enhanced 911 Dialing Digit Assignment
1-15-19
Centralized 911 Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-21
Centralized 911 Look Ahead Routing Allow/Deny Selection
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 374
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming (Continued)
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
4-54
Enhanced 911 CESID to Station Table Assignment

Notes

1.
Use this Memory Block for 911 outgoing calls from a remote office to select Station Number or CES-ID for Calling
Party Number information. When the main office is a NEAX2000 or Electra Elite IPK, this data is set to CES-ID.
When the main office is a NEAX2400, this data is set to Station Number.
2.
This system data is used at remote offices only.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 375

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K
1-15-21
Centralized 911 Look Ahead Routing
System Mode
Allow/ Deny Selection
1
Submode
15
General Description
Use this Memory Block to assign the Electra Elite IPK installed at a remote K-CCIS
Data No.
office to allow an alternate line to be used when all trunks at the main office are busy
21
when an Emergency 911 call is originated at the remote K-CCIS office.
PC Programming
This Memory Block is used at remote offices only.
¦+AW
System Software R2000 or higher is required.
Display
Data
Setting
No.
Title
Data
2 1 : 9 1 1 R O U T I N G
N O
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
NO (Deny)
YS (Allow)
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK15 + BA to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the Setting Data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data, and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-8-43
Enhanced 911 Trunk Assignment
1-8-44
Enhanced 911 Alternate Route Assignment
1-8-45
Enhanced 911 Alternate Route Assignment (Maintenance Busy)
1-8-46
Enhanced 911 Dialing Digit Assignment
1-15-19
Centralized 911Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-20
Centralized 911 Originating Number Selection
4-54
Enhanced 911 CESID to Station Table Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 376
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________

Notes

1.
When no outgoing trunks are available at the main or tandem office, and a 911 call is originated at the remote
office, the following alternate outgoing process is applied when this Memory Block is set to YS (allow):
When a trunk number is assigned in Memory Block 1-8-43, and a Centralized 911 call is originated, the Electra
Elite IPK searches for an idle trunk in the Trunk Group (TG)/Route Advance Block (RAB) assigned in Memory
Block 1-8-44.
When an RAB is assigned in Memory Block 1-8-43, and a Centralized 911 call is originated, the Electra Elite IPK
searches for an idle line in the TG that has lower priority in the route advance block assigned in Memory Block
1-8-43, and then searches for an idle line in the trunk group/route advance block assigned in Memory Block
1-8-44.
When a Centralized E911call is originated by an RAB assigned by Memory Block 1-8-44, the Electra Elite IPK
searches for an idle line in the Trunk Group with lower priority than the RAB assigned in Memory Block 1-8-44.
When a Centralized E911 call is originated by a TG assigned in Memory Block 1-8-44 or an idle line cannot be
found in the outgoing line search process, the caller hears a busy tone with BUSY display.
2.
This system data is used only at remote offices.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 377

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-16-00
Auto Negotiation Yes/No Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not Auto Negotiation is enabled for each
16
port of the HUB(8)-U( ) ETU. When No is selected, Memory Block 1-16-01 (Port
Speed Selection 10/100 Base -T) and Memory Block 1-16-02 (Port Duplex Mode
Data No.
Selection) are used. When equipment with auto negotiation function is connected to a
port, ensure that the YS is set for this Memory Block.
00
PC Programming
R1500 or higher is required.
¦+AB
Display
Data
HUB
PORT
Setting
No.
1~3
1~8
Title
Data
0 0 : 1 - 1
A U T O
Y S
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
YS
NO
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK16 to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the Setting Data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data.
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each Port.
E
6
Press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 379

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-16-01
Port Speed Selection 10/100 Base-T
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
When Memory Block 1-16-00 (Auto Negotiation Yes/No Selection) is set to NO, use
16
this Memory Block to specify the Ethernet port speed as 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps for
each port of each HUB(8)-U( ) ETU.
Data No.
R1500 or higher is required.
01
PC Programming
Display
¦+AB
Data
HUB
PORT
Setting
No.
1~3
1~8
Title
Data
0 1 : 1 - 1
S P E E D
1 0 0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
10
100
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK16 + JJKAto access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the Setting Data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data.
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each port.
E
6
Press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 381

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-16-02
Port Duplex Mode Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
When Memory Block 1-16-00 (Auto Negotiation Yes/No Selection) is set to NO, use
16
this Memory Block to specify duplex mode (HALF or FULL) for each port of each
HUB(8)-U( ) ETU.
Data No.
R1500 or higher is required.
02
PC Programming
Display
¦+AB
Data
HUB
PORT
Setting
No.
1~3
1~8
Data
Title
0 2 : 1 - 1
H A L F
D U P L
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
HALF
FULL
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK16 + JJKBto access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the Setting Data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data.
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each port of each HUB(8)-U( ) ETU.
E
6
Press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 383

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-16-03
MDI/MDIX Mode Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify an MDI/MDIX mode for each port of each
16
HUB(8)-U( ) ETU.
Data No.
R1500 or higher is required.
03
Display
PC Programming
Data
HUB
PORT
Setting
1~3
1~8
Title
¦+AB
No.
Data
0 3 : 1 - 1
M O D E
A U T O
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
MDIX
MDI
Auto
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK16 +JJKC to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the Setting Data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data.
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each Port of each HUB(8)-U( ) ETU.
E
6
Press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 385

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card Interface Slot Selection
1-16-00
Auto Negotiation Yes/No Selection
1-16-01
Port Speed Selection 10/100 Base T
1-16-02
Port Duplex Mode Selection
1-16-04
VLAN Mode Selection
1-16-05
Default VLAN ID Tag Insertion Assignment
1-16-06
Port Based Priority Selection
1-16-07
High Priority RX Tag Threshold
1-16-08
High Priority TX Tag Assignment
1-16-09
Low Priority TX Tag Assignment
1-16-10
Port Mirroring Selection
1-16-11
Mirroring Source Port Assignment
1-16-12
Mirroring Target Port Assignment
1-16-13
VLAN Group to VLAN ID Assignment
1-16-14
Port VLAN Group Membership
1-16-15
VLAN Tag Insertion Selection
1-16-16
Flow Control for Full Duplex Selection
1-16-17
Back Pressure for Half Duplex Selection

Notes

1.
Only one HUB(8)-U( ) ETU can be assigned and installed for each cabinet.
2.
MDI/MDIX is an Ethernet port connection using twisted-pair cable. Medium Dependent Interface (MDI) is the
Media Attachment Unit (MAU) component that provides the physical and electrical connection to the cabling
medium. An MDIX (MDI crossover) is an MDI version that enables cabling between like devices. MDI ports
connect to MDIX ports using straight-through twisted-pair cabling; both MDI-to-MDI and MDIX to-MDIX
connections use crossover twisted-pair cabling.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 386
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-16-04
VLAN Mode Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not IEEE 802.1q VLAN Tagging is
16
enabled for each HUB(8)-U( ) ETU. This Memory Block must also be enabled to use
IEEE 802.p Priority. Priority options can be enabled in Memory Block 1-16-06 (Port
Data No.
Based Priority Selection), Memory Block 1-16-07(High Priority RX Tag Threshold),
Memory Block 1-16-08 (High Priority TX Tag Assignment), and Memory Block 1-16-09
04
(Low Priority TX Tag Assignment).
PC Programming
R1500 or higher is required.
¦+AB
Display
Data
HUB
Setting
No.
1~3
Title
Data
0 4 : 1
V L A N
N O
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
NO
YS
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK16 +JJKD to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the Setting Data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data.
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each HUB(8)-U( ) ETU.
E
6
Press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 387

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card Interface Slot Selection
1-16-00
Auto Negotiation Yes/No Selection
1-16-01
Port Speed Selection 10/100 Base T
1-16-02
Port Duplex Mode Selection
1-16-03
MDI/MDIX Mode Selection
1-16-05
Default VLAN ID Tag Insertion Assignment
1-16-06
Port Based Priority Selection
1-16-07
High Priority RX Tag Threshold
1-16-08
High Priority TX Tag Assignment
1-16-09
Low Priority TX Tag Assignment
1-16-10
Port Mirroring Selection
1-16-11
Mirroring Source Port Assignment
1-16-12
Mirroring Target Port Assignment
1-16-13
VLAN Group to VLAN ID Assignment
1-16-14
Port VLAN Group Membership
1-16-15
VLAN Tag Insertion Selection
1-16-16
Flow Control for Full Duplex Selection
1-16-17
Back Pressure for Half Duplex Selection

Notes

1.
Only one HUB(8)-U( ) ETU can be assigned and installed for each cabinet.
2.
A virtual (logical) LAN is a local area network with a definition that maps workstations on a basis other than
geographic location (for example: department, user type, or primary application). The virtual LAN controller can
change or add workstations and manage load balancing and bandwidth allocation easier than with a physical
picture of the LAN. Network management software keeps track of relating the virtual picture of the LAN with the
actual physical picture.
3.
When VLAN Mode is enabled, the port based Tag VLAN feature can be used. In Tag VLAN mode, a received
frame is switched according to a combination of the Address and VLAN ID. When the incoming frame is not
tagged or VLAN ID = 0, the VLAN ID is set to the default assigned by Memory Block 1-16-05 (Default VLAN ID
Assignment). Default LAN ID range is 0001~4095 (0x001~0xfff Hex).
4.
For Tag VLAN feature, the HUB(8)-U( ) ETU has a VLAN table and an entry in the table is Media Access Control
(MAC) address and VLAN ID source dependent. Therefore, multiple entries could have the same address with
different VLAN IDs.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 388
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-16-05
Default VLAN ID Tag Insertion
System Mode
Assignment
1
Submode
16
General Description
Use this Memory Block to insert VLAN ID tagging to data frames from network devices
Data No.
that cannot insert VLAN tags. When data without a VLAN tag is transmitted by the
05
device on the port, a tag is inserted with the VLAN ID assigned by this Memory Block.
PC Programming
R1500 or higher is required.
¦+AB
Display
Data
HUB
PORT
Setting
No.
1~3
1~8 Title
Data
0 5 : 1 - 1
I D
=
0 0 0 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK16 + JJKE to access the Memory Block.
3
Use dial pad keys to enter Setting data.
Default Values:

Use the following to enter data:
All ports = 0001
Use Jto move cursor left
Use Lto move cursor right
Use K~ Ito enter numeric data

VLAN ID range is 0001~4095 (0x001~ 0xfff Hex).
G
4
Press
to write the data.
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each port.
E
6
Press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 389

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-16-06
Port Based Priority Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this memory block to specify how frames, reaching the ingress port without VLAN
16
tags are marked for queuing internally in the HUB(8). The HUB(8) has two queues:
High Priority and Low Priority. When the frame reaches the egress port, settings for
Data No.
Memory Blocks 1-16-08 (for High Priority frames) and 1-16-09 (for Low Priority
frames) for the egress port are used to convert the low or high priority queue to a
06
VLAN tag priority (0~7). Set to NO (default), this Memory block does not mark frames
for either queue; Memory Block 1-16-07 then determines the priority queue for where
PC Programming
the frame is sent.
¦+AB
R1500 or higher is required.
Display
Data
HUB
PORT
Setting
No.
1~3
1~8 Title
Data
0 6 : 1 - 1
Q o S
N O
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
The shaded
NO
selection is the
LO
HI
(Not
default.
Low
High
Assigned)
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK16 + JJKF to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the Setting Data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data.
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each HUB(8)-U( ) ETU.
E
6
Press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 391

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card Interface Slot Selection
1-16-00
Auto Negotiation Yes/No Selection
1-16-01
Port Speed Selection 10/100 Base T
1-16-02
Port Duplex Mode Selection
1-16-03
MDI/MDIX Mode Selection
1-16-04
VLAN Mode Selection
1-16-05
Default VLAN ID Tag Insertion Assignment
1-16-07
High Priority RX Tag Threshold
1-16-08
High Priority TX Tag Assignment
1-16-09
Low Priority TX Tag Assignment
1-16-10
Port Mirroring Selection
1-16-11
Mirroring Source Port Assignment
1-16-12
Mirroring Target Port Assignment
1-16-13
VLAN Group to VLAN ID Assignment
1-16-14
Port VLAN Group Membership
1-16-15
VLAN Tag Insertion Selection
1-16-16
Flow Control for Full Duplex Selection
1-16-17
Back Pressure for Half Duplex Selection

Notes

1.
Only one HUB(8)-U( ) ETU can be assigned and installed for each cabinet.
2.
In networks, QoS indicates that transmission rates, error rates, and other characteristics can be measured,
improved, and to some extent, guaranteed in advance. QoS is particularly important for continuous transmission
of high-bandwidth video, multimedia, and voice information.
3.
The HUB(8)-U( ) ETU has two priority assignment methods: Port Based Priority ( frame received) or Tag Based
Priority. Unknown Unicast Frames are always set for Low priority.
The Port Based Priority feature can assign priority of all frame except the Unknown Unicast Packets.
The priority of received packets is always that assigned by this Memory Block.
4.
When LO or HI is selected, QoS mode follows the setting of this system data only, even when a tagged frame is
received.
5.
When NO is selected, the priority of a received frame follows the value of the priority field of the Tag in the
received frame. Low or high priority depends on the setting of Memory Block 1-16-07 (High Priority RX Tag
Threshold).
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 392
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-16-07 High Priority RX Tag Threshold
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
The HUB(8) has two queues: High Priority and Low Priority. When Memory Block
16
1-16-06 is set to NO, and the priority of the VLAN tag is equal to or greater than the
setting in this block, the tag is queued for high priority. Otherwise, it is queued for low
Data No.
priority. When it is transmitted out the egress port of the HUB(8), it retains its original
VLAN tag priority value.
07
PC Programming
R1500 or higher is required.
¦+AB
Display
Data
HUB
PORT
Setting
No.
1~3
1~8
Title
Data
0 7 : 1 - 1
H I G H
R X = 7
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK16 + JJKG to access the Memory Block.
3
Use dial pad keys to enter Setting data.
Default Values:

Use the following to enter data:
All ports = 7
Use Jto move cursor left
Use Lto move cursor right
Use K~ Ito enter numeric data

Priority range is lowest 0~7 highest.
G
4
Press
to write the data.
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each HUB(8)-U( ) ETU port.
E
6
Press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 393

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-16-08
High Priority TX Tag Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
For frames marked at the ingress port by Memory Block 1-16-06 as High Priority, this
16
memory block setting on the egress port assigns a value (0 ~7) to the priority field of
the VLAN tag. The default is 7.
Data No.
R1500 or higher is required.
08
PC Programming
Display
¦+AB
Data
HUB
PORT
Setting
No.
1~3
1~8
Title
Data
0 8 : 1 - 1
H I G H
T X = 7
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK16 + JJKH to access the Memory Block.
3
Use dial pad keys to enter Setting data.
Default Values:

Use the following to enter data:
All ports = 7
Use Jto move cursor left
Use Lto move cursor right
Use K~ Ito enter numeric data

Priority range is lowest 0~7 highest.
G
4
Press
to write the data.
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each port.
E
6
Press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 395

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-16-09
Low Priority TX Tag Assignment
Sys
Sy te
t m M
m
o
M d
o e
1
General Description
Submode
Subm
For frames marked at the ingress port by Memory Block 1-16-06 as Low Priority, this
16
memory block setting on the egress port assigns a value (0 ~7) to the priority field of
the VLAN tag. The default is 0.
Data
Dat No.
a
R1500 or higher is required.
08
09
PC
P P
C r
P ogramm
ogram ing
Display
¦+AB
¦
Data
HUB
PORT
Setting
No.
1~3
1~8
Title
Data
0 9 : 1 - 1
L O W
T X
= 0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK16 + JJKI to access the Memory Block.
3
Use dial pad keys to enter Setting data.
Default Values:

Use the following to enter data:
All ports = 0
Use Jto move cursor left
Use Lto move cursor right
Use K~ Ito enter numeric data

Priority range is lowest 0~7 highest.
G
4
Press
to write the data.
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each port.
E
6
Press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 397

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-16-10
Port Mirroring Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not Port Mirroring is enabled for each
16
HUB(8)-U( ) ETU. The source port and the target port must be members of the same
VLAN(s).
Data No.
R1500 or higher is required.
10
PC Programming
Display
¦+AB
Data
HUB
Setting
No.
1~3
Title
Data
1 0 : 1
M I R R O R
N O
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
NO
YS
default.
(Normal)
(Mirror)
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK16 + JJAK to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the option.
G
4
Press
to write the data.
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each HUB(8)-U( ) ETU.
E
6
Press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 399

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card Interface Slot Selection
1-16-00
Auto Negotiation Yes/No Selection
1-16-01
Port Speed Selection 10/100 Base T
1-16-02
Port Duplex Mode Selection
1-16-03
MDI/MDIX Mode Selection
1-16-04
VLAN Mode Selection
1-16-05
Default VLAN ID Tag Insertion Assignment
1-16-06
Port Based Priority Selection
1-16-07
High Priority RX Tag Threshold
1-16-08
High Priority TX Tag Assignment
1-16-09
Low Priority TX Tag Assignment
1-16-11
Mirroring Source Port Assignment
1-16-12
Mirroring Target Port Assignment
1-16-13
VLAN Group to VLAN ID Assignment
1-16-14
Port VLAN Group Membership
1-16-15
VLAN Tag Insertion Selection
1-16-16
Flow Control for Full Duplex Selection
1-16-17
Back Pressure for Half Duplex Selection

Notes

1.
Only one HUB(8)-U( ) ETU can be assigned and installed for each cabinet.
2.
The HUB(8)-U( ) ETU is an eight-port switching HUB. One port can be set as a source port, and one port can be
set as a target port for port mirroring to monitor traffic data.
3.
To allow this function, set this Memory Block to YS, and program Memory Block 1-16-11 (Mirroring Source Port
Selection) and Memory Block 1-16-12 (Mirroring Target Port Selection).
4.
When mirroring data to a PC for protocol analysis, an 802.1q/p-aware network interface card is required to
capture tagged frames.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 400
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-16-11
Mirroring Source Port Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
When Port Mirroring is enabled in Memory Block 1-16-10 (Port Mirroring Selection),
16
use this Memory Block to specify a port with data to be monitored on another port
specified by Memory Block 1-16-12 (Mirroring Target Port Assigment) for each
Data No.
HUB(8) -U( ) ETU. The source port and target port must be in the same VLAN(s).
11
R1500 or higher is required.
PC Programming
Display
¦+AB
Data
HUB
Setting
No.
1~3
Title
Data
1 1 : 1
S O U R C E
= 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK16 + JJAA to access the Memory Block.
3
Use dial pad keys to enter Setting Data.
Default Values:

Use the following to enter data:
Port 1
Use Jto move cursor left
Use Lto move cursor right
Use K~ Ito enter numeric data

Port range is 1~8.
G
4
Press
to write the data.
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each HUB(8)-U( ) ETU.
E
6
Press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 401

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-16-12
Mirroring Target Port Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
When Port Mirroring is enabled in Memory Block 1-16-10 (Port Mirroring Selection),
16
use this Memory Block to specify a target port that monitors frames transmitted on the
source port specified by Memory Block 1-16-11 (Mirroring Source Port Assigment) for
Data No.
each HUB(8)-U( ) ETU. The source port and target port must be in the same VLAN(s).
12
R1500 or higher is required.
PC Programming
Display
¦+AB
Data
HUB
Setting
No.
1~3
Title
Data
1 2 : 1
T A R G E T
= 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK16 + JJAB to access the Memory Block.
3
Use dial pad keys to enter Setting data.
Default Values:

Use the following to enter data:
Port 1
Use Jto move cursor left
Use Lto move cursor right
Use K~ Ito enter numeric data

Port range is 1~8.
G
4
Press
to write the data.
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each HUB(8)-U( ) ETU.
E
6
Press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 403

__
D __
oc __
u __
me __
nt __
Re ___
visio__
n __
3 _______________________________________________________
Elect__
ra __
E __
lite __
IP _
K

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card Interface Slot Selection
1-16-00
Auto Negotiation Yes/No Selection
1-16-01
Port Speed Selection 10/100 Base T
1-16-02
Port Duplex Mode Selection
1-16-03
MDI/MDIX Mode Selection
1-16-04
VLAN Mode Selection
1-16-05
Default VLAN ID Tag Insertion Assignment
1-16-06
Port Based Priority Selection
1-16-07
High Priority RX Tag Threshold
1-16-08
High Priority TX Tag Assignment
1-16-09
Low Priority TX Tag Assignment
1-16-10
Port Mirroring Selection
1-16-11
Mirroring Source Port Assignment
1-16-13
VLAN Group to VLAN ID Assignment
1-16-14
Port VLAN Group Membership
1-16-15
VLAN Tag Insertion Selection
1-16-16
Flow Control for Full Duplex Selection
1-16-17
Back Pressure for Half Duplex Selection

Notes

1.
Only one HUB(8)-U( ) ETU can be assigned and installed for each cabinet.
2.
The HUB(8)-U( ) ETU is an eight-port switching HUB. One port can be set as a source port, and one port can be
set as a target port for port mirroring to monitor traffic data.
To allow this function, set Memory Block 1-16-10 (Port Mirroring Selection) to YS, and program Memory Block
1-16-11 (Mirroring Source Port Selection).
3.
When mirroring data to a PC for protocol analysis, an 802.1q/p-aware network interface card is required to
capture tagged frames.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 404
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-16-13
VLAN Group to VLAN ID Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to create a list of valid VLAN IDs to be recognized by the
16
HUB(8)-U( ) ETU.
Data No.
R1500 or higher is required.
13
Display
PC Programming
Data
HUB
VLAN Gp
Setting
1~3
Title
01~16
¦+AB
No.
Data
1 3 : 1
1 D
0 1 = 0 0 0 0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK16 + JJAC to access the Memory Block.
3
Use dial pad keys to enter Setting data.
Default Values:

Use the following to enter data:
0000
Use Jto move cursor left
Use Lto move cursor right
Use K~ Ito enter numeric data

ID range is 0001~4095 (0x001~ 0xfff Hex).
G
4
Press
to write the data.
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each HUB(8)-U( ) ETU and VLAN Group.
E
6
Press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 405

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-16-14
Port VLAN Group Membership
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to create a list of accepted VLANs for each port. When
16
Memory Block 1-16-04 (VLAN Mode Selection) is set to YS, each port accepts
frames tagged with VLAN IDs only when the port is programmed as a member of that
Data No.
VLAN Group. Frames without VLAN tags are also permitted. When Port Mirroring is
used, the source and target ports must be members of the same VLAN(s).
14
PC Programming
R1500 or higher is required.
¦+AB
Display
Data
HUB
VLAN Gp Port Setting
No.
1~3
Title
01~16 1~8
Data
1 4 : 1
P O R T 0 1 = 1
N O
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
NO
YS
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK16 + JJAD to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the option.
G
4
Press
to write the data.
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each HUB(8)-U( ) ETU and VLAN Group.
E
6
Press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 407

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-16-15
VLAN Tag Insertion Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not the port should insert VLAN tags in
16
frames transmitted on this port. When this Memory Block is set to NO, tags are
deleted from frames of the same VLAN Group transmitted on this port.
Data No.
R1500 or higher is required.
15
PC Programming
Display
¦+AB
Data
HUB
VLAN Gp Port Setting
No.
1~3
Title
01~16 1~8
Data
1 5 : 1
T A G
0 1 = 1
N O
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
NO
YS
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK16 + JJAE to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the option.
G
4
Press
to write the data.
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each HUB(8)-U( ) ETU and VLAN Group.
E
6
Press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 409

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-16-16
Flow Control for Full Duplex
System Mode
Selection
1
Submode
16
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not Full duplex IEEE802.3x Flow Control
Data No.
is enabled for each HUB(8)-U( ) ETU port.
16
R1500 or higher is required.
PC Programming
Display
¦+AB
Data
HUB
PORT
Setting
No.
1~3
1~8
Title
Data
1 6 : 1 - 1
F L O W
N O
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
NO
YS
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK16 + JJAF to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the option.
G
4
Press
to write the data.
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each HUB(8)-U( ) ETU port.
E
6
Press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 411

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1-16-17
Back Pressure for Half Duplex
System Mode
1
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not half-duplex Back Pressure Flow
16
Control is enabled for each HUB(8)-U( ) ETU port.
Data No.
R1500 or higher is required.
17
Display
PC Programming
Data
HUB
PORT
Setting
1~3
1~8
Title
Data
¦+AB
No.
1 7 : 1 - 1
B A C K
N O
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
NO
YS
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK16 + JJAG to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the option.
G
4
Press
to write the data.
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each HUB(8)-U( ) ETU port.
E
6
Press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 413

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
2-01
Trunk to Tenant Assignment
Tenant Mode
2
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to assign CO/PBX lines to a tenant.
--
Display
Data No.
Tenant
No.
Data
01
(00~47)
No.

Tit
le

Trunk
PC Programming
0 0 / 0 1 : T R K T N T | 0 1
¦+BN
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
Page 2
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Page 3
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Page 4
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
All line keys are
Page 5
assigned.
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Page 6
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
4/
Page 7
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
Page 8
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
57
58
59*
60
21
62
63
64
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 415

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK2 to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
Tenant 00 = All trunks are assigned
J
Tenant 01~47 = Not assigned
to move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data
D

to go to the next assigned Tenant No.
C

to go to the next page
A to go to the previous page

Data Options:
\
CO/PBX
Off
On
Line LED
No
Yes
Data
(Not Assigned)
(Assigned)
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
5
Program Memory Blocks 2-05~2-09. The next Tenant No. is displayed.
6
Repeat steps 3, 4, and 5 for each Tenant No. Memory Block 2-01 Tenant 00 is displayed.
E
7
Press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
2-05
Line Key Selection
4-09
Telephone to Tenant Assignment

Notes

When data is changed while the system is busy, DATA ENTRY is displayed at the programming station until the
system becomes idle.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 416
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
2-05
Line Key Selection
Tenant Mode
2
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to select Tenant-Wide Mode or Telephone Mode line key
--
assignment for each tenant.
Data No.
Display
05
Tenant
No.
Data
Setting
(00~47)
No.
Ti
tle Data
PC Programming
¦+BN
0 0 / 0 5 : M O D E
T E L
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
TNAT
TEL
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK2 + KE to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option to TNAT.
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
2-06
Line Key Selection for Tenant Mode
4-12
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode

Notes

1.
Mixed use of Tenant-Wide Mode and Telephone Mode is permitted in the system.
2.
Tenant-Wide Mode:
Memory Block 2-06 (Line Key Selection for Tenant Mode) permits assignment of any desired feature to each of
the CO/PBX line keys. All the telephones in a tenant are assigned the same features.
3.
Telephone Mode:
Memory Block 4-12 (Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode) permits assignment of any feature to each of the
CO/PBX line keys. Each telephone can be assigned different features.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 417

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
2-06
Line Key Selection for Tenant Mode
Tenant Mode
2
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to assign functions to each CO/PBX line key on each
--
telephone in a tenant specified as Tenant Mode in Memory Block 2-05 (Line Key
Selection).
Data No.
Display
06
Tenant
Line
Setting
Setting
PC Programming
No.
Data
Key
Data
Data
(00~47)
No.
(01~24)
Page 1
2
¦+BN
0 0 / 0 6 : L 0 1 = C O
0 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1
LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
Call
CO
Feature
Route
NON
FW BNA
FW ALL
Appearance
TKGP
(CO/PBX)
Access Key
Advance
Key
The shaded
Page 2
selection is the
default.
LK 9
LK102
LK 11
LK 12
LK 13
LK 14
LK 15
LK 16
SCROLL
DND
LOG
BGM
SIE
Microphone
H SET
(ANI/Caller
ICM
(On/Off)
(On/Off)
(On/Off)
ID)

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK2 + KF to access the Memory Block. Verify that Memory Block 2-05 is set to TNAT.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to select the function for Line Key No. 01. When indicated, add Setting Data 2 using
dial keys.
G
4
Press
to write data and display Line Key No. 2.
5
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each Line Key assignment. After Line Key No. 24 is programmed, the next Memory Block is displayed.
E
6
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 418
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Procedures
7
The operation data includes:
Default Values
Setting Data Page 1
Tenant 00 = CO/PBX Lines 01~08
Tenant 01~ 47 = Not Assigned
Line
LCD
Setting Data (1)
Setting Data (2)
Key
Indication
1
Not Specified
NON
N/A
2
CO
CO
01~64
3
CFW - BNA
FW BNA
N/A
4
CFW - ALL
FW ALL
N/A
Call Appearance
5
Call Appearance Block (00~47)
C
Key 01~24
6
Feature Access
F A
01~16
7
Trunk Group
TKGP
01~32
8
Route Advance
ADV
01~32
Setting Data Page 2
Secondary Incoming Extension
Telephone Port No.
9
SIE
(Including CAR)
01~C0
10
Microphone
MIC
N/A
11
Headset
H SET
N/A
12
Scroll Key
SCROLL
N/A
13
DND On/Off
DND
N/A
14
Log On/Off
LOG
N/A
15
BGM On/Off
BGM
N/A
16
Intercom Key
ICM
N/A

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter the numeric data or Tenant No.
 OR 
D

to go to the next assigned Tenant No.
C

to change page; = is page 1,+ is page 2
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
2-05
Line Key Selection
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 419

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________

Notes

1.
Specify Call Appearance as the call appearance number of Call Appearance Block numbers from Memory Block
4-43 (Station to Call Appearance Block Assignment).
2.
Use this Memory Block to assign the following functions to each of the CO/PBX line keys on each telephone in a
tenant specified as Tenant Mode in Memory Block 2-05 (Line Key Selection):
H
Not specified (NON)
H
CO/PBX Line (CO) 01~64
H
CFW - BNA
H
CFW - ALL
H
Call Appearance (C) 00~47, 01~24 (Each Call Appearance Block may have a maximum of 24 Call
Appearance keys).
H
Feature Access (FA) 01~16
H
Trunk Group (TKGP) 01~32
H
Route Advance Block (ADV) 01~32
H
Secondary Incoming Extension (SIE) 01~C0
H
Microphone (MIC)
H
Headset (H SET)
H
Scroll Key for ANI/Caller ID (SCROLL)
H
DND On/Off
H
LOG On/Off
H
BGM On/Off
H
Intercom Key (ICM)
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 420
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
2-07
System Speed Dial Display
Tenant Mode
Assignment
2
Submode
--
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not confirmation of the Speed Dial
Data No.
numbers and messages stored in the system Speed Dial memory is allowed.
07
Display
PC Programming
Tenant
No.
Data
Page
(00~47)
No.
Title
No.
¦+BN
0 0 / 0 7 : S P D
D S P | 0 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1 When system Speed Dial is 80 buffers:
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
00~09
10~19
20~29
30~39
40~49
50~59
60~69
70~79
Page 2

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
All line keys
are at the
Page 1 When system Speed Dial is 1000 buffers:
default
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
499
setting.
000~099
100~199
200~299
300~399
400~499
500~599
600~699
700~799
Page 2
LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
800~899
900~999
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK2 + KG to access the Memory Block.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 421

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Procedures (Continued)
3
Press the CO/PBX Line key. The LED indication changes to indicate the data
Default Values
each time the CO/PBX line key is pressed.
All Speed Dial confirmation allowed

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter number data
C

to go to next page
A to go to previous page
D

to go to the next assigned Tenant No.
CO/PBX
Off
On
Line LED
The shaded
selection is the
Data
No (Not Assigned)
Yes (Assigned)
default.
G
4
After entering data for both pages, press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-35
Speed Dial Buffer Allocation
1-8-07
Class of Service (Attendant) Feature Selection 1

Notes

1.
When Deny is specified, no display is presented even when a System Speed Dial call is originated.
2.
Divide the Speed Dial numbers into groups and specify, per tenant, whether confirmation is allowed or denied.
3.
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) prints telephone numbers.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 422
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
2-08
ECR Relay to Tenant Assignment
Tenant Mode
2
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify Tenant Assignment for External Tone Ring/Night
--
Chime function.
Data No.
Display
08
Tenant
No.
Data
(00~47)
No.

Ti
tle
PC Programming

0 0 / 0 8 : R L Y
T E N A N T
¦+BN
0 0 / 0 8 : R L Y
T E N A N T
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Default not

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
assigned.
External
External
External
External
Tone Relay Tone Relay Tone Relay
Tone Relay Night Chime
1
2
3
4
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK2 + KH to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
All Tenants No Assignment
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
D

to go to the next assigned Tenant No.
G
4
Press the
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-7-07
External Ring Relay Pattern Selection

Notes

1.
By assigning Night Chime to a Tenant, incoming calls to the Tenant group in Night Mode can be answered using
the Night Call Pickup Access Code.
2.
The relays are fixed (nonprogrammable).
3.
Night Chime must be assigned for Night Call Pickup to work. A relay may be assigned even when an ECR-U( )
ETU is not installed in the system.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 423

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
2-09
DID Limit to Tenant Assignment
System Mode
2
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to assign the number of DID calls allowed to ring at a specified
--
tenant.
Data No.
Display
09
Tenant
Data
Setting
No.
No.
Title
Data 00~64
PC Programming
0 0 : 0 9 : L I M I T
0 0
¦+ BN
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK2 + KI to access the Memory Block.
3
Enter Setting Data using the dial pad.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
00 (No Limit)
J
01~64 Incoming Calls
to move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Tenant No. for Memory Block 2-01 is displayed.
5
Program all Tenants. After Tenant 47 is programmed, the display cycles back to Tenant 01 of Memory Block 2-01.
E
6
Press
to go back on-line.

Notes

Only DID incoming calls are limited. Outgoing calls, Internal (ICM) calls, and normal incoming calls are not
limited.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 424
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
3-00
Trunk Name/Number Assignment
CO/PBX Line Mode
3
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify telephone name/number for the CO/PBX line that is
--
displayed when the CO/PBX Line is seized, or during an incoming call.
Data No.
Display
00
CO/PBX No.
Setting Data
(01~64)
PC Programming
(1

3 di
gi
ts
ma
xi
mu m)
¦+BCT
0 1 /
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
Number
Name
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK3 to access the Memory Block.
3
Leave Number set or press LK2 to change to name for the data option for the selected
Default Values
CO/PBX No. 01, and enter the number or name (refer to Notes).
Not Specified

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.
 OR 
D

to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.
B

to generate a - (hyphen)
H

to generate a space (clear after hold)
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
5
After Memory Blocks 3-02~3-70 are programmed, the next CO/PBX No. is displayed.
6
Repeat steps 3~5 for each CO/PBX No. After the last CO/PBX number is programmed, CO/PBX No. 01 is displayed again.
E
7
Press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 425

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3-02
Trunk Status Selection
CO/PBX Line Mode
3
Use this Memory Block to specify whether a CO/PBX line is used for call origination
Submode
and termination or termination only.
--
Display
Data No.
CO/PBX
No.
Data
02
(01~64)
No.
Se
tti
ng
D
ata
PC Programming
0 1 / 0 2 : O U T & I N
¦+BCT
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7
LK8

The shaded
selection is the
OUT&IN
IN
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
G
2
Press LK3 +
to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX Line Key to change the option.

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.
 OR 
D

to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 426
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
3-03
Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment
CO/PBX Line Mode
3
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to assign a Trunk Group Number (01~32) to each CO/PBX
--
line.
Data No.
Display
03
CO/PBX
No.
Data
Trunk Group
PC Programming
(01~64)
No.

Ti
tle No. (01~32)
¦+BCT
0 1 / 0 3 : T R K
G P
= 0 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
G
2
Press LK3 +
+ KCto access the Memory Block.
3
Enter data for CO/PBX No. 01 using the dial pad to change the Trunk Group
Default Values
number.
CO/PBX lines (01~08) in Trunk Group 01

Use the following enter data:
CO/PBX lines (09~64) in Trunk Group 00
Jto move the cursor left
All Tie lines in Trunk Group 02
Lto move the cursor right
All DID lines Trunk Group 00
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.
 OR 
D

to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.

Trunk Group No:
00: Not Set
01~32: Trunk Group 01~32
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Notes

1.
When a Trunk group Access Code is dialed, an idle CO line is selected automatically and seized from the same
Trunk group dialed (the CO line of either same tenant or another tenant can be seized).
2.
By specifying the priority order, up to four routes (Trunk groups) can be selected in Memory Block 1-1-30 (Route
Advance Block Assignment). Idle CO lines are selected and seized in this sequence.
3.
When LCR is installed, Local Trunks should be assigned to Trunk Group 1. When a number is dialed that
bypasses LCR, the system accesses Trunk Group 1 and dials the number.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 427

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3-04
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Yes/No
CO/PBX Line Mode
Selection
3
Submode
--
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not to allow Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer.
Data No.
Display
04
CO/PBX
PC Programming
No.
Data
Setting
(01~64)
No.
Ti
tle
Data
¦+BCT
0 1 / 0 4 : T R F
N O
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8

The shaded
selection is the
NO
YES
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
G
2
Press LK3 +
+ KDto access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX Line Key to change the option.

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.
 OR 
D

to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 428
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-8-07
Class of Service (Attendant) Feature Selection 1
1-8-08
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
3-05
Trunk Incoming Answer Mode Selection
3-06
Automatic Tandem Trunk Assignment
5-01
Tie Line Networking Tandem Connection Assignment

Notes

Assign YS to connect both trunks via Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer or Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer feature.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 429

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3-05
Trunk Incoming Answer Mode
CO/PBX Line Mode
Selection
3
Submode
--
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify the incoming answer mode (Automatic
Data No.
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer, Automated Attendant, or DISA) per outside line.
05
Display
PC Programming
CO/PBX
No.
Data
Setting
(01~64)
No.

Data
¦+BCT
0 1 / 0 5 : N O
A S S I G N
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
NO ASSIGN
TANDM TRF
A A
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
G
2
Press LK3 +
+ KEto access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option for CO/PBX No.

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.
 OR 
D

to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.

Setting Data:

Line
LCD Indication
Definition
Key
when Selected
LK 1
NO ASSIGN
Normal
LK 2
TANDM TRF
Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
LK 3
A A
Automated Attendant/DISA
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 430
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming
Refer to individual features in the Electra Elite IPK Features and Specifications Manual.

Notes

1.
Only trunks assigned to TANDM TRF in this Memory Block are set or canceled for Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk
Transfer Mode when an attendant position enters 00 during the set or cancel operation.
For example:
To set Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Mode from an attendant position:
A
A
Press
+ FA + KK +
.
To cancel Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Mode from an attendant position:
A
A
Press
+ FB + KK +
.
2.
Only trunks assigned to AA in this Memory Block are set or canceled for Automated Attendant/DISA Mode when
an attendant position enters 00 during the set or cancel operation.
For example:
To set Automated Attendant/DISA Mode from an attendant position:
A
A
Press
+ HA + KK +
.
To cancel Automated Attendant/DISA Mode from an attendant position:
A
A
Press
+ HB + KK +
.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 431

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3-06
Automatic Tandem Trunk Assignment
CO/PBX Line Mode
3
Use this Memory Block to specify the incoming trunk and outgoing trunk for Automatic
Submode
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer.
--
Display
Data No.
(Incoming)
CO/PBX
06
No.
Data
Setting
(01~64)
No.

Ti
tl
e

Data
PC Programming
0 1 / 0 6 : T A N D
C O =
¦+AT
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
G
2
Press LK3 +
+ KFto access the Memory Block.
3
Enter the outgoing trunk number for incoming CO/PBX No.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
Not Specified
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.
 OR 
D

to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
3-04
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Yes/No Selection
3-05
Trunk Incoming Answer Mode Selection
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 432
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
3-07
CO/PBX Ringing Variation Selection
CO/PBX Line Mode
3
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify a ringing tone for each CO/PBX line.
--
Display
Data No.
CO/PBX
No.
Data
Setting
07
(01~64)
No.

Ti
tle
Data
PC Programming
0 1 / 0 7 : D S T
R I N G = M
¦+BCT
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
M
L
H
default.
(Medium)
(Low)
(High)
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
G
2
Press LK3 +
+ KGto access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the ringing tone for CO/PBX.

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.
 OR 
D

to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-28
Distinctive Ringing by Telephone or CO Selection

Notes

1.
This Memory Block is not applicable when Telephone is selected in Memory Block 1-1-28 (Distinctive Ringing by
Telephone or CO Selection).
2.
High, medium, or low ringing tone applies to incoming outside line calls only.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 433

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3-11
CO External Source Selection
CO/PBX Line Mode
3
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify whether the Music On Hold source is from the CO or
--
an external source (EXT SOURCE).
Data No.
Display
11
CO/PBX
No.
Data
Setting
(01~64)
No.
Data
PC Programming
0 1 / 1 1 : C O
¦+BCT
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
EXT
CO
default.
SOURCE
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
G
2
Press LK3 +
+ AAto access the Memory Block.
3
Press LK2 to change Music On Hold to an external source for CO/PBX No.

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.
 OR 
D

to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
3-12
CO Hold Memory Selection

Notes

When CO is set for EXT SOURCE and left in a trunk group, that CO is skipped in dialing access of the trunk
group.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 434
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
3-12
Trunk-to-MOH Trunk Assignment
CO/PBX Line Mode
3
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify the music on hold source for each CO/PBX line.
--
Display
Data No.
CO/PBX
12
No.
Data
Setting
(01~64)
No.
Ti
tle
Data
PC Programming
0 1
1 2 : H O L D
C O 0 0
¦+BCT
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
G
2
Press LK3 +
+AB access the Memory Block.
3
Enter data for CO/PBX No. using the dial pad to assign the music selection.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
00 = Not Assigned for CO/PBX No. 01~64
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.
 OR 
D

to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-4-17
Automated Attendant Delay Announcement Hold Tone Selection
1-8-09
Music on Hold Pattern Selection
1-8-31
Hold Tone Source Assignment
1-8-32
Hold Internal Tone Volume Selection
3-11
CO External Source Selection
4-66
MOH or Ring Back Tone Selection

Notes

1.
When set to 00, the CO gets Music on Hold from the MOH jack on the side of the cabinet.
2.
When Memory Block 1-8-31 (Hold Tone Source Assignment) is set to INT, this Memory Block is not used.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 435

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3-14
Tie Line Type Assignment
CO/PBX Line Mode
3
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to assign the loop supervision to be used for each Trunk
--
associated with a Tie line.
Data No.
Display
14
Tie/DID
No.
Data
(01~64)
No.

Ti
tle
PC Programming
0 1 / 1 4 : 2 N D
D I A L
¦+ALT
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
2ND DIAL
IMMEDIATE
DELAY
WINK
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
G
2
Press LK3 +
+ ADto access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the loop supervision for CO/PBX No.

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.
 OR 
D

to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
3-92
Trunk (Installed, DP/DTMF) Selection
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 436
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________

Notes

1.
Line keys 1~4 identify the following methods of loop supervision:
1 = Second Dial Tone
2 = Immediate Start
3 = Delay Dial
4 = Wink Start
2.
This Memory Block affects T1 channels assigned as Tie lines.
3.
When a second dial tone is selected, the distant system provides the dial tone.
4.
When Immediate, Delay, or Wink is selected, the local system provides the dial tone.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 437

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3-15
Trunk DTMF Duration/Interdigit
CO/PBX Line Mode
Selection
3
Submode
--
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify the tone duration/interdigit time of dual-tone
Data No.
multifrequency (DTMF) signals.
15
Display
PC Programming
CO/PBX
No.
Data
¦+BCT
(01~64)
No.
Titl
e
S
ett
ing Data
0 1 / 1 5 : M F
1 1 0 / 8 0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
default. Times
60/70
60/80
110/80
160/80
210/80 410/100 610/100 810/190
ar
e in
milliseconds.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
G
2
Press LK3 +
+ AEto access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change tone duration/interdigit time for CO/PBX No.

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.
 OR 
D

to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
3-92
Trunk (Installed, DP/DTMF) Selection
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 438
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________

Notes

1.
This is also used for Tie lines.
2.
This Memory Block affects T1 Channels assigned as Tie/DID lines. A DTI-U( ) ETU is required.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 439

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3-16
Tie Line Prepause Time Selection
CO/PBX Line Mode
3
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify the time (prepause) before the originating side can
--
send dial pulse or dual-tone multifrequency (DTMF) to the distant system.
Data No.
Display
16
CO/PBX
No.
Data
Setting
Page
PC Programming
(01~64)
No.
Ti
tl
e
Data
No.
¦+ALM
0 1 / 1 6 : P R E
0 | 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
0
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
The shaded
selection is the
Page 2
default. Times

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
are in seconds.
6.0
7.0
8.0
9.0
10.0
11.0
12.0
13.0
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
G
2
Press LK3 +
+ AF to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change prepause time for CO/PBX No.

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.
 OR 
D

to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.
C

to go to the next page
A

to go to the previous page
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Notes

1.
Prepause time differs according to the acknowledgment signaling method.
2.
This Memory Block affects T1 channels assigned as Tie/DID lines.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 440
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
3-17
Tie Line Answer Detect Time
CO/PBX Line Mode
Selection
3
Submode
--
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify the time before an Electra Elite IPK system answer
Data No.
(off-hook) is recognized as an answer.
17
Display
PC Programming
CO/PBX
Data
Setting
(01~64)
No.
Title
Data
Page
¦+ALM

0 1 / 1 7 : A N S
5 2 0 | 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
The shaded
0
130 260
390
520
650
780
910
selection is the
Page 2
default. Times
are in

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
milliseconds.
1040
1170
1300
1430
1560
1690
1820
1950

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
G
2
Press LK3 +
+ AG to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change answer detect time for CO/PBX No.

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.
 OR 
D

to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.
C

to go to the next page
A

to go to the previous page
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Notes

1.
Answering a call may be impossible if the CO answer detect time is too long.
2.
This Memory Block affects T1 channels assigned as Tie/DID lines.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 441

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3-18
Tie Line Release Detect Time
CO/PBX Line Mode
Selection
3
Submode
--
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify the time before the circuit disconnect detected on
Data No.
the Tie line on the distant system side is recognized as Tie line release.
18
Display
PC Programming
CO/PBX
No.
Data
Setting
¦+ALM
(01~64)
No.
Title
Data
Page
0 1 / 1 8 : R L S
5 2 0 | 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
The shaded
0
130
260
390
520
650
780
910
selection is the
Page 2
default. Times
are in

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
milliseconds.
1040 1170
1300
1430
1560
1690
1820
1950
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
G
2
Press LK3 +
+ AH to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change release detect time for CO/PBX No.

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.
 OR 
D

to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.
C

to go to the next page
A

to go to the previous page
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 442
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________

Notes

1.
Specify distinguishing circuit release from on-hook, noise, and temporary interruption. Probable situations for Tie
line release detection include:
H
Called side hangs up first. The circuit is released 92 ms. + specified time after the other party disconnects
the call.
H
Called side hangs up second. The circuit is released when the specified time has elapsed after the other
party hangs up.
H
Originating side hangs up first. The circuit is released 92 ms. + specified time after the other party hangs
up.
H
Originating side hangs up second. The circuit is released when the specified time has elapsed after the
other party hangs up.
2.
This Memory Block affects T1 channels assigned as Tie/DID lines. A DTI-U( ) ETU is required.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 443

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3-19
Tie Line/CO/PBX Incoming Signal
CO/PBX Line Mode
Detect Time Selection
3
Submode
--
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify the time after the incoming signal from another
Data No.
system is detected before the acknowledge signal is sent out.
19
Display
PC Programming
CO/PBX
No.
Data
Setting
Page
¦+BCT
(01~64) No.
Title
Data
No.
0 1 / 1 9 : I N C
0 3
| 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1 Wink Start
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
00 (0 ms.)
01 (130 ms.) 02 (260 ms.) 03 (390 ms.) 04 (520 ms.) 05 (650 ms.) 06 (780 ms.) 07 (910 ms.)
Page 2

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
08 (1040
09 (1170
10 (1300
11 (1430
12 (1560
13 (1690
14 (1820
15 (1950
ms.)
ms.)
ms.)
ms.)
ms.)
ms.)
ms.)
ms.)
Page 1 Delay
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
The shaded
00 (0 ms.)
01 (30 ms.)
02 (60 ms.)
03 (90 ms.) 04 (120 ms.) 05 (150 ms.) 06 (180 ms.) 07 (210 ms.)
selection is the
Page 2
default for each
method.

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
08 (240 ms.) 09 (270 ms.) 10 (300 ms.) 11 (330 ms.) 12 (360 ms.) 13 (390 ms.) 14 (420 ms.) 15 (450 ms.)
Page 1 COI
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
00 (50 ms.) 01 (100 ms.) 02 (150 ms.) 03 (200 ms.) 04 (250 ms.) 05 (300 ms.) 06 (350 ms.) 07 (400 ms.)
Page 2

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
08 (450 ms.) 09 (500 ms.) 10 (550 ms.) 11 (600 ms.) 12 (650 ms.) 13 (700 ms.) 14 (750 ms.) 15 (800 ms.)
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
G
2
Press LK3 +
+ AI to access the Memory Block.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 444
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Procedures
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change incoming signal detect time for CO/PBX No.

Receiving Side
Incoming Signal Detection
DC Loop Supervision
Time
Sending Acknowledgment Signal

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.
 OR 
D

to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.
C

to go to the next page.
A

to go to the previous page.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
3-14
Tie/DID Line Type Assignment

Notes

1.
For second dial tone and immediate loop supervision, the time is fixed at 30 ms.
2.
This Memory Block affects T1 channels assigned as Tie/DID lines.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 445

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3-20
Tie Line Loop Off-Guard Time
CO/PBX Line Mode
Selection
3
Submode
--
General Description
Use this Memory Block to assign loop off-guard time to prevent noise that could cause
Data No.
the system to be unable to answer an incoming Tie line.
20
Display
PC Programming
CO/PBX
No.
Data
Setting
Page
(01~64)
No.
Title
Data
No.
¦+ALM

0 1 / 2 0 : L O O P
2 . 0 | 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
0.0
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
3.0
4.0.
5.0
The shaded
selection is the
Page 2
default. Times

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
are in seconds.
6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0
10.0
11.0
12.0
13.0
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
G
2
Press LK3 +
+ BK to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change loop off-guard time for CO/PBX No.

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.
 OR 
D

to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.
C

to go to the next page.
A

to go to the previous page.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 446
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________

Notes

1.
Assign a loop off-guard time to prevent system malfunction caused by noise when going off-hook to answer a call
from another system on a Tie line call.
2.
The system ignores any noise that is detected during the time specified in this Memory Block.
3.
This Memory Block affects T1 channels assigned as Tie/DID lines.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 447

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3-21
Tie Line Length of Wink Signal
CO/PBX Line Mode
Selection
3
Submode
--
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify the time a wink pulse is sent to another system.
Data No.
21
Display
CO/PBX
PC Programming
No.
Data
Setting
(01~64)
No.

Ti
tle
Da
ta
Page
¦+ALM
0 1 / 2 1 : W I N K 1 8 0
| 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
The shaded
30
60
90
120
150
180
210
240
selection is the
Page 2
default. Times
are in

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
milliseconds.
270
300
330 360
390
420
450 480
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
G
2
Press LK3 +
+ BA to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change wink-signal time for CO/PBX No.

Receiving Side
Incoming Signal Detection
DC Loop Supervision
Time
Wink Pulse Sending

Use the following to enter data:
J to move the cursor left
L to move the cursor right
K~I to enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.
 OR 
D

to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.
C

to go to the next page
A

to go to the previous page
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 448
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Procedures (Continued)
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Notes

1.
Specify Wink Start in Memory Block 3-14 (Tie Line Type Assignment).
2.
This Memory Block affects T1 channels assigned as Tie/DID lines.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 449

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3-22
Tie Line Length of Delay Signal
CO/PBX Line Mode
Selection
3
Submode
--
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify the time a delay pulse is sent to another system.
Data No.
22
Display
CO/PBX
PC Programming
No.
Data
Setting
(01~64)
No.

Ti
tle
Data
Page
¦+ALM
0 1 / 2 2 : D E L Y
3 0 0 | 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1
LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
The shaded
0
300
600
900
1200
1500
1800
2100
selection is the
Page 2
default. Times
are in

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
milliseconds.
2400
2700 3000 3300 3600
3900 4200 4500
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
G
2
Press LK3 +
+ BB to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change delay signal time for CO/PBX No.

Receiving Side
Receiving Signal Detection
DC Loop Supervision
Time
Delay Pulse Sending

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.
 OR 
D

to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.
C

to go to the next page
A

to go to the previous page
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
G
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 450
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________

Notes

1.
Specify Delay loop supervision in Memory Block 3-14 (Tie Line Type Assignment).
2.
This Memory Block affects T1 channels assigned as Tie/DID lines.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 451

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3-24
Tie Line Incoming Interdigit Timeout
CO/PBX Line Mode
Selection
3
Submode
--
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify the time, in seconds, that an address signal is
Data No.
missing during the incoming call detection process before an error tone is returned to
24
the other system.
PC Programming
Display
CO/PBX
¦+ALM
No.
Data
Setting
(01~64
No.

T
itle
Data
Page
0 1 / 2 4 : I N C O M
6 s | 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6
LK 7
LK 8

(
1s
2s
3s
4s
5s
6s
7s
No Limit)
The shaded
selection is the
Page 2
default.

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
8s
9s
10s
11s
12s
13s
14s
15s
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
G
2
Press LK3 +
+ BD to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change incoming interdigit timeout for CO/PBX No.

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.
 OR 
D

to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.
C

to go to the next page
A

to go to the previous page
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 452
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________

Notes

1.
A timeout occurs when:

A dial pulse is not received within the time specified by this Memory Block after the receiving side detects
the off-hook signal.

The next dial pulse is not received within the time specified by this Memory Block after the receiving side
detects (receives) a dial pulse.
2.
This Memory Block affects T1 channels assigned to Tie/DID lines.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 453

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3-25
Tie Line Wink/Delay Signal Detect
CO/PBX Line Mode
Timeout Selection
3
Submode
--
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify a maximum time, in seconds, for receiving an
Data No.
acknowledgment signal from a distant system before sending a busy tone.
25
Display
PC Programming
CO/PBX
No.
Data
Setting
Page
(01~64)
No.
Title
Data
No.
¦+ALM
0 1 / 2 5 : D T E C T
7 s | 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7
LK 8
·
(
1s
2s
3s
4s
5s
6s
7s
No Limit
The shaded
selection is the
Page 2
default.

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
8s
9s
10s
11s
12s
13s
14s
15s
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
G
2
Press LK3 +
+ BE to access the Memory Block.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 454
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Procedures (Continued)
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change signal detect timeout for CO/PBX No.

Originating Side
Sending an Outgoing Signal
Time
Receiving Acknowledgment Signal
Timeout when the
acknowledgment
signal is not received.

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.
 OR 
D

to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.
C

to go to the next page
A

to go to the previous page
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Notes

1.
When the acknowledgment signal is not received in a programmed time after an outgoing signal is sent to the
other system, a busy tone is sent to the telephone.
2.
This Memory Block affects T1 channels assigned to Tie/DID lines.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 455

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3-27
Tie Line Dial Tone Selection
CO/PBX Line Mode
3
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not to send a dial tone to the distant
--
system.
Data No.
Display
27
CO/PBX
No.
Data
Setting
(01~64)
No.
Data
PC Programming
Ti
tl
e
¦+ALT
0 1 / 2 7 : S D T
Y S
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8

The shaded
selection is the
NO
YS
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
G
2
Press LK3 +
+ BG to access the Memory Block.
3
Press Lk1 when you don't want to send a dial tone to the distant system for CO/PBX No.

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.
 OR 
D

to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
3-14
Tie Line Type Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 456
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
3-28
Tie Line Reorder Tone Selection
CO/PBX Line Mode
3
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not to send a reorder tone to the
--
originating station when the number of a distant system is used to originate a call over
a Tie line.
Data No.
Display
28

PC Programming
CO/PBX
No.
Data
Setting
¦+ALT
(01~64)
No.
Ti
tl
e
Data
0 1 / 2 8 : R O T
Y S
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
NO
YS
default.

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
G
2
Press LK3 +
+ BH to access the Memory Block.
3
Press LK1 to cancel a reorder tone to the originating system for CO/PBX No.

Originating Side
Electra
Distant
Elite IPK
System
8 - 12
Reorder
12
1111
Tone
Sending

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.
 OR 
D

to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 457

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
3-14
Tie Line Type Assignment

Notes

This Memory Block affects T1 channels assigned as Tie lines.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 458
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
3-29
Trunk Internal Transmit Pad
CO/PBX Line Mode
Selection
3
Submode
--
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify a dB volume level for calls originated from the
Data No.
extensions of a local system to a distant system.
29
Display
PC Programming
CO/PBX
No.
Data
Setting
(01~64)
No.
Title
¦+BCT
Data
Page
0 1 / 2 9 : P A D
I T
8 | 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
2 4
6
8
12
16
3
-3
The shaded
selection is the
Page 2
default. Settings

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
are in dB.
0
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
G
2
Press LK3 +
+ BI to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change internal transmit pad for CO/PBX No.

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.
 OR 
D

to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.
C

to go to the next page
A

to go to the previous page
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 459

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________

Notes

1.
The Electra Elite IPK system divides the connections into the following patterns:
(Specify the sending and receiving levels of each pattern for each of the trunks.)
Pattern A (Intercom Mode)
Connections established between the intercom stations of the
local system and trunks.
Sending level
(To be specified in this Memory Block.)
Receiving level
Pattern B (Tandem Mode)
Connections established between two systems, with the local
Sending level
system as a tandem system.
Receiving level
2.
The Memory Block applies to Tie lines, T1, DID, and Basic Rate Interface (BRI) trunks.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 460
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
3-30
Trunk Internal Receive Pad Selection
CO/PBX Line Mode
3
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify a dB volume level for calls coming to extensions of a
--
local system from a distant system.
Data No.
Display
30
CO/PBX
No.
Data
Setting
(01~64)
No.
Title
Data
Page
PC Programming

¦+BCT
0 1 / 3 0 : P A D
I R
8 | 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
2
4
6
8
12
16
3
-3
The shaded
selection is the
Page 2
default. Settings

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
are in dB.
0
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
G
2
Press LK3 +
+ CK to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change internal receive pad for CO/PBX No.

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.
 OR 
D

to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.
C

to go to the next page
A

to go to the previous page
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 461

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________

Notes

1.
The Electra Elite IPK system divides the connections into the following patterns:
(Specify the sending and receiving levels of each pattern for each of the trunks.)
Pattern A (Intercom Mode)
Connections established between the intercom stations of the
local system and trunks.
Sending level
Receiving level
(To be specified in this Memory Block.)
Pattern B (Tandem Mode)
Connections established between two systems, with the local
Sending level
system as a tandem system.
Receiving level
2.
This Memory Block applies to Tie lines, T1, DID, and Basic Rate Interface (BRI) trunks.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 462
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
3-31
Trunk External Transmit Pad
CO/PBX Line Mode
Selection
3
Submode
--
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify transmit dB volume level for tandem calls between a
Data No.
local system and two distant systems.
31
Display
PC Programming
CO/PBX
No.
Data
Setting
(01~64)
No.
Title
Data
Page
¦+BCT
0 1 / 3 1 : P A D
E T
0 | 2
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
2
4
6
8
12
16
3
-3
The shaded
selection is the
Page 2
default. Settings

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
are in dB.
0
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
G
2
Press LK3 +
+ CA to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change external transmit pad for CO/PBX No.

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.
 OR 
D

to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.
C

to go to the next page
A

to go to the previous page
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 463

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________

Notes

1.
The Electra Elite IPK system divides the connections into the following patterns:
(Specify the sending and receiving levels of each pattern for each of the trunks.)
Pattern A (Intercom Mode)
Connections established between the intercom stations of the
local system and trunks.
Sending level
Receiving level
Pattern B (Tandem Mode)
Connections established between two systems, with the local
Sending level
system as a tandem system.
Receiving level
(To be specified in this Memory Block.)
2.
This Memory Block applies to Tie lines, T1, DID, and ISDN trunks.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 464
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
3-32
Trunk External Receive Pad Selection CO/PBX Line Mode
3
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify receive dB volume level for tandem calls between a
--
local system and two distant systems.
Data No.
Display
32
CO/PBX
No.
Data
Setting
(01~64)
No.

Ti
tle Data
Page
PC Programming
0 1 / 3 2 : P A D
E R
0 | 2
¦+BCT
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
2
4
6
8
12
16
3
-3
The shaded
selection is the
Page 2
default. Settings

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
are in dB.
0
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
G
2
Press LK3 +
+ CB to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change eternal receive pad for CO/PBX No.

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.
 OR 
D

to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.
C

to go to the next page
A

to go to the previous page
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 465

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________

Notes

1.
The Electra Elite IPK system divides the connections into the following patterns:
(Specify the sending and receiving levels of each pattern for each of the trunks.)
Pattern A (Intercom Mode)
Connections established between the intercom stations of the
local system and trunks.
Sending level
Receiving level
Pattern B (Tandem Mode)
Connections established between two systems, with the local
Sending level
system as a tandem system.
Receiving level
2.
This Memory Block applies to Tie lines, T1, DID, and ISDN trunks.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 466
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
3-33
Disconnect Recognition Time
CO/PBX Line Mode
Selection
3
Submode
--
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify the minimum time before a disconnected circuit can
Data No.
be accessed again.
33
Display
PC Programming
CO/PBX
No.
Data
Setting
(01~64)
No.
Title
¦+BCT

Da ta
Page
0 1 / 3 3 : D I S T
0 . 3 | 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
The shaded
selection is the
Page 2
default. Times

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
are in seconds.
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
G
2
Press LK3 +
+ CC to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change disconnect recognition time for CO/PBX No.

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.
 OR 
D

to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.
C

to go to the next page
A

to go to the previous page
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Notes

When a call origination on a CO/PBX line or Tie line is interrupted or dropped, and an attempt is made to seize
the line again, it must be disconnected and cleared before it can be accessed again.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 467

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3-38
Automated Attendant Message to
CO/PBX Line Mode
Trunk Selection
3
Submode
--
General Description
Use this Memory Block to assign the Automated Attendant Message for each CO/PBX
Data No.
Trunk. When the Automated Attendant Message is assigned to each CO/PBX Trunk,
38
the system automatically answers the incoming call and sends an Automated
Attendant Message to the calling party.
PC Programming
Display
¦+AU
CO/PBX
No.
Data
Setting
(01~64)
No.

Ti
tle
Data
0 1 / 3 8 : A A
M S G
= 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
G
2
Press LK3 +
+ CHto access the Memory Block.
3
Enter data for CO/PBX No. using the dial pad to change the Automated Attendant
Default Values
message number.
Message 1
Setting Data: 1~8 Automated Attendant Message 1~8

Use the following to enter data:
Jto moves the cursor left
Lto moves the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.
 OR 
D

to go to the next assigned CO/PBX Line No.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Notes

An Access Code must be dialed from the attendant telephone position to activate this feature.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 468
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
3-40
Automatic Release Signal Detection
CO/PBX Line Mode
Selection
3
Submode
--
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify the signal detection time for release of a CO/PBX
Data No.
line after a disconnect signal is received from the distant Central Office or PBX.
40
Display
PC Programming
CO/PBX
No.
Data
Setting
(01~64)
No.
Title
Data
Page
¦+BCT

0 1 / 4 0 : R L S T
3 5 0 | 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7
LK 8
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
350
The shaded
selection is the
Page 2
default. Times

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
are in
milliseconds.

400
450
500
550
600
650
700
(NO limit)
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
G
2
Press LK3 +
+ DKto access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change signal release time for CO/PBX No.

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.
 OR 
D

to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.
C

to go to the next page
A

to go to the previous page
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 469

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3-41
Delay Announcement Assignment
CO/PBX Line Mode
3
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not Delay Announcement is sent to the
--
calling party for Day and/or Night Mode per CO Port.
Data No.
Display
41
CO/PBX
No.
Data
Setting
(01~64)
No.

Ti
tle
Data
PC Programming
0 1 / 4 1 : M S G
D / N = N N
¦+AR
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
NN
YN
NY
YY
default.
(NO)
(Day)
(Night)
(Both)

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
G
2
Press LK3 +
+ DAto access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to assign the delay announcement for CO/PBX No.

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.
 OR 
D

to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
Refer to individual features in the Electra Elite IPK Features and Specifications Manual.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 470
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
3-42
DIT Assignment
CO/PBX Line Mode
3
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to assign a Day Mode direct trunk termination to an
--
independent station.
Data No.
System Software R2500 is required for 5-, 6-, or 7-digit Extension Numbers.
42
Display (R1700 or lower)
PC Programming
(Incoming)
¦+BCT
CO/PBX
No.
Data
(01~64)
No.

Ti
tle Setting Data
0 1 / 4 2 : D I T
D --
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Display (R2000 or higher)
(Incoming)
CO/PBX
No.
Data
(01~64)
No.
Tit
le Setting Data
0 1 / 4 2 : D I T X X X
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

The number displayed after DIT (XXX) is from Memory Block 1-2-34 (Expanded Station Number Assignment) when assigned
(R2500 is required).
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
G
2
Press LK3 +
+ DBto access the Memory Block.
3
Enter data for CO/PBX No. using the dial pad to assign DIT to a station.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
No Assignment
Jto moves the cursor left
Lto moves the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.
 OR 
D

to go to the next assigned CO/PBX Line No.

Enter the following:
Station No. (2-, 3-, or 4-digits 10~8999)
CO Port No. (01~64)
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 471

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Procedures
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-46
Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment
1-1-47
Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment
1-1-48
Access Code (3-Digit) Assignment
1-2-03
2~7-Digit Station Number Selection
1-2-34
Expanded Station Number Assignment
3-43
ANA Assignment
4-10
Station Number Assignment

Notes

1.
A trunk can terminate at only one station, but any number of trunks can terminate at the same station.
2.
When 5-, 6-, or 7-digit Extension Numbers are used, the three leading digits are assigned in Memory
Block 1-2-34 (Expanded Station Number Assignment) and are displayed in this Memory Block when assigned.
3.
When 5-, 6-, or 7-digit Extension Numbers are used, only the last four digits are assigned in this Memory Block.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 472
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
3-43
ANA Assignment
CO/PBX Line Mode
3
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to assign a Night Mode Direct trunk termination to a station.
--
System Software R2500 is required for 5-, 6-, or 7-digit Extension Numbers.
Data No.
Display (R1700 or lower)
43
PC Programming
(Incoming)
CO/PBX
¦+BCT
No.
Data
(01~64)
No.
T
itl
e Setting Data
0 1 / 4 3 : D I T
N --
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Display (R2000 or higher)
(Incoming)
CO/PBX
No.
Data
(01~64)
No.
Tit
le Setting Data
0 1 / 4 3 : A N A X X X
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

The number displayed after DIT (XXX) is from Memory Block 1-2-34 (Expanded Station Number Assignment) when assigned
(R2500 is required).
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
G
2
Press LK3 +
+ DCto access the Memory Block.
3
Enter data for CO/PBX No. using the dial pad to assign ANA to a station.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
No Assignment
Jto moves the cursor left
Lto moves the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.
 OR 
D

to go to the next assigned CO/PBX Line No.

Enter the following:
Station No. (2-, 3-, or 4-digits 10~8999)
CO Port No. (01~64)
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 473

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
3-44
Caller ID Display Assignment for CO/ CO/PBX Line Mode
PBX Line
3
Submode
--
General Description
Use this Memory Block to assign one Multiline Terminal to display ANI/Caller ID
Data No.
Indication for incoming CO/PBX calls per CO/PBX line.
44
This Memory Block is used for System Software R1600 and lower. For System
PC Programming
Software R1700 or higher, it is no longer required.
¦+AI
Display
CO/PBX
Tel
No.
Data
Port No.
(01~64)
No.

Ti
tle
01~C0
0 1 / 4 4 : C A L L I D
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
G
2
Press LK3 +
+ DDto access the Memory Block.
3
Enter data for CO/PBX No. using the dial pad to assign ANI/Caller ID to a station.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
No Assignment
Jto moves the cursor left
Lto moves the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.
 OR 
D

to go to the next assigned CO/PBX Line No.

Enter the following:
Tel Port No. 01~CO
CO/PBX No. 01~64
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
Refer to individual features in the Electra Elite IPK Features and Specifications Manual.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 475

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________

Notes

To display ANI/Caller ID Indication for normal incoming CO calls and CAR incoming calls, both Caller ID
Indication and Ring assignment must be Programmed. A maximum of 15 Multiline Terminals can be assigned
system-wide to display ANI/Caller ID for normal incoming CO calls and CAR incoming calls using Memory Block
1-1-78 (Caller ID Display Assignment for System Mode). Another Multiline Terminal can be assigned to display
ANI/Caller ID Indication for normal incoming CO calls, per CO line, using this Memory Block.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 476
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
3-45
Live Record Trunk Selection
CO/PBX Line Mode
3
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify per Trunk whether or not to allow Live Record for
--
Digital Voice Mail.
Data No.
Display
45
CO/PBX
Data
No.
Setting
No.

Ti
tle
Data
PC Programming
(01~64)
¦+AV
0 1 / 4 5 : L I V E R E C
N O
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
NO
YS
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
G
2
Press LK3 +
+ DEto access the Memory Block.
3
Press LK2 to assign Live Record for CO/PBX No.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
NO
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.
 OR 
D

to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-8-08
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 477

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3-50
ISDN Line SPID Assignment
CO/PBX Line Mode
3
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to assign the Integrated Services Digital Network Service
--
Profile Identifier (ISDN SPID) number.
Data No.
Display
50
CO/PBX
No.
Data
Setting Data
(01~64)
No.
(20 digits maximum)
PC Programming
¦+AN
0 1 / 5 0 :
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
G
2
Press LK3 +
+ EK to access the Memory Block.
3
Enter data for CO/PBX No. using the dial pad to assign ISDN SPID to a station.

Use the following to enter data:
Jto moves the cursor left
Lto moves the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.
 OR 
D

to go to the next assigned CO/PBX Line No.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 478
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
3-52
ISDN Trunk Directory Number
CO/PBX Line Mode
Assignment
3
Submode
--
General Description
Use this Memory Block to assign the Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)
Data No.
Directory Number.
52
Display
PC Programming
CO/PBX
No.
Data
Setting Data
(01~64)
No.
(20 digits maximum)
¦+AN

0 1 / 5 2 :
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
G
2
Press LK3 +
+ EB to access the Memory Block.
3
Enter data for CO/PBX No. using the dial pad to assign ISDN Directory Number.

Use the following to enter data:
Jto moves the cursor left
Lto moves the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.
 OR 
D

to go to the next assigned CO/PBX Line No.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 479

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3-53
Caller Name Indication Selection
CO/PBX Line Mode
3
General Description
Submode
When an Caller ID number is detected, the Electra Elite IPK system can check the
--
speed dialing buffer for a match. When a name is assigned to a matched number, the
name can be displayed, when allowed by this assignment.
Data No.
Display
53
CO/PBX
PC Programming
No.
Data
Setting
(01~64)
No.

Ti
tl
e
Data
¦+AI
0 1 / 5 3 : I S
I N D
N U M
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
NO
NUM
NAM
TRK
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
G
2
Press LK3 +
+ EC to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.
 OR 
D

to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.

Settings include:
NO
Disables caller name display.
NUM
Selected when system speed dial buffers are assigned a number; the number is displayed when Caller ID
number matches a speed dial number.
NAM
Selected when system speed dial buffers are assigned a name; the name is displayed when it is assigned to a
matched number and Caller ID number matches the speed dial number.
TRK
Selected if you want the trunk name or number to be displayed when data is assigned in Memory Block 3-00
(Trunk Name/Number Assignment).
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line after all data is written.
Related Programming
Refer to individual features in the Electra Elite IPK Features and Specifications Manual.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 480
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
3-59
Automated Attendant Function
CO/PBX Line Mode
Selection
3
Submode
--
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify whether the Automated Attendant is to operate in
Data No.
the Normal DISA Mode or in the Delay Announcement mode.
59
Display
PC Programming
CO/PBX
No.
Data
Setting
(01~64)
No.
Title
¦+AU
Data
0 1 / 5 9 : A . A . N O R M A L
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
NORMAL
DELAY
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
G
2
Press LK3 +
+ EI to access the Memory Block.
3
Press LK2 to Delay Announcement Mode on CO/PBX No.

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.
 OR 
D

to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.
G
4
Press
to write the selected data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-4-18
Automated Attendant Delay Announcement Assignment
1-4-19
Automated Attendant 1st to 2nd Delay Announcement Interval Time Selection
1-4-20
Automated Attendant Delay Announcement Disconnect Time Selection
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 481

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3-61
DIT/ANA Delay Answer Time
CO/PBX Line Mode
Selection
3
Submode
--
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify the time an incoming call rings before being
Data No.
changed to a DIT/ANA call.
61
This Memory Block can be adjusted in 1-second intervals (R3000 or higher).
PC Programming
Display (2500 or lower)
¦+BCT
CO/PBX
No.
Data
Setting
(01~64)
No.
Title
Data
0 1 / 6 1 : D L Y
A N S
0 s
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
0s
5s
10s
20s
30s
40s
50s
60s
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
G
2
Press LK3 +
+ FA to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the applicable line key to change the time an incoming call rings before it is changed to a DIT/ANA call on CO/PBX NO.

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.
 OR 
D

to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.
G
4
Press
to write the selected data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Refer to next page for R3000 Programming Procedures.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 482
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Display (3000 or higher)
CO/PBX
No.
Data
Setting
(01~64)
No.
Title
Data
0 1 / 6 1 : D L Y A N S
0 0 s
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
G
2
Press LK3 +
+ FA to access the Memory Block.
3
Use the dial pad to enter the Data Setting for Class 1.
Default Values
Setting Data
00s
00s = No Time
00s~99s (e.g., 02s = 2s)
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
E
5
Program the next memory block, or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
3-42
DIT Assignment
3-43
ANA Assignment
3-62
DIT Tenant Assignment

Notes

1.
When the time is set to a value other than 0, call termination is treated as a normal incoming call and DIT
termination is performed after the time elapses. When 0 is selected, DIT call termination is performed
immediately.
2.
R3000 or higher is required to adjust this memory block by 1-second intervals.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 483

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3-62
DIT Tenant Assignment
CO/PBX Line Mode
3
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to assign each Trunk to a Master Tenant for the DIT/ANA to
--
follow the Day/Night/Weekend mode settings.
Data No.
Display
62
CO/PBX
No.
Data
Tenant
(01~64)
No.
Title
(00~47
PC Programming
¦+BCT
0 1 / 6 2 : D I T
= T N T 0 0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
G
2
Press LK3 +
+ FB to access the Memory Block.
3
Select the CO/PBX Line No. and enter the Tenant No.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
Tenant 00
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter Tenant No. or CO/PBX No.
 OR 
D

to go to the next assigned CO/PBX Line No.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
3-42
DIT Assignment
3-43
ANA Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 484
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
3-63
DIT Weekend Mode Selection
CO/PBX Line Mode
3
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to enable weekend (Holiday) Mode check on Tenant Groups
--
for incoming DIT calls.
Data No.
Display
63
CO/PBX
No.
Data
Setting
(01~64)
No.
Title
Data
PC Programming
¦+BCT
0 1 / 6 3 : H O L
D I T
Y S
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
YS
NO
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
G
2
Press LK3 +
+ FC to access the Memory Block.
3
Press LK2 to disable weekend Mode check on Tenant Groups for incoming DIT calls on CO/PBX No.

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.
 OR 
D

to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.
G
4
Press
to write the selected data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 485

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3-64
DIT Night Mode Delay Answer
CO/PBX Line Mode
Selection
3
Submode
--
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not the DIT Delay Answer Time applies
Data No.
to the CO/PBX calls ringing in Night Mode.
64
Display
PC Programming
CO/PBX
No.
Data
Setting
Title
¦+BCT
(01~64)
No.
Data
0 1 / 6 4 : N T
M O D
N O
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
NO
YS
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
G
2
Press LK3 +
+ FD to access the Memory Block.
3
Press LK2 to apply DIT Delay Answer time for incoming DIT calls ringing in night mode on CO/PBX No.

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.
 OR 
D

to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.
G
4
Press
to write the selected data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 486
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
3-65
Hold Tone Automated Attendant
CO/PBX Line Mode
Selection
3
Submode
--
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify the Automated Attendant message that is played to
Data No.
an extension or DID trunk on an incoming call.
65
Display
PC Programming
CO/PBX
No.
Data
Setting
(01~64)
No.
Title
Data
Page
¦+AU

0 1 / 6 5 : I N C
N O N E | 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
NONE
MSG 1
MSG 2
MSG 3
MSG 4
MSG 5
MSG 6
MSG 7
The shaded
Page 2
selection is the
default.

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
MSG 8
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
G
2
Press LK3 +
+ FE to access the Memory Block.
3
Press line key to specify the Automated Attendant message to play to an extension or DID trunk on an incoming call to CO/PBX
No.

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.
 OR 
D

to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.
C

to go to the next page
A

to go to the previous page
G
4
Press
to write the selected data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 487

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-4-11
Automated Attendant Message Day/Night Mode Selection
1-4-17
Automated Attendant Delay Announcement Hold Tone Selection
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 488
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
3-67
CO/PBX Ringing Pattern Selection
CO/PBX Line Mode
3
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify the ringing pattern assigned to each CO/PBX line.
--
Display
Data No.
CO/PBX
No.
Data
Setting
67
(01~64)
No.

T

itle Data Page
PC Programming
0 1 / 6 7 : C O
R N G
| 1
¦+BCT
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
Ringing
Ringing
Ringing
Ringing
Ringing
Ringing
Ringing
(None)
Pattern A
Pattern B
Pattern C
Pattern D
Pattern E
Pattern F
Pattern G
The shaded
Page 2
selection is the
default.

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
Ringing
Pattern H
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
G
2
Press LK3 +
+ FG to access the Memory Block.
3
Press line key to specify the Ringing pattern assigned to CO/PBX No.

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.
 OR 
D

to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.
C

to go to the next page
A

to go to the previous page
G
4
Press
to write the selected data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
4-57
CO Line Ringing Pattern Priority Selection
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 489

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
The Ring Patterns are shown in the table below:
s= seconds
Pattern
0s
1s
2s
3s
4s
5s
6s
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
NO
No Ring
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 490
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
3-69
911 Cut Through Trunk Selection
CO/PBX Line Mode
3
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify which trunk or trunks are released when a 911 call is
--
placed.
Data No.
Display
69
CO/PBX
No.
Data
Setting
(01~64)
No.
Title
PC Programming
Data
¦+AE
0 1 / 6 9 : 9 1 1 D R O P
N O
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
NO
YES
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
G
2
Press LK3 +
+ FI to access the Memory Block.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
CO/PBX No. 01~64 = NO
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.
 OR 
D

to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the Setting Data option.
G
4
Press
to write the selected data and display next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 491

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
3-03
Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment
3-33
Disconnect Recognition Time Selection
3-91
Trunk Type Selection
1-1-24
PBX/CTX Access Code Assignment I
1-1-25
PBX/CTX Access Code Assignment II

Notes

1.
When only one trunk is assigned YES, this is the only trunk used for 911-Cut Through.
2.
The following calls are not used for 911-Cut Through: Receiving Normal Incoming Call, Receiving DIT/ANA Call,
Incoming Automated Attendant, Originating 911 Call, and Receiving ACD Incoming Call.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 492
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
3-70
CIC Number Assignment
CO/PBX Line Mode
3
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to assign the Circuit Identification Code for each voice channel
--
used for K-CCIS.
Data No.
Display
70
CO No.
Data
Setting
(01~64)
No.
Title
Data
PC Programming
¦+AW
0 1 / 7 0 : C I C
N O
0 0 0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
G
2
Press LK3 +
+ GK to access the Memory Block.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
000 (Not Specified)
J
CIC Number range: 001~127
to move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.
 OR 
D

to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.
G
3
Press
to write the selected data and display next Memory Block or Memory BLock 3-00 CO/PBX 02. After the last CO/
PBX is programmed, CO/PBX 01 is displayed again.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 493

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-05
Start Time Selection
1-15-00
K-CCIS Main/Remote Office selection
1-15-01
Common Signal Channel Data Speed Assignment
1-15-02
Common Signal Channel Assignment
1-15-03
Originating Point Code Assignment
1-15-04
Destination Point Code Assignment
1-15-05
Destination Point Code Transfer Assignment
1-15-06
Originating Office Code Number Assignment
1-15-07
K-CCIS Message Response Timeout Assignment
1-15-08
Link Reconnect Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-09
K-CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop Assignment
1-15-10
Calling Name Display Allow/Deny Selection

Notes

CIC Numbers must be assigned consecutively for K-CCIS to operate correctly.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 494
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
3-73
CO Message Waiting Yes/No Selection CO/PBX Line Mode
3
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not the CO Message Waiting feature is
--
allowed per CO/PBX Line.
Data No.
System Software R2000 or higher is required.
73
Display
PC Programming
CO/PBX
No.
Data
Setting
(01~64)
No.
Title
¦+BCT
Data
0 1 / 7 3 : C O M W
N O
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
NO
YES
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
G
2
Press LK3 +
+ GC to access the Memory Block.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
CO/PBX No. 01~64 = NO
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.
 OR 
D

to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the Setting Data option.
G
4
Press
to write the selected data and display Memory Block 3-00 CO/PBX 02. After the last CO/PBX is programmed,
CO/PBX 01 is displayed again.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-8-07
Class of Service (Attendant) Feature Selection 1
Page 3, LK 2
4-69
CO Message Waiting Indication Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 495

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3-90
Polarity Reverse Selection
CO/PBX Line Mode
3
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to enable a Central Office to Reverse the Polarity to provide an
--
answer supervision signal. In North America and Canada, this type of answer
supervision is not normally supported by the CO.
Data No.
Display
90
CO/PBX
PC Programming
No.
Data
Setting
(01~64)
No.
Ti
tle
Data
¦+BCT
0 1 / 9 0 : R V R S
N O
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
NO
YS
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
G
2
Press LK3 +
+ IK to access the Memory Block.
3
Press LK2 to reverse polarity for an answer supervision signal on CO/PBX No.

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.
 OR 
D

to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.
G
4
Press
to write the selected data and display the next Memory Block.
5
Continue the Memory Block 3-90~3-92 cycle until CO/PBX No. 01 is displayed again.
E
6
Press
to go back on-line.

Notes

This Memory Block applies to Loop Start or Ground Start Trunks only.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 496
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
3-91
Trunk Type Selection
CO/PBX Line Mode
3
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify an external line as a CO, PBX/CTX, Tie, DID, or
--
CTX Assume - 9 line.
Data No.
Display
91
CO/PBX
No.
Data
Trunk
(01~64)
No.
Type
PC Programming
¦+BCT
0 1 / 9 1 : C O
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
PBX
CTX
CO
TIE
DID
default.
(or CTX)
(Assume - 9)
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
G
2
Press LK3 +
+ IA to access the Memory Block.
3
Press line key to specify trunk type for CO/PBX No.

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.
 OR 
D

to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.
G
4
Press
to write the selected data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Notes

1.
This Memory Block affects T1 channels assigned as Tie or DID lines.
2.
Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) lines can be assigned as PBX/CTX or CTX Assume - 9. A CTX
Transfer does not work on ISDN lines.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 497

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3-92
Trunk (Installed, DP/DTMF)
CO/PBX Line Mode
Selection
3
Submode
--
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify an external line as DP (10 pps or 20 pps), DTMF
Data No.
line, or not connected (NIL).
92
Display
PC Programming
CO/PBX
No.
Data
Setting
(01~64)
No.
Data
¦+BCT

0 1 / 9 2 : M F
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
NIL
DP 10pps
DP 20pps
MF
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
G
2
Press LK3 +
+ IB to access the Memory Block.
3
Press line key to specify external line as DP or DTMF for CO/PBX No.

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.
 OR 
D

to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.
G
4
Press
to write the selected data and display the next CO/PBX No. for Memory Block 3-90. After CO/PBX No. 64 is
entered, CO/PBX No. 01 is again displayed on Memory Block 3-90.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
3-14
Tie Line Type Assignment
4-12
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode

Notes

Only Tie lines and Direct Inward Dialing (DID) trunks can use dial pulse on the Electra Elite system. All other
trunks must be set to multifrequency (MF).
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 498
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-01
CO/PBX Ring Assignment
Telephone Mode
(Day Mode)
4
Submode
--
General Description
Use this Memory Block to assign incoming CO/PBX calls to ring on Multiline Terminals
Data No.
in Day Mode.
01
Display
PC Programming
Tel
Port
¦+BTT
No.
(01~CO)
Data
Trunk
*
No.
Title
No.
0 1 / 0 1 : R N G
D Y
| 0 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings 1
Tel Port
Meaning
Operation
Number
B
*A0~A9
100~109
+ 1 for A
B
*B0~B9
110~119
+ 2 for B
B
*C0
120
+ 3 for C
Settings 2
Page 1 Trunks 01~08
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
Page 2 Trunks 09~16

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Page 3 Trunks17~24

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
The shaded
Page 4 Trunks 25~32
selection is the
default.

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Page 5 Trunks 33~40

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Page 6 Trunks 41~48

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 499

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Page 7 Trunks 49~56

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
Page 8 Trunks 57~64

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK4 to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the CO/PBX Line key to select Day ring assignment for Tel Port No.
Default Values
The LED indication changes to indicate data each time a CO/PBX line key is pressed.
CO/PBX lines 01 ~ 08 ring at Tel Port
numbers 01 and 02.
Tel Port numbers 03 ~ 120 do not ring
CO/PBX
Off
Green
Red
on any incoming CO/PBX calls.
Line Key LED
Immediate
Data
No ring
Delayed Ring
Ring

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.
 OR 
D

to go to next assigned Tel Port No.
C

to go to the next page
A

to go to the previous page
G
4
Press
to write the data and display Memory Block 4-02.
5
After programming Memory Blocks 4-02~4-59, the next sequential Tel Port No. is automatically displayed.
6
Repeat steps 3, 4, and 5 until all Tel Port Nos. are programmed. Tel Port No. 01 is displayed again.
E
7
Press
to go back on-line.

Notes

Telephone ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120. Refer to Settings 1 to enter ports A0~C0.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 500
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-02
CO/PBX Ring Assignment
Telephone Mode
(Night Mode)
4
Submode
--
General Description
Use this Memory Block to assign incoming CO/PBX calls to ring in Night Mode.
Data No.
02
Display
Tel
PC Programming
Port
No.
(01~C0)
Data
Trunk
¦+BTT
No.
*
Title
No.
0 1 / 0 2 : R N G
N T
| 0 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings 1
Tel Port
Meaning
Operation
Number
B
*A0~A9
100~109
+ 1 for A
B
*B0~B9
110~119
+ 2 for B
B
*C0
120
+ 3 for C
Settings 2
Page 1 Trunks 01~08
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
Page 2 Trunks 09~16

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Page 3 Trunks 17~24
The shaded

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
selection is the
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
default.
Page 4 Trunks 25~32)

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Page 5 Trunks 33~40

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 501

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________

Page 6 Trunks 41~48

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
Page 7 Trunks 49~56)

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
Page 8 Trunks 57~64)

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK4 + KB to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the CO/PBX Line key to select night ring assignment for Tel Port No.
Default Values
The LED indication changes to indicate data each time a CO/PBX line key is pressed.
CO/PBX lines 01 ~ 08 ring at Tel Port
numbers 01 and 02.
Tel Port numbers 03 ~ 120 do not ring
CO/PBX Line
Off
Green
Red
on any incoming CO/PBX calls.
Key LED
Immediate
Delayed
Data
No Ring
Ring
Ring

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.
 OR 
D

to go to next assigned Tel Port No.
C

to go to the next page
A

to go to the previous page
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Notes

Telephone ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120. Refer to Settings 1 to enter ports A0~C0.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 502
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-03
Doorphone Chime Assignment
Telephone Mode
(Day Mode)
4
Submode
--
General Description
Use this Memory Block to assign up to four doorphones to chime at each station in day
Data No.
mode.
03
Display
PC Programming
Tel
Port
¦+BTP
No.
Data
(01~C0)
No.
Title
0 1 / 0 3 : D P H
D A Y
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings

LK 1
LK 2
LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
Shading shows
the default.
DPH1
DPH2
DPH3
DPH4

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK4 + KC to access the Memory Block.
3
Use LK1~LK4 to assign doorphones 1~4 to chime for Day Mode on Tel Port No.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
Ports 01 and 02 chime for all
J
doorphones.
to move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.
 OR 
D

to go to next assigned Tel Port No.
B

+ Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109
B

+ Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119
B

+ Cto enter C for Port Number 120
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 503

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-7-00
Doorphone Assignment
1-7-01
Doorphone Display Time Selection
1-7-04
Doorphone Ringing Pattern Selection
1-7-05
Doorphone Ringing Frequency Selection

Notes

Telephone ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 504
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-04
Doorphone Chime Assignment
Telephone Mode
(Night Mode)
4
Submode
--
General Description
Use this Memory Block to assign up to four doorphones to chime at each station in
Data No.
Night Mode.
04
Display
PC Programming
Tel
Port
No.
¦+BTP
Data
(01~C0)
No.
Title
0 1 / 0 4 : D P H
N I G H T
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings

LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selections
DPH1
DPH2
DPH3
DPH4
indicate default.

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press + KD to access the Memory Block.
3
Use LK1~LK4 to assign doorphones 1~4 to chime for Night Mode on Tel Port No.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
Ports 01 and 02 chime for all
J
doorphones.
to move the cursor left
Lo move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.
 OR 
D

to go to next assigned Tel Port No.
B

+Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109
B

+Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119
B

+Cto enter C for Port Number 120
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 505

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-7-00
Doorphone
1-7-01
Doorphone Display Time Selection
1-7-04
Doorphone Ringing Pattern Selection
1-7-05
Doorphone Ring Frequency Selection

Notes

Telephone ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 506
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-07
Code Restriction Class Assignment
Telephone Mode
(Day Mode)
4
Submode
--
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify Code Restriction Class per station in Day Mode.
Data No.
07
Display
Tel
PC Programming
Port
Setting
No.
Data
Data
(01~C0)
No.
Title
(00~15)
¦+AC
0 1 / 0 7 : C L S
D A Y = 0 0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK4 + KG to access the Memory Block.
3
Use dial pad to change Day Mode Restriction Class 00 for Tel Port No.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
All Stations Class 00
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.
 OR 
D

to go to next assigned Tel Port No.
B

+ Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109
B

+ Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119
B

+ Cto enter C for Port Number 120
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
Refer to Chapter 3 Advanced Applications.

Notes

Telephone ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 507

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-08
Code Restriction Class Assignment
Telephone Mode
(Night Mode)
4
Submode
--
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify Code Restriction Class per station in Night Mode.
Data No.
08
Display
Tel
PC Programming
Port
Setting
No.
Data
Data
(01~C0)
No.
Title
(00~15)
¦+AC
0 1 / 0 8 : C L S
N T
= 0 0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK4 + KH to access the Memory Block.
3
Use dial pad to change Night Mode Restriction Class 00 for Tel Port No.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
All Stations Class 00
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.
 OR 
D

to go to next assigned Tel Port No.
B

+ Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109
B

+ Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119
B

+ Cto enter C for Port Number 120
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming.
Refer to Chapter 3 Advanced Applications.

Notes

Telephone ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 508
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-09
Telephone to Tenant Assignment
Telephone Mode
4
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify Tenant Assignment per station.
--
Display
Data No.
Tel
09
Port
Setting
No.
Data
Data
(01~COA
No.
Title
(00~47)
PC Programming
¦+BTT
0 1 / 0 9 : T E N A N T = 0 0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK4 + KI to access the Memory Block.
3
Use dial pad to change telephone to Tenant Assignment for Tel Port No.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
All Telephones Tenant 00
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.
 OR 
D

to go to next assigned Tel Port No.
B

+Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109
B

+Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119
B

+Cto enter C for Port Number 120
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
2-01
Trunk To Tenant Assignment
2-05
Line Key Selection
2-06
Line Key Selection for Tenant Mode
2-07
System Speed Dial Display Assignment
2-08
ECR Relay to Tenant Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 509

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________

Notes

1.
Stations can be assigned to one of 48 Tenant Number (00 ~ 47).
2.
The Call Pickup group is determined by Tenant assignment.
3.
Telephone ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 510
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-10
Station Number Assignment
Telephone Mode
4
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to assign a station number to each telephone.
--
System Software R2500 is required for 5-, 6-, or 7-digit Extension Numbers.
Data No.
Display (R1700 or lower)
10
Tel
PC Programming
Port
No.
Data
Setting
(01~C0)
No.
Title
Data
¦+BS
0 1 / 1 0 : S T A
- 1 0 0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Display (R2000 or higher)
Tel
Port
Setting
No.
Data
Data
(01~C0)
No.
Title
0 1 / 1 0 : S T A X X X 1 0 0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

The number displayed after DIT (XXX) is from Memory Block 1-2-34 (Expanded Station Number Assignment) when assigned
(R2500 is required).

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK4 + AK to access the Memory Block.
3
Use dial pad to assign a 2- (10~89), 3- (100~899), 4-digit (1000~8999), or 5~7, 4-digit
Default Values
(0000~9999) station number for Tel Port No.
Valid Station Numbers are 100~399.

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.
 OR 
D

to go to next assigned Tel Port No.
B

+ Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109
B

+ Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119
B

+ Cto enter C for Port Number 120
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 511

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-46
Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment
1-1-47
Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment
1-1-48
Access Code (3-Digit) Assignment
1-2-03
2~7-Digit Station Number Selection
1-2-24
Expanded Station Number Assignment

Notes

1.
Station Number Assignment is per station. A station number cannot be assigned to more than one telephone. A
telephone cannot have more than one station number.
2.
When changing Station Numbers to a different numbering plan perform the following steps in order.
a. Select Station Numbers using Memory Block 1-2-03 (2-,3-, or 4-digit Station Number Selection).
b. Program applicable Access Code in Memory Block 1-1-46 [Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment], 1-1-47
[Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment], or 1-1-48 [Access Code (3-Digit) Assignment].
c. Program all Station Numbers using this Memory Block.
3.
Telephone ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.
4.
When 5-, 6-, or 7-digit Extension Numbers are used, the leading (XXX) digits are assigned in Memory Block
1-2-34 (Expanded Station Number Assignment) and are displayed in this Memory Block when assigned.
5.
When 5-, 6-, or 7-digit Extension Numbers are used, only the last four digits are assigned in this Memory Block.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 512
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-11
Ringing Line Preference Selection
Telephone Mode
4
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not each station user can answer
--
incoming ringing CO/PBX calls by going off-hook.
Data No.
Display
11
Tel
Port
No.
Data
Setting
PC Programming
(01~C0)
No.
Title
Data
¦+BTM
0 1 / 1 1 : R N G
P R F
Y S
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
NO
YS
default.

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK4 + AA to access the Memory Block.
3
Press CO/PBX LK1 to prevent the Tel Port No. station user from answering incoming ringing CO/PBX calls by going off hook.

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.
 OR 
D

to go to next assigned Tel Port No.
B

+ Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109
B

+ Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119
B

+ Cto enter C for Port Number 120
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
4-01
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)
4-02
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 513

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________

Notes

1.
Programming for this Memory Block applies to Ring Assigned telephones only.
2.
An intercom call cannot be originated after a ring assigned CO/PBX line terminates on the telephone.
3.
Telephone ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.
4.
PS II telephone ports should have ringing line preference set to Yes.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 514
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-12
Line Key Selection for Telephone
Telephone Mode
Mode
4
Submode
--
General Description
Use this Memory Block to assign a function to each CO/PBX line key on each
Data No.
telephone in a tenant specified as Telephone Mode in Memory Block 2-05 (Line Key
12
Selection).
PC Programming
Display
Tel
¦+BTM
Port
Line Key
Setting
No.
Data
No.
Data 1 Setting
(01~C0)
No.
(01~24)Page 6 max.
Data 2
0 1 / 1 2 : L 0 1 = C O
0 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1
LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
Call
Feature
Route
NON
CO
FW BNA
FW ALL
Appearance
TKGP
Access Key
Advance
Key
The shaded
Page 2
selection is the
default.

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
SCROLL
DND
LOG
BGM
SIE
Microphone H
SET
(ANI/Caller
ICM
(On/Off)
(On/Off)
(On/Off)
ID)
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK4 +AB to access the Memory Block. Verify that Memory Block 2-05 is set to TEL.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 515

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Procedures (Continued)
3
Press the CO/PBX line key to select a function for Line Key No. 1, and use dial
Default Values
keys to enter Setting Data 2 if required.
For Tel 01~CO: LK01~08 Assigned to

Use the following to enter data:
CO/PBX lines 01~08.
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.
 OR 
D

to go to next assigned Tel Port No.
C

to go to the next page, or + to switch to page 2
A

to go to the previous page, or = to switch to page 1
B

+ Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109
B

+ Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119
B

+ Cto enter C for Port Number 120
For example, to assign Trunk Group 5 to CO/PBX line key 1, press LK7 to
display the TKGP, and enter 05 using the dial pad.
Setting Data Page 1
Functions
Line
[For each telephone in tenant specified as
Setting Data 1
Setting Data 2
Key
Telephone Mode in Memory Block 2-05 (Line
LCD Indication
Key Selection)]
1
Not Specified
NON
N/A
2
CO/PBX line
CO
01~64
3
Call Forward Busy/No Answer
FW BNA
N/A
4
Call Forward All Call
FW ALL
N/A
5
Call Appearance Block
C00~C47
01~24
(Call Appearance Block)
(Call Appearance Key)
6
Feature Access
F A
01~16
7
Trunk Group
TKGP
01~32
8
Route Advance
ADV
01~32
Setting Data Page 2
1
Telephone Port No.
Secondary Incoming Extension, including CAR
SIE
01~99, A0~C0
2
Microphone
MIC
N/A
3
Headset
H SET
N/A
4
Scroll Key for ANI/Caller ID
SCROLL
N/A
5
Do Not Disturb - Break Mode On/Off
DND
N/A
6
Log On/Off
LOG
N/A
7
Background Music On/Off
BGM
N/A
8
Intercom Key
ICM
N/A
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Line Key No.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 516
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Procedures (Continued)
5
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each Line Key assignment. After Line Key No. 24 is programmed, the next Memory Block is displayed.
E
6
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
2-05
Line Key Selection (Tenant Mode)

Notes

1.
When an Electra Elite IPK system is installed as a Key Function (KF) system, all COs must be assigned to the
line keys. Trunk groups, Route Advance Blocks and Least Cost Routing (LCR) cannot be assigned.
2.
At system default, line keys 09~24 are not assigned.
3.
Telephone ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.
4.
A minimum of two call appearance keys should be assigned to each PS II.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 517

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-13
CO/PBX Busy Forward Station
Telephone Mode
Assignment
4
Submode
--
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify up to two telephones to ring when a CO/PBX call
Data No.
terminates at a busy station.
13
Display
PC Programming
Tel
Port
Forward
¦+BTT
No.
Data
No.
Setting
(01~C0)
No.
Title
1/2
Data
0 1 / 1 3 : F W D
1
=
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK4 + AC to access the Memory Block.
3
Use dial pad to change data.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
Not specified
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.
 OR 
D

to go to next assigned Tel Port No.
B

+ Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109.
B

+ Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119
B

+ Cto enter C for Port Number 120

Setting Data: Port No. 01 ~ 96
G
4
Press
to write the data and display Forward No. 2.
5
Enter second transfer Port No.
G
6
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
7
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Notes

1.
When the Multiline Terminal where the forward is initially set (Forward 1) is busy, the call is forwarded to a
second specified station (Forward 2).
2.
When all three stations are busy, the first station rings.
3.
Telephone ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 518
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-14
Intercom Master Hunt Number
Telephone Mode
Selection
4
Submode
--
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not each telephone port number is
Data No.
designated as an intercom master hunt number.
14
Display
PC Programming
Tel
Port
¦+BTT
No.
Data
Setting
(01~C0)
No.
Title
Data
0 1 / 1 4 : M S T E R
N O
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
NO
YS
default.

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK4 + AD to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change data option.

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.
 OR 
D

to go to next assigned Tel Port No.
B

+ Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109
B

+ Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119
B

+ Cto enter C for Port Number 120
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
4-15
Intercom Master Hunt Number Forward Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 519

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________

Notes

1.
When YS is assigned, an incoming internal call from another station, Automated Attendant transferred call, or
DIT/ANA/DID/Tie line designated call is forwarded to a station specified in Memory Block 4-15 (Intercom Master
Hunt Number Forward Assignment) when the line is busy.
2.
Telephone ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 520
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-15
Intercom Master Hunt Number
Telephone Mode
Forward Assignment
4
Submode
--
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify a telephone to ring for an incoming call when YS is
Data No.
specified in Memory Block 4-14 (Intercom Master Hunt Number Selection) and the
15
Intercom Master Hunt Number line is busy.
PC Programming
System Software R2500 is required for 5-, 6-, or 7-digit Extension Numbers.
¦+BTT
Display (R1700 or lower)
Tel
Port
No.
Data
Setting
(01~C0)
No.
Title
Data
0 1 / 1 5 : I C M F W D
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Display (R2000 or higher)
Tel
Port
No.
Data
Setting
(01~C0)
No.
Title
Data
0 1 / 1 5 : S T A X X X
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

The number displayed after DIT (XXX) is from Memory Block 1-2-34 (Expanded Station Number Assignment) when assigned
(R2500 is required).
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK4 + AE to access the Memory Block.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 521

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Procedures
3
Use dial pad to enter station number. To set Tel. Port No. to forward station number 300,
Default Values
enter CKK.
All Telephones Not Specified

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.
 OR 
D

to go to next assigned Tel Port No.
H

to clear data when cursor is at setting data
B

+ Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109
B

+ Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119
B

+ Cto enter C for Port Number 120

Setting data Forward Station Number is one of the following:
2 digit
(10 ~ 89)
3 digit
(100 ~ 899)
4 digit
(1000 ~ 8999)
5 digit
(X0000 ~ X9999)
6 digit
(XX0000 ~ XX9999)
7 digit
(XXX0000 ~ XXX9999)
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-46
Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment
1-1-47
Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment
1-1-48
Access Code (3-Digit) Assignment
1-2-03
2~7-Digit Station Number Selection
1-2-34
Expanded Station Number Assignment
4-10
Station Number Assignment
4-14
Intercom Master Hunt Number Selection
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 522
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________

Notes

1.
Telephone ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.
2.
Example - Assign the following Memory Blocks:
H Memory Block 4-14 (Intercom Master Hunt Number Selection)
Telephone Port Number 01 ==> YES
All other Port Numbers ==> NO
H Memory Block 4-10 (Station Number Assignment
Telephone Port Number and related Station Number
Port
Station
No.
No.
01
==>
100
02
==>
101
03
==>
102
04
==>
103
H Memory Block 4-15 (Intercom Master Hunt Number Forward Assignment)
Telephone Port Number (Port Number forwards to Station Number)
Port
Station
No.
No.
01
==>
101
02
==>
102
03
==>
103
Incoming to Station,
100
(01)
(02)
100
101
(Master)
(Busy)
FWD
(Busy)
FWD
(03)
102
(Busy)
FWD
103
(04)
3.
When 5-, 6-, or 7-digit Extension Numbers are used, the leading XXX digits are assigned in Memory Block 1-2-34
(Expanded Station Number Assignment) and are displayed in this Memory Block when assigned.
4.
When 5-, 6-, or 7-digit Extension Numbers are used, only the last four digits are assigned in this Memory Block.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 523

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-17
Station to Class of Service Feature
Telephone Mode
Assignment
4
Submode
--
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify a class for each Table (1 or 2) to enable/disable
Data No.
features per station.
17
Display
PC Programming
Tel
Port
Table
Setting
¦+BTT
No.
Data
No.
Service
(01~C0)
No.
Title
1/2
Class
0 1 / 1 7 : C L S ( 1 )
= 0 0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK4 + AG to access the Memory Block.
3
Use the dial pad to enter Service Class (00 ~ 15) for Table 1/Table 2.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
Telephone
Table
Service
Jto move the cursor left
Number
Number
Class
Lto move the cursor right
1 ATTN
00
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.
01
2 STA
00
 OR 
D
1 ATTN
00

to go to next assigned Tel Port No.
B
02
2 STA
00

+ Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109
B
1 ATTN
15

+ Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119
B
03 ~ C0
2 STA
00

+ Cto enter C for Port Number 120
G
4
Press
to write the data and display Table 2 data.
G
5
Enter Table 2 Service Class, and press
to write data and display the next Memory Block.
E
6
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-8-07
Class of Service (Attendant) Feature Selection 1
1-8-08
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 524
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________

Notes

1.
Table 1 includes features that telephone ports 01 and 02 users are normally allowed to activate. Select any
Class pattern specified in Memory Block 1-8-07 [Class of Service (Attendant) Feature Selection 1].
2.
Table 2 includes features that all telephones users are normally allowed to activate. Select any Class pattern
specified in Memory Block 1-8-08 [Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2].
3.
Telephone ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 525

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-18
Station Name Assignment
Telephone Mode
4
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to assign names for telephone stations.
--
Display
Data No.
Tel
18
Port
No.
Data
Setting
(01~C0)
No.
Data
PC Programming
0 1 / 1 8 : <
>
¦+BTT
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK4 + AH to access the Memory Block.
3
Use the dial pad to enter data.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
Not Specified
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.
 OR 
D

to go to next assigned Tel Port No.
H

to clear data when cursor is at setting data
B

+ Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109
B

+ Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119
B

+ Cto enter C for Port Number 120
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Notes

1.
While an internal line is ringing or in use, the station number and name of the other party are displayed.
2.
The name is not displayed when Tone Override, Automatic Callback, or Callback Request is displayed.
3.
Only six digits/characters can be used for each name.
4.
Telephone ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.
5.
Refer to Appendix B Character Codes, Section 1 Character Assignment on page B-1 for the procedure for
entering station names using the dial pad instead of the ASCII Character Code Tables.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 526
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-19
Trunk Outgoing Restriction
Telephone Mode
4
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify per CO/PBX line whether or not to restrict line
--
seizure for an outgoing call.
Data No.
Display
19
Tel
Port
No.
Data
PC Programming
(01~C0)
No.
Title
Trunk
¦+BTT
0 1 / 1 9 : T R K
R S T | 0 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1 Ports 01~08

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
Page 2 Ports 09~16

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Page 3 Ports 17~24

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Page 4 Ports 25~32

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Default not
Page 5 Ports 33~40
assigned.

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Page 6 Ports41~48

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
Page 7 Ports 49~56

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
Page 8 Ports 57~64

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK4 + AI to access the Memory Block.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 527

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Procedures (Continued)
3
Press the CO/PBX line key corresponding to each CO/PBX line.
Default Values
The LED indication changes to indicate data each time a CO/PBX line key is pressed.
Not Restricted
CO/PBX
Off
On
Line Key LED
The shaded selection
Data
Not Restricted
Restricted
is the default.

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.
 OR 
D

to go to next assigned Tel Port No.
C

to go to the next page
A

to go to the previous page
H

to clear data when cursor is at setting data position
B

+ Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109
B

+ Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119
B

+ Cto enter C for Port Number 120
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Notes

1.
A restricted CO/PBX line allows the station user to answer an incoming call or access a held call, but does not
allow a user to originate a CO/PBX call.
2.
When restricted is specified in this section, the data in Memory Blocks 4-07 [Code Restriction Class Assignment
(Day Mode)] and Memory Block 4-08 [Code Restriction Class Assignment (Night Mode)] is treated as invalid
even if specified.
3.
Telephone ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 528
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-23
Prime Line/Hot Line Assignment
Telephone Mode
4
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to enable user to access various features when going
--
off-hook.
Data No.
Display
23
Tel
Port
No.
Data
Setting
PC Programming
(01~C0)
No.
Data
¦+BTT
0 1 / 2 3 :
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK4 + BC to access the Memory Block.
3
Use dial pad to enter telephone number (10 Digits max.) for Tel Port No.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
Not Specified
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.
 OR 
D

to go to next assigned Tel Port No.
B

+ Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109.
B

+ Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119
B

+ Cto enter C for Port Number 120
B

and Jto input ,
B

andLto input #
G
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
4
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 529

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________

Notes

1.
Prime Line function enables a user to seize a specified trunk when the Multiline Terminal goes off-hook. Refer to
function codes 063 and 064 for Memory Blocks 1-1-46 [Access Code (1-Digit) assignment] and 1-1-47 [Access
Code (2-Digit) assignment].
2.
To call the specified station number or CO line on Hot Line, go off-hook.
A E
3.
When using Prime Line an access code (
and
) or ICM key can be used to seize the intercom
(ICM) Dialtone for internal call processing.
4.
To use Hot Line Assignment, one of the following must be entered:
H Station Number
H Access Code and Dial Number
H Speed Dial Access Code and Speed Dial Buffer Number
5.
Only 10 digits can be assigned.
6.
Telephone ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 530
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-24
SLT Hookflash Assignment
Telephone Mode
4
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to either Hold or disconnect the trunk for the Single Line
--
Telephone (SLT) hooking operation.
Data No.
Display
24
Tel
Port
PC Programming
No.
Data
Setting
(01~C0)
No.
Title
Data
¦+BTI
0 1 / 2 4 : S L T
H K H O L D
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
HOLD
DISC
default.

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK4 + BD to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change data option.

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.
 OR 
D

to go to next assigned Tel Port No.
B

+ Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109
B

+ Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119
B

+ Cto enter C for Port Number 120
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-3-02
SLT Hookflash Signal Selection
4-23
Prime Line/Hot Line Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 531

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________

Notes

1.
This Memory Block affects only Single Line Telephone stations assigned Prime Line in Memory Block 4-23
(Prime Line/Hot Line Assignment).
2.
When Prime Line is assigned to an Single Line Telephone, hookflash drops the CO and issues intercom (ICM)
dial tone when this Memory Block is set to disconnect.
3.
After an SLT begins to dial out 9 +, hookflash follows Memory Block 1-3-02 (SLT Hookflash Signal Selection)
selection.
4.
Telephone ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 532
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-26
DISA ID Number Station Assignment
Telephone Mode
4
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to assign the Direct Inward System Access (DISA) ID Buffer
--
Number corresponding to the station port number. The Station Message Detail
Data No.
Recording (SMDR) printout of the station number identifies the calling party that dialed
the DISA ID number.
26
Display
PC Programming
Station
¦+BD
Port
No.
Data
Setting
(01~C0)
No.
Title
Data
0 1 / 2 6 : I D
N O .
= 0 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK4 + BF to access the Memory Block.
3
Use the dial pad to assign DISA ID Buffer Number 01 to Station Port No.

Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
J
Station Port
DISA ID Buffer
to move the cursor left
Number
Number
Lto move the cursor right
01
01
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.
02 ~ C0
02 ~ C0
 OR 
D

to go to next assigned Tel Port No.
B

+ Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109
B

+ Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119
B

+ Cto enter C for Port Number 120
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Notes

Telephone ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 533

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-28
Multilingual LCD Indication
Telephone Mode
Selection
4
Submode
--
General Description
Data No.
Use this Memory Block to specify the language displayed on the Multiline Terminal
LCD.
28
DisplayS
PC Programming
Tel
¦+BTM
Port
No.
Data
Setting
(01~C0)
No.
Title
Data
0 1 / 2 8 : L A N G U
E N G
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
JAPA
FREN
ENG
SPAN
default.

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK4 + BH to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change language option for Tel Port No.

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.
 OR 
D

to go to next assigned Tel Port No.
B

+ Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109
B

+ Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119
B

+ Cto enter C for Port Number 120
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Notes

Telephone ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 534
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-29
HFU Selection
Telephone Mode
4
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to enable/disable per station the built-in Handsfree HFU-U
--
Unit.
Data No.
Display
29
Tel
Port
PC Programming
No.
Data
Setting
(01~C0)
No.
Table
Data
¦+BTM
0 1 / 2 9 : H F U
N O
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
NO
YS
default.

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK4 + BI to access the Memory Block.
3
Press LK2 if you want to enable the HFU-U Unit for Tel Port No.

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.
 OR 
D

to go to next assigned Tel Port No.
B

+ Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109
B

+ Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119
B

+ Cto enter C for Port Number 120
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Notes

Telephone ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 535

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-30
Hold/Transfer Recall Display
Telephone Mode
Selection
4
Submode
--
General Description
Use this Memory Block to enable/disable the Hold Recall indication on the LCD.
Data No.
30
Display
Tel
PC Programming
Port
No.
Data
Setting
(01~C0)
No.
Title
Data
¦+BTM
0 1 / 3 0 : H L D
D S P
Y S
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
YS
NO
default.

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK4 + CK to access the Memory Block.
3
Press LK2 to disable Hold Recall LCD Indication for Tel Port No.

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.
 OR 
D

to go to next assigned Tel Port No.
B

+ Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109
B

+ Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119
B

+ Cto enter C for Port Number 120
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
G
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Notes

1.
When this Memory Block is assigned YS, HOLD RECALL replaces the Time Display.
2.
LCD indication of the CO line number is displayed on the upper line of the display when a recall occurs,
regardless of the assignment for this Memory Block.
3.
Telephone ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 536
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-31
Receiving Internal/All Call Page
Telephone Mode
Selection
4
Submode
--
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify per station whether or not an Internal Zone or
Data No.
Internal All Zone Page is received.
31
Display
PC Programming
Tel
Port
¦+BTT
No.
Data
Setting
(01~C0)
No.
Title
Data
0 1 / 3 1 : P A G I N G
Y S
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
YS
NO
default.

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK4 + CA to access the Memory Block.
3
Press LK2 to disable Internal Zone or Internal All Zone page for Tel Port No.

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.
 OR 
D

to go to next assigned Tel Port No.
B

+ Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109
B

+ Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119
B

+ C3 to enter C for Port Number 120
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Notes

1.
Internal Emergency All Call Page and Internal Paging by Tenant group override this Memory Block. Refer to
Memory Block 1-1-46 [Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment].
2.
Telephone ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 537

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-32
Trunk Digit Restriction
Telephone Mode
4
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify per port the maximum number of digits that can be
--
dialed on any outside line.
Data No.
Display
32
Tel
Port
Setting
No.
Data
Data
PC Programming
No.
(01~C0)
Title
(00~99)
¦+BTT
0 1 / 3 2 : D G
R E S T = 0 0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK4 + CB to access the Memory Block.
3
Use the dial pad to change Setting Data for CO/PBX No.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
00 (No Limit)
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.
 OR 
D

to go to next assigned Tel Port No.
B

+ Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109
B

+ Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119
B

+ Cto enter C for Port Number 120
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming.
Refer to Chapter 3 Advanced Applications.

Notes

1.
Code Restriction must be assigned before this feature is used.
2.
Trunk Digit Restriction applies to all CO/PBX lines.
3.
Tie Line Code Restriction must be assigned before this feature works on Tie lines.
4.
Telephone ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 538
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-35
Voice Mail/SLT Selection
Telephone Mode
4
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not a Voice Mail system is interfaced with
--
the system for Single Line Telephone ports.
Data No.
Display
35
Tel
Port
PC Programming
No.
Data
Setting
(01~C0)
No.
Title
Data
¦+BTI
0 1 / 3 5 : V
M A I L
N O
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
NO
YS
default.

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK4 + CE to access the Memory Block.
3
Press LK2 to interface Voice Mail with single line telephones for Tel Port No.

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.
 OR 
D

to go to next assigned Tel Port No.
B

+ Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109
B

+ Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119
B

+ Cto enter C for Port Number 120
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-2
Telephone Type Assignment (used for digital voice mail ports)
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 539

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________

Notes

1.
The SLT(1)-U( ) ADP Adapter and the ADA(2)-W Unit do not support Voice Mail.
2.
Only 16 Voice Mail ports are supported by this system.
3.
Telephone ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 540
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-36
Voice Prompt Selection
Telephone Mode
4
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify per port whether or not to allow Voice Prompt.
--
Display
Data No.
Tel
36
Port
No.
Data
Setting
(01~C0)
No.
Title
Data
PC Programming
¦+BTT
0 1 / 3 6 : P R O M P T
N O
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
NO
YS
default.

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK4 + CF to access the Memory Block.
3
Press LK2 to allow voice prompt for Tel Port No.

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.
 OR 
D

to go to next assigned Tel Port No.
B

+ Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109
B

+ Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119
B

+ Cto enter C for Port Number 120
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
Refer to individual features in the Electra Elite IPK Features and Specifications Manual.

Notes

Telephone ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 541

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-37
Extension Line Key Ring Assignment
Telephone Mode
(Day Mode)
4
Submode
--
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify the day ringing assignment on incoming calls to a
Data No.
Secondary Incoming Extension (SIE) or a Call Arrival key.
37
Display
PC Programming
Tel
Port
¦+BTM
No.
Data
Line
(01~C0)
No.
Title
Key
0 1 / 3 7 : E X T
D A Y | 0 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1 Line Keys 01~08

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Page 2 Line Keys 09~16

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
Default not
assigned.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Page 3 Line Keys 17~24

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK4 + CG to access the Memory Block.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 542
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Procedures
3
Press the Line Key corresponding to ringing required for Tel Port No.
Default Values
The LED indication changes to indicate data each time a CO/PBX Line Key is
All Telephones: No Ring
pressed.
CO/PBX
Off
Green
Red
Line Key LED
The shaded
selection is the
Immediate
Delayed
default.
Data
No ring
Ring
Ring

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.
 OR 
D

to go to next assigned Tel Port No.
C

to go to the next page
A

to go to the previous page
B

+ Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109
B

+ Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119
B

+ Cto enter C for Port Number 120
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-2-26
Delayed Ringing Time Assignment (ICM)
4-12
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode

Notes

1.
When Immediate Ring is set, the LED is green.
2.
This Memory Block applies only when an SIE or Call Arrival key is programmed for line key appearance.
3.
Telephone ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 543

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-38
Extension Line Key Ring Assignment
Telephone Mode
(Night Mode)
4
Submode
--
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify the night ringing assignment on incoming calls to a
Data No.
Secondary Incoming Extension (SIE) or a Call Arrival Key.
38
Display
PC Programming
Tel
Port
¦+BTM
No.
Data
Line
(01~C0)
No.
Title
Key
0 1 / 3 8 : E X T
N T
| 0 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1 Line Keys 01~08

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Page 2 Line Keys 09~16

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
Default not
assigned.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Page 3 Line Keys 17~24

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK4 + CH to access the Memory Block.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 544
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Procedures
3
Press the Line Key corresponding to ringing required for Tel Port No.
Default Values
The LED indication changes to indicate data each time a CO/PBX Line Key is
All Telephones: No Ring
pressed.
CO/PBX
Off
Green
Red
The shaded
Line Key LED
selection is the
default.
Immediate
Delayed
Data
No ring
Ring
Ring

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.
 OR 
D

to go to next assigned Tel Port No.
C

to go to the next page
A

to go to the previous page
B

+ Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109
B

+ Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119
B

+ Cto enter C for Port Number 120
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-2-26
Delayed Ringing Time Assignment (ICM)
4-12
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode

Notes

1.
When Immediate Ring is set, the LED is green.
2.
This Memory Block applies only when an SIE or Call Arrival key is programmed for line key appearance.
3.
Telephone ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 545

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-39
APR Ring Mode Assignment
Telephone Mode
4
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify the ringing mode for a Single Line Telephone
--
connected to an AP(R)-R or APR-U Unit.
Data No.
Display
39
Tel
Port
PC Programming
No.
Data
Setting
(01~C0)
No.
Title
Data
¦+BTM
0 1 / 3 9 : A P R
S T A
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
The shaded
NON
STA
selection is the
(No Ring)
(Station
ALL
default.
Number)

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK4 + CI to access the Memory Block.
3
Press line key to specify ringing Mode for a single line telephone connected to an APR-U Unit for Tel Port No.

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.
 OR 
D

to go to next assigned Tel Port No.
B

+ Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109
B

+ Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119
B

+ Cto enter C for Port Number 120
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 546
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________

Notes

1.
No Ring means that no calls ring at the Single Line Device connected to an AP(R)-R or APR-U Unit.
2.
Station Number ring means that only calls directed to the Multiline Terminal Station Number, ring at the Single
Line Device connected to an AP(R)-R or APR-U Unit.
3.
ALL ring means that all calls that ring at the Multiline Terminal also ring at the Single Line Device connected to an
AP(R)-R or APR-U Unit.
4.
Telephone ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 547

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-40
LCR Class Selection
Telephone Mode
4
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify per station the Least Cost Routing (LCR) Class. The
--
Electra Elite IPK system has four Area Code Tables. Each LCR Class can have
different Trunk group access to allow priority levels for the station user. This Memory
Data No.
Block can be used to specify either the LCR Class or the Automatic Route Selection
(ARS) Class (Tables 1~4) depending on the system configuration.
40
PC Programming
Display
Tel
¦+BTT
Port
No.
Data
Setting
(01~C0)
No.
Title
Data
0 1 / 4 0 : L C R
C L S = 0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
default.
0
1
2
3
4
Numbers are
LCR Classes.

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK4 + DK to access the Memory Block.
3
Press line key to specify LCR Class for Tel Port No.

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.
 OR 
D

to go to next assigned Tel Port No.
B

+ Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109
B

+ Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119
B

+ Cto enter C for Port Number 120
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 548
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________

Notes

1.
LCR Class Selection corresponds to Area Code Tables as follows:
Class 0 No LCR
Class 1 Use Area Code Table 1
Class 2 Use Area Code Table 2
Class 3 Use Area Code Table 3
Class 4 Use Area Code Table 4
2.
Stations cannot be assigned to multiple LCR Classes.
3.
The KMM(1.0)U must be installed on the MIFM-U( ) ETU to support this feature.
4.
Telephone ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 549

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-41
SIE/CAR Ringing Line Preference
Telephone Mode
Selection
4
Submode
--
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not to allow Ringing Line Preference (go
Data No.
off-hook or press Speaker key) on all telephones that are assigned Secondary
41
Incoming Extension (SIE) and/or Call Arrival keys.
PC Programming
Display
Tel
¦+BTM
Port
No.
Data
Setting
(01~C0)
No.
Title
Data
0 1 / 4 1 : S C
P R F
Y S
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
NO
YS
default.

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK4 +DA to access the Memory Block.
3
Press LK1 to disable Ringing Line Preference for SIE or CAR for Tel Port No.

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.
 OR 
D

to go to next assigned Tel Port No.
B

+ Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109
B

+ Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119
B

+ Cto enter C for Port Number 120
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 550
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
4-37
Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Day Mode)
4-38
Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Night Mode)

Notes

1.
Telephone ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.
2.
The SIE/CAR must be ringing for this Memory Block to work.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 551

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-42
Call Forward-Busy Immediately/
Telephone Mode
Delay Selection
4
Submode
--
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify immediate forward (NO) or delay forward (YS) for an
Data No.
Incoming CO/PBX call if the station is set for Call Forward Busy.
42
Display
PC Programming
Tel
Port
¦+BTT
No.
Data
Setting
(01~C0)
No.
Title
Data
0 1 / 4 2 : B U S Y F W D
Y S
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8

The shaded
selection is the
NO
YS
default.

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK4 + DB to access the Memory Block.
3
Press LK1for immediate forward to a station set to Call Forward Busy for Tel Port No.

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.
 OR 
D

to go to next assigned Tel Port No.
B

+ Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109
B

+ Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119
B

+ Cto enter C for Port Number 120
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 552
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-2-22
Call Forward No Answer Time Selection

Notes

Telephone ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 553

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-43
Station to Call Appearance Block
Telephone Mode
Assignment
4
Submode
--
General Description
Use this Memory Block to assign a Multiline Terminal to a Call Appearance Block.
Data No.
43
Display
Tel
PC Programming
Port
Setting
No.
Data
Data
(01~C0)
No.
Title
(00~47)
¦+BTT
0 1 / 4 3 : C A P
N O 0 0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK4 + DC to access the Memory Block.
3
Use the dial pad to enter Call Appearance Block assignment for Tel Port No.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
All stations are assigned to
J
Call Appearance Block 00.
to move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.
 OR 
D

to go to next assigned Tel Port No.
B

+ Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109
B

+ Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119
B

+ Cto enter C for Port Number 120
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
Refer to individual features in the Electra Elite IPK Features and Specifications Manual.

Notes

Telephone ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 554
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-44
Caller ID Preset Dial Outgoing CO
Telephone Mode
Selection
4
Submode
--
General Description
Use this Memory Block to assign the Trunk group, Route Advanced group, or Closed
Data No.
Numbering group that is seized for ANI/Caller ID Outgoing Calls. Use the ANI/Caller
44
ID Scroll key to access the ANI/Caller ID to be called.
PC Programming
Display
Tel
¦+AI
Port
No.
Data
Setting
No.
Data
(01~C0)
0 1 / 4 4 :
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK4 + DD to access the Memory Block.
3
Use the dial pad to enter Trunk Group, Route Advance group, or Closed
Default Value
Numbering group Access Code to seize for ANI/Caller ID outgoing calls for
Not specified
Tel Port No.

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.
 OR 
D

to go to next assigned Tel Port No.
B

+ Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109
B

+ Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119
B

+ Cto enter C for Port Number 120
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Notes

1.
Setting Data is Access Code Assignment in Memory Blocks 1-1-46, 47, 48 [Access Code (1-Digit, 2-Digit, or
3-Digit) Assignment]. For example: Dial 9 (101) Trunk Group 1.
2.
Assign the ANI/Caller ID Scroll key using Memory Blocks 2-06 (Line Key Selection for Tenant Mode) or 4-12
(Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode).
3.
Telephone ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120. Use redial +1 for A, redial +2 for B, and redial +3 for C.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 555

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-46
Live Record Auto Delete Selection
Telephone Mode
4
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not live record sessions that are not
--
addressed by the station user are deleted.
Data No.
Display
46
Tel
Port
PC Programming
No.
Data
Setting
(01~C0)
No.
Title
Data
¦+AV
0 1 / 4 6 : A U T O D E L
N O
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8

The shaded
selection is the
YS
NO
default.

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK4 + DF to access the Memory Block.
3
Press LK2 to delete live record sessions not addressed by the user for Tel Port No.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
NO
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.
 OR 
D

to go to next assigned Tel Port No.
B

+ Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109
B

+ Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119
B

+ Cto enter C for Port Number 120s
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 556
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-47
ISDN Directory Number Selection
Telephone Mode
4
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not the directory Number is presented to
--
the Network when a call is placed from the programmed station.
Data No.
Display
47
Tel
Port
PC Programming
No.
Data
Setting
No.
(01~C0)
Title
Data
¦+AN
0 1 / 4 7 : C I D
Y E S
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
YES
NO
default.

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK4 + DG to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the Setting Data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
3-52
ISDN Trunk Directory Number Assignment
3-91
Trunk Type Assignment
4-62
ISDN-PRI Directory Number Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 557

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________

Notes

BRI:
1.
When this Memory Block is set to No, the station placing an outgoing call does not present the programmed
number in Memory Block 3-52 assigned for the BRI Trunks. The Network presents Restricted for the Caller ID
information.
2.
When this Memory Block is set to YES, the station placing an outgoing call presents the programmed number in
Memory Block 3-52 assigned for the BRI Trunks. The Network presents the programmed number as Caller ID.
PRI:
1.
For ISDN-PRI Calling Party Number (CPN) Presentation from Station, PRT firmware Version 3.50 or higher is
required.
2.
When this Memory Block is set to No, and ISDN-PRI is used in CO Mode in Memory Block 3-91, the programmed
number in Memory Block 3-52 is not presented as Caller ID. The Network presents Restricted for the Caller ID
information.
3.
When this Memory Block is set to YES, and ISDN-PRI is used in CO Mode in Memory Block 3-91, the
programmed number in Memory Block 3-52 is presented as Caller ID. The Network presents the programmed
number as Caller ID.
4.
When this Memory Block is set to No, and ISDN-PRI is used in DID Mode in Memory Block 3-91, the
programmed number in Memory Block 3-52 is not presented as Caller ID.
5.
When this Memory Block is set to YES, and ISDN-PRI is used in DID Mode in Memory Block 3-91, the
programmed number in Memory Block 4-62 is presented as Caller ID. The Network presents the programmed
number as Caller ID.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 558
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-49
Caller ID Display for CAR Key
Telephone Mode
Assignment
4
Submode
--
General Description
Use this Memory Block to assign one Multiline Terminal per CAR to display ANI/Caller
Data No.
ID Indication on incoming CAR calls.
49
This Memory Block is used for System Software R1600 and lower. For System
PC Programming
Software R1700 or higher, it is no longer required.
¦+AI
Display
Tel
CAR Port
Data
Port No.
No.
No.
Title
(01~C0)
0 1 / 4 9 : C A L L I D
0 0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK4 + DI to access the Memory Block.
3
Use the dial pad to enter Tel port No for CAR Port No. 01.
Default Value

Use the following to enter data:
Not Specified
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.
 OR 
D

to go to next assigned Tel Port No.
B

+ Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109
B

+ Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119
B

+ Cto enter C for Port Number 120
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Notes

To display ANI/Caller ID Indication for normal incoming CO calls and CAR incoming calls, both ANI/Caller ID
Indication and Ring assignment must be assigned for the terminal in System Programming. A maximum of 15
Multiline Terminals can be assigned system-wide to display caller identification for normal incoming CO calls and
CAR incoming calls using Memory Block 1-1-78 (Caller ID Display Assignment for System Mode). A sixteenth
Multiline Terminal can be assigned to display ANI/Caller ID Indication for CAR incoming calls per CAR using this
Memory Block.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 559

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-50
Multiline Terminal Type Selection
Telephone Mode
4
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to assign a DTU/DTP or DTH/DTR-32-1 TEL, DTP or
--
DTH/DTR-32D-1 TEL, or DTU-32D-2 TEL with 16 Line Keys or 24 Line Keys.
Data No.
Display
50
Tel
Port
PC Programming
No.
Data
Setting
(01~C0)
No.
Title
Data
¦+BTM
0 1 / 5 0 : M L T
T P
1 6
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8

The shaded
selection is the
16
24
24A
default.

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK4 + EK to access the Memory Block.
3
Press LK2 if you want 24 line keys for Tel Port No.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
All stations have 16 line keys.
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.
 OR 
D

to go to next assigned Tel Port No.
B

+ Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109
B

+ Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119
B

+ Cto enter C for Port Number 120
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 560
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________

Notes

1.
Telephone ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.
2.
Line Key Orientation:
LK = Line Keys
OT = One-Touch keys
DTU/DTP-32-1 TEL or DTP-32D-1 or DTU-32D-2
16 Line Key Mode
24 Line Key Mode
LK1
LK2
LK3
LK4
OT 1
OT 9
LK1
LK2
LK3
LK4
LK17
LK21
LK5
LK6
LK7
LK8
OT 2
OT 10
LK5
LK6
LK7
LK8
LK18
LK22
LK9
LK10
LK11
LK12
OT 3
OT 11
LK9
LK10
LK11
LK12
LK19
LK23
LK13
LK14
LK15
LK16
OT 4
OT 12
LK13
LK14
LK15
LK16
LK20
LK24
OT 5
OT 13
OT 1
OT 5
OT 6
OT 14
OT 2
OT 6
OT 7
OT 15
OT 3
OT 7
OT 8
OT 16
OT 4
OT 8
DTH/DTR-32D-1 TEL
16 Line Key Mode
24 Line Key Mode
LK1
LK2
LK3
LK4
LK5
LK6
LK7
LK8
LK1
LK2
LK3
LK4
LK5
LK6
LK7
LK8
LK9
LK10
LK11
LK12
LK13
LK14
LK15
LK16
LK9
LK10
LK11
LK12
LK13
LK14
LK15
LK16
OT1
OT2
OT3
OT4
OT5
OT6
OT7
OT8
LK17
LK18
LK19
LK20
OT 1
OT 2
OT 3
OT 4
OT9
OT10 OT11
OT12 OT13 OT14 OT15 OT16
LK21
LK22
LK23
LK24
OT 5
OT 6
OT 7
OT 8
24A Line Key Mode
LK1
LK2
LK3
LK4
LK5
LK6
LK7
LK8
LK9
LK10
LK11
LK12
LK13
LK14
LK15
LK16
LK17
LK18
LK19
LK20
LK21
LK22
LK23
LK24
OT 1
OT 2
OT 3
OT 4
OT 5
OT 6
OT 7
OT 8
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 561

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-51
Off-Hook Ringing Selection
Telephone Mode
4
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to assign per station Off-Hook Ringing to the Multiline
--
Terminal.
Data No.
Display
51
Tel
Port
PC Programming
No.
Data
Setting
(01~C0)
No.
Title
Data
¦+BTM
0 1 / 5 1 : O F F
R I N G
Y S
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8

The shaded
selection is the
YS
NO
default.

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK4 + EA to access the Memory Block.
3
Press LK2 to disable Off-Hook Ringing for Tel Port No.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
All Terminals = YS
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.
 OR 
D

to go to next assigned Tel Port No.
B

+ Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109
B

+ Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119
B

+ Cto enter C for Port Number 120
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Notes

Telephone ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 562
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-52
CO/PBX Answer Key Operation
Telephone Mode
Without Ringing Assignment (Day
4
Mode)
Submode
--
Data No.
General Description
52
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not day assignment Answer key
operation uses ringing. When NO is selected, press the Answer key while an incoming
PC Programming
CO line key is flashing to answer the line key call. When YS is selected, the telephone
must be ringing for the Answer Key to answer an incoming CO/PBX call.
¦+BTT
Display
Tel
Port
No.
Data
Setting
(01~C0)
No.
Title
Data
0 1 / 5 2 : R I N G
D
Y S
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
NO
YS
default.

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK4 +EB to access the Memory Block.
3
Press LK1 to disable ringing for answer key operation for Tel Port No.

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.
 OR 
D

to go to next assigned Tel Port No.
B

+ Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109
B

+ Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119
B

+ Cto enter C for Port Number 120
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 563

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________

Notes

1.
Telephone ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.
2.
Ringing must be assigned in Memory Block 4-01 [CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)] for the YS choice to
work. When ringing is assigned, and NO is assigned here, the telephone does not ring during incoming CO/PBX
calls.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 564
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-53
CO/PBX Answer Key Operation
Telephone Mode
Without Ringing Assignment
4
(Night Mode)
Submode
--
Data No.
General Description
53
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not night assignment Answer key
operation uses ringing. When NO is selected, press the Answer key while an
PC Programming
incoming CO line key is flashing to answer the line key call. When YS is selected, the
telephone must be ringing for the Answer key to answer an incoming CO/PBX call.
¦+BTT
Display
Tel
Port
No.
Data
Setting
(01~C0)
No.
Title
Data
0 1 / 5 3 : R I N G
N
Y S
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
NO
YS
default.

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK4 + EC to access the Memory Block.
3
Press LK1 to press the answer key while an incoming CO line key is flashing to answer the call for Tel Port No.

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.
 OR 
D

to go to next assigned Tel Port No.
B

+ Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109
B

+ Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119
B

+ Cto enter C for Port Number 120
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 565

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________

Notes

1.
Telephone ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.
2.
Ringing must be assigned in Memory Block 4-02 [CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)] for the YS choice to
work. When ringing is assigned, and NO is assigned here, the telephone does not ring during incoming CO/PBX
calls.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 566
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-54
Enhanced 911 CESID to Station Table
Telephone Mode
Assignment
4
Submode
--
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify E911 Caller Emergency Service Identification
Data No.
(CESID).
54
Display
PC Programming
Tel
Port
¦+AE
No.
Data
Setting
(01~C0)
No.
Data
0 1 / 5 4
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK4 + ED to access the Memory Block.
3
Enter data using dial pad. Enter 7- or 10-digit code plus up to 5-digit extension number (15 digits maximum) for Tel port No.

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.
 OR 
D

to go to next assigned Tel Port No.
H

to clear data when cursor is at setting data position
B

+ Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109
B

+ Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119
B

+ Cto enter C for Port Number 120
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 567

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-8-43
Enhanced 911 Trunk Assignment
1-8-44
Enhanced 911 Alternate Route Assignment
1-8-45
Enhanced 911 Alternate Route Assignment (Maintenance Busy)
1-8-46
Enhanced 911 Dialing Digit Assignment

Notes

Telephone ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 568
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-55
CO/PBX Telephone Ringing Pattern
CO/PBX Line Mode
Selection
4
Submode
--
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify the ringing pattern assigned to each telephone.
Data No.
55
Display
Tel Port
PC Programming
No.
Data
Setting
(01~CO)
No.

Ti
tle Data Page
¦+BTT
0 1 / 5 5 : C O
R N G
| 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
--
Ringing
Ringing
Ringing
Ringing
Ringing
Ringing
Ringing
(None)
Pattern A
Pattern B
Pattern C
Pattern D
Pattern E
Pattern F
Pattern G
The shaded
Page 2
selection is the
default.

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
Ringing
Pattern H
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK4 + EE to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to select the ringing pattern for Tel Port No.

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.
 OR 
D

to go to next assigned Tel Port No.
C

to go to the next page
A

to go to the previous page
B

+ Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109
B

+ Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119
B

+ Cto enter C for Port Number 120
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 569

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
4-57
CO Line Ringing Pattern Priority Selection

Notes

Telephone Ports A0-C0 are ports 100~120.
The Ring Patterns are shown in the table below:
s= seconds
Pattern
0s
1s
2s
3s
4s
5s
6s
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
NO
No Ring
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 570
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-56
SMDR Telephone Print Selection
CO/PBX Line Mode
4
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not a call record is printed for the
--
specified station.
Data No.
Display
56
Tel Port
No.
Data
Setting
PC Programming
(01~CO)
No.

Ti
tl
e
Data
¦+AS
0 1 / 5 6 : P R T
O U T
Y S
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
YES
NO
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK4 + EF to access the Memory Block.
3
Press LK2 to deny call record printing for Tel port No.

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.
 OR 
D

to go to next assigned Tel Port No.
B

+ Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109
B

+ Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119
B

+ Cto enter C for Port Number 120
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-5-13
Printer Connected Selection

Notes

Telephone Ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 571

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-57
CO Line Ringing Pattern Priority
CO/PBX Line Mode
Selection
4
Submode
--
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify the priority for station or CO/PBX line ringing.
Data No.
57
Display
Tel Port
PC Programming
No.
Data
Setting
(01~CO)
No.

Ti
tle
Data
¦+BTT
0 1 / 5 7 : R N G P R I
C O
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
CO
TEL
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK4 + EG to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.
 OR 
D

to go to next assigned Tel Port No.
B

+ Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109
B

+ Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119
B

+ Cto enter C for Port Number 120
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5 Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 572
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
4-55
CO/PBX Telephone Ringing Pattern Selection
3-67
CO/PBX Ringing Pattern Selection

Notes

Telephone Ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 573

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-58
Automated Attendant Selection for
CO/PBX Line Mode
DID
4
Submode
--
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify the Automated Attendant message for DID calls.
Data No.
58
Display
Tel Port
PC Programming
No.
Data
Setting
(01~CO)
No.

Ti
tle
Data
Page
¦+AU
0 1 / 5 8 : D I D > N O N | 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
NON
AA1
AA2
AA3
AA4
AA5
AA6
AA7
The shaded
Page 2
selection is the
default.

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
AA8
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK4 +EH to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the line key to specify Automated Attendant priority for Tel port No.

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.
 OR 
D

to go to next assigned Tel Port No.
C

to go to the next page
A

to go to the previous page
B

+ Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109
B

+ Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119
B

+ Cto enter C for Port Number 120
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Notes

Telephone Ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 574
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-59
APR/APA Hookflash Selection
CO/PBX Line Mode
4
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to allow/deny Hookflash for Analog Port Adapter with Ringer
--
(AP(R)-R/APR-U) or Analog Port Adapter (AP(A)-R/APA-U) without ringer on a
Multiline Terminal.
Data No.
Display
59
Tel Port
PC Programming
No.
Data
Setting
(01~CO)
No.

T

itle
Data
¦+AU
0 1 / 5 9 : H K
F L S H
N O
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
NO
YS

default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK4 + EI to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the setting data option.

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.
 OR 
D

to go to next assigned Tel Port No.
B

+ Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109
B

+ Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119
B

+ Cto enter C for Port Number 120
G
4
Press
to write the data and display Memory Block 4-1 for next Tel Port No.
E
5
Program the next Tel Port No. or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-02
Hookflash Time Selection
1-3-02
SLT Hookflash Signal Selection
4-39
APR Ring Mode Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 575

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
4-95
DTMF/DP SLT Type Selection

Notes

Operation of SLT connected to AP(R)-R/ APR-U or AP(A)-R/ APA-U is the same as the Single Line Telephone.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 576
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-62
ISDN-PRI Directory Number
Telephone Mode
Selection
4
Submode
--
General Description
Use this Memory Block to provide the station DID Number (CPN, Calling Party
Data No.
Number) to the Network when placing outgoing calls.
62
Display
PC Programming
Tel
Port
¦+AN
No.
Data
Setting
(01~C0)
No.
Data
0 1 / 6 2 :
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK4 + FB to access the Memory Block.
3
Use the dial pad to enter data.

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data
 OR 
D

to go to the next TEL port number
H

to clear data
G
4
Press
to write the data and display Memory Block 4-01.
E
5
Program Memory Block 4-01 or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
3-52
ISDN Trunk Directory Number Assignment
3-91
Trunk Type Assignment
4-47
ISDN Directory Number Selection
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 577

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________

Notes

1.
A maximum of 13 digits is allowed.
2.
Hyphens/dashes are not allowed when entering the directory number.
3.
This Memory Block supports only trunks assigned as DID in Memory Block 3-91.
4.
When using CO Line Mode, Memory Block 3-52 is used to assign the directory number for ISDN-PRI.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 578
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-64
Code Restriction Class (without
CO/PBX Line Mode
Authorization Code) Day Mode
4
Assignment
Submode
--
Data No.
General Description
64
Use this Memory Block to specify the Code Restriction Class per station in Day Mode
when Forced Account Code/Authorization Code is set in Memory Block 1-8-08 [Class
PC Programming
of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2] and a call is made without using a Forced
Account Code/Authorization Code.
¦+AC
Display
Tel Port
No.
Data
Setting
(01~CO)
No.

Ti
tl
e
Data
0 1 / 6 4 : C L S
D A Y = 1 5
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK4 + FD to access the Memory Block.
3
Use the dial pad to change Day Mode Restriction Class for Tel port No.
Default Value

Use the following to enter data:
All Stations Class 15
J to move the cursor left
L to move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.
 OR 
D

to go to next assigned Tel Port No.
B

+ Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109
B

+ Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~11
B

+ Cto enter C for Port Number 120
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 579

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-46
Access Code(1,2,3-Digit) Assignment
1-1-47
Function 146 Forced Account Code/Authorization Code
1-1-48
Function 147 Forced Account Code/Authorization Code Access
1-8-07
Class of Service (Attendant) Feature Selection 1
Page 2, LK 8 Forced Account Code/Authorization Code Programming
1-8-08
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
Page 5, LK 1 Forced Account Code/Authorization Code
Page 6, LK 3 Unverified for Forced Account Code/Authorization Code
1-8-27
Forced Account Code/Authorization Code Length Assignment
4-07
Code Restriction Class Assignment (Day Mode)
4-08
Code Restriction Class Assignment (Night Mode)
4-17
Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment
4-65
Code Restriction Class (without authorization code) Night Mode Assignment

Notes

Telephone Ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 580
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-65
Code Restriction Class (without
CO/PBX Line Mode
Authorization Code) Night Mode
4
Assignment
Submode
--
Data No.
General Description
65
Use this Memory Block to specify the Code Restriction Class per station in Night Mode
when Forced Account Code/Authorization Code is set in Memory Block 1-8-08 [Class
PC Programming
of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2] and a call is made without using a Forced
Account Code/Authorization Code.
¦+AC
Display
Tel Port
No.
Data
Setting
(01~CO)
No.

Ti
tl
e
Data
0 1 / 6 5 : C L S
N T
= 1 5
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK4 + FE to access the Memory Block.
3
Use the dial pad to change Night Mode Restriction Class for Tel port No.
Default Value

Use the following to enter data:
All Stations Class 15
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter Restriction Class or Tel Port No.
 OR 
D

to go to next assigned Tel Port No.
B

+ Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109
B

+ Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119
B

+ Cto enter C for Port Number 120
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 581

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-46
Access Code(1,2,3-Digit) Assignment
1-1-47
Function 146 Forced Account Code/Authorization Code
1-1-48
Function 147 Forced Account Code/Authorization Code Access
1-8-07
Class of Service (Attendant) Feature Selection 1
Page 2, LK 8 Forced Account Code/Authorization Code Programming
1-8-08
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
Page 5, LK 1 Forced Account Code/Authorization Code
Page 6, LK 3 Unverified for Forced Account Code/Authorization Code
1-8-27
Forced Account Code/Authorization Code Length Assignment
4-07
Code Restriction Class Assignment (Day Mode)
4-08
Code Restriction Class Assignment (Night Mode)
4-17
Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment
4-64
Code Restriction Class (without authorization code) Day Mode Assignment

Notes

Telephone Ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 582
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-66
MOH or Ring Back Tone Selection
CO/PBX Line Mode
4
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to assign MOH or Ring Back Tone for the outside party when a
--
trunk call is placed on hold by the Transfer key on a Multiline Terminal, hook flash from
a Single Line Telephone, or the Transfer or Hold key at a PSII station.
Data No.
Display
66
Tel Port
PC Programming
No.
Data
Setting
(01~CO)
No.

T

itle
Data
¦+BTT
0 1 / 6 6 : H O L D
M O H
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
MOH
RBT

default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK4 + FF to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the setting data option.

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter Tel Port No.
 OR 
D

to go to next assigned Tel Port No.
B

+ Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109
B

+ Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119
B

+ Cto enter C for Port Number 120
G
4
Press
to write the data and advance to the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 583

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-8-09
Music on Hold Pattern Selection
1-8-31
Hold Tone Source Assignment
1-8-32
Hold Internal Tone Volume Selection
3-11
CO External Source Selection
3-12
Trunk-to-MOH Trunk Assignment

Notes

Telephone Ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 584
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-67
IP Station Number Assignment
CO/PBX Line Mode
4
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to assign a station number for each IP telephone supported by
--
the IPCA( )-U( ) ETU.
Data No.
System Software R2500 is required.
67
Display
PC Programming
Tel Port
No.
Data
Setting
(01~CO)
No.
Title
Data
¦+BTT

0 1 / 6 7 : I P
I C M
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK4 + FG to access the Memory Block.
3

Use dial pad to assign a 2- (10~89), 3- (100~899) or 4-digit (1000~8999) station number for each Tel Port No.:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.
 OR 
D

to go to next assigned Tel Port No.
B

+ Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109
B

+ Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119
B

+ Cto enter C for Port Number 120
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5 Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 585

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card Interface Slot Assignment
1-1-46
Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment
Function 001
1-1-47
Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment
Function 001
1-1-48
Access Code (3-Digit) Assignment
Function 001
1-2-03
2~7-Digit Station Number Selection
1-2-04
Call Arrival Key Block Assignment
1-2-21
PS Telephone Block Assignment
1-2-32
IP Telephone Block Assignment
1-2-33
IP Telephone Block Assignment Allow/Deny Selection
1-2-34
Expanded Station Number Assignment
4-07
Code Restriction Class Assignment (Day Mode)
4-08
Code Restriction Class Assignment (Night Mode)
4-10
Station Number Assignment
4-40
LCR Class Selection
4-54
Enhanced 911 CESID to Station Table Assignment
4-56
SMDR Telephone Print Selection

Notes

1.
The Electra Elite IPK Basic port package allows up to 30 IP Telephones to be installed using dedicated ports
73~104.
2.
The maximum station port capacity for the Electra Elite IPK Expanded port package is reduced by the number of
IPC IP Telephones assigned by this Memory Block in groups of 4.
3.
The Electra Elite IPK Expanded port package allows a maximum of 120 ports to be shared by station ports (ESI,
SLI, OPX, FMS/VMS, etc. ), Call Arrival Keys, PS Telephones, and IP Telephones. When 32 station ports are
being used as IP Telephones, 88 Station ports remain for use by the Legacy system.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 586
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-68
LCD Line Key Name Assignment
CO/PBX Line Mode
4
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to assign a name to each LCD Line Key of the DTH/
--
DTR-16LD-1 Telephone. Up to eight characters can be assigned.
Data No.
Display
68
Tel Port
Data
Line Key
(01~CO)
No.
01
~1
6
Title
PC Programming
0 1 / 6 8 : L K 0 1
N A M E
¦+BTT
< C O
0 1
>
Setting Data

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK4 + FH to access the Memory Block.
3
Use the dial pad to change Line key number or name.
Default Value

Use the following to enter data:
LK01~08: C0 01~08
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter Name, Line key number or Tel Port No.
 OR 
D

to go to next assigned Tel Port No.
B

+ Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109
B

+ Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119
B

+ Cto enter C for Port Number 120
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Line key and name.
5
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each Line key assignment. After Line key 16 is programmed, the next Tel Port No. is displayed. When
D
you want to program less than 16 keys, after the last Line key to program, press
to go to next assigned Tel Port No.
After all Tel Ports are assigned, the next Memory Block is displayed.
E
6
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-2
Telephone Type Assignment
4-12
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 587

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________

Notes

1.
Telephone Ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.
2.
The name can be entered using the dial pad. Follow the procedures in Appendix B Character Codes.
3.
The default names listed in the table below are assigned based on the line key type from Memory Block 4-12
(Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode).
LK Assign
Default
Note
NON (not assigned)
All Blank
CO Outside Lines
CO^xx
xx=Port 01~64
Call Forward Busy/No Answer
CFB
Call Forward All Calls
CFA
xx=Block 00~47
Call Appearance Keys (CAP)
CAPxx-yy
yy=Key 01~24
Programmable One-Touch Keys
FA xx
xx=key 01~24
Trunk Group
TKGP^xx
xx=Trunk Group 01~32
Route Advance Group
ADV^xx
xx=Group 01~16
SIE including CAR
SIE^xxx
xxx=Port No. 01~99, AO~CO
Microphone
MIC
Headset On/Off Key
HSET
Scroll Key for Caller ID indication
SCROLL
Do Not Disturb On/Off
DND
Log On/Off
LOG
BGM On/Off
BGM
Intercom Key
ICM
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 588
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-69
CO Message Waiting Indication
CO/PBX Line Mode
Assignment
4
Submode
--
General Description
Use this Memory Block to assign the CO Message Waiting Indication to Line Keys
Data No.
assigned for direct CO/PBX appearances in Memory Block 4-12 (Line Key Selection
69
for Telephone Mode) per Line Key per Station.
PC Programming
System Software R2000 or higher is required.
¦+BTT
Display
Tel Port
No.
Data
(01~CO)
No.

Ti
tle
Line Key
0 1 / 6 9 : C O
M W
| O 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1
Line Keys 01~08

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

8
Page 2
Line Keys 09~16

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
default not
assigned.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

16
Page 3
Line Keys 17~24

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 589

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK4 + FI to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the Line Key corresponding to CO Message Waiting Indication required for Tel Port No.
The LED indication changes to indicate data each time a CO/PBX Line Key is pressed:
Off
Not assigned
On Red: Assigned

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter Tel Port No.
 OR 
D

to go to next assigned Tel Port No.
C

to go to the next page
A

to go to the previous page
B

+ Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109
B

+ Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119
B

+ Cto enter C for Port Number 120
G
4
Press
to write the data and advance to the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-8-07
Class of Service (Attendant) Feature Selection 1
Page 3, LK 2
3-73
CO Message Waiting Yes/No Selection

Notes

This assignment is valid for Multiline Terminals only.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 590
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-71
Station to Timer Class of Service
CO/PBX Line Mode
4
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify the Timer Class of Service per station.
--
R3000 or higher is required.
Data No.

71
Tel Port
Setting
PC Programming
No.
Data
Data
(01~CO)
No.

Ti
tl
e
1~4
¦+AC
0 1 / 7 1 : T M R
C L S
1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK4 + GA to access the Memory Block.
3
Use the dial pad to change Night Mode Restriction Class for Tel port No.
Default Value

Use the following to enter data:
Tel Ports 1 & 2 = Class 1
J
All other ports = Class 2
to move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter Restriction Class or Tel Port No.
 OR 
D

to go to next assigned Tel Port No.
B

+ Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109
B

+ Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119
B

+ Cto enter C for Port Number 120
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Timer Class of Service.
E
5
Program the next Timer Class of Service or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 591

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-03
Hold Recall Time Selection (Non-Exclusive Hold )
1-1-05
Start Time Selection
1-1-07
Tie Line Delay Ringing Time Selection
1-1-12
Station Transfer/Camp-On Recall Time Selection
1-1-37
Trunk Queuing Timeout Selection
1-1-63
Hold Recall Time Selection (Exclusive)
1-2-00
Internal Paging Timeout Selection
1-2-02
Automatic Callback Release Time Selection
1-2-22
Call Forward No Answer Time Selection
1-2-23
System Call Park Recall Time Selection
1-4-02
Automated Attendant Transfer Delayed Ringing Time Selection
1-7-06
External Paging Timeout Selection

Notes

1.
Telephone Ports 1 and 2 are in Station to Timer Class of Service, Class 1 by default. All other ports are in Station
to Timer Class of Service, Class 2 by default.
2.
When a system is upgraded from R2500 or below, the related memory blocks above and the following are reset
to the default value during the upgrade process:
·
1-1-06
CO/PBX Incoming Ringing Alarm Time Selection
·
1-1-81
ISDN Dial Interval Time Selection
·
1-3-03
First Digit PBR Release Time Selection
·
1-4-01
Automated Attendant First Digit PBR Release Time Selection
·
1-4-03
Automated Attendant No Answer Disconnect Time Selection
·
1-7-01
Doorphone Display Time Selection
3.
Telephone Ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 592
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-90
SLT Data Line Security Assignment
Telephone Mode
4
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify NORMAL or DATA position for a Single Line
--
Telephone (SLT).
Data No.
Display
90
Tel
Port
No.
PC Programming
Data
Setting
(01~C0)
No.
Title
Data
¦+BTT
0 1 / 9 0 : S L T
N O R M A L
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
NORMAL
DATA
default.

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK4 + IK to access the Memory Block.
3
Press LK2 to select DATA for single Line telephones for Tel Port No.
Default Values

Ports 01~CO = NO
Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.
 OR 
D

to go to next assigned Tel Port No.
B

+Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109
B

+Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119
B

+Cto enter C for Port Number 120
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
5
Program Memory Blocks 4-91 ~4-95. The next Tel Port No. is displayed.
6
Repeat Steps 3, 4, and 5, for all Tel Port Nos. Tel Port No. 01 is displayed again for Memory Block 4-90.
E
7
Press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 593

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________

Notes

1.
When connecting SLT/Voice Mail, assign NORMAL. When connecting Fax/Modem, assign DATA.
2.
When Multiline Terminal is assigned for Data Line Security, Tone Override and Call Alert Notification tones are
not heard from the handset; however, the tone is still sent and heard from the speaker when off-hook.
3.
Data Line Security denies a station from barging in, even if Barge-In is allowed in Class of Service.
4.
When this Memory Block is set to DATA, the Voice Override tone is not heard when doing a Voice Over Split.
5.
Telephone ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 594
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-91
Telephone Ringing Variation
Telephone Mode
Selection
4
Submode
--
General Description
Data No.
Use this Memory Block to assign a Low, Medium, or High ringing tone frequency when
Telephone is specified in Memory Block 1-1-28 (Distinctive Ringing by Telephone or
91
CO Selection).
PC Programming
Display
¦+BTM
Tel
Port
No.
Data
Setting
No.
Title
(01~C0)
Data
0 1 / 9 1 : R N G T O N E
= M
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
M
L
H
default.

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK4 + IA to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the line Key to select ringing frequency for Tel Port No.

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.
 OR 
D

to go to next assigned Tel Port No.
B

+ Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109
B

+ Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119
B

+ Cto enter C for Port Number 120
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-28
Distinctive Ringing by Telephone or CO Selection
3-07
CO/PBX Ringing Variation Selection
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 595

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________

Notes

1.
This Memory Block is applicable for telephones selected in Memory Block 1-1-28 (Distinctive Ringing by
Telephone or CO Selection).
2.
Selected ringing tone (H, M or L) applies to incoming outside line calls only.
3.
Telephone ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 596
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-92
Receiving Volume Selection
Telephone Mode
4
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify whether receiving volume is returned to normal
--
(DOWN) or kept as is (UP) on a call after hanging up.
Data No.
Display
92
Tel
Port
PC Programming
No.
Data
Setting
(01~C0)
No.
Title
Data
¦+BTT
0 1 / 9 2 : R C V
D O W N
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
DOWN
UP
default.

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK4 + IB to access the Memory Block.
3
Press LK2 to keep volume UP after hanging up a call.

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.
 OR 
D

to go to next assigned Tel Port No.
B

+ Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109
B

+ Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119
B

+ Cto enter C for Port Number 120
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Notes

When UP is assigned in this Memory Block, and a user sets the handset volume to maximum, the volume is reset
to a level to meet FCC standard when the user hangs up.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 597

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-93
Internal Zone Paging Selection
Telephone Mode
4
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to assign stations as Internal page zones.
--
Display
Data No.
Tel
Port
93
No.
Data
Setting
(01~C0)
No.
Title
Data
PC Programming
0 1 / 9 3 : Z O N E
N O
¦+BTM
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8

The shaded
selection is the
NO

A

B

C
default.

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK4 + IC to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to select internal page zone for Tel Port No.

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.
 OR 
D

to go to next assigned Tel Port No.
B

+ Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109
B

+ Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119
B

+ Cto enter C for Port Number 120
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 598
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________

Notes

1.
Specify one zone:
All Internal Zones: Paged by dialing 51
Zone A: Paged by dialing 52
Zone B: Paged by dialing 53
Zone C: Paged by dialing 54.
2.
Telephones can be assigned to No Zone. All Internal Zones page the telephone unless No Page Receive is
assigned in Memory Block 4-31 (Receiving Internal/All Call Page Selection).
3.
All Internal Zones pages all of the idle Multiline Terminals.
4.
Telephone ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 599

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-94
3-Minute Alarm Selection
Telephone Mode
4
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify per station whether or not a warning tone is
--
generated at 3-minute intervals during an outgoing or incoming CO/PBX call.
Data No.
Display
94
Tel
Port
No.
Data
PC Programming
Setting
No.
(01~C0)
Title
Data
¦+BTM
0 1 / 9 4 : 3 m A L M
N O
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8

The shaded
selection is the
NO
YS
default.

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK4 + ID to access the Memory Block.
3
Press LK2 to generate a three-minute warning tone during a call for Tel port No.

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.
 OR 
D

to go to next assigned Tel Port No.
B

+ Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109
B

+ Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119
B

+ Cto enter C for Port Number 120
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Notes

1.
A 1-second (approximately) warning signal sounds every three minutes during CO/PBX calls.
2.
The alarm tone is heard through the terminal speaker only.
3.
When the built-in speakerphone is used for handsfree, the warning signal is not used.
4.
Telephone ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 600
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
4-95
DTMF/DP SLT Type Selection
Telephone Mode
4
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block to specify per port whether Dial Pulse or Dual-Tone
--
Multifrequency (MF) Single Line Telephone is connected to the system.
Data No.
Display
95
Tel
Port
PC Programming
No.
Data
Setting
No.
(01~C0)
Title
Data
¦+BTI
0 1 / 9 5 : S L T
= M F
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
DP
MF
default.

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK4 + IE to access the Memory Block.
3
Press LK1 to specify Dial Pulse for single line telephones connected to the system.

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.
 OR 
D

to go to next assigned Tel Port No.
B

+ Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109
B

+ Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119
B

+ Cto enter C for Port Number 120
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Tel Port No. for Memory Block 4-90.
5
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for all Tel Port Nos. Tel Port No. 01 for Memory Block 4-90 is displayed.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 601

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 602
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
5-00
Digit Add/Del for Tie Line Networking Trunk Group Mode
Assignment
5
Submode
--
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify the number of digits to add/delete from the
Data No.
telephone number sent from a distant system over Tie lines or from DID lines. The
00
digits enable the system to determine whether a call is directed to the local system or
to a distant system. Refer to Notes.
PC Programming
Display
¦+ALN
Trunk
Group No. Data
Setting
(01~32)
No.

Ti
tle
Data
0 1 / 0 0 : A D D / D E L 0 0 0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK5 to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to enter the data.

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data
D

to go to the next Trunk Group No.

Setting Data:
000:
No Addition or Deletion
001~009:
[1]~[9] Add
010:
[0] Digit Add
100~199:
[00]~[99} Add
201:
1-Digit Delete
202:
2-Digit Delete
301~309:
1-Digit Delete and 1~9 Add
310:
1-Digit Delete and 0 Add
400~499:
1-Digit Delete and 00~99 Add
501~509:
2-Digit Delete and 1 ~ 9 Add
510:
2-Digit Delete and 0 Add
600~699:
2-Digit Delete and 00 ~99 Add
G
4
Press
to write the data and display Memory Block 5-01.
5
After Memory Blocks 5-01~5-03 are programmed, the next Trunk Group No. is displayed on Memory Block 5-00.
6
Program all Trunk Group Nos. Trunk Group No. 01 is displayed again.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 603

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programmi E
ng Procedures
7
Press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-46
Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment
3-03
Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment

Notes

1.
This Memory Block applies only when two or more systems are connected by Tie lines or when the systems are
connected by a DID line.
2.
When the call is intended for another system, the Tie line is directed to send the number again.
3.
At default, DID lines are not assigned to a Trunk group.
4.
This Memory Block affects T1 channels assigned as Tie/DID lines.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 604
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
5-01
Tie Line Networking Tandem
Trunk Group Mode
Connection Assignment
5
Submode
--
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not Trunk groups connected to the
Data No.
system allow incoming Trunk groups to be connected to outgoing Trunk groups for
01
tandem connections.
PC Programming
Display
¦+ALN
(Incoming)
Trunk Group
No.
Data
Trunk
(01~32)
No.

T
itle
Group
0 1 / 0 1 : T A N D E M
| 0 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
Page 2
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
The shaded
Page 3
selection is the
default.
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Page 4
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 605

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
G
2
Press LK5 +
+ KA .
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option. Operation data includes:
CO/PBX
Off
On
The shaded
Line LED
selection is
the default.
Data
No
Yes

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
C

to go to the next page
A

to go to the previous page
D

to go to the next Trunk Group No.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
3-03
Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment
4-09
Telephone to Tenant Assignment

Notes

Tandem connection of Trunk Group-to-Trunk Group must be specified separately.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 606
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
5-02
8-Digit Matching Table to Trunk
Trunk Group Mode
Group Assignment
5
Submode
--
General Description
Use this Memory Block to assign each Trunk group to the 8-Digit Matching Tables.
Data No.
02
Display
Trunk
PC Programming
Group No. Data
Page
(01~32)
No.

Ti
tle
No.
¦+AC
0 1 / 0 2 : 8 D G T R K G | 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Table 00
Table 01
Table 02
Table 03
Table 04
Table 05
Table 06
Table 07
All are enabled
Page 2
at default.
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Table 08
Table 09
Table 10
Table 11
Table 12
Table 13
Table 14
Table 15
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
G
2
Press LK5 +
+ KB to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
Operation data includes:
The shaded
CO/PBX
Off
On
selection is the
Line LED
default.
Data
Disabled
Enabled

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
C

to go to the next page
A

to go to the previous page
D

to go to the next Trunk Group No.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Memory Block.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming.
Refer to Chapter 3 Advanced Applications.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 607

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
5-03
OCC Table to Trunk Group
Trunk Group Mode
Assignment
5
Submode
--
General Description
Use this Memory Block to assign each of the 16 OCC Tables to each Trunk group.
Data No.
03
Display
Trunk Group
PC Programming
No.
Data
Page
(01~32)
No.

Ti
tle
No.
¦+AC
0 1 / 0 3 : O C C - T R K G | 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Table 00
Table 01
Table 02
Table 03
Table 04
Table 05
Table 06
Table 07
Page 2
All are enabled.
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Table 08
Table 09
Table 10
Table 11
Table 12
Table 13
Table 14
Table 15

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
G
2
Press LK5 +
+ KC to access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to enter the data. Operation data includes:
Default Values
Use all tables
CO/PBX
Off
On
Line LED
The shaded selection is
the default.
Data
Disabled
Enabled

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
C

to go to the next page
A

to go to the previous page
D

to go to the next Trunk Group No.
G
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Trunk Group No. for Memory Block 5-00.
Related Programming
Refer to Chapter 3 Advanced Applications.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 608
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
5-04
LCR Class to Trunk Group Selection
Trunk Group Mode
5
General Description
Submode
Use this Memory Block per trunk group to specify the Least Cost Routing (LCR)/
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Class. For systems connected using K-CCIS, the
Electra Elite can analyze incoming telephone numbers received from a distant system
Data No.
and use the LCR/ARS assignments to route the call to its desired destination.
04
Display
PC Programming
Trunk
Group
Data
Setting
(01~32)
Title
No.
Data
¦+AW
0 1 / 0 4 : C L A S S
0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
0
1
2
3
4
default.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
G
2
Press LK5 +
+KDto access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the Setting Data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
3-70
CIC Number Assignment
1-1-05
Start Time Selection
1-1-46~48
Access Code (1-, 2- or 3-Digit) Assignment
1-15-00
K-CCIS Main/Remote Office Selection
1-15-01
Common Signal Channel Data Speed Assignment
1-15-02
Common Signal Channel Assignment
1-15-03
Originating Point Code Assignment
1-15-04
Destination Point Code Assignment
1-15-05
Destination Point Code Transfer Assignment
1-15-06
Originating Office Code Number Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 609

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming (Continued)
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-15-07
K-CCIS Message Response Timeout Assignment
1-15-08
Link Reconnect Allow/Deny Selection
1-15-09
K-CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop Assignment
1-15-10
Calling Name Display Allow/Deny Selection
5-05
Common Signaling Channel Route Selection

Notes

Refer to the Electra Elite IPK Key-Common Channel Interoffice Signaling (K-CCIS) Manual for details.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 610
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
5-05
Common Signaling Channel Route
Trunk Group Mode
Assignment
5
Submode
General Description
Use this Memory Block to specify the Common Signaling Channel for each voice trunk
Data No.
group used for K-CCIS.
05

PC Programming
Trunk
Group
Data
Setting
(01~32)
Title
No.
Data
¦+AW
0 1 / 0 5 : C C H
C H
0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
G
2
Press LK5+
+ KE to access the Memory Block.
Default Values:

Use the following to enter data:
0 (Not Assigned)
J
CCH: 1~4
to move cursor left
Lto move cursor right
K~ Ito enter numeric data
G
3
Press
to write the data.
E
4
Press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
3-70
CIC Number Assignment
1-1-05
Start Time Selection
1-1-46~48
Access Code (1-, 2- or 3-Digit) Assignment
1-15-00
K-CCIS Main/Remote Office Selection
1-15-01
Common Signal Channel Data Speed Assignment
1-15-02
Common Signal Channel Assignment
1-15-03
Originating Point Code Assignment
1-15-04
Destination Point Code Assignment
1-15-05
Destination Point Code Transfer Assignment
1-15-06
Originating Office Code Number Assignment
1-15-07
K-CCIS Message Response Time Assignment
1-15-08
Link Reconnect Allow/Deny Selection
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 611

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-15-09
K-CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop Assignment
1-15-10
Calling Name Display Allow/Deny Selection
5-4
LCR Class to Trunk Group Selection

Notes

This Memory Block is used to assign the voice channels to the Common Channel. When the voice channels
trunk group is set at 0, K-CCIS does not operate correctly.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 612
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
5-06
Trunk Group Outgoing Priority
Trunk Group Mode
Selection
5
Submode
General Description
Use this Memory Block to assign the Outgoing Priority for trunk access to each Trunk
Data No.
Group. This is normally used with a Tie Line or K-CCIS network to reverse the search
06
order and reduce call collisions during trunk seizure.
PC Programming
Display
Trunk
¦+ALN
Group
Data
Setting
(01~32)
Title
No.
Data
0 1 / 0 6 : P R I O R .
H > L
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
H L
L H
default.
High to Low Low to High
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
G
2
Press LK5 +
+KFto access the Memory Block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the Setting Data option.
G
4
Press
to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.
E
5
Program the next Memory Block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-46~48
Access Code (1-, 2- or 3-Digit) Assignment
Function 201~232 Route Advance Block 01~32
Function 401~416 Closed Number Block 01~32
Function 601~604 ARS Table 1~4
1-1-30
Route Advance Block Assignment
1-1-49
Networking Trunk Group/Route Advance Assignment
1-14-04
ARS Trunk Group to Route Number Assignment

Notes

This Memory Block should not be assigned (use default) for trunk groups with trunks belonging to an IAD(8)-U( )
ETU used with IP (K-CCIS) or IP (K-CCIS) to NEAX (Point-to-Multipoint).
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 613

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 614
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
6-2
Tenant Mode Copy Assignment
Copy Mode
6
General Description
Tenant
Use this Memory Block to enable copying data from one tenant to another tenant or
2
multiple consecutive tenants.
Data No.
Display
--
Setting
Title

Data
T N A T
>
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK6 + LK2 to access the Memory Block.
3
Enter the tenant to be copied.

Use the following to enter data:
K~Ito enter numeric data
H

to clear all data when placed at cursor position
Example: To copy data of Tenant 00 to Tenant 05~07:
1.
Enter the original Tenant No. Using the dial pad, press KK.

T N A T
0 0
>
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
G
2.
Press
.

>
T N A T

T I M E
D I S P L A Y
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 615

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.
Enter the beginning of the tenant (00~47) range to be copied to. Using the dial pad, press KE.

>
T N A T
0 5
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
4.
Enter the end of the tenant (00~47) range to be copied to. Using the dial pad, press KG.

>
T N A T
0 5
0 7
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
G
5.
Press
.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 616
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
6-3
CO Line Mode Copy Assignment
Copy M
Co
ode
py Mode
66
Use this Memory Block to enable copying data from one CO/PBX line to another CO/
CO/P
Te BX
nant
PBX line or multiple consecutive CO/PBX lines.
33
Display
Data No.
Data No.
Original
CO/PBX No.
Setting
--
--
Title
(01~64)

Data
C O
>
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK6 + LK3 to access the Memory Block.
3
Enter the CO/PBX line to be copied.

Use the following to enter data:
K~Ito enter numeric data
H

to clear all data when placed at cursor position
Example: To copy data of CO/PBX line 01 to CO/PBX line 05~07:
1.
Enter the original CO/PBX No. Using the dial pad, press KA.

C O
0 1
>
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
G
2.
Press
.

>
C O

T I M E
D I S P L A Y
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 617

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.
Enter the beginning of the CO/PBX (02~64) range to be copied to. Using the dial pad, press KE.

>
C O
0 5
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
4.
Enter the end of the CO/PBX (02~64) range to be copied to. Using the dial pad, press KG.

>
C O
0 5 0 7
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
G
5.
Press
.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 618
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
6-4
Telephone Mode Copy Assignment
Copy Mode
6
General Description
Tenant
Use this Memory Block to enable copying data from one telephone port to another
4
telephone port or multiple consecutive telephone ports.
Data No.
Display
--
Original
Tel Port No.
Setting
Title
(01~CO)
Data
T E L

>
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK6 + LK4 to access the Memory Block.
3
Enter the Tel. Port No. to be copied.

Use the following to enter data:
K~Ito enter numeric data
H

to clear all data when placed at cursor position
Example: To copy data of telephone port 01 to telephone ports 20~30:
1.
Enter the original Tel. No. Using the dial pad, pressKA.

T E L
0 1
>
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
G
2.
Press
.

>
T E L

T I M E
D I S P L A Y
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 619

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.
Enter the beginning of the Tel. Port No. (01~C0) range to be copied to. Using the dial pad, press BK.

>
T E L
2 0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
4.
Enter the end of the Tel. Port No. (01~C0) range to be copied to. Using the dial pad, press CK.

>
T E L
2 0 3 0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
G
5.
Press
.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 620
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
6-5
Trunk Group Mode Copy Assignment
Copy Mode
6
General Description
Tenant
Use this Memory Block to enable copying data from one Trunk group to another Trunk
5
group or multiple consecutive Trunk groups.
Data No.
Display
--
Original
Trunk Group No.
Setting
Title
(0
1~
32)
Data
T R K
G P

>
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK6 + LK5 to access the Memory Block.
3
Enter the Trunk group to be copied.

Use the following to enter data:
K~Ito enter numeric data
H

to clear all data when placed at cursor position
Example: To copy data of Trunk Group 01 to Trunk Groups 10~14:
1.
Enter the original Trunk Group. Using the dial pad, press KA.

T R K
G P
0 1
>
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
G
2.
Press
.
3.
Enter the Trunk Group. Using the dial pad, press AK~ AD.

> T R K
G P

T I M E
D I S P L A Y
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 621

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.
Enter the Start Trunk Group No. (01~32). Using the dial pad, press AK.

> T R K
G P
1 0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
5.
Enter the End Trunk Group (01~32). Using the dial pad, press AD.

> T R K
G P
1 0 1 4
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
G
6.
Press
.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 622
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
7-1
Card Interface Slot Assignment
ETU Mode
7
General Description
Slot
Use this Memory Block to specify the installed ETU.
1
Display
Data No.
Port Number for COI 4, TLI, DID, SLI 4, OPX, DPH, VRS, VMS 2/4 ETU
--
Upper
Page
Slot
No.
No.

PC Programming
1
0 9 : N O N
¦+BS
1
0 1 : C O I
4
= 0 1
Cabinet Lower
Unit Name
Port No.
No.
Slot
1st of 4
1~3
No.
Port Number for COI 8, TLI, DID, ESI 8, SLI 8, BRT
Upper
Page
Slot
Port No.
No.
No.

1st of 4
1
0 9 :
= 0 5
1
0 1 : E S I
8
= 0 1
Cabinet Lower
Unit Name
Port No.
No.
Slot
1st of 4
1~3
No.
Port Number for ESIB 16 ETU
Upper
Page
Slot
Port No.
No.
No.

1st of 8
5
:
= 0 9
1
0 1 : E S I B
1 6
= 0 1
Cabinet Lower
Unit Name
Port No.
No.
Slot
1st of 8
1~3
No.
Port Number for DTI or PRT
Page
Port Nos.
No.

1s
t of
4
6
0 1 0 5 0 9 1 3 1 7 2 4
1
0 1 : D T I
2 4
= 0 1
Cabinet Lower
Unit Name
Board No.
No.
Slot
1~3
No.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 623

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK7 + LK1 to access the Memory Block.
3
Use the Line key to enter Setting Data:
Line
Line
Setting Data Page 1
LCD Indication
Setting Data Page 2
LCD Indication
Key
Key
1
NON
1
ESI(8)-U( )
ESI 8
COI(4)-U( ) or
NON
2
COI 4
2
COIB(4)-U( ) (in COI Mode)
COI(8)-U( ) or
SLI(8)/CNF(8)-U()
3
COI 8
3
SLI 8
COIB(8)-U( ) (in COI Mode)
4
NON
4
OPX(2)-U( )
OPX
COID(4)-U( ) or
VDH2(8)-U( )
5
COID 4
5
VDH
COIB(4)-U( )(COID Mode)
(Refer to Note 7)
COID(8)-U( ) or
DPH(4)-U( )
6
COID 8
6
DPH
COIB(4)-U( )(COID Mode)
7
TLI(2)-U( )
TLI
7
PBR( )-U( )
PBR
8
DID(4)-U( )
DID
8
ECR-U( )
ECR
Line
Line
Setting Data Page 3
LCD Indication
Setting Data Page 4
LCD Indication
Key
Key
1
VRS(4)-U( )
VRS
1
MIFA-U( )
MIFA
2
NON
CCH(4)-U( )
2
CCH
VMS(2)/(4)/FMS(2)/(4)-U( )/
3
VMS 4
CMS(2)/(4)-U( )
NON
3
FMS/VMS/CTI/IVR/VP/
4
VMS 8
ACD+(8)-U( )
4
NON
5
BRT(4)-U( )
BRT
5
NON
6
NON
6
NON
7
NON
BSU(2)-U( )
7
BSU 2
MIFM-U10/20 or
8
SPE(M)-U( )(R3000 or
MIFM
SLI(4)-U( )
8
SLI 4
higher)
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 624
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
4
Use the Line key to enter Setting Data:
Line
Line
Setting Data Page 5
LCD Indication
Setting Data Page 6
LCD Indication
Key
Key
ESIB(8)-U( )
DTI-U( )
1
ESIB8
1
DTI4
(R3000 or higher)
ESIE(8)-U( )
DTI-U( )
2
ESIB16
2
DTI8
(R3000 or higher)
MG(8)-U( )
DTI-U( )
3
MG
3
DTI12
(R2500 or higher)
HUB(8)-U( )
DTI-U( )
4
HUB
4
DTI16
(R1500 or higher)
5
NON
5
DTI-U( )
DTI20
6
NON
6
DTI-U( )
DTI24
7
NON
7
NON
8
NON
8
NON
Line
Setting Data Page 7
LCD Indication
Key
PRT(1)-U( )
1
PRT4
PRT(1)-U( )
2
PRT8
PRT(1)-U( )
3
PRT12
PRT(1)-U( )
4
PRT16
5
PRT(1)-U( )
PRT20
6
PRT(1)-U( )
PRT24
7
NON
8
NON

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data
C

to go to the next page
A

to go to the previous page
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 625

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
G
5
Press
to write the data.
E
6
Press
to go back on-line.
KSU Power-Based ETU Quantity Limitations
The following charts indicate the maximum number of specific ETU combinations in each KSU that are restricted by
power limitations of the KSU.
For System without EliteMail VP/CTI
Maximum NO. of
NO. of ESI(8)
NO. of
Either
ACD+/CMS/FMS/VMS/
Other ETUs
ETUs ,
ESI Ports
EliteMail VP or CTI
IPC/MG/IVR/IPT/IAD/
SLI/OPX/or DID ETUs
10
80
0
2
No Limitation
9
72
0
2
No Limitation
8
64
0
3
No Limitation
7
56
0
4
No Limitation
6
48
0
5
No Limitation
5
40
0
5
No Limitation
4
32
0
6
No Limitation
3
24
0
6
No Limitation
2
16
0
7
No Limitation
1
8
0
7
No Limitation
, The number of 8-port ESI ETUs installed including ESI(8)-U( ), ESIB(8)-U( ), or ESIE(8)-U( ) ETU.

When the SPE(M)-U( ) ETU or the MIFM-U20 ETU (with Ethernet option installed) is installed in
the AP slot, the HUB(8)-U( ) ETU or Elite Mail CIT/VP must be installed in a different cabinet.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 626
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
For System with EliteMail VP/CTI
Maximum NO. of
NO. of ESI(8)
NO. of
Either
ACD+/CMS/FMS/VMS/
Other ETUs
ETUs ,
ESI Ports
EliteMail VP or CTI
IPC/MG/IVR/IPT/IAD/
SLI/OPX/or DID ETUs
9
72
1
0
No Limitation
8
64
1
0
No Limitation
7
56
1
1
No Limitation
6
48
1
2
No Limitation
5
40
1
2
No Limitation
4
32
1
3
No Limitation
3
24
1
4
No Limitation
2
16
1
4
No Limitation
1
8
1
5
No Limitation
, The number of 8-port ESI ETUs installed including ESI(8)-U( ), ESIB(8)-U( ), or ESIE(8)-U( ) ETU.

When the SPE(M)-U( ) ETU or the MIFM-U20 ETU (with Ethernet option installed) is installed in
the AP slot, the HUB(8)-U( ) ETU or Elite Mail CIT/VP must be installed in a different cabinet.
Table 2-2 Card Interface Slot Assignment
Slot Availability
ETU
Port Type
AP IF1, IF2 IF3~IF8
ACD(8)-U( )
Station

X
X
BRT(4)-U( )
CO/PBX

X
X
BSU(2)-U( )
BSU

X
X
CCH(4)-U( )
CCH

X
X
CMS(2)/(4)-U( )
Station

X
X
COI(4)-U( )/COIB(4)-U( )
CO/PBX Line

X
X
COI(8)-U( )/COIB(8)-U( )
CO/PBX Line

X
X
COID(4)-U( )/COIB(4)-U( )
CO/PBX Line

X
X
COID(8)-U( )/COIB(8)-U( )
CO/PBX Line

X
X
CTI(4)/(8)/(12)/(16)-U( )
Station

X (3, 4)
X (3, 4)
DID(4)-U( )
CO/PBX Line

X
X
DPH(4)-U( )
Doorphone

X
X
DTI-U( )
CO/PBX Line

X
X
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 627

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 2-2 Card Interface Slot Assignment (Continued)
Slot Availability
ETU
Port Type
AP IF1, IF2 IF3~IF8
ECR-U( )
ECR

X
X
ESI(8)-U( )
Station

X
X
ESIB(8)-U( )
Station

X
X
ESIB(8)-U( ) with
Station)

X
X
ESIE(8)-U( )
EXPT(2)-U( )
CO/PBX Line

X (2)

FMS(2)/(4)/(8)-U( )
Station

X
X
HUB(8)-U( )
HUB

X (3)
X (3)
MG(8)-U( )
CO/PBX Line

X
X
MIFA-U( )
MIFA
X (1)
X (1)

MIFM-U10, MIFM-U20,
MIFM
X (1)
X (1)

SPE(M)-( )
OPX(2)-U( )
Station

X
X
PBR( )-U( )
PBR

X
X
PRT(1)-U( )
CO/PBX Line

X
X
SLI(4)-U( )
Station

X
X
SLI(8)-U( )/CNF(8)-U( )
Station

X
X
TLI(2)-U( )
CO/PBX Line

X
X
VDH2(8)-U( )
Station

X
X
VMS(2)/(4)/(8)-U( )
Station

X
X
VP(4)/(8)/(12)/(16)-U( )
Station

X (3)
X (3)
VRS(4)-U( )
VRS

X
X
X
Compatible

Not Compatible
1
Cabinet 1 only
2
Cabinet 1, Slot 1 only of second, third, or fourth system
3
The VP/CTI (12)/(16)-U( ) ETU requires two physical slots.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 628
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________

Notes

1.
ETU interface cards are assigned automatically during initial power up.
2.
ESI(8)-U( ) ETU with ports 01 and 02 cannot be changed.
3.
When ETU system capacity is exceeded, ERROR is displayed on the LCD, and the Transfer key cannot be used
to write data.
4.
When changing an interface slot assignment to a different ETU, use the following procedure:
a.
Remove the ETU installed in the slot.

Power off ACD(8), VoIP, VMS, IPCA, or FMS ETU before removing it.
b.
Program the slot for new ETU in this Memory Block.
c.
Install the new ETU.
5.
VMS(2)/FMS(2)-U( ) ETU must be assigned as a VMS(4)/FMS(4)-U( ) ETU.
6.
Eight BSU(2)-U( ) ETUs can be installed in the EXP Electra Elite IPK. Only three can be installed in the Basic
Electra Elite IPK.
7.
Page 2, LK 5 is used for indication only. The VDH2(8)-U( ) ETU cannot be assigned.
8.
Refer to Electra Elite IPK Features and Specifications Manual, Universal Slots, for maximum capacities.
9.
When the SLIB(4)-U10 ETU is initially installed, pressing RESET may be necessary for proper functionality.
10. When the MG(8)-U( ) ETU is installed in a Basic Port Package, trunk ports 17~24 are dedicated for this ETU.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-3-00
MIF(ACD) Assignment
7-3-01
MIF(LCR) Assignment
7-3-02
MIF(SMDR) Assignment
7-3-03
MIF(UCD) Assignment
7-3-04
MIF(Caller ID) Assignment
1-2-04
Call Arrival Key Block Assignment
1-2-21
PS Telephone Block Assignment
1-2-32
IP Telephone Block Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 629

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
7-2
Telephone Type Assignment
ETU Mode
7
General Description
Telephone
Use this Memory Block to specify the device that is connected to an ESI port.
2
Display
Data No.
ESI
Port No.
Setting
--
(01~CO)
Data
PC Programming
0 1 : T E L
¦+BS
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
The shaded
selection is the
DIGITAL
MSG
NON
TEL
CONSOL
SLT ADP
default.
VM
BOARD
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK7 + LK2 to access the Memory Block.
3
To change data, press the corresponding CO/PBX line key.

Use the following to enter data:
D

to go to next assigned ESl Port No. or cycle back to 1.
G
4
Press
to write the data.
E
5
Press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
Refer to individual features in the Electra Elite IPK Features and Specifications Manual.

Notes

1.
Only Multiline Terminals can be assigned to ports 01 and 02.
2.
A maximum of four Attendant Add-On Consoles can be installed in the system.
3.
A maximum of eight SLT(1)-U( ) ADP adapters can be installed in the system.
4.
A maximum of 16 Digital Voice Mail ports are available.
5.
When assigning SLT adapters or Digital Voice Mail ports, Memory Block 4-10 (Station Number Assignment) must
be reassigned also.
6.
The Dterm Cordless II, Dterm Cordless Lite, or Dterm Cordless Handset Terminal uses TEL selection.
7.
A maximum of eight basic Message Display Boards and 40 expansion boards are available.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 630
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
7-3-00
MIF (ACD) Assignment
ETU Mode
7
General Description
MIF
Use this Memory Block to enable the Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) function of the
3
MIFA-U( ) ETU.
Data No.
Display
00
Data
Setting
No.
Title

Data
PC Programming
0 0 : A C D
M I F = 0 0
¦+BS
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK7 + LK3 to access the Memory Block.
3
Use the dial pad to enter data.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
No Assignment (00)
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data

Setting Data: 00, 01, 02
G
4
Press
to write the data.
E
5
Press
to go back on-line.

Notes

The ACD feature requires a KMA(1.0)U to be installed on the MIFA-U( ) ETU.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 631

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
7-3-01
MIF (LCR) Assignment
ETU Mode
7
General Description
MIF
Use this Memory Block to enable the Least Cost Routing (LCR) function of the
3
MIFM-U10/20 ETU and the SPE(M)-U( ) ETU.
Data No.
Display
01
Data
Setting
No.
Title
Data
PC Programming
0 1 : L C R
M I F = 0 0
¦+BS
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK7 + LK3 +JA to access the Memory Block.
3
Use the dial pad to enter data.
Default Value

Use the following to enter data:
No Assignment (00)
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data

Setting Data: 00, 01, 02
G
4
Press
to write the data.
E
5
Press
to go back on-line.

Notes

1.
The LCR feature requires a KMM(1.0)U to be installed on the MIFM-U10 ETU.
2.
The LCR feature requires a KMM-U20 to be installed on the MIFM-U20 ETU.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 632
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
7-3-02
MIF (SMDR) Assignment
ETU Mode
7
General Description
MIF
Use this Memory Block to enable the Station Message Detail Reporting (SMDR)
3
function on the MIFM-U( ) ETU or the SPE(M)-U( ) ETU.
Data No.
Display
02
Data
Setting
No.
Title

Data
PC Programming
¦+BS
0 2 : S M D R
M I F = 0 0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK7 + LK3 + JB to access the Memory Block.
3
Use the dial pad to enter data.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
No Assignment (00)
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data

Setting Data: 00, 01, 02
G
4
Press
to write the data.
E
5
Press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 633

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
7-3-03
MIF (UCD) Assignment
ETU Mode
7
General Description
MIF
Use this Memory Block to enable the Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) function on the
3
MIFA-U( ) ETU.
Data No.
Display
03
Data
No.
Title

Se
t
ting Data
PC Programming
0 3 : U C D
M I F = 0 0
¦+BS
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK7 + LK3 + JC to access the Memory Block.
3
Use the dial pad to enter data.
Default Values

Use the following are used when entering data:
No Assignment (00)
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data

Setting Data: 00, 01, 02
G
4
Press
to write the data.
E
5
Press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 634
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
7-3-04
MIF (Caller ID) Assignment
ETU Mode
7
General Description
MIF
Use this Memory Block to enable the ANI/Caller ID scrolling or outdial function on the
3
MIFM-U10/20 ETU or the SPE(M)-U( ) ETU. Basic Caller ID works without an
MIFM-U( ) ETU installed.
Data No.
Display
04
PC Programming
Data
Setting
No.
Title
Data
¦+BS
0 4 : C L A S S
M I F = 0 0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK7 + LK3 + JD to access the Memory Block.
3
Use the dial pad to enter data.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
No Function (00)
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data

Setting Data: 00, 01, 02
G
4
Press
to write the data.
E
5
Press
to go back on-line.

Notes

1.
ANI/Caller ID scrolling and outdial must have the KMM(1.0)U installed on the MIFM-U10 ETU.
2.
ANI/Caller ID scrolling and outdial must have the KMM-U20 installed on the MIFM-U20 ETU.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 635

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
8-1
ROM Version Confirmation
Special Mode
8
General Description
ROM
Use this Memory Block to confirm the ETU firmware version without removing the card
1
from the KSU.
Data No.
Display
S P 0 1 6
1 - 0 1 : M I F M
= 1 . 0 0
Cab.
Lower
Unit Name
Version
No.
Slot:
1~3
01~0C

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK8 + LK1 to access the Memory Block.
3
Enter data using the Dial Pad.

Use the following to enter data:
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
A~H = Cabinet No. 1~3, Lower Slot No 1~8
I = Slot Number A
K = Slot Number B
C

= Slot Number C
G
4
Press
to advance to the next lower Slot No.
E
5
Press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 637

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
8-2
System Speed Dial Memory Clear
Special Mode
8
General Description
Spd-Clr-Sys
Use this Memory Block to clear all System Speed Dial programming.
2

Data No.
Before using this procedure, understand completely the affect of erasing all
--
System Speed Dial buffers in the system.
PC Programming
¦+BE
Display

Title
C L R
S Y S
S P D
?
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK8 + LK2 to access the Memory Block.
3
The system display indicates CLR SYS SPD?, and the first four CO/PBX lines light red.
R
R
R
R
W W W W
4
Press HAHIto enter the fixed password.

When each number of the password is being entered, the applicable top line CO/PBX LED changes from red to green.
G
R
R
R
H = W W W W
G
G
R
R
A = W W W W
G
G
G
R
H = W W W W
G
G
G
G
I = W W W W
G
5
Press
to write the data.
E
6
Press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 638
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
8-3
Station Speed Dial Memory Clear
Special Mode
8
General Description
Spd-Clr-Sys
3
Use this Memory Block to clear the the Station Speed Dial memories of all
Data No.
programmed Speed Dial numbers.
--

PC Programming
Before using this procedure, understand completely the affect of erasing all
System Speed Dial buffers in the system.
¦+BE
Display

Title

C L R
T E L
S P D
?
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK8 + LK3 to access the Memory Block.
3
The system display indicates CLR SYS SPD?, and the first four CO/PBX lines light red.
R
R
R
R
W W W W
4
Press HAHIto enter the fixed password.

When each number of the password is being entered, the applicable top line CO/PBX LED changes from red to green.
G
R
R
R
H = W W W W
G
G
R
R
A = W W W W
G
G
G
R
H = W W W W
G
G
G
G
I = W W W W
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 639

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programmi G
ng Procedures
5
Press
to write the data.
E
6
Press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 640
Memory Blocks

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
8-8
Second Initialization
Special Mode
8
General Description
CO Line
Use this Memory Block to initialize all the system hardware. All system software and
8
user programming are retained after the Second Initialization.
Data No.
Display
Title

PC Programming
1 1 : 0 8 A M
¦+CI
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK8 + LK8 to access the Memory Block.
3
When the system display prompt indicates CPU RESET?, the first four CO/PBX lines light red.
W W W
W
4
Press HHKKto enter the fixed password.

When each number of the password is being entered, the applicable top line CO/PBX LED changes from red to green.
H = W W W
W
H = W W W
W
K = W W W
W
K = W W W
W
G
5
Press
to begin the initialization process.
E
6
Press
to go back on-line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
2 - 641

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Clock/Calendar Setting
System Mode
--
General Description
Submode
This Memory Block is used to set the time and date displayed on the Multiline
--
Terminals. Clock/Calendar must be set on a port 01 or port 02 assigned terminal.
Data No.
Display
--

PC Programming
1 1 : 0 8 A M
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
A
1
Press
.
2
Dial I.
3
Dial L.
4
Dial current time (e.g. KC:BI).
C
5
Press
to toggle AM/PM.
H
6
Press
to advance to the calendar.
C
7
Press
to select the day of the week.
8
Dial L to move the cursor to the day of the month setting.
9
Enter the date using the dial pad (K~I).
C
10 Press
to select the month.
11 Dial L to move the cursor to the year setting.
12 Enter the last two digits of the year using the dial pad (K~I).
A
13 Press
.

Notes

1.
This operation must be performed at port 01, or port 02 only.
2.
The Clock/Calendar cannot be set using PC Programming.
A
3.
To set the time only, press
after Step 5.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 642
Memory Blocks

Advanced Applications
Chapter 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 1
CODE RESTRICTION
1.1
General
The Electra Elite IPK system provides an advanced method of restricting
outgoing calls based on the first eight digits dialed. Code Restriction denies
placement of outside calls based on Trunk groups and accommodates equal
access to an other common carrier (OCC). This eliminates unauthorized calls
and configures system calling functions 66.0 to provide cost control.
System Programming has 16 Code Restrictions Classes. Class 00 is fixed and
allows free dialing. Class 15 is fixed and denies all outside calls. Classes
01~14 are programmable in system software. Stations are assigned per
station to a Code Restriction Class. A separate Day Mode and Night Mode
station to Code Restriction Class assignment is available.
1.2
Default Assignments
All stations are assigned to Code Restriction Class 00 for both Day and Night
Mode to allow free dialing.
Code Restriction Classes are set up with the following restrictions to provide
the most common Code Restriction requirements and simplify Code
Restriction programming.
Class 01:
Deny:
0 and 1 + calls
Class 02:
Deny:
0 and 1 + calls
Allow:
1-800, 888, 877 calls
Class 03:
Deny:
0, 1 +, and 976 calls
Allow:
1-800, 888, 877 calls
Class 04:
Deny:
1 + calls
Allow:
1-800, 888, 877 calls
Class 05~14:
Allow:
911 calls only
All OCC calls are denied for Code Restriction Classes 01~14.
System Speed Dial buffers override Code Restriction Classes 01~14.
Code Restriction is not applied to Tie lines.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
3 - 1

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
When Station Lockout is set at a station, the station is outgoing restricted.
Digit Restriction is not assigned.

Refer to Section 1.5 Code Restriction Tables (Default Values).
1.3
Memory Blocks
The following related Memory Blocks are used when assigning Code
Restriction.
Memory
Title
Block
Trunk to Tenant Assignment...................................................2-01
Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment......................................... 3-03
Trunk Type Selection..............................................................3-91
PBX/CTX Access Code Assignment I................................. 1-1-24
PBX/CTX Access Code Assignment II................................ 1-1-25
OCC Table Assignment.......................................................1-1-67
OCC Table to Trunk Group Assignment................................. 5-03
8-Digit Matching Table to OCC Table Assignment.............. 1-1-68
8-Digit Matching Table to Normal Dial Assignment............. 1-1-66
8-Digit Matching Table to Trunk Group Assignment............... 5-02
8-Digit Matching Table Assignment..................................... 1-1-60
8-Digit Matching Table to Class Assignment....................... 1-1-61
Code Restriction Class Allow/Deny Assignment................. 1-1-65
System Speed Dial Restriction by Tenant........................... 1-1-18
System Speed Dial Override by Class Selection................ 1-1-62
Tie Line Code Restriction Assignment................................ 1-1-69
Code Restriction Class Assignment When Lockout is Set.. 1-1-70
CO Feature Codes Service for Code Restriction................ 1-1-82
Trunk Digit Restriction............................................................ 4-32
Code Restriction Class Assignment (Day Mode)................... 4-07
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 2
Advanced Applications

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Code Restriction Class Assignment (Night Mode)................. 4-08
Telephone to Tenant Assignment........................................... 4-09
Station To Class of Service Feature Assignment................... 4-17
1.4
Memory Block Description
1.4.1
General
This section describes the function of the Memory Blocks directly
related to Code Restriction. Some Memory Blocks from the previous
list are not described here but are included because of their effect on
Code Restriction (e.g., Trunk to Tenant Assignment). Code
Restriction is based on Trunk group and consideration should be
given to this Memory Block because stations are assigned to a
tenant, and trunks are assigned to a Trunk group.
1.4.2
OCC Assignment/Operation
OCC Table Assignment (Memory Block 1-1-67)
This Memory Block allows an OCC Access Code (maximum of eight
digits) to be assigned. System Programming has 16 OCC Tables
(01~16). Each table can have one OCC Access Code assigned.
OCC Table to Trunk Group Assignment (Memory Block 5-03)
This Memory Block assigns Trunk groups to the OCC Tables. Any
combination of Trunk groups can be assigned to the OCC Tables.
8-Digit Matching Table to OCC Table Assignment (Memory Block
1-1-68)
This Memory Block assigns the 8-Digit Matching Table to the OCC
Tables. Any combination of 8-Digit Matching Tables can be assigned
to the OCC Tables.
OCC Operation
When a restricted station user dials an OCC Access Code, the
system searches the OCC Tables for a match. When no match is
found, the user is allowed free dialing. When a match is found, the
system monitors the eight digits dialed and searches the 8-Digit
Matching Tables assigned to the OCC Table. The system searches
only the 8-Digit Matching Tables assigned to the Code Restriction
Class the station is assigned to and has the Trunk group assigned to
it for the in-use trunk the station is on. When the interdigit time of the
dialing party exceeds 10 seconds while the station user is dialing on
an outside line, and the system is searching the assigned tables, the
system automatically drops the call.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
3 - 3

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
1.4.3
8-Digit Matching Table Assignment/Operation
8-Digit Matching Table to Normal Dial Assignment (Memory Block
1-1-66)
This Memory Block assigns the 8-Digit Matching Table to be Used or
Unused for non-OCC calls. When an 8-Digit Matching Table is
assigned as Unused, the table is used only for OCC calls. There are
16, 8-Digit Matching Tables (00~15) in System Programming. Each
table is independently assigned to be Used or Unused.
8-Digit Matching Table to Trunk Group Assignment (Memory Block
5-02)
This Memory Block assigns Trunk groups to the 8-Digit Matching
Tables. Any combination of Trunk groups can be assigned to the
8-Digit Matching Tables.
8-Digit Matching Table Assignment (Memory Block 1-1-60)
This Memory Block assigns the 8-Digit Matching Tables. Each
8-Digit Matching Table can have 16, 8-digit entries. To cover the
many possible combinations (without listing each individual number),
code restriction letters can be used in place of digits. The code
restriction letters used and their numerical values are as follows:
X
=
0~9, ,, and #
P
=
0 and 1
N =
2~9
When 1X is entered in a table, and the table is assigned as a deny
table in the 8-Digit Matching Table to Class Assignment, any 1 + any
digit call is denied When the table is used. Using X, P, and N
accommodates several combinations with just one entry.

The Trunk Access Code should not be placed in the 8-Digit Matching
Table. Code Restriction starts after a trunk is seized.
8-Digit Matching Table to Class Assignment (Memory Block 1-1-61)
This Memory Block assigns the 8-Digit Matching Tables to the Code
Restriction Classes. The 8-Digit Matching Tables are also assigned
as Allow/Deny Tables in this Memory Block.
Any combination of 8-Digit Matching Tables (Allow, Deny, or Not
Used) can be assigned to Code Restriction Classes 01~14. Classes
00 and 15 are fixed and are nonprogrammable.
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 4
Advanced Applications

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Code Restriction Class Allow/Deny Selection (Memory Block 1-1-65)
This Memory Block assigns the Code Restriction Classes (01~14) as
Allow or Deny. This assignment is used when there is no match or
when there is an overlap (duplicate numbers in tables with opposite
Allow/Deny assignments) of numbers in the 8-Digit Matching Tables.
8-Digit Matching Table Operations
The 8-Digit Matching Tables are used to restrict specific or all OCC
calls and non-OCC calls. To understand the relationship of the
8-Digit Matching Tables with OCC calls, refer to Section 6.4.2 - OCC
Assignment/Operation.
When a restricted station user makes a non-OCC call, the system
monitors the first eight digits dialed and searches the 8-Digit
Matching Tales assigned for Used in Memory Block 1-1-66 (8-Digit
Matching Table to Normal Dial Assignment). The system searches
only the 8-Digit Matching Tables assigned to the Code Restriction
Class the station is assigned to and has the Trunk group assigned to
it for the in-use trunk the station is on.
When a match is found, the system looks at the 8-Digit Matching
Table to Class Assignment for the Allow or Deny Assignment. When
the table is assigned as Allow, the call is allowed. When the table is
assigned as Deny, the call is denied.
When a match is not found or a duplicate match is made with
opposite Allow/Deny Assignments, the system looks at the class
Allow/Deny Assignment. When the class is assigned as Allow, the
call is allowed. When the Class is assigned as Deny, the call is
denied. When the interdigit time of the dialing party exceeds 10
seconds while the station user is dialing on an outside line, and the
system is searching the assigned tables, the system automatically
drops the call.
1.4.4
System Speed Dial Override by Class Selection (Memory Block
1-1-62)
This Memory Block allows System Speed Dial buffers to override or
not override Code Restriction. Each Code Restriction Class (01~14)
is assigned as Allow or Deny.
1.4.5
Tie Line Code Restriction Assignment (Memory Block 1-1-69)
This Memory Block assigns system-wide Code Restriction to be
used or not used for calls made on a Tie line.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
3 - 5

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
1.4.6
Code Restriction Class Assignment when Lockout is Set (Memory
Block 1-1-70)
This Memory Block assigns the Code Restriction Class to be used
when Station Lockout (Outgoing) is set at a station. Station Lockout
can be set by the Attendant or from any station when allowed in
System Programming.
1.4.7
CO Feature Code Service For Code Restriction (Memory Block
1-1-82)
This Memory Block assigns feature codes per system. A station user
can dial these codes as the leading digits of a telephone number.
The Electra Elite ignores these digits and applies code restriction to
the remaining digits. The codes are sent to the CO as the leading
digits on permitted code restriction calls.
1.4.8
Trunk Digit Restriction Assignment (Memory Block 4-32)
This Memory Block specifies, per station, the maximum number of
digits that can be dialed from any outside line.
1.4.9
Code Restriction Class Assignment (Day Mode) (Memory Block
4-07)
This Memory Block specifies, per station, the Code Restriction Class
used when the system or a station that is assigned to a tenant is in
the Day Mode.
1.4.10
Code Restriction Class Assignment (Night Mode) (Memory Block
4-08)
This Memory Block specifies, per station, the Code Restriction Class
used when the system or a station that is assigned to a tenant is in
the Night Mode.
1.5
Code Restriction Tables (Default Values)
1.5.1
OCC Tables with Default Values
The following Memory Blocks are displayed:
OCC Table Assignment (1-1-67)
OCC Table to Trunk Group Assignment (5-03)
8-Digit Matching Table to OCC Table Assignment (1-1-68)
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 6
Advanced Applications

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________

Table 01
Table 02
Table 03
Table 04
Memory Block (1-1-67)
Memory Block (5-03)
Trunk Group 01~32
Trunk Group
Trunk Group
Trunk Group
01~32
01~32
01~32
Memory Block (1-1-68)
Table 05
Table 06
Table 07
Table 08
Memory Block (1-1-67)
Memory Block (5-03)
Trunk Group 01~32
Trunk Group
Trunk Group
Trunk Group
Memory Block (1-1-68)
01~32
01~32
01~32
Table 09
Memory Block (1-1-67)
Table 10
Table 11
Table 12
Memory Block (5-03)
Trunk Group 01~32
Memory Block (1-1-68)
Trunk Group
Trunk Group
Trunk Group
01~32
01~32
01~32
Table 13
Memory Block (1-1-67)
Table 14
Table 15
Table 16
Memory Block (5-03)
Trunk Group 01~32
1 0 1 0 X X X
Memory Block (1-1-68)
Trunk Group
Trunk Group
Trunk Group 0~32
01~32
01~32
Continued on next page.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
3 - 7

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
1.5.2
8-Digit Matching Tables with Default Values
The following Memory Blocks are displayed:
8-Digit Matching Table to Normal Dial Assignment (1-1-66)
8-Digit Matching Table to Trunk Group Assignment (5-02)
8-Digit Matching Table Assignment (1-1-60)
The following designations are used in these tables:

Table 00
Table 01
Table 02
Table 03
Use Table
Use Table
Use Table
Use Table
Memory Block (1-1-66)
Trunk Group 01~32
Trunk Group 01~32
Trunk Group 01~32
Trunk Group 01~32
Memory Block (5-02)
Memory Block (1-1-60)
00 9 1 1
00
00
00
01
01
01
01
02
02
02
02
03
03
03
03
04
04
04
04
05
05
05
05
06
06
06
06
07
07
07
07
08
08
08
08
09
09
09
09
10
10
10
10
11
11
11
11
12
12
12
12
13
13
13
13
14
14
14
14
15
15
15
15
Note:
X = 0~9, ,, #
P = 0,1
Continued on next page.
N = 2~9
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 8
Advanced Applications

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
8-Digit Matching Table to Normal Dial Assignment (1-1-66)
8-Digit Matching Table to Trunk Group Assignment (5-02)
8-Digit Matching Table Assignment (1-1-60)

Table 04
Table 05
Table 06
Table 07
Use Table
Use Table
Use Table
Use Table
Memory Block (1-1-66)
Trunk Group 01~32
Trunk Group 01~32
Trunk Group 01~32
Trunk Group 01~32
Memory Block (5-02)
Memory Block (1-1-60) 00
00
00
00
01
01
01
01
02
02
02
02
03
03
03
03
04
04
04
04
05
05
05
05
06
06
06
06
07
07
07
07
08
08
08
08
09
09
09
09
10
10
10
10
11
11
11
11
12
12
12
12
13
13
13
13
14
14
14
14
15
15
15
15
Note:
X = 0~9, ,, #
P = 0,1
Continued on next page.
N = 2~9
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
3 - 9

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
8-Digit Matching Table to Normal Dial Assignment (1-1-66)
8-Digit Matching Table to Trunk Group Assignment (5-02)
8-Digit Matching Table Assignment (1-1-60)

Table 08
Table 09
Table 10
Table 11
Use Table
Use Table
Use Table
Use Table
Memory Block (1-1-66)
Trunk Group 01~32
Trunk Group 01~32
Trunk Group 01~32
Trunk Group 01~32
Memory Block (5-02)
Memory Block (1-1-60)
00
00
00
00 0
01
01
01
01
02
02
02
02
03
03
03
03
04
04
04
04
05
05
05
05
06
06
06
06
07
07
07
07
08
08
08
08
09
09
09
09
10
10
10
10
11
11
11
11
12
12
12
12
13
13
13
13
14
14
14
14
15
15
15
15
Note:
X = 0~9, ,, #
P = 0,1
N = 2~9
Continued on next page.
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 10
Advanced Applications

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
8-Digit Matching Table to Normal Dial Assignment (1-1-66)
8-Digit Matching Table to Trunk Group Assignment (5-02)
8-Digit Matching Table Assignment (1-1-60)

Table 12
Table 13
Table 14
Table 15
Use Table
Use Table
Use Table
Unused Table
Memory Block (1-1-66)
Trunk Group 01~32
Trunk Group 01~32
Trunk Group 01~32
Trunk Group 01~32
Memory Block (5-02)
Memory Block (1-1-60) 00 9 7 6
00 1 8 0 0
00 1 X
00 X
01
01 1 8 8 8
01
01
02
02 1 8 7 7
02
02
03
03
03
03
04
04
04
04
05
05
05
05
06
06
06
06
07
07
07
07
08
08
08
08
09
09
09
09
10
10
10
10
11
11
11
11
12
12
12
12
13
13
13
13
14
14
14
14
15
15
15
15
Note:
X = 0~9, ,, #
P = 0,1
N = 2~9
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
3 - 11

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
8-Digit Matching Tables with Default Values
The following designations are used in this table:
8-Digit Matching Table to Class Assignment (1-1-61)
Class Allow/Deny Selection (1-1-65)

8-Digit Matching Table
Class
Allow/Deny
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
Assignment
Class 01
A
D
D
D
Allow
Class 02
A
D
A
D
D
Allow
Class 03
A
D
D
A
D
D
Allow
Class 04
A
A
D
D
Allow
Class 05
A
Deny
8-Digit
Class 06
A
Deny
Matching
Table to
Class 07
A
Deny
Class
Assignment
Class 08
A
Deny
Class 09
A
Deny
Class 10
A
Deny
Class 11
A
Deny
Class 12
A
Deny
Class 13
A
Deny
Class 14
A
Deny
Note: A
=
Allow
D = Deny
Blank = Not used
1.6
Code Restriction Algorithm
The following chart identifies how the system checks for and processes Code
Restriction assignments.
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 12
Advanced Applications

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
User Accesses a
CO/PBX Line
Code
Restriction Class
Allow User
Class 00
Class 15
Disconnect
(Day, Night)
Free Dialing
Issue Error
M. B. 4-07
and 4-08
Class 01 ~ 14
Is line
No
Is M.B. 1-1-82
Assigned as
Yes
PBX?
assigned?
M. B. 3-91
Yes
Yes
User
No
Dials PBX
Access Code
No
Allow User
M. B. 1-1-25
Free Dialing
Search CO Feature
or M. B. 1-1-26
Allow User
Code Service for Code
to Dial 1
Restriction for dialed
Digit
Allow User
number.
to Dial 1
1
Digit
Code Restriction starts
1st Digit
with next dialed number.
0, 2~9
2nd Digit
1~9
CO Feature Code
0
Service for Code
Restriction
Match
Allow User
M.B. 1-1-82
to Dial up to
* 67 Dialed
6 More
Digits
Search Only 8-Digit Matching Table
No Match
From Table 00~15 After Each Digit For
the First 8 Digits
Code Restriction starts
Search OCC
Tables From
from first dialed number.
Tables 01~16
Search Only 8-Digit Matching Tables
Assigned To Class Assignment
M. B. 1-1-61
No Match
Search Only 8-Digit Matching Tables
OCC Table Found
Assigned To Normal Dial
Allow User
Assignment
M. B. 1-1-66
Free Dialing
M. B. 1-1-67
Search Only 8-Digit Matching Tables
Match Found
Assigned for Trunk Group Being Used
M. B. 5-02
2
1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
3 - 13

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
1
2
Search 8-Digit Matching
Table From Table 00~15
After Each Digit Entered
For First 8 Digits
Search Only 8-digit
Matching Tables
Assigned To Class
Assignment M. B. 1-1-61
Search Only 8-Digit
Matching Tables
Assigned to OCC Table
M. B. 1-1-68
Search Only 8-digit
Matching Tables
Assigned For Trunk
Group Being Used
M. B. 5-02
Match Found Allow
8-Digit
Match Found Deny
Table (Note 1)
Table (Note 1)
Matching Table 00
M. B. 1-1-60
Match Found Allow
Match Found Deny
8-Digit
Table (Note 1)
Table (Note 1)
Disconnect
Allow User
Matching Table 15
Issue Error
Free Dialing
M. B. 1-1-60
No Perfect Match Found or Duplicate
Match in Opposite Tables
CRC
Allow User
Allow
Allow/Deny
Deny
Disconnect
Free Dialing
Selection
Issue Error
M. B. 1-1-65
Note 1:
Tables are assigned as Allow or Deny in the 8-Digit Matching Table to Class Assignment
(Memory Block 1-1-61).
Note 2:
When the interdigit time duration of the dialing party exceeds 10 seconds while the Code
Restriction Tables are being searched, the system automatically drops the call.
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 14
Advanced Applications

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 2
AUTOMATIC ROUTE SELECTION
2.1
General
Route Selection is automatically directed by user-specified conditions.
Four Least Cost Routing (LCR) tables are provided for user-specified data that
can be used to select a single route.
User can delete digits from or add digits to a user specified dialing number to
use ARS to originate the call with LCR.
2.2
Memory Blocks
The following related Memory Blocks are used when assigning ARS.
Memory
Title
Block
Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment..................................... 1-1-46
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2....................1-8-08
ARS Allow/Deny Selection................................................ 1-14-00
ARS Dialing Assignment................................................... 1-14-01
ARS Dial Allow/Deny Selection......................................... 1-14-02
ARS Route Table Number Assignment............................. 1-14-03
ARS Trunk Group to Route Number Assignment..............1-14-04
ARS Digit Delete Assignment........................................... 1-14-05
ARS Digit Add Assignment............................................... 1-14-06
ARS Max Digit Assignment ............................................... 1-14-07
Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment......................................... 3-03
Trunk Type Selection..............................................................3-91
LCR Class Selection.............................................................. 4-40
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
3 - 15

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
2.3
Memory Block Description
2.3.1
Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment (Memory Block 1-1-46)
Use this Memory Block to assign Trunk Group Access code for LCR.
Default: Dial 9 Function number 101
2.3.2
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2 (Memory Block
1-8-08)
Use this Memory Block to allow/deny LCR Bypass (Page 3, LK4) for
Trunk Groups 02~32).
Default: Deny
Use this Memory Block to allow/deny ARS Overflow (Page 6, LK1) to
trunk group 01 when programmed route is busy.
Default: Deny
2.3.3
ARS Allow/Deny Selection (Memory Block 1-14-00)
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not to Allow ARS to
function system wide.
Default: NO
2.3.4
ARS Dialing Assignment (Memory Block 1-14-01)
Use this Memory Block to assign a dialing plan to one of four LCR
tables. A maximum of 128 (up to 8 digits) dialing combinations are
possible for each table.
Default: Not Assigned
2.3.5
ARS Dial Allow/Deny Selection (Memory Block 1-14-02)
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not to Allow digits that
are entered in the ARS dialing assignment to be routed using the
ARS feature.
Default: YES
2.3.6
ARS Route Table Number Assignment (Memory Block 1-14-03)
Use this Memory Block to assign each ARS Dialing Assignment to
an ARS Route Assignment (01~32).
Default: 00 (Not used)
2.3.7
ARS Trunk Group to Route Number Assignment (Memory Block
1-14-04)
Use this Memory Block to specify whether a Trunk Group (TKGP) or
Route Advance Group (RAB) is used by each ARS route number.
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 16
Advanced Applications

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Trunk Group 1 origination (NORMAL) is used in the USA. When the
call is not originated by pressing the line key or by dialing an access
code of Trunk Group 1, and the LCR Class assignment is 0, the call
is originated as is.
Default: NORMAL
2.3.8
ARS Digit Delete Assignment (Memory Block 1-14-05)
Use this Memory Block to specify number of digits (00~10) from the
first digit that are deleted from the route assignment.
Default: 00 (None)
2.3.9
ARS Digit Add Assignment (Memory Block 1-14-06)
Use this Memory Block to specify a maximum of 10 digits to add to
the route assignment.
Default: Not Assigned
2.3.10
ARS Max Digit Assignment (Memory Block 1-14-07)
Use this Memory Block to specify the number of digits to be collected
by the system before the message is sent to the network.
Default: Not Specified
2.3.11
Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment (Memory Block 3-03)
Use this Memory Block to assign a Trunk Group number to each CO/
PBX line.
Default: CO/PBX lines 01~08 in Trunk group 1
2.3.12
Trunk Type Selection (Memory Block 3-91)
Use this Memory Block to specify an external line as CO, PBX,TIE,
DID or CTX.
Default: CO
2.3.13
LCR Class Selection (Memory Block 4-40)
Use this Memory Block to specify the LCR/ARS class for each
station. The class number is the number of the Area Code Table
used. Stations cannot have multiple classes. Four area code tables
are provided. The MIFM-U( ) ETU with attached KMM(1.0)U must be
installed to support this feature.
Default: Class 0 (No LCR)
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
3 - 17

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
2.4
ARS Operation Example
TEL100 dials 1-9727517645, seizes trunk 8, and sends 1010288
9727517645.
1.
Program the following values, if necessary:
H 1-1-46
9 (Trunk Group 1)
H 1-8-08
Page 3, LK4 (Deny)
H 1-14-00
YS
H 1-14-01
1:1972751
H 1-14-02
YS
H 1-14-03
Table 1, Route 01
H 1-14-04
TKGP 04
H 1-14-05
01 Digit
H 1-14-06
1010288
H 3-03
CO lines 01, 02 to TKGP 1
CO lines 03, 04 to TKGP 2
CO lines 05, 06to TKGP 3
CO lines 07, 08 to TKGP 4
H 3-91
Assign trunks 01~08 for CO
H 4-40
TEL 100 assigned to class 1
E
2.
Press
.
Dial tone is heard.
Speaker key is on red, and the top display shows:
100 ( ).
3.
Dial I.
LCR Dial tone is heard.
The top display shows: LCR
Dial AIGBGE.
4.
No dial tone.
The LCD top display shows: 197275
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 18
Advanced Applications

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
5.
Dial A.
CO8 Line key is green
The LCD top display shows: 1972751
6.
Dial GFDE.
Ringback Tone is heard.
The LCD top display shows: 19727517645
7.
When you go Off-hook to converse, E goes off, and display changes
to call time and Clock/Calendar.
8.
The system actually dialed 1010288 9727517645 on CO8 of Trunk
Group 4 after the route was selected.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
3 - 19

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
2.5
Service Conditions
Built-in ARS provides a system with four tables to allow route selection, and a
single route table to select a Trunk Group or Route Advance Block and
provide digit control.
From
Deny
CPU
MB 1-14-00
MIFM LCR Originate
END
Allow

Class
Dial MB1-14-01
MB1-14-02
MB1-14-03
01
1X
YES
01
LCR/ARS
02
NX
YES
02
MB 4-40
03
1-800
YES
03
1
04
1-900
NO
04
2
·
3
·
·
·
·
4
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
128
1-800
YES
32
Dialing Combinations
Allow ARS
Route Number

Route MB1-14-04
01
NORMAL
To TKGP 01 as dialed
02
TKGP
Route MB1-14-05
Route
MB1-14-06
03
RAB
01
00~10
01
1010288
04
N/A
To TKGP 01~32
02
00~10
02
Max 10 digits
·
·
03
00~10
03
Max 10 digits
32
TKGP
04
10
To RAB 01~32
04
Max 10 digits
05
00~10
05
Max 10 digits
06
00~10
06
Max 10 digits
07
00~10
To TKGP 01
07
Max 10 digits
·
·
·
·
·
·
TKGP/RAB Assignment
·
·
·
·
32
00~10
·
·
32
Max 10 digits
Delete Digits
Add Digits
Table
Value
LCR Class
1~4
Dial Combinations
01~128
Route
01~32
TKGP
01~32
RAB
01~32
Seize Trunk and Dial
Delete digits
Up to 10
Add digits
Up to 10
Figure 3-1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) System Data Flow
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 20
Advanced Applications

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 3-1 Automatic Route Selection to Route Number Assignment (Continued)
Route
Digits (Max. 8)
Table
Dialing
Allow/Deny
Number
Memory Block
1~4
Combination
M.B. 1-14-02
M.B. 1-14-03
1-14-01
(01~32)
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 22
Advanced Applications

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 3-1 Automatic Route Selection to Route Number Assignment (Continued)
Route
Digits (Max. 8)
Table
Dialing
Allow/Deny
Number
Memory Block
1~4
Combination
M.B. 1-14-02
M.B. 1-14-03
1-14-01
(01~32)
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 24
Advanced Applications

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 3-1 Automatic Route Selection to Route Number Assignment (Continued)
Route
Digits (Max. 8)
Table
Dialing
Allow/Deny
Number
Memory Block
1~4
Combination
M.B. 1-14-02
M.B. 1-14-03
1-14-01
(01~32)
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128

Table 3-2 Route Number to Trunk Group/RAB Selection and Digit Control
NORMAL,
Delete Digits
Route Number TKGP (01~32),
Add Digits (10 Max.)
(00~10)
M.B. 1-14-03
or RAB (01~32)
M.B. 1-14-06
M.B. 1-14-05
M.B.1-14-04
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
3 - 25

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 3-2 Route Number to Trunk Group/RAB Selection and Digit Control (Continued)
NORMAL,
Delete Digits
Route Number TKGP (01~32),
Add Digits (10 Max.)
(00~10)
M.B. 1-14-03
or RAB (01~32)
M.B. 1-14-06
M.B. 1-14-05
M.B.1-14-04
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
H A single route is specified for each registered dialing number.
H When Memory Block 1-14-00 is set to allow, ARS functions
even with the MIFM-U( ) ETU installed, but LCR using the
MIFM-U( ) ETU is disabled.
H The MIFM-U( ) ETU is required for charge display to function.
H The ARS dialing numbers are checked according to the
following priorities:
Complete table match
Allow/Deny in the order 0~9, ,, # or P/N or X
Data sorted in the order 0~9, ,, # or P/N or X.
H The program cannot detect 1+; it must be entered in the table.
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 26
Advanced Applications

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
H Numbers affected by code restriction using Memory Block
1-1-82 (CO Feature Code Service for Code Restriction.), need
not be specified as 8-digit dialing numbers in the ARS table
because they are automatically excluded from ARS.
H NORMAL origination in USA is Trunk Group 1.
H When a dialing number is not subjected to ARS, it is either
originated according to the LCR bypass specification or busy.
H When ARS begins checking a received number, a 10-second
timer is set. When timeout occurs, ARS ends and normal
origination is performed.
2.6
ARS Flowcharts
The flowcharts show how origination by Trunk Group 1 is determined.
When the call is not originated by pressing a line key or dialing a Trunk Group
1 access code and the LCR Class is 0, the call is originated as is.
When LCR Class 1, 2, 3, or 4 is selected the call is originated according to
bypass specifications in the class of service and becomes busy.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
3 - 27

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Automatic Route Selection Flowcharts
Start
MB
Deny
1-14-00
MIFM LCR Originate
Allow/Deny
Allow
MB 4-40
0

Trunk Group 1 Originated
LCR Class
by Dialing
Selection
1~4

2
Code
Restriction Assigned
MB 1-1-82
If Digits Match,
Continue

1

___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 28
Advanced Applications

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
1
ARS Table Dial
Check - Refer to
Service Conditions
No
Match Dial?
4
Yes
Check ARS
Allow/Deny
Allow
M.B. 1-14-02
LCR ByPass?
M.B. 1-8-08
Deny
No
No Call
Allow?
Busy
Yes
Trunk Group 1
Originate

Busy
Route Number
to TKGP/RAB
Memory Block 1-14-03
Check
2
2
Which TKGP or
Memory Block 1-14-04
RAB?
TKGP 01~32
RAB 01~32
3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
3 - 29

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3
2
No
TKGP/RAB
meets condition?

Yes
4
MB 1-14-05
Digit
MB 1-14-06
Add/Del
Seize Trunk
and Dial
END
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 30
Advanced Applications

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 3
ISDN-PRI CALL BY CALL
3.1
General
Call by Call Service allows multiple services to share a PRI line.
When a call is originated or terminated, an Information Element (IE) called the
Network Specified Facility (NSF) is added to the SETUP message to identify
the service associated with the call.
The number of Simulated Facility Groups (SFGs) that can be simultaneously
used for each service must be restricted. The total number of SFGs must be
less than the number of PRI channels. The SFGs are determined when
contracting with the network. The network determines whether calls that
exceed the restriction are rejected or diverted. For outgoing calls, the KTS
counts the number of calls in progress per group, and rejects excess calls.
For Call by Call to operate, the number of B channels used for PRI must be
specified using Memory Block 1-13-00 (PRT Channel Assignment), and Call
by Call service must be assigned to each PRT using Memory Block 1-13-03
(Call by Call Service Selection).
3.2
Memory Blocks
The following related Memory Blocks are used when assigning Call by Call.
Memory
Title
Block
DID Digit Length Selection.................................................. 1-1-20
DID Digit Conversion Assignment....................................... 1-1-21
DID Digit Conversion Table................................................. 1-1-22
DID Forward Station Number for Busy Station
or Undefined Digit............................................................... 1-1-23
Access Code (1~3 Digit) Assignment........................... 1-1-46~48
Route Advance Block Assignment...................................... 1-1-30
ISDN DTMF Duration/Interdigit Selection........................... 1-1-80
ISDN / K-CCIS Interval Time Selection............................... 1-1-81
SLT or Automated Attendant/DISA to CPU PBR Selection.1-8-01
PBR Receive Level Assignment for
Automated Attendant/DISA................................................. 1-8-02
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
3 - 31

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Master Clock Selection....................................................... 1-8-33
Trunk to Tenant Assignment...................................................2-01
Line Key Selection..................................................................2-05
Line Key Selection for Tenant Mode.......................................2-06
Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment......................................... 3-03
Trunk Incoming Answer Mode Selection................................ 3-05
Automatic Release Signal Detection Selection...................... 3-40
DIT Assignment...................................................................... 3-42
ANA Assignment.................................................................... 3-43
ISDN Trunk Directory Number Assignment............................3-52
Caller Name Indication Selection........................................... 3-53
Trunk Type Selection..............................................................3-91
Trunk (Installed, DP/DTMF) Selection.................................... 3-92
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode).................................. 4-01
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)................................ 4-02
Telephone to Tenant Assignment........................................... 4-09
Line key Selection for Telephone Mode................................. 4-12
Station to Call Appearance Block Assignment....................... 4-43
Multiline Terminal Type Selection........................................... 4-50
PRT Channel Assignment................................................. 1-13-00
Call by Call Service Selection........................................... 1-13-03
Call by Call Type of Number Assignment..........................1-10-02
Call by Call Numbering Plan ID Assignment..................... 1-10-03
Call by call Type of Network ID Assignment..................... 1-10-00
Call by Call ID Plan Assignment....................................... 1-10-01
Call by Call Network ID Assignment................................. 1-10-04
Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment (Service).. 1-10-05
Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment (Feature).. 1-10-06
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 32
Advanced Applications

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Call by Call Service Parameter Assignment..................... 1-10-07
Call by Call Max Digit Assignment.................................... 1-10-08
Call by Call Simulated Facility Group Assignment............ 1-10-09
Call by Call Outgoing SFG Assignment............................ 1-10-20
Call by Call Outgoing/Incoming SFG Assignment.............1-10-21
Call by Call Incoming Type Selection................................1-10-22
3.3
Memory Block Description
3.3.1
DID Digit Length Selection (Memory Block 1-1-20)
Use this Memory Block to define the number of DID digits.
Default: 3
3.3.2
DID Digit Conversion Assignment (Memory Block 1-1-21)
Use this Memory Block to enable the DID Digit Conversion table.
Default: NO
3.3.3
DID Digit Conversion Table (Memory Block 1-1-22)
Use this Memory Block to assign DID numbers to ring at station
numbers, closed number (plus outgoing digits), or tenant number.
Default: Not Specified
3.3.4
DID Forward Station Number for Busy Station or Undefined Digit
(Memory Block 1-1-23)
Use this Memory Block when the DID conversion Table is enabled to
define where digits are routed when undefined or the station is busy.
Default: NON (Not Assigned)
3.3.5
Access Code (1-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment (Memory Block
1-1-46~48)
Use this Memory Block to assign access codes or station numbers.
Function 080 [Outgoing (CO only) Access in same Tenant] default
Not Specified, Function 101(Trunk Group 01) default is 9, and
Function 201~232 (Route Advance Blocks 1~32) default is none
specified.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
3 - 33

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.3.6
Route Advance Block Assignment (Memory Block 1-1-30)
Use this Memory Block to assign priority levels to each Trunk Group
assigned in a Route Advance Block.
Default: All Blocks 00
3.3.7
ISDN DTMF Duration/Interdigit Selection (Memory Block 1-1-80)
Use this Memory Block to specify tone duration and interdigit time of
DTMF signals for ISDN trunks.
Default: 100/70 milliseconds
3.3.8
ISDN / K-CCIS Interval Time Selection (Memory Block 1-1-81)
Use this Memory Block to specify time between digits dialed.
Default: 4s
3.3.9
SLT or Automated Attendant/DISA to CPU PBR Selection (Memory
Block 1-8-01)
Use this Memory Block to specify whether the PBR circuits in the
CPU are for Single Line Telephones or Automated Attendant/DISA.
Default: SLT
3.3.10
PBR Receive Level Assignment for Automated Attendant/DISA
(Memory Block 1-8-02)
Use this Memory Block to Specify the receiving level at the
Automated Attendant /DISA.
Default: 03 (-36 dBm)
3.3.11
Master Clock Selection (Memory Block 1-8-33)
Use this Memory Block to assign the source for synchronization of
the clocking for DTI-U( ), PRT(1)-U( ), or BRT(4)-U( ) ETU.
Default: 0 (Not assigned)
3.3.12
Trunk to Tenant Assignment (Memory Block 2-01)
Use this Memory Block to assign CO/PBX lines to tenants.
Default: CO/PBX lines 01~64 are assigned
3.3.13
Line Key Selection (Memory Block 2-05)
Use this Memory Block to select Tenant mode or Telephone Mode
line key assignment for each tenant.
Default: TEL
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 34
Advanced Applications

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.3.14
Line Key Selection for Tenant Mode (Memory Block 2-06)
Use this Memory Block to assign functions to each telephone line
key for Tenant Mode.
Default: Tenant 00, Line keys 01~08 are assigned to CO/PBX.
Tenants 01~47 are unassigned)
3.3.15
Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment (Memory Block 3-03)
Use this Memory Block to assign a Trunk Group number to each
CO/PBX line.
Default: Lines 01~08 assigned to Trunk Group 01
Lines 09~64 assigned to Trunk Group 00
All Tie Lines assigned to Trunk Group 02
All DID lines assigned to Trunk Group 00
3.3.16
Trunk Incoming Answer Mode Selection (Memory Block 3-05)
Use this Memory Block to specify the incoming answer mode per
outside line as NO ASSIGN (Normal), TANDM TRF (automatic
trunk-to-trunk transfer), or AA (Automated Attendant/DISA).
Default: NO ASSIGN
3.3.17
Automatic Release Signal Detection Selection (Memory Block 3-40)
Use this Memory Block to specify signal detection time for release of
a CO/PBX line after a disconnect signal is received from the Central
Office or PBX.
Default: 350 (milliseconds)
3.3.18
DIT Assignment (Memory Block 3-42)
Use this Memory Block to assign a Day Mode direct-trunk
termination to an independent station.
Default: Blank (No Assignment)
3.3.19
ANA Assignment (Memory Block 3-43)
Use this Memory Block to assign a Night Mode direct-trunk
termination to an independent station.
Default: Blank (No Assignment)
3.3.20
ISDN Trunk Directory Number Assignment (Memory Block 3-52)
Use this Memory Block to assign ISDN Directory Number.
Default: Blank (Not Specified)
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
3 - 35

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.3.21
Line Key Selection (Memory Block 3-53)
Use this Memory Block to check the speed dialing buffer for a match
when a Caller ID Number is detected. When a name is assigned to a
matched number, it can be displayed when Line key 3 (NAM) is
selected.
Default: NUM
3.3.22
Trunk Type Selection (Memory Block 3-91)
Use this Memory Block to specify an external line as CO, PBX (or
CTX), TIE, DID, or CTX (Assume 9).
Default: CO
3.3.23
Trunk (Installed, DP/DTMF) Selection (Memory Block 3-92)
Use this Memory Block to specify an external line as NIL (Not
connected), DP 10 pps, DP 20 pps, or MF (DTMF).
Default: MF
3.3.24
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode) (Memory Block 4-01)
Use this Memory Block to assign incoming CO/PBX calls to ring on
Multiline Terminals in the Day mode.
Default: Lines 01~08 ring at telephone ports 01 and 02
3.3.25
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode) (Memory Block 4-02)
Use this Memory Block to assign incoming CO/PBX calls to ring on
Multiline Terminals in the Night mode.
Default: Lines 01~08 ring at telephone ports 01 and 02
3.3.26
Telephone to Tenant Assignment (Memory Block 4-09)
Use this Memory Block to specify Tenant assignment per station.
Default: All telephones assigned to Tenant 00
3.3.27
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode (Memory Block 4-12)
Use this Memory Block to assign functions to each CO/PBX line key
on each tenant assigned to telephone mode.
Default: Line keys 01~08 are assigned as CO/PBX lines 01~08 for all
telephones.
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 36
Advanced Applications

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.3.28
Station to Call Appearance Block Assignment (Memory Block 4-43)
Use this Memory Block to assign a multiline Terminal to a Call
Appearance Block.
Default: All stations are assigned to CAP Block 00
3.3.29
Multiline Terminal Type Selection (Memory Block 4-50)
Use this memory Block to select the Multiline Terminal type.
Default: 16 Line Keys
3.3.30
PRT Channel Assignment (Memory Block 1-13-00)
Use this Memory Block to assign B channels for PRI.
Default: 24
3.3.31
Call by Call Service Selection (Memory Block 1-13-03)
Use this Memory Block to specify whether (YS) or not (NO) Call by
Call is specified per PRT line.
Default: NO
3.3.32
Call by Call Type of Number Assignment (Memory Block 1-10-02)
Use this Memory Block to specify a TN for each Route Advance
Block (RAB) as 0 (Unknown), 1 (International), 2 (National), 3
(Network Specific), or 4 (Subscriber or local).
Default: 0 for all RABs
3.3.33
Call by Call Numbering Plan ID Assignment (Memory Block 1-10-03)
Use this Memory Block to specify Numbering Plan ID (NPI) for each
RAB as 00 (Unknown), 1 (ISDN/Telephony), 2 (Reserved), 3 (Data,
in the future), or 9 (Private).
Default: 0 for all RABs
3.3.34
Call by call Type of Network ID Assignment (Memory Block 1-10-00)
Use this Memory Block to specify Type of Network ID (TNI) for each
RAB as 0,1 (Reserved), 2 (National Network), 3 ~7 (Reserved).
The Network ID (Memory Block 1-10-04) must be assigned.
Default: 2 for all RABs
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
3 - 37

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.3.35
Call by Call ID Plan Assignment (Memory Block 1-10-01)
Use this Memory Block to specify Network ID Plan (NIP) for each
RAB as 0 (Reserved), 1 (Interexchange Carrier), 2 ~15 (Reserved).
The Network ID (Memory Block 1-10-04) must be assigned.
Default: 1 for all RABs
3.3.36
Call by Call Network ID Assignment (Memory Block 1-10-04)
Use this Memory Block to specify Network ID (NID) for each RAB.
Default: All RABs are unspecified
3.3.37
Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment (Service) (Memory
Block 1-10-05)
Use this Memory Block to specify Facility Coding Value (Service) for
each RAB as specified by the Memory Block table.
Default: All blocks 00 (None)
3.3.38
Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment (Feature) (Memory
Block 1-10-06)
Use this Memory Block to specify Facility Coding Value (Feature) for
each RAB as specified by the Memory Block table.
Default: All blocks 00 (None)
3.3.39
Call by Call Service Parameter Assignment (Memory Block1-10-07)
Use this Memory Block to specify Call Service Parameter for each
RAB as specified by the Memory Block table.
Default: All RABS 0-000
3.3.40
Call by Call Max Digit Assignment (Memory Block 1-10-08)
Use this Memory Block to specify Max Digit for each RAB.
Default: All RABs 00 (No Limit)
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 38
Advanced Applications

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.3.41
Call by Call Simulated Facility Group Assignment (Memory Block
1-10-09)
Use this Memory Block to specify a Simulated Facility Group (01~16)
to control SFGs of each facility for each RAB.
Default: All RABs 00 (None)
SFGs for FX can be defined per FX Facility Group for incoming,
outgoing, and Incoming/outgoing calls using an FX Facility Group.
SFGs for Tie Trunks can be defined per Tie Trunk Facility Group for
incoming, outgoing, and Incoming/outgoing calls using a Tie Trunk
Facility Group.
SFGs for OUTWATS can be defined for outgoing calls per individual
OUTWATS service. For IntraLATA and banded OUTWATS, an SFG
is assigned to each band. For InterLATA OUTWATS, an SFG is
assigned to each IC.
SFGs for INWATS can be defined for incoming calls per INWATS
called DN.
3.3.42
Call by Call Outgoing SFG Assignment (Memory Block 1-10-20)
Use this Memory Block to specify an outgoing SFG for each SFG
specified by Memory Block 1-10-09.
Default: 99
3.3.43
Call by Call Outgoing/Incoming SFG Assignment (Memory Block
1-10-21)
Use this Memory Block to specify an Outgoing or Incoming SFG for
each SFG specified by Memory Block 1-10-09. The incoming SFG
is controlled by the network.
Default: 99
3.3.44
Call by Call Incoming Type Selection (Memory Block 1-10-22)
Use this Memory Block to specify an Incoming Call Type for each
SFG specified by Memory Block 1-10-09 as either CO (Normal) or
DID.
Default: DID
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
3 - 39

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.4
Call by Call (CBC) Programming (LCR PC Software V2.0 or Higher)
3.4.1
The International/Operator Table
This table has a page for each LCR Class (1~4) that contains fixed
dialing patterns that can be assigned to that Class.
H Two routes can be assigned and arranged in priority. PRT
should have higher priority.
H Trunk Group or Route Advance Blocks are specified in
TG/RAB.
H Delete digits specifies the number of digits to delete from the
first dial when using PRT.
H PreDigits controls whether digits that are specified in pre-digit
tables are dialed before the International or Operator code.
H When TG/RAB is not assigned, outgoing calls cannot be made.
International or Operator Table Example
LCR Class
Delete
PreDigits
Dial
Priority TG/RAB
1~4
Digits Add/Not Add
0-
1
RAB 09
1
Not Add
2
None
None
Not Add
00
1
RAB 10
2

Not Add
2
None
None
Not Add
010
1
RAB 11
3

Not Add
2
None
None
Not Add
Class1
011
1
RAB 12
3

Not Add
2
None
None
Not Add
01N
1
RAB 13
2

Not Add
2
None
None
Not Add
ON
1
RAB 14
1

Not Add
(N = 2~9)
2
None
None
Not Add
3.4.2
The OCC Table
This Table has 16 pages (called Table 1~Table 16) that are required
for each of the LCR Classes for a total of 64 tables with fixed dialing
patterns.
H Dial means following the OCC dial.
H Two routes can be assigned and arranged in priority. PRT
should have higher priority.
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 40
Advanced Applications

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
H Trunk Group or Route Advance Blocks are specified in TG/
RAB.
H Delete digits specifies the number of digits to delete from the
first dial when using PRT.
H PreDigits controls whether digits that are specified in pre-digit
tables are dialed before the International or Operator code.
H When TG/RAB is not assigned, outgoing calls cannot be made.
H When an unassigned OCC number is dialed, route selection is
bypassed.
OCC Table Example
Tables (64)
PreDigits
Delete
01~16 for OCC Dial
Dial
Priority TG/RAB
Add/Not
Digits
each Class
Add
0-
1
RAB 15
8
Not Add
2
None
Not Add
00
1
RAB 16
9
Not Add
2
None
Not Add
011
1
RAB 3
10
Not Add
2
None
Not Add
101XXX
X
0N
1
RAB 4
10
Not Add
Table 1
(X = 0~9)
2
None
Not Add
1010288
1N
1
RAB 5
10
Not Add
(N = 2~9)
2
None
Not Add
NX
1
RAB 6
9
Not Add
(X = 0~9)
2
None
Not Add
#
1
RAB 7
8
Not Add
2
None
Not Add
3.4.3
Operator Call Time Out Table Example
This table specifies a timeout (0~9 seconds) that is used to
distinguish between 0 and 00 of an Operator Call.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
3 - 41

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
The MIFM-U( ) ETU refers to this table when the first digit dialed is 0
or when 0 follows the OCC Dial.
Operator Call Time Out Table
Default SettingsOperator Call Time Out
4 sec
3.5
Least Cost Routing (LCR) Programming
Refer to the Electra Elite IPK Least Cost Routing Manual.
3.6
Operating Procedures Example
Ensure that the following items are assigned or registered:
Memory Block
Setting
7-1
S1
MIFM
S2
ESITEL01~08
S4
PRTCO 01~24
S7
COICO 25~32
1-1-20
4 Digits
1-1-21
YS
1-1-22
DID number: 2000, Station number:100
1-1-30
Set all 32 RABs at 02 with number 1 priority
1-1-46
Set dial 9 to function 101 (Trunk Group 1)
1-1-81
4s
1-8-08
Page 3, LK4 [LCR Bypass (Trunk Groups 2~32)] to
Allow
Page4, LK1 (LCR Recall) to deny
1-13-03
PRT01 to YS
2-01
Co lines 01~23, 25~32 assigned to Tenant 00
3-03
Co lines 01~23 assigned to TKGP02
Co lines 25~32 assigned to TKGP03
3-91
Co lines 01~23 set to DID
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 42
Advanced Applications

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
3-92
Co line 24 set to NIL (Not installed)
4-12
TEL ports 01, 02 (Ext. 100,101), LK01~23, C
(CAP)01~23
4-40
Set TEL ports 01, 02 (Ext. 100,101) to CLS 1
4-50
24 Line Keys
1-10-20
Group 01 to 08
MEGACOM (AT&T)
Group 02 to 05
MEGACOM800 (AT&T)
Group 03 to 02
MultiQuest (AT&T)
Group 04 to 02
Tie (Nortel)
Group 05 to 02
FX (Nortel)
Group 06 to 01
ACCUNET (AT&T)
(Future)
Group 07 to 03
OUTWATS (Nortel)
Group 08~16 to 99 (default)
1-10-21
Group 01 to 10
MEGACOM (AT&T)
Group 02 to 05
MEGACOM800 (AT&T)
Group 03 to 02
MultiQuest (AT&T)
Group 04 to 03
Tie (Nortel)
Group 05 to 03
FX (Nortel)
Group 06 to 01
ACCUNET (AT&T)
(Future)
Group 07 to 03
OUTWATS (Nortel)
Group 08~16 to 99 (default)
1-10-22
SFG05 to CO
Other SFGs remain in DID
3-42
Set CO 01~23 to TEL 101
3-43
CO 01~23 unassigned
Call by Call Memory Block Data Table (Example Only)
Refer to the Memory Block Data table.

AT&T and Nortel are mixed in this example even though in reality this is
impossible.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
3 - 43

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 3-3 Memory Block Data
R
MAX
TN
NPI
TNI
NIP
NID
FCVS
FCVF
SP
SFG
A
DIGIT
(02)
(03)
(00)
(01)
(04)
(1-10-05)
(06)
(07)
(09)
B
(08)

Values in ( ) are the last two digits of Call by Call Memory Blocks (e.g. 1-10-0X).
0:00
01
2
1
None
None
None
03 (AT&T)
00
11
01
0
0:00
02
4
1
None
None
None
03 (AT&T)
00
10
01
0
0:00
03
2
1
2
1
0288
03 (AT&T)
00
11
01
0
0:00
04
2
1
None
None
None
02 (AT&T)
00
11
02
0
0:00
05
2
1
None
None
None
16 (AT&T)
00
11
03
0
04 0r 19
06
0
0
None
None
None
00
001
11
04
Nortel
05 0r 20
07
0
0
None
None
None
00
100
11
05
Nortel
0:00
08
1
1
2
1
3333
03 (AT&T)
00
0
01
0
0:00
09
0
0
None
None
None
03 (AT&T)
05
1
N/A
0
3.7
Dialing Examples
3.7.1
Dial 9 (Trunk access code) 1-212-752-5000
LCR search sequence: Area Code:212 Route Adv 01 Route 01
RAB 01 TG 02 CO 23.
Operation:
1.
Go off-hook, and listen for ICM dial tone.
The Terminal LCD shows 100 .
2.
Dial the Trunk Access Code (I).
The KSU generates an LCR Dial Tone.
The Terminal LCD shows LCR.
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 44
Advanced Applications

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.
Dial A.
Dial tone stops.
The Terminal LCD shows 1.
4.
Dial BABGEB.
CAP LEDs 00 and 01 light green.
The Terminal LCD shows 1212752.
5.
Dial EKKK.
LEDs remain On.
Ring Back Tone is generated.
The Terminal LCD shows 12127527000.
SETUP is sent to the Network.
SETUP Message
CPN
NSF
F/S
Service
RAB
TN
NPI
TNI
NIP
NID
Service FCV
Feature FCV
FCV
Parameter
01
2(N)
1
212-752-5000
None
None
None
S
MEGACOM
None
6.
PRT is connected.
LEDs remain On.
Conversation starts.
7.
The Terminal LCD displays the elapsed time for the call.
3.7.2
Dial 9 (Trunk access code) 214-222-5000
LCR search sequence: Area Code:214 Route Adv 02 Route 02
RAB 02 TG 02 CO 23.
Operation:
1.
Go off-hook, and listen for ICM dial tone.
The Terminal LCD shows 100 .
2.
Dial the Trunk Access Code (I).
The KSU generates an LCR Dial Tone.
The Terminal LCD shows LCR.
3.
Dial BAD.
Dial tone stops.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
3 - 45

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
The Terminal LCD shows 214.
CAP LEDs 00 and 01 light green.
SFG 1 counter increments by 1.
4.
Dial BBBEKKK.
LEDs remain On.
Ring Back Tone is generated.
The Terminal LCD shows 2142227000.
SETUP is sent to the Network.
SETUP Message
CPN
NSF
F/S
Service
RAB
TN
NPI
TNI
NIP
NID
Service FCV
Feature FCV
FCV
Parameter
02
4(N)
1
214-222-5000
None
None
None
S
MEGACOM
None
5.
PRT is connected.
LEDs remain On.
Conversation starts.
6.
The Terminal LCD displays the elapsed time for the call.
3.7.3
Dial 9-1-333-444-5000
LCR search sequence: Area Code:333 Route Adv 03 Route 03
RAB 03 TG 02 CO 23.
SETUP Message
CPN
NSF
F/S
Service
RAB
TN
NPI
TNI
NIP
NID
Service FCV
Feature FCV
FCV
Parameter
03
2(N)
1
333-444-5000
2
1
0288
S
MEGACOM
None
3.7.4
Dial 9-1-800-777-5000
LCR search sequence: Area Code:800 Route Adv 04 Route 04
RAB 04 TG 02 CO 23.
SETUP Message
CPN
NSF
F/S
Service
RAB
TN
NPI
TNI
NIP
NID
Service FCV
Feature FCV
FCV
Parameter
MEGACOM
04
2(N)
1
800-777-5000
None
None
None
S
None
800
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 46
Advanced Applications

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.7.5
Dial 9-1-913-381-6000
LCR search sequence: Area Code:800 Route Adv 04 Route 04
RAB 04 TG 02 CO 23.
SETUP Message
CPN
NSF
F/S
Service
RAB
TN
NPI
TNI
NIP
NID
Service FCV
Feature FCV
FCV
Parameter
05
2(N)
1
913-381-6000
None
None
None
S
MultiQuest
None
3.7.6
Dial 9-011-81 (Country Code)1-471-82-1111
LCR search sequence: Dial 011 of International/Operator Table 1
RAB 08 TG 02 CO 23.
SETUP Message
CPN
NSF
F/S
Service
RAB
TN
NPI
TNI
NIP
NID
Service FCV
Feature FCV
FCV
Parameter
81-471-82-
08
1(l)
1
2
1
3333
S
MEGACOM
None
1111
3.7.7
Outgoing Tie Line Service Detour to Analog Trunk when Simulated
Facility Group (SFG) Busy
Dial I-EKK-BBB-CCCC.
LCR search sequence: LCR Dial Route Adv 01 Route 01 (first
priority) RAB 01 SFG 01 Outgoing SFG=08 (overflow)
Route 040 (2nd priority) TG 03 CO 32.
SETUP Message
CPN
NSF
F/S
Service
RAB
TN
NPI
TNI
NIP
NID
Service FCV
Feature FCV
FCV
Parameter
06
0(U)
0(U)
500-222-3333
None
None
None
S
Tie
None
001
3.7.8
Outgoing FX service Dial 9-1 +500-222-3333
LCR search sequence: Area Code 555 Route Adv 07 Route
07 RAB 07 TG 02 CO 23.
SETUP Message
CPN
NSF
F/S
Service
RAB
TN
NPI
TNI
NIP
NID
Service FCV
Feature FCV
FCV
Parameter
07
0(U)
0(U)
500-222-3333
None
None
None
S
FX
None
100
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
3 - 47

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.7.9
Local Operator Call Dial 9 +0
LCR search sequence: Dial 0 of International/Operator Table 1
RAB 09 TG 02 CO 23.
SETUP Message
CPN
NSF
F/S
Service
RAB
TN
NPI
TNI
NIP
NID
Service FCV
Feature FCV
FCV
Parameter
Operator
09
0(U)
0(U)
No Digits
None
None
None
S
MEGACOM
None
(Local)
3.8
Service Conditions
The following service conditions apply.
H The Electra Elite supports the AT&T 5ESS-2000 switch, Software
release 5E12 or later using the National ISDN PRI version only.
H Caller ID is displayed as with normal CO calls.
H LCR is necessary for Call by Call origination.
H For an outgoing call to an external line, dialed digits are sent collectively
when the specified ISDN interdigit dialing interval (MB 1-1-81, ISDN/
K-CCIS Interval Time Selection, 4 sec default) from the last digit expires.
When a digit is not dialed after seizure of the external line before the
interdigit interval times out, the external line is released and a Busy Tone
is generated.
H When Call forward Off-premise is assigned, MB 4-47 (ISDN Directory
Number Selection) follows the specification at the TEL to which the call
is forwarded.
H No tandem connection is allowed in Tie Trunk Mode.
H For PRI trunks, CO or DID type should be assigned using MB 3-91
(Trunk Type Selection).
H When PRT is used as an outgoing trunk on Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk
transfer, Caller ID follows the MB 3-52 (ISDN Trunk Directory Number
selection) setting. When allowed, Caller ID is sent to the network.
H For an incoming call, the lowest numbered channel in the PRT trunk is
used.
H Call by Call does not follow Tenant Day/Night Mode switching.
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 48
Advanced Applications

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
H When bypassing LCR for CBC, press a line key assigned for RAB or Dial
the RAB access code to access the RAB. Using LCR requires dialing
1+NXX+NXX+XXXX. Pressing the RAB line key requires dialing
NXX+NXX+XXXX. The greater of the two should be registered in MB
1-10-08 (Call by Call Max Digit Assignment).

LCR should be assigned to delete the 1. It should not be sent to the
network.
H The system sends the number dialed to the network by the earliest
occurrence of the following. Either the Max digits assigned by MB
1-10-08 (Call by Call Max Digit Assignment) are reached or the ISDN
Dial Interval Time assigned by Memory Block 1-1-81 (ISDN /K-CCIS
Interval Time Selection) expires.
H An incoming call is regarded as DID, but if called party information is not
sent as for FX, it is regarded as a normal incoming call. Day/Night Ring,
using Memory Block 4-01[CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)]/
Memory Block 4-02[CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)], or DIT/
ANA, using Memory Block 3-61 (DIT/ANA Delay Answer Time
Selection), must be set for all COs.
H CBC parameters can be set to all assigned values. When an unused
value is set, outgoing calls may not process properly.
H The Type of Network ID (TNI), Network ID Plan (NIP) and Network ID
(NID) are mutually related. When NID is not registered, TNI, NIP, and
NID are not sent. When NID is registered, the registered values for NIP
and TNI are sent.
H Main Software controls the incoming SFG as follows:
·
The Facility Coded Value (FCV), NID, and Service parameters are
extracted from the NSF-IE.
·
The RAB based CBC values are searched for a match.
·
When a match is found, the assigned SFG value for the RAB is
used.
·
When a match is not found, software uses SFG value of 16.
·
When an incoming call indication is received, and the call is
processed, the counter for incoming calls is incremented by one.
·
When an outgoing call is processed, the counter for incoming calls
is incremented by one.
·
When the call is terminated before sending a SETUP message to
the network, the outgoing call is canceled and the call counter is
decreased by one.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
3 - 49

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
·
When incoming and outgoing calls are processed simultaneously
the incoming call has priority. A collision error between
simultaneous SETUP messages is generated, and the outgoing
call gets a busy signal.
H The Incoming/outgoing (IC/OG) SFG must be equal to or greater than
the outgoing (OG) SFG. When not, In many cases, the Electra Elite
system does not accept an incoming call.
H When Operator Call Time Out Table is set to 0 in LCR Programming, the
operator call requiring more than 1 digit cannot be used. When 0 + any
digits is stored in speed dial, the system sends the call as 0 Call
(operator) only.
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 50
Advanced Applications

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.9
Call by Call (CBC) Termination Flowchart
The flowchart shows how Call by Call incoming calls are terminated.
CBC Call Termination Flowchart
Incoming
Others
Incoming Reject
Call Type
#88: Incompatible
Destination
Voice

No
CBC?
MB 1-13-03
Yes

CO

Trunk Type
MB 3-91

No Match
SFG

MB 1-10-01~08
DID

No
Data Match

Called Party
Number
(CPN)?

DID

I
ncoming Type
Yes
DIT/ANA
MB 1-10-22

Assigned?
MB 3-42,3-43
CO
Yes

Digit Add/Del for Tie Line
No
Networking (MB 5-00)

Digit Conversion Table
MB 1-1-22
Software selects
Normal Incoming, A.A., Auto
DID/DIT (also Call Alert)
SFG 16
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
3 - 51

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 4
HUB(8) VLAN AND QOS CONFIGURATION
4.1
General
The HUB(8)-U( ) ETU is an optional Ethernet Interface for the Electra Elite IPK
KSU that supports eight Ethernet ports with status and activity indicators. A
HUB is a switching Point for data that comes together from individual ports. A
switch determines the port where the data should be forwarded and regulates
transmission. This ETU is an efficient platform when multiple ETUs that
require Ethernet connection are installed in the Electra Elite IPK KSU. One
port can be a source port and another port can be a target port to mirror the
source and monitor data traffic.
4.2
Memory Block Descriptions
Auto Negotiation Yes/No Selection (Memory Block 1-16-00)
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not Auto Negotiation is enabled
for each port of the HUB(8)-U( ) ETU. When No is selected, Memory Block
1-16-01 (Port Speed Selection 10/100 Base -T) and Memory Block 1-16-02
(Port Duplex Mode Selection) are used. When equipment with auto
negotiation function is connected to a port, ensure that the YS is set for this
Memory Block.
Port Speed Selection 10/100 Base-T (Memory Block 1-16-01)
When Memory Block 1-16-00 (Auto Negotiation Yes/No Selection) is set to
NO, use this Memory Block to specify the Ethernet port speed as 10 Mbps or
100 Mbps for each port of each HUB(8)-U( ) ETU.
Port Duplex Mode Selection (Memory Block 1-16-02
When Memory Block 1-16-00 (Auto Negotiation Yes/No Selection) is set to
NO, use this Memory Block to specify duplex mode (HALF or FULL) for each
port of each HUB(8)-U( ) ETU.
MDI/MDIX Mode Selection (Memory Block 1-16-03)
Use this Memory Block to specify an MDI/MDIX mode for each port of each
HUB(8)-U( ) ETU.
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 52
Advanced Applications

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
VLAN Mode Selection (Memory Block 1-16-04)
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not IEEE 802.1q VLAN Tagging
is enabled for each HUB(8)-U( ) ETU. This Memory Block must also be
enabled to use IEEE 802.p Priority. Priority options can be enabled in
Memory Block 1-16-06 (Port Based Priority Selection), Memory Block 1-16-07
(High Priority RX Tag Threshold), Memory Block 1-16-08 (High Priority TX
Tag Assignment), and Memory Block 1-16-09 (Low Priority TX Tag
Assignment).
Default VLAN ID Tag Insertion Assignment (Memory Block 1-16-05)
Use this Memory Block to insert VLAN ID tagging to data frames from network
devices that cannot insert VLAN tags. When data without a VLAN tag is
transmitted by the device on the port, a tag is inserted with the VLAN ID
assigned by this Memory Block.
Port Based Priority Selection (Memory Block 1-16-06)
Use this memory block to specify how frames, reaching the ingress port
without VLAN tags are marked for queuing internally in the HUB(8). The
HUB(8) has two queues: High Priority and Low Priority. When the frame
reaches the egress port, settings for Memory Blocks 1-16-08 (for High Priority
frames) and 1-16-09 (for Low Priority frames) for the egress port are used to
convert the low or high priority queue to a VLAN tag priority (0~7). Set to NO
(default), this Memory block does not mark frames for either queue; Memory
Block 1-16-07 then determines the priority queue for where the frame is sent.
High Priority RX Tag Threshold (Memory Block 1-16-07)
The HUB(8) has two queues: High Priority and Low Priority. When Memory
Block 1-16-06 is set to NO, and the priority of the VLAN tag is equal to or
greater than the setting in this block, the tag is queued for high priority.
Otherwise, it is queued for low priority. When it is transmitted out the egress
port of the HUB(8), it retains its original VLAN tag priority value.
High Priority TX Tag Assignment (Memory Block 1-16-08)
For frames marked at the ingress port by Memory Block 1-16-06 as High
Priority, this memory block setting on the egress port assigns a value (0 ~7) to
the priority field of the VLAN tag. The default is 7.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
3 - 53

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Low Priority TX Tag Assignment (Memory Block 1-16-09)
For frames marked at the ingress port by Memory Block 1-16-06 as Low
Priority, this memory block setting on the egress port assigns a value (0 ~7) to
the priority field of the VLAN tag. The default is 0.
Port Mirroring Selection (Memory Block 1-16-10)
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not Port Mirroring is enabled for
each HUB(8)-U( ) ETU. The source port and the target port must be members
of the same VLAN(s).
Mirroring Source Port Assignment (Memory Block 1-16-11)
When Port Mirroring is enabled in Memory Block 1-16-10 (Port Mirroring
Selection), use this Memory Block to specify a port with data to be monitored
on another port specified by Memory Block 1-16-12 (Mirroring Target Port
Assignment) for each HUB(8) -U( ) ETU. The source port and target port
must be in the same VLAN(s).
Mirroring Target Port Assignment (Memory Block 1-16-12)
When Port Mirroring is enabled in Memory Block 1-16-10 (Port Mirroring
Selection), use this Memory Block to specify a target port that monitors frames
transmitted on the source port specified by Memory Block 1-16-11 (Mirroring
Source Port Assignment) for each HUB(8) -U( ) ETU. The source port and
target port must be in the same VLAN(s).
VLAN Group to VLAN ID Assignment (Memory Block 1-16-13)
Use this Memory Block to create a list of valid VLAN IDs to be recognized by
the HUB(8)-U( ) ETU.
Port VLAN Group Membership (Memory Block 1-16-14)
Use this Memory Block to create a list of accepted VLANs for each port.
When Memory Block 1-16-04 (VLAN Mode Selection) is set to YS, each port
accepts frames tagged with VLAN IDs only when the port is programmed as a
member of that VLAN Group. Frames without VLAN tags are also permitted.
When Port Mirroring is used, the source and target ports must be members of
the same VLAN(s).
VLAN Tag Insertion Selection (Memory Block 1-16-15)
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not the port should insert VLAN
tags in frames transmitted on this port. When this Memory Block is set to NO,
tags are deleted from frames of the same VLAN Group transmitted on this
port.
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 54
Advanced Applications

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Flow Control for Full Duplex Selection (Memory Block 1-16-16)
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not Full duplex IEEE802.3x Flow
Control is enabled for each HUB(8)-U( ) ETU port.
Back Pressure for Half Duplex (Memory Block 1-16-17)
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not half-duplex Back Pressure
Flow Control is enabled for each HUB(8)-U( ) ETU port.
4.3
Quality of Service Configuration with VLANs
Quality of Service (QoS) is a means of giving priority to time-sensitive network
voice or video traffic. Diffserv and another router-based queuing method
(layer 3 of the OSI model) do not solve the problem of network congestion on
the LAN. Networks for voice and video should use switching hubs instead of
dumb hubs. The HUB(8) ETU is a layer 2 switch that supports the IEEE
802.1p standard for QoS for IEEE 802.1q standard VLANs.

Figure 3-2 Quality of Service Configuration
VLANs may be implemented for reasons other than QoS such as reducing
broadcast traffic on the network, security, or managing multiple paths to a
destination. Using Voice over IP (VoIP), QoS is yet another reason to
implement VLANs. Congestion may occur on the LAN typically on the trunk
connecting the Ethernet switches, between switches and routers, or on the
backplane of a switch-supporting network-intensive application (e.g., imaging
or video).
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
3 - 55

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
When a network incorporates VLANs, the designer must remember that for a
device on one VLAN to communicate with a device on another VLAN, all
traffic between VLANs must travel across a router or a switch with built-in
layer 3 routing ability. Layer 3 routing is slower than layer 2 switching and can
be a potential traffic bottleneck on the network. Therefore, it is logical to
create a VLAN for voice traffic only.
By enabling layer 2 QoS in the LAN, voice and other time-sensitive traffic can
be given priority when the network is congested.
A workgroup may have all PCs in VLAN 200 and all IP telephone terminals in
VLAN 100, even when PCs are typically connected to the second Ethernet
port on the IP telephone terminals. The port on an Ethernet switch supporting
both the IP telephone and the PC must be configured to allow traffic from both
VLAN 100 and VLAN 200. NEC IP terminals have two Ethernet connections
that can be assigned to different VLANs and QoS priorities.
The IEEE 802.1q VLANs insert a 4-byte tag in the Ethernet frame that
includes both the VLAN Identifier (1~4095) and the user_priority (0~7) field
that is used to assign traffic to a priority queue.
The HUB(8) has high and low priority queues. With Memory Block 1-16-06 set
to NO (default), Memory Block 1-16-07 is used to determine which queue a
frame is assigned, based on the frame IEEE 802.1p priority.
For port-based priority, Memory Block 1-16-06 determines which queue a
frame is assigned, based on the port it enters. When an untagged frame
leaves the HUB(8) ETU, it is assigned a priority based on the assigned queue
and the corresponding memory block for the port it leaves: 1-16-08 for
high-priority queue frames or 1-16-09 for low-priority queue frames.
IEEE 802.1q VLAN tags should be sent only to equipment that supports IEEE
802.1q/p. The insertion of an additional 4 bytes likely can create frames that
are larger than the normal Ethernet maximum frame size. Equipment that
does not support, IEEE 802.1q/p likely cannot respond to frames with tags.
Using Memory Block 1-16-15, the HUB(8) can be configured to send tagged
frames only to those devices that support tags.
4.4
Port Based Priority Example
In this example, the HUB(8) is set up to support 2 VLANs:
H VLAN Membership
·
VLAN 100 (black) voice traffic for IP telephones A, B, and C,
plus the IPC and MG ETUs.
·
Vlan 200 (grey) data traffic of PCs A, B, and C.
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 56
Advanced Applications

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
H Priority
·
Voice traffic is set for high priority and programmed on the IP
terminals using a priority level of 5.
·
Data traffic is generally set for a priority of 0.
Programming:
MB 1-16-04
VLAN Mode Selection
YS
MB 1-16-05
Default VLAN IDTag Insertion
Refer to Table 1.
MB 1-16-06
Port Based Priority Selection
Refer to Table 3.
MB 1-16-07
High Priority RX Tag Threshold
Refer to Table 3.
MB 1-16-08
High Priority TX Tag Assignment
Refer to Table 3.
MB 1-16-09
Low Priority TX Tag Assignment
Refer to Table 3.
MB 1-16-13
VLAN Group to VLAN ID Assignment
Refer to Table 2.
MB 1-16-14
Port VLAN Group Membership
Refer to Table 2.
MB 1-16-15
VLAN Tag Insertion Selection
Refer to Table 2.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
3 - 57

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________

MB 1-16-05 Default VLAN
ID Tag Insertion Assignment
Port 8 0001
(any)
Port 7 0001
(any)
Port 6 0100
Port 5 0001
(any)
Port 4 0100

Port 3 0200
Port 2 0001
Port 1 0001
(any)

Figure 3-3 Physical Layout and Default VLAN IDs
H Ports 1, 5, and 7
IP telephone programming tags voice traffic on VLAN 100, and the PC on
port 1 is attached to an IP telephone with a PC port set for VLAN 200.
H Port 2
Not Used.
H Port 3
PC requires default VLAN ID setting of 200, because it may not be able to
tag traffic.
H Ports 4 and 6
VoIP cards without native ability to tag traffic.
H Port 8
Ethernet switch with native VLAN tagging abilities enabled.
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 58
Advanced Applications

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Depicts Memory Blocks
Settings:

1-16-13 VLAN Group to
VLAN ID Assignment

1-16-14 Port VLAN
Group Membership

1-16-15 VLAN Tag
Insertion Selection

Figure 3-4 VLAN Settings
VLAN Group 1 carries traffic marked VLAN ID = 100.
VLAN Group 2 carries traffic marked VLAN ID = 200.
H Port 1
In IP terminal programming, both the IP terminal and PC are configured for
VLAN tagging: IP terminal on VLAN 100, PC on VLAN 200. Traffic from
both VLAN 100 and VLAN 200 must be permitted to go through port 1.
VLAN tags should be inserted for each.
H Port 2
Not Used
H Port 3
PC is a member of VLAN 200 but does not support VLAN tag insertion. The
PC does not respond to VLAN-tagged traffic.
H Port 4
MG(8) ETU, Elite VoIP ETU that does not support VLAN tags on VLAN 100.
H Port 5
IP terminal with VLAN tagging support on VLAN 100.
H Port 6
IPC ETU, ELite VoIP ETU that does not support VLAN tags on VLAN 100.
H Port 7
IP terminal with VLAN tagging support on VLAN 100.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
3 - 59

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
Port 8
Ethernet Switch that has IEEE 802.1q/p support enabled and is configured
to carry traffic for both VLAN 100 and VLAN 200.
Depicts Memory Blocks
Settings:

1-16-06 Port Based
Priority Selection

1-16-07 High Priority
RX Tag

1-16-08 High Priority
TX Tag

1-16-09 Low Priority TX
Tag

Figure 3-5 Port Priority Settings
H
Port 1
In IP terminal programming, the IP terminal is configured for priority 5, and
the PC is configured for priority 0.
H
Port 2
Not Used.
H
Port 3
The PC does not support VLAN tagging, so port-based priority could be
used.
H
Port 4
Traffic from the MG(8) is set for High Priority queue in MB 1-16-06.
H
Port 5
In IP terminal programming, the IP terminal is configured for priority 5.
H
Port 6
Traffic from the IPC is set for High Priority queue in MB 1-16-06.
H
Port 7
In IP terminal programming, the IP terminal is configured for priority 5.
___________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 60
Advanced Applications

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
H
Port 8
The Ethernet switch carries traffic already marked with VLAN tags with
priorities. The threshold set on the HUB(8) ETU in MB 1-16-07 is priority 4.
Priority 0~3 traffic from the Ethernet Switch goes to the Low Priority queue
of the HUB(8), and priority 4~7 goes to the High Priority queue. For traffic
from ports configured for port-based priority that exit port 1, the Low Priority
queue traffic is marked priority 0, and the High Priority queue traffic (from
the MG(8) on port 4 and the IPC on port 6) is marked priority 4. The
Ethernet switch is configured for special handling of priority 4 traffic and
priority 5 traffic for the IP telephones off the HUB(8) on its adjoining port.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
3 - 61

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Function Time Chart
Appendix A
SECTION 1
TIME CHART
The chart on the following pages provides a list of times that can be programmed in
the system. The information is listed numerically by Memory Block number. A brief
definition and Minimum, Default, and Maximum values are given for each time.
Table A-1 Function Time Chart
Value
Memory
Time
Definition
Block
Minimum
Default
Maximum
Pause Time
1-1-00
Time when no signal is being
1.0s
3.0s
3.0s
Selection
sent to a CO/PBX line.
DP Interdigit Time
1-1-01
Minimum time between dialing
A
B
B
Selection
signals in Dial Pulse dialing.
Hookflash Time
1-1-02
Timing of a CO/PBX hookflash
20ms
600ms
5.0s
Selection
from the Recall key of a
Multiline Terminal or a Single
Line Telephone to the CO/PBX
line.
Hold Recall Time
1-1-03*
The time before a held CO/PBX
25s
25s

Selection
line recalls the station that put
(Non-Exclusive
that line on hold.
000s
060s
255s
Hold)
(No Limit)
Automatic Redial
1-1-04
Defines the redial timing
Table 1 001
030
050 sec.
Time Selection
parameters when automatic
Table 2 001
060
100 sec.
redial is set to a busy CO/PBX
Table 3 001
002
015
number.
Attempts
Start Time
1-1-05*
The time after dialing before
2s
10s
70s
Selection
the system starts the elapsed
Call Time.
00s
02s
99s
(No Limit)
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
A - 1

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table A-1 Function Time Chart (Continued)
Value
Memory
Time
Definition
Block
Minimum
Default
Maximum
CO/PBX Incoming
1-1-06*
The time after an incoming
10s

Ringing Alarm Time
CO/PBX call is detected before
Selection
the ringing tone changes to a
255s
different ringing tone level
000s
000s
when the call is not answered.
(No Limit)
Tie Line Delay
1-1-07*
The time between when a
10s

Ringing Time
telephone rings (accessed by a
Selection
ringing call in the Tie/DID line)
000s
255s
and calls can start ringing at
000s
other assigned stations when it
(No Limit)
is not answered.
Station Transfer/
1-1-12*
The time before a ring
25s
45s

Camp-On Recall
transferred call recalls to the
Time Selection
station that transferred the call.
000s
060s
999s
(No Limit)
Trunk Queuing
1-1-37*
The time a station with Trunk
10s
10s
60s
Timeout Selection
Queue set rings before the
queue is automatically
00s
10s
99s
canceled.
(No Limit)
CO/PBX Prepause
1-1-57
The time before dialed digits
NON
1s
13s
Time Selection
are sent over a CO/PBX line
after the line is seized.
Hold Recall Time
1-1-63*
The time (minutes) for
0.5
1.0

Selection
Exclusive Hold Recall. No limit
(Exclusive)
disables this feature.
000s
060s
999s
(No Limit)
First Delay
1-1-71
The time (seconds) between
00
20
60
Announcement
receiving an incoming CO call
Start Time
and sending the First Delay
Selection
Announcement to the caller.
First to Second
1-1-73
The time (seconds) between
00
20

Delay
the end of the First Delay
Announcement
Announcement and the
Interval Time
beginning of the second
Selection
Second Delay Announcement.
Second Delay
1-1-75
The time (seconds) to repeat
0
20

Announcement
the Second Delay
Repeat Interval
Announcement.
Time Selection
___________________________________________________________________________________
A - 2
Function Time Chart

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table A-1 Function Time Chart (Continued)
Value
Memory
Time
Definition
Block
Minimum
Default
Maximum
Delayed Ringing
1-1-77
The time for delayed ringing on
00s
15s
99s
Time Assignment
incoming outside line calls.
(CO)
ISDN DTMF
1-1-80
The tone duration/interdigit
70/60
100/70
900/200
Duration/Interdigit
time (milliseconds) of DTMF
Selection
signals.
ISDN / K-CCIS
1-1-81*
The time between each digit
2s
4s
32s
Interval Time
dialed.
Selection
01s
04s
99s
Internal Paging
1-2-00*
The time allowed for paging.
90s
90s

Timeout Selection
000s
090s
255s
(No Limit)
Automatic Callback
1-2-02*
Time allowed before Automatic
30s
30m
30m
Release Time
Callback is automatically
00m
Selection
canceled.
(No Limit)
30m
99m
Call Forward - No
1-2-22*
The time before ICM or Trunk
4s
12s
60s
Answer Time
calls are forwarded when there
Selection
is no answer.
01s
12s
99s
System Call Park
1-2-23*
Time (minutes) before a parked
0.5
1.0
10.0
Recall Time
call recalls to the station that
Selection
parked the call.
001s
060s
999s
Delayed Ringing
1-2-26
The delayed ringing time on
00
10s
99
Time Assignment
incoming internal calls.
(ICM)
PS Out of Area
1-2-30
The retry time when PS is Out
00
08s
99
Time Assignment
of Area.
Bounce Protect
1-3-01
The time for detecting a valid
0ms
300ms
1500ms
Time Selection
off-hook that is long enough to
prevent unintentional bounce
as an off-hook indication from a
Single Line Telephone or Voice
Mail System.
First Digit PBR
1-3-03*
The time that a receiver is
10s
10s
60s
Release Time
connected when a DTMF
Selection
Single Line Telephone user is
01s
10s
99s
dialing.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
A - 3

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table A-1 Function Time Chart (Continued)
Value
Memory
Time
Definition
Block
Minimum
Default
Maximum
Hookflash Start
1-3-05
The minimum hookflash time
40
290
790
Time Selection
(milliseconds) for a Single Line
Telephone or Voice Mail
System before a valid
hookflash is detected.
Hookflash End
1-3-06
The maximum hookflash time
00
07
15
Time Selection
from a Single Line Telephone
(HST + 0
(HST + 700
(HST +
to receive a second dial tone
ms.)
ms.)
1500 ms.)
(HST = Hookflash Start Time).
Voice Mail DTMF
1-3-08
The delay time before DTMF
0s
1s
8s
Delay Time
tones are sent from the VMI
Selection
port.
Voice Mail
1-3-09
The time a disconnect signal is
0.5s
1.5s
3.5s
Disconnect Time
sent to Voice Mail equipment.
Selection
Voice Mail DTMF
1-3-10
The DTMF duration/interdigit
60/70
110/80 810/190
Duration/Interdigit
time (milliseconds) for voice
Time Selection
mail.
Tandem Transfer
1-4-00
The maximum time (minutes)
000
060
999
Automatic
before the system automatic
Disconnect Time
disconnects a Trunk-to-Trunk
Selection
connection.
Automated
1-4-01*
The time a PBR circuit remains
5s
20s
60s
Attendant First Digit
connected after the Automated
PBR Release Time
Attendant message is played
01s
20s
99s
Selection
when a call comes in through
an Automated Attendant trunk.
Automated
1-4-02*
The time a call rings at the
10s

Attendant Transfer
destination before the
Delayed Ringing
Automated Attendant rings a
00s
00s
Time Selection
predetermined station.
(No Limit)
99s
Automated
1-4-03*
The time the Automated
1m
2m
4m
Attendant No
Attendant rings a station before
Answer Disconnect
automatic disconnect.
001s
120s
255s
Time Selection
Automated
1-4-13
The time before the Automated
00s
04s 99s
Attendant Answer
Attendant answers an incoming
Delay Time
CO/PBX call.
Assignment
___________________________________________________________________________________
A - 4
Function Time Chart

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table A-1 Function Time Chart (Continued)
Value
Memory
Time
Definition
Block
Minimum
Default
Maximum
Automated
1-4-19
The time between Automated
0s
4m
20m
Attendant 1st to 2nd
Attendant Delay
Delay
Announcement messages.
Announcement
Interval Time
Selection
Automated
1-4-20
The time the Automated
0s
30s
20m
Attendant Delay
Attendant rings the stations
Announcement
before disconnecting the caller.
Disconnect Time
Selection
SMDR Valid Call
1-5-25
The Minimum call time of an
000s
040s
099s
Time Assignment
outside call before the system
(10-second
provides an SMDR report (Set
increments)
from 0~99 seconds in
10-second increments).
Doorphone Display
1-7-01*
The time a doorphone call
10s
10s
90s
Time Selection
signals a station before it times
out.
01s
10s
99s
External Paging
1-7-06*
The time (minutes) before an
0.5
5.0

Timeout Selection
external paging is automatically
disconnected.
000s
300s
999s
(No Limit)
External Speaker
1-7-09
The delay time (milliseconds)
000
700
1500
Chime Start Time
between when an external
Selection
paging code is dialed and when
the paging alert tone is
provided.
PBR Interdigit
1-8-10
The interdigit release time for
3s
7s
10s
Release Time
the PBR.
Selection
System Refresh
1-8-11
The system refresh time during
NON
4H
24H
Time Assignment
idle periods.
VRS Message
1-8-12
The recording time and number
15s x16
15s x16
120s x2
Recording Time
of messages for each VRS
Selection
channel.
ACD Hunt Time
1-8-40
The time for hunting among
10s
10s

ACD/UCD agents that do not
answer a call.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
A - 5

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table A-1 Function Time Chart (Continued)
Value
Memory
Time
Definition
Block
Minimum
Default
Maximum
ACD/UCD Overflow
1-12-02
The maximum time (seconds) a
Time Selection
waiting ACD/UCD call remains

at an ACD/UCD group before
10
60
overflowing to a specified
Station or Station Hunt group.
Centralized BLF
1-15-17
The time (seconds) for sending
4
4
16
Send Time
BLF information across the
Assignment
K-CCIS Network.
Trunk DTMF
3-15
The tone duration/interdigit
60/70
110/80
810/190
Duration/Interdigit
time (milliseconds) of DTMF
Selection
signals.
Tie Line Prepause
3-16
The prepause time (seconds)
0
0
13.0
Time Selection
when the originating side can
send dial pulse or DTMF to a
distant system.
Tie Line Answer
3-17
The time (milliseconds)
0 520
1950
Detect Time
between when the receiving
Selection
system answers and the time
when it is recognized as an
answer.
Tie Line Release
3-18
The time (milliseconds)
0 520
1950
Detect Time
between when the circuit
Selection
disconnection is detected on
the Tie line on the distant
system side and when it is
recognized as Tie Line
Release.
Tie Line/CO/PBX
3-19
The time (milliseconds)
0/0/50
390/90/200
1950/450/
Incoming Signal
between when an incoming
800
Detect Time
signal is detected from another
00 (LK 1)
03 (LK 4)
Selection
Electra Elite system and the
15 (LK 8)
acknowledgment signal is sent
(Expressed as Wink Start/
Delay/COI).
Tie Line Loop
3-20
Off-guard time (seconds) to
0.0
2.0
13.0
Off-Guard Time
prevent noise that may cause
Selection
the system to be unable to
answer an incoming Tie line.
Tie Line Length of
3-21
The time (milliseconds) of a
30
180
480
Wink Signal
Wink pulse that is sent to
Selection
another Electra Elite system.
___________________________________________________________________________________
A - 6
Function Time Chart

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table A-1 Function Time Chart (Continued)
Value
Memory
Time
Definition
Block
Minimum
Default
Maximum
Tie Line Length of
3-22
The time (milliseconds) a delay
0
300
4500
Delay Signal
pulse is sent to another system.
Selection
Tie Line Incoming
3-24
The maximum time an address
1s
6s

Interdigit Timeout
signal is missing during
Selection
incoming call detection before
an error tone is returned to the
other system.
Tie Line Wink/Delay
3-25
The maximum time for
1s
7s

Signal Detect
receiving an acknowledgment
Timeout Selection
signal from a distant system
before sending a busy tone.
Disconnect
3-33
The minimum time (seconds)
0
0.3
1.5
Recognition Time
before a disconnected circuit
Selection
can be accessed again.
Automatic Release
3-40
The Signal detection time
0
350

Signal Detection
(milliseconds) for CO/PBX line
Selection
release after a disconnect
signal is received from the
distant CO or PBX.
DIT/ANA Delay
3-61*
The time an incoming CO/PBX
0s
0s
60s
Answer Time
call rings before changing to a
Selection
DIT/ANA call.
00s
00s
99s
(No Time)
*
With R3000 or higher, these Memory Blocks have changes in Minimum, Default, or Maximum values
that are indicated by bold figures
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
A - 7

Character Codes
Appendix B
___________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 1
CHARACTER ASSIGNMENT
1.1
Character Code Tables
The character code tables are used when entering some functions provided
with the Electra Elite IPK system.
Characters can be entered using the dial pad instead of the Character Code
Tables. Refer to 1.2 Dial Pad Character Assignment.

Codes 166~221 and 250~252 are used for Japanese characters only.
Character
Code
Character
Code
Character
Code
BLANK
032
@
064
\
096
!
033
A
065
a
097
||
034
B
066
b
098
#
035
C
067
c
099
$
036
D
068
d
100
%
037
E
069
e
101
&
038
F
070
f
102
`
039
G
071
g
103
(
040
H
072
h
104
)
041
I
073
i
105
*
042
J
074
j
106
+
043
K
075
k
107
,
044
L
076
l
108
--
045
M
077
m
109

046
N
078
n
110
/
047
O
079
o
111
0
048
P
080
p
112
1
049
Q
081
q
113
2
050
R
082
r
114
3
051
S
083
s
115
4
052
T
084
t
116
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
B - 1

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Character
Code
Character
Code
Character
Code
5
053
U
085
u
117
6
054
V
086
v
118
7
055
W
087
w
119
8
056
X
088
x
120
9
057
Y
089
y
121
:
058
Z
090
z
122
;
059
[
091
{
123
<
060
¥
092
|
124
=
061
]
093
}
125
>
062
^
094
Æ
126
?
063
_
095
¨
127
___________________________________________________________________________________
B - 2
Character Codes

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
B - 3

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
1.2
Dial Pad Character Assignment
Refer to the applicable table and procedure example.
Table B-1 System Data Input
Press
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
Redial
1st
1
A
D
G
J
M
P
T
W
0
,
2nd
@
B
E
H
K
N
Q
U
X
!
+
3rd
[
C
F
I
L
O
R
V
Y
"
,
4th
¥
a
d
g
j
m
S
t
Z
#
-
5th
]
b
e
h
k
n
p
u
w
$
.
6th
^
c
f
i
l
o
q
v
x
%
/
7th
2
3
4
5
6
r
8
y
&
:
8th
/
To A
To D
To G
To J
To M
s
To T
z
|
;
9th
{
7
9
(
<
10th
|
To P
To W
)
=
11th
}
To 0
>
12th
?
13th
To ,
14th
To 1
,
Used to move cursor to left.
#
Used to move cursor to right.
Hold
Space (MB3-00) Data Clear (except MB3-00)
1.2.1
Trunk Name or Number Assignment Example
1.
Enter Program Mode.
Display shows PROGRAM MODE.
2.
Press LK3.
Display shows 01/_.
3.
Press LK2.
Display still shows 01/_.
4.
Press KK.
Display shows 01/N_.
___________________________________________________________________________________
B - 4
Character Codes

Electra Elite IPK
Document Revision 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
5.
Press CC.
Display shows 01/NE_.
6.
Press BBB.
Display shows 01/NEC_.
G
7.
Press
.
Display shows 01/02:OUT&IN.
Table B-2 Speed Dial Name Input
Press
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
,
#
1st
1
A
D
G
J
M
P
T
W
0
,
Space
2nd
@
B
E
H
K
N
Q
U
X
!
+
3rd
[
C
F
I
L
O
R
V
Y
"
,
4th
¥
a
d
g
j
m
S
t
Z
#
-
5th
]
b
e
h
k
n
p
u
w
$
.
6th
^
c
f
i
l
o
q
v
x
%
/
7th
2
3
4
5
6
r
8
y
&
:
8th
/
To A
To D
To G
To J
To M
s
To T
z
b
;
9th
{
7
9
(
<
10th
|
To P
To W
)
=
11th
}
To 0
>
12th
?
13th
To ,
14th
To 1
Conf
Clear and 1 character back from the cursor.
1.2.2
Enter Speed Dial Name
A
1.
Press inactive
.
Display is blank.
B
2.
Press
.
Display shows:_.
3.
Press KK.
Display shows 00:_.
4.
Press I.
Display shows 00:0:_.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
B - 5

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
5.
Press ABCDE.
Display shows 00:0:12345_.
H
6.
Press
.
Display shows 00=_.
7.
Press FF.
Display shows 00=N_.
8.
Press CC.
Display shows 00=NE_.
9.
Press BBB.
Display shows 00=NEC_.
10.
Press B.
Display shows 00=NECA_.
11.
Press F.
Display shows 00=NECAM_.
A
12.
Press
.
___________________________________________________________________________________
B - 6
Character Codes

Display Abbreviations
Appendix C
___________________________________________________________________________________
Abbreviations found in the display are defined in below.
Table C-1 Abbreviations used in Multiline Terminal Displays
ADD/DEL
: Addition/Deletion
DESG
: Designation
AL
: All
DGT
: Digit
ALM
: Alarm
DISP
: Display
ANS
: Answer
DISTM
: Disconnection Recognition
Time
ANSWR
: Answer
DIVERT
: Diversion
ASSGN
: Assignment
DLY
: Delay Signal Time
AUT
: Automatic
DP
: Dial Pulse
AUTANS
: Autoanswer
DSS
: Direct Station Selection
BLANK
: Service Class
DY
: Day Mode
BNCE
: Bounce
FLSH
: Flash
BTN
: Button
GUARD
: Outgoing Guard Time
CAL
: Call
H
: High
CANCLD
: Canceled
HR
: Hour
CKT
: Circuit
ICM
: Intercom (Extension)
CNF
: Confirmation
IMDT
: Immediate
CL
: Class
IN
: Incoming
CLD
: CO Line Display
INC
: Incoming Signal Detection Time
Assignment
CLR
: Clear
INDV
: Individual
CLS
: Class
INTRPT
: Interruption
CONN
: Connection
L
: Low
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
C - 1

Document Revision 3
Electra Elite IPK
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table C-1 Abbreviations used in Multiline Terminal Displays (Continued)
LCD
: Liquid Crystal Display
PBX
: Private Branch Exchange
LN
: Line
PRE
: Prepause Time Selection
LOOP
: Loop Off-Guard Assignment
PRNT
: Print
LNR/SPD
: Last Number/Speed Dial
PTRN
: Pattern
M
: Medium
PV
: Tie Line
MAN
: Manual
PVT
: Tie Line
MF
: Dual-Tone Multifrequency
PWRFAIL
: Power Failure
(DTMF)
MIN
: Minimum
RCV
: Receiving
MOH
: Music On Hold
RINGTONE
: Ringing Tone
MSTR
: Master
RCVR
: Receiver
NUM
: Number
RES
: Restriction
NT
: Night Mode
RLY
: Relay
OUT
: Outgoing
RNGTONE
: Ringing Tone
OG TM
: Outgoing Time OUt Assignment
RT
: Route
OV
: Over
RT ADV
: Route Advance Block
PAD AT
: PAD Pattern A Transmission
RVS
: Reversal
Assignment
PAD AR
: PAD Pattern A Receiving
SDT
: Second Dial Tone Assignment
Assignment
PAD BT
: PAD Pattern B Transmission
SEND
: Transmission
Assignment
PAD BR
: PAD Pattern B Receiving
SEL
: Selection
Assignment
PBR
: Pushbutton Signal Receiver
SLT
: Single Line Telephone
SPD
: Speed Dial
TMR
: Timer
ST
: Start
TRNS
: Transfer
TEL
: Telephone
TRK
: Trunk
TERM
: Terminating
TRK GP
: Trunk Group
TMD
: Timed
WDSD
: Wink/Delay Signal Detection
Timeout
___________________________________________________________________________________
C - 2
Display Abbreviations

PROGRAMMING MANUAL
NEC Unified Solutions, Inc.
Document Revision 3
(Release 3000/3500)

Document Outline